FX3U HW Manual

Санкт-Петербург, ул. Седова, д.
53
[email protected] +7 (812) 7-028-029
www.elinc.ru
USER'S MANUAL - Hardware Edition
FX3U SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
Main Unit
FX3U- MR/ES
Input/output powered extension unit
FX2N- E -
Input/output extension block
FX2N-16E -
Special Adapter
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Display Module
FX3U-7DM
Memory Cassette
FX3U-FLROM-
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers
User's Manual - Hardware Edition Table of Contents
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)
Standards 15
Certification of UL, cUL standards ..................................................................................................... 15

Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking) ...................................................................................... 16
Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive .................................................................................. 16
Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive ................................................................................... 18
Caution for compliance with EC Directive ............................................................................................. 18
1. Introduction 19
1.1 Introduction of Manuals................................................................................................................ 19

1.1.1 Classification of major components in this manual........................................................................ 19
1.1.2 Manual organization and position of this manual .......................................................................... 21
1.1.3 List of manuals .............................................................................................................................. 22
1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals.................................................................... 27
2. Features and Part Names 29
2.1 Major Features .............................................................................................................................. 29

2.2 Names and Functions of Parts...................................................................................................... 31
2.2.1 Front Panel .................................................................................................................................... 31
2.2.2 Sides.............................................................................................................................................. 33
3. Introduction of Products (Compliant with Overseas Standards) 34
3.1 List of Products (to be Connected) and Interpretation of Model Names ....................................... 34
3.1.1 [A] Main units................................................................................................................................. 35
3.1.2 [B] Input/output powered extension units ...................................................................................... 36
3.1.3 [C] Input/output extension blocks .................................................................................................. 37
3.1.4 [D] [E] Special function units/blocks .............................................................................................. 38
3.1.5 [F] Display modules and holder ..................................................................................................... 39
3.1.6 [G] Expansion boards .................................................................................................................... 39
3.1.7 [H] Special adapters ...................................................................................................................... 40
3.1.8 [I] Power supply unit ...................................................................................................................... 40
3.1.9 [J] Extension cables and connector conversion adapter [K] Battery [L] Memory cassettes .......... 41
3.1.10 [M] FX Series terminal blocks (cables and connectors) .............................................................. 42
3.1.11 [N] Remote I/O............................................................................................................................. 42
3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication.......................................................... 43
3.2.1 Programming tool .......................................................................................................................... 44
3.2.2 Communication cables .................................................................................................................. 44
3.2.3 Converters and interface ............................................................................................................... 45
1
4. Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 46
4.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................. 46

4.1.1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test..................................................... 47
4.2 Power Supply Specifications......................................................................................................... 48
4.3 Input Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 49
4.3.1 24V DC Input (sink/source) ........................................................................................................... 49
4.4 Output Specifications .................................................................................................................... 50
4.4.1 Relay output .................................................................................................................................. 50
4.4.2 Life of relay output contact ............................................................................................................ 51
4.5 Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................... 52
4.6 External Dimensions (Weight and Installation) ............................................................................. 55
4.6.1 FX3U-16MR/ES, FX3U-32MR/ES .................................................................................................. 55
4.6.2 FX3U-48MR/ES, FX3U-64MR/ES, FX3U-80MR/ES....................................................................... 55
4.7 Terminal Layout and Examples of Wiring ..................................................................................... 56
4.7.1 Interpretation ................................................................................................................................. 56
4.7.2 FX3U-16MR/ES ............................................................................................................................. 57
4.7.3 FX3U-32MR/ES ............................................................................................................................. 58
4.7.4 FX3U-48MR/ES ............................................................................................................................. 59
4.7.5 FX3U-64MR/ES ............................................................................................................................. 60
4.7.6 FX3U-80MR/ES ............................................................................................................................. 61
5. Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History 62
5.1 Version Upgrade History ............................................................................................................... 62

5.1.1 Version check method ................................................................................................................... 62
5.1.2 How to look at manufacturer’s serial number ................................................................................ 62
5.1.3 Version upgrade history................................................................................................................. 62
5.2 Programming Tool Applicability..................................................................................................... 63
5.2.1 Applicable versions of programming tool....................................................................................... 63
5.2.2 In the case of programming tool (version) not applicable.............................................................. 63
5.2.3 Program transfer speed and programming tool............................................................................. 63
5.2.4 Cautions on write during RUN ....................................................................................................... 64
5.3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series ................................ 66
5.4 Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series ................................... 67
6. Examination of System Configuration 68
6.1 Configuration of Whole System..................................................................................................... 68

6.1.1 List of system components ............................................................................................................ 69
6.1.2 System configuration with special adapters .................................................................................. 71
6.2 Rules of System Configuration...................................................................................................... 72
6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points ............................ 74
6.3.1 Calculation of number of input/output points ................................................................................. 74
6.3.2 Maximum number of input/output points when CC-Link master is used ....................................... 76
6.3.3 Maximum number of input/output points when AS-i master is used.............................................. 77
6.4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable)........................... 78
6.4.1 Expansion board and special adapter ........................................................................................... 78
6.4.2 Special function units/blocks ......................................................................................................... 78
6.4.3 Extension cable ............................................................................................................................. 78
6.5 Expansion of Main Unit (Calculation of Current Consumption)..................................................... 79
6.5.1 Quick reference matrix - when only input/output devices are added............................................. 79
6.5.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current consumption)................. 80
6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit (Calculation of Current Consumption)... 83
6.6.1 Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added)............................................. 83
6.6.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current consumption)................. 85
2
6.7 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption......................................... 87

6.7.1 [A] Main units................................................................................................................................. 87
6.7.2 [B] Expansion boards .................................................................................................................... 87
6.7.3 [C] Special adapters ...................................................................................................................... 88
6.7.4 [D] Input/output powered extension units/blocks ........................................................................... 88
6.7.5 [E] Special extension devices........................................................................................................ 90
6.7.6 [G] Display module ........................................................................................................................ 91
6.8 Example of System Configuration and System Modification......................................................... 92
6.8.1 Example system configuration....................................................................................................... 92
6.8.2 Expansion of main unit .................................................................................................................. 93
6.8.3 Re-examination of suitability for configuration............................................................................... 96
7. Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y) and Unit Numbers 101
7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)................................................................................ 101

7.1.1 Concept of assigning ................................................................................................................... 101
7.1.2 Example of assigning .................................................................................................................. 102
7.1.3 Application of I/O number label ................................................................................................... 103
7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units/Blocks.......................................................................... 104
7.2.1 Concept of assigning ................................................................................................................... 104
7.2.2 Example of assigning .................................................................................................................. 105
7.2.3 Application of unit number labels................................................................................................. 106
8. Installation In Enclosure 107
8.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ 110

8.2 Installation location...................................................................................................................... 111
8.2.1 Installation location in enclosure.................................................................................................. 111
8.2.2 Spaces in enclosure .................................................................................................................... 112
8.3 Layout in Enclosure..................................................................................................................... 113
8.3.1 1-stage layout .............................................................................................................................. 113
8.3.2 2-stage layout .............................................................................................................................. 113
8.4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure .......................................................................... 115
8.4.1 Installing methods........................................................................................................................ 115
8.4.2 Cautions in examining installing method ..................................................................................... 115
8.4.3 Examples of installation............................................................................................................... 115
8.5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail.......................................................... 117
8.5.1 Preparation for installation........................................................................................................... 117
8.5.2 Installation of main unit................................................................................................................ 118
8.5.3 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function unit/block ........... 119
8.5.4 Removal of main unit................................................................................................................... 119
8.6 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws).................................................................... 121
8.6.1 Hole pitches for direct mounting .................................................................................................. 121
8.6.2 Example of mounting hole pitches............................................................................................... 123
8.6.3 Installation of main unit................................................................................................................ 124
8.6.4 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function unit/block ........... 124
8.7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices ........................................................ 125
8.7.1 Connection of extension devices................................................................................................. 125
8.7.2 Connecting method A - connection of expansion board.............................................................. 126
8.7.3 Connecting method B - connection of special adapter ................................................................ 127
8.7.4 Connecting method C - connection of powered extension unit/block to main unit ...................... 127
8.7.5 Connecting method D - connection of powered extension units/blocks ...................................... 128
8.7.6 Connecting method E - connection of extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC................................ 129
8.7.7 Connecting method F - connection of input/output powered extension unit................................ 129
8.7.8 Connecting method G - connection of extension block to input/output powered extension unit .... 130
3
9. Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 131
9.1 Preparation for Wiring ................................................................................................................. 133

9.1.1 Wiring procedures ....................................................................................................................... 133
9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures .................................................................................................... 134
9.2.1 Input/output terminal block (power supply and input/output wiring)............................................. 134
9.2.2 Input/output connectors (FX2N input/output extension blocks) ................................................... 136
9.2.3 Terminal block (for europe) [expansion board and special adapters].......................................... 137
9.3 Power Supply Specifications....................................................................................................... 138
9.4 Grounding ................................................................................................................................... 139
9.5 Examples of External Wiring ....................................................................................................... 140
9.5.1 Example of input/output wiring with 24V DC service power supply............................................. 140
9.5.2 Example of sink input [-common] wiring ...................................................................................... 141
9.5.3 Example of source input [+common] wiring................................................................................. 142
10. Input Wiring Procedures (Input Interruption and Pulse Catch) 143
10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring ...................................................................................................... 145

10.1.1 Sink and source input (24V DC input type) ............................................................................... 145
10.2 24V DC Input Type (Common to Sink/Source Input) ................................................................ 146
10.2.1 Input specifications (main unit) .................................................................................................. 146
10.2.2 Handling of 24V DC input .......................................................................................................... 147
10.2.3 Instructions for connecting input devices................................................................................... 148
10.2.4 Examples of external wiring (sink input) .................................................................................... 150
10.2.5 Example of external wiring (source input) ................................................................................. 152
10.3 100V AC Input (Except Main Unit) ............................................................................................ 153
10.3.1 Input specifications .................................................................................................................... 153
10.3.2 Handling of 100V AC Input ........................................................................................................ 153
10.3.3 Example of external wiring ........................................................................................................ 154
10.4 Input Interruption (I00 to I50 ) - With Delay Function........................................................... 155
10.4.1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers (input signal ON/OFF duration) ................................... 155
10.4.2 Input interruption delay function ................................................................................................ 155
10.4.3 Cautions for input interruption ................................................................................................... 155
10.4.4 Examples of external wiring....................................................................................................... 156
10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8177) ................................................................................................ 157
10.5.1 Allocation of special memories to Iinput numbers (ON duration of input signals) ..................... 157
10.5.2 Cautions for pulse catch ............................................................................................................ 157
10.5.3 Examples of external wiring....................................................................................................... 158
11. Use of High-speed Counters (C235 to C255) 159
11.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 159

11.2 Input Specifications ................................................................................................................... 160
11.2.1 High-speed input special adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP)............................................................... 160
11.2.2 Cautions in connecting mating device ....................................................................................... 160
11.3 Types of Counting and Operations ........................................................................................... 161
11.3.1 Classification according to counting method ............................................................................. 161
11.3.2 Types and input signal forms..................................................................................................... 161
11.3.3 High-speed counter device notations ........................................................................................ 161
11.4 List of Device Numbers and Functions ..................................................................................... 162
11.5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers ...................................................................... 164
11.5.1 Allocation table .......................................................................................................................... 164
11.5.2 Inhibition of redundant use of input numbers ............................................................................ 165
11.6 Handling of High-speed Counters ............................................................................................. 166
11.6.1 1-phase 1-count input................................................................................................................ 166
4
11.7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value .................................. 169
11.7.1 Timing of updating of current value ........................................................................................... 169
11.7.2 Comparison of current value ..................................................................................................... 169
11.8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter .................................... 170
11.8.1 Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters ........................................ 170
11.8.2 Method of confirming operation status of counters.................................................................... 170
11.9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency.................................................... 171
11.9.1 Response frequencies of hardware counters ............................................................................ 171
11.9.2 Response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters .......................................... 171
11.10 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)....................................................................... 174
11.10.1 1-phase 1-input [C235 to C245] .............................................................................................. 174
11.10.2 2-phase 2-input [C251 to C255] .............................................................................................. 175
11.10.3 Cautions for the other side device ........................................................................................... 176
11.11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures ............................................................ 177
11.11.1 Related devices ....................................................................................................................... 177
11.11.2 [Function switching] switching of logic of external reset input signal....................................... 179
11.11.3 [Function switching] switching of allocation and functions of input terminals .......................... 179
11.11.4 [Function switching] procedures for using 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255
in 4 edge count mode ............................................................................................................. 180
12. External Wiring Procedures 181
12.1 Sink and Source Output (Transistor)......................................................................................... 183

12.2 External Wiring for Relay Output............................................................................................... 184
12.2.1 Output specifications (main unit) ............................................................................................... 184
12.2.2 Contact life of relay output contact ............................................................................................ 185
12.2.3 Handling of relay output............................................................................................................. 185
12.2.4 Cautions on external wiring ....................................................................................................... 186
12.3 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type ......................................................... 188
12.3.1 Handling of transistor output...................................................................................................... 188
12.3.2 External wiring precautions ....................................................................................................... 189
12.4 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type ............................................................................ 193
12.4.1 Handling of triac output.............................................................................................................. 193
13. Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 196
13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring............................................................................................... 197

13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]...................................... 198
13.2.1 When DSW instructions are used.............................................................................................. 198
13.2.2 When BIN instructions are used ................................................................................................ 200
13.3 10-key Input [TKY Instructions (FNC70)] .................................................................................. 201
13.4 16-key Input [HKY Instructions (FNC71)].................................................................................. 202
13.5 Matrix Input [MTR Instructions (FNC52)] .................................................................................. 204
13.6 7-segment Display [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]........................... 206
13.6.1 When SEGL instructions are used ............................................................................................ 206
13.6.2 When BCD instructions are used .............................................................................................. 207
5
14. Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 208
14.1 Preparation for Test Operation.................................................................................................. 209

14.1.1 Preliminary inspection [power OFF] .......................................................................................... 209
14.1.2 Connection to built-in programming connector.......................................................................... 209
14.1.3 Writing of program and program check [power ON and PLC stopped] ..................................... 210
14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]........................................................................ 211
14.2.1 Methods of running and stopping .............................................................................................. 211
14.2.2 Use of several running/stopping methods ................................................................................. 212
14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running] .................................................................. 213
14.3.1 Self-diagnostic function ............................................................................................................. 213
14.3.2 Test functions ............................................................................................................................ 213
14.3.3 Program modification function ................................................................................................... 214
14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection ....................................................................................... 215
14.4.1 Procedures for checking model name ....................................................................................... 215
14.4.2 Periodic inspection - battery life, etc.......................................................................................... 215
14.4.3 Maintenance - life of relay contacts ........................................................................................... 216
14.4.4 Procedures for replacing battery ............................................................................................... 216
14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs ....................................................................................................... 217
14.5.1 POWER LED [on/flashing/off].................................................................................................... 217
14.5.2 BATT LED [on/off] ..................................................................................................................... 217
14.5.3 ERROR LED [on/flashing/off] .................................................................................................... 218
14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ................................................ 219
14.6.1 Operation and check on display module (FX3U-7DM) .............................................................. 219
14.6.2 Operation and check by GX developer...................................................................................... 220
14.6.3 Representation of errors............................................................................................................ 221
14.6.4 Error Code List and Action ........................................................................................................ 222
14.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 228
14.7.1 Output does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks) ................................... 228
14.7.2 24V DC input does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)......................... 228
14.7.3 Cautions in registering keyword ................................................................................................ 229
15. FX2N-32/48E*-* (Input/Output Powered Extension Units) 230
15.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 232

15.1.1 Product configuration................................................................................................................. 232
15.1.2 Product list................................................................................................................................. 232
15.2 Power Supply Specifications (Power Supply Input/24V DC Service Power Supply) ................ 233
15.2.1 Weight, accessories, etc............................................................................................................ 233
15.2.2 Part names ................................................................................................................................ 234
15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL and FX2N-48ER-ES/UL ............................................................................. 236
15.3.1 Product specifications................................................................................................................ 236
15.3.2 External dimensions .................................................................................................................. 237
15.3.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 238
15.3.4 Examples of wiring .................................................................................................................... 239
15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL................................................................................ 240
15.4.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 242
15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER........................................................................................................... 244
15.5.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 246
15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET............................................................................................................ 248
15.6.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 250
6
15.7 FX2N-32ES................................................................................................................................ 252

15.7.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 254
15.7.4 Examples of Wwiring ................................................................................................................. 254
15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL.................................................................................................................. 255
15.8.3 Terminal layout .......................................................................................................................... 257
16. FX2N-16E*-*(Input/Output Extension Blocks) 258
16.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 259

16.1.1 Product type .............................................................................................................................. 259
16.1.2 List of products .......................................................................................................................... 260
16.2 FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input) ...................................................................... 261
16.2.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement ........................................................................... 262
16.2.4 Example of terminal arrangement ............................................................................................. 262
16.3 FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C (24V DC Input: 16 Points) ....................................................... 264
16.3.4 Example of wiring ...................................................................................................................... 266
16.4 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points).................................................................................. 267
16.5 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output: 16 Points)........................................................................ 270
16.6 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output: 16 Points) ............................................................... 272
16.7 FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output: 16 Points) ................................................................................... 274
16.8 FX2N-16EYT and FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output: 16 Points) ............................................ 276
16.9 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)..................................................................................... 280
7
17. Other Extension Devices and Optional Units

(External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement) 282
17.1 Special Function Units/Blocks................................................................................................... 282

17.1.1 FX0N-3A .................................................................................................................................... 282
17.1.2 FX2N-2AD ................................................................................................................................. 282
17.1.3 FX2N-2DA.................................................................................................................................. 283
17.1.4 FX2N-4AD.................................................................................................................................. 283
17.1.5 FX2N-4DA.................................................................................................................................. 284
17.1.6 FX2N-4AD-PT ............................................................................................................................ 284
17.1.7 FX2N-4AD-TC............................................................................................................................ 285
17.1.8 FX2N-5A .................................................................................................................................... 285
17.1.9 FX2N-2LC .................................................................................................................................. 286
17.1.10 FX2N-8AD................................................................................................................................ 286
17.1.11 FX2N-1HC ............................................................................................................................... 287
17.1.12 FX2N-1PG(-E) ......................................................................................................................... 287
17.1.13 FX2N-10PG ............................................................................................................................. 288
17.1.14 FX2N-10GM............................................................................................................................. 288
17.1.15 FX2N-20GM............................................................................................................................. 289
17.1.16 FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET................................................................................................................. 290
17.1.17 FX2N-232IF ............................................................................................................................. 291
17.1.18 FX2N-32ASI-M......................................................................................................................... 291
17.1.19 FX2N-64CL-M.......................................................................................................................... 292
17.1.20 FX2N-16CCL-M ....................................................................................................................... 292
17.1.21 FX2N-32CCL ........................................................................................................................... 293
17.1.22 FX2N-16LNK-M ....................................................................................................................... 293
17.2 Power Supply ............................................................................................................................ 294
17.2.1 FX2N-20PSU ............................................................................................................................. 294
17.3 Special Adapters ....................................................................................................................... 294
17.3.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP ......................................................................................................................... 294
17.3.2 FX3U-4DA-ADP ......................................................................................................................... 295
17.3.3 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP ................................................................................................................... 295
17.3.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP ................................................................................................................... 295
17.3.5 FX3U-232ADP ........................................................................................................................... 296
17.3.6 FX3U-485ADP ........................................................................................................................... 296
17.3.7 FX3U-4HSX-ADP....................................................................................................................... 297
17.3.8 FX3U-2HSY-ADP....................................................................................................................... 297
17.4 Expansion Board....................................................................................................................... 298
17.4.1 FX3U-USB-BD ........................................................................................................................... 298
17.4.2 FX3U-232-BD ............................................................................................................................ 298
17.4.3 FX3U-422-BD ............................................................................................................................ 298
17.4.4 FX3U-485-BD ............................................................................................................................ 299
17.4.5 FX3U-CNV-BD ........................................................................................................................... 299
17.5 Connector Conversion Adapter................................................................................................. 299
17.5.1 FX2N-CNV-BC ........................................................................................................................... 299
17.6 Interface Module ....................................................................................................................... 300
17.6.1 FX-232AWC-H........................................................................................................................... 300
17.6.2 FX-USB-AW .............................................................................................................................. 300
17.7 Display Module.......................................................................................................................... 301
17.7.1 FX3U-7DM................................................................................................................................. 301
17.7.2 FX3U-7DM-HLD ........................................................................................................................ 301
8
18. FX3U-7DM (Display Module) 302
18.1 Description of Products (Introduction of Related Products) ...................................................... 303

18.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 304
18.2.1 Display/switch specifications ..................................................................................................... 304
18.2.2 Parts layout................................................................................................................................ 304
18.3 Installation and Removal........................................................................................................... 305
18.4 Summary of Functions .............................................................................................................. 306
18.5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen ............................................ 307
18.5.1 Title screen ................................................................................................................................ 307
18.5.2 Top screen (time display) .......................................................................................................... 307
18.5.3 Menu screen.............................................................................................................................. 307
18.6 Menu Structure.......................................................................................................................... 308
18.7 Monitor/Test Mode [Excluding User-Registered Devices]......................................................... 310
18.7.1 Relevant devices ....................................................................................................................... 310
18.7.2 Monitor mode operation............................................................................................................. 311
18.7.3 Monitor screen & status display................................................................................................. 312
18.7.4 Test mode operation.................................................................................................................. 314
18.7.5 Test mode operation notes........................................................................................................ 317
18.8 Monitor/Test Mode [User-Registered Devices] ......................................................................... 318
18.8.1 Monitor mode operation............................................................................................................. 318
18.8.2 Test mode operation.................................................................................................................. 319
18.9 Error Check ............................................................................................................................... 319
18.10 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)...................................................................... 320
18.10.1 Changing to japanese menus.................................................................................................. 320
18.10.2 Changing to english menus ..................................................................................................... 321
18.10.3 D8302 changes by program & related devices........................................................................ 321
18.11 Contrast................................................................................................................................... 322
18.12 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)......................................................................................... 323
18.12.1 Current time setting procedure ................................................................................................ 323
18.12.2 Displaying the current time ...................................................................................................... 324
18.12.3 Changing the current time’s "Year" from 2-digit format to 4-digit format ................................. 324
18.13 Entrycodes .............................................................................................................................. 325
18.13.1 Entry code types & levels ........................................................................................................ 325
18.13.2 Level-specific restrictions screen list ....................................................................................... 326
18.13.3 Entry code storage .................................................................................................................. 327
18.13.4 Screens requiring entry codes for access ............................................................................... 327
18.13.5 Canceling an entry code.......................................................................................................... 328
18.13.6 Enabling an entry code............................................................................................................ 329
18.14 Device All-Clear ...................................................................................................................... 329
18.14.1 Device all-clear operation ........................................................................................................ 329
18.15 PLC Status .............................................................................................................................. 330
18.15.1 Display operation..................................................................................................................... 330
18.15.2 PLC status display items ......................................................................................................... 331
18.16 Scan Time (Scan Time Display).............................................................................................. 332
18.16.1 Scan time display operation .................................................................................................... 332
18.17 Cassette (Memory Cassette Transfers) .................................................................................. 332
18.17.1 Transfer from internal RAM to memory cassette (Cassette ¨ RAM) ........................................ 333
18.17.2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal RAM (Cassette Æ RAM)...................................... 334
18.17.3 Memory cassette & internal RAM consistency check (Cassette : RAM) ................................. 335
18.18 System Information (Restrictions From PLC).......................................................................... 336
18.18.1 System information list ............................................................................................................ 336
18.18.2 System information setting programexample .......................................................................... 337
18.19 User (User-Registered Device Setting)................................................................................... 338
18.19.1 System information - user-registered device setting ............................................................... 338
18.19.2 Precaution when setting 3 or fewer devices ............................................................................ 338
18.19.3 Program example 1 (when 4 devices are displayed as user-registered devices) ................... 339
18.19.4 Program example 2 (when 3 or fewer devices are displayed as user-registered devices) ..... 340
18.19.5 Program example 3 (when 5 or more devices are displayed as user-registered devices) ...... 341
9
18.20 Operation Button ON/OFF Information ................................................................................... 343

18.20.1 Various applications ................................................................................................................ 343
18.20.2 System information - operation button ON/OFF information ................................................... 343
18.21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format ...................................................... 344
18.21.1 System information - specifying a hexadecimal current value display format ......................... 344
18.21.2 Program example 1 (specifying a hexadecimal data display format) ...................................... 344
18.21.3 Program example 2 (specifying a decadal data display format).............................................. 344
18.22 Display Screen Protect Function............................................................................................. 345
18.22.1 Entry code & display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions ............... 345
18.22.2 Relationship between entry code & display screen protect function ....................................... 345
18.22.3 Entry code levels ..................................................................................................................... 346
18.22.4 System information - display screen protect function .............................................................. 346
18.22.5 Program example (screen protect function setting)................................................................. 346
18.22.6 Pointers for using the display screen protect function ............................................................. 347
18.23 User Message Display Function ............................................................................................. 348
18.23.1 System information - user message display function .............................................................. 348
18.23.2 Shift JIS code arrangement precautions ................................................................................. 348
18.23.3 Displaying a word device current value as a message............................................................ 349
18.23.4 Program example 1 (user messages display switching) ......................................................... 349
18.23.5 Program example 2 ([+] / [-] buttons of user messages switching) ......................................... 350
18.23.6 Program example 3 (user messages plus data display).......................................................... 351
18.23.7 Character data input procedure............................................................................................... 354
18.24 Operation Error Messages & Corrective Actions .................................................................... 357
18.24.1 When a "Fatal error occurred" message appears ................................................................... 358
18.25 Menu Display Characters - Japanese & English Display Character Correspondence Table.. 359
19. FX-16/32E*-*-TB (Terminal Block) 360
19.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 362

19.1.1 Product configuration................................................................................................................. 363
19.2 External Dimensions & Component Names.............................................................................. 364
19.3 Terminal Arrangement .............................................................................................................. 365
19.4 Installation Work........................................................................................................................ 367
19.4.1 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 367
19.4.2 Removal .................................................................................................................................... 367
19.4.3 Input/output cable connection.................................................................................................... 367
19.4.4 Connection to terminal block ..................................................................................................... 368
19.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB ............................................................................................................ 369
19.5.1 Internal circuit ............................................................................................................................ 369
19.5.2 Example of input external wiring................................................................................................ 370
19.5.3 Output external wiring................................................................................................................ 370
19.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB ........................................................................................................................ 371
19.6.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 371
19.6.3 Example of input external wiring................................................................................................ 372
19.7 FX-16EYR-TB ........................................................................................................................... 373
19.7.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 373
19.7.3 Example of output external wiring ............................................................................................. 374
19.7.5 Operation life of relay output contact......................................................................................... 376
19.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB ............................................................................................... 377
19.8.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 377
19.9 FX-16EYS-TB ........................................................................................................................... 380
19.9.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 380
10
20. FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L (Memory Cassette) 383
20.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 383

20.1.1 Electrical specifications ............................................................................................................. 383
20.1.2 Component names & external dimensions................................................................................ 383
20.2 Installation & Removal .............................................................................................................. 384
20.2.1 Memory cassette installation ..................................................................................................... 384
20.2.2 Memory cassette removal ......................................................................................................... 385
20.3 Saved Data Content.................................................................................................................. 386
20.4 PROTECT Switch ..................................................................................................................... 387
20.4.1 PROTECT switch setting........................................................................................................... 387
20.4.2 PROTECT switch operation ...................................................................................................... 387
20.4.3 Precautions when setting and using the switch......................................................................... 387
20.5 Memory Cassette <-> PLC (RAM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function .............................. 388
20.5.1 Tool for pressing the [WR] and [RD] keys ................................................................................. 388
20.5.2 Writing (WR: 64L → PLC) ......................................................................................................... 388
20.5.3 Reading (RD: 64L ← PLC) ........................................................................................................ 389
20.6 Transfers By Display Module Operation ................................................................................... 389
20.7 Operation Precautions .............................................................................................................. 389
21. FX3U-32BL (Battery) 390
21.1 Battery Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 390

21.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 390
21.2.1 Differences between main unit’s internal battery and the optional battery ................................ 390
21.3 Battery Handling........................................................................................................................ 391
21.3.1 Battery life & replacement guidelines ........................................................................................ 391
21.3.2 Reading the date of manufacture .............................................................................................. 391
21.3.3 Special "battery low-voltage" device & notification program example ....................................... 391
21.4 Battery-Free Operation ............................................................................................................. 392
21.5 Battery Replacement................................................................................................................. 393
21.6 Battery Related Precautions ..................................................................................................... 393
Appendix A: Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 394
Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511) ........................................................ 394

Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511) ........................................................... 402
Appendix A-3 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299]..................... 409
Appendix A-3-1 Special auxiliary relays (M8260 to M8299)................................................................. 409
Appendix A-3-2 Special data registers (D8260 to D8299).................................................................... 410
Appendix B: Instruction List 411
Appendix B-1 Basic Instructions ............................................................................................... 411

Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instructions .................................................................................... 411
Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number .............................. 412
Appendix C: Character-code 416
Appendix C-1 ASCII Code Table .............................................................................................. 416
11
Warranty................................................................................................................................. 419
Revised History ..................................................................................................................... 420
12
User's Manual - Hardware Edition

User's Manual [Hardware Edition]
Manual number JY997D16501

Manual revision A
Date 7/2005
Foreword
This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation,
safe use and operation of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood
before attempting to install or use the unit.
And, store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always
forward it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
13
User's Manual - Hardware Edition
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers. The manual
has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or
persons is as follows;
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the
local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all
associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance
with established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note: the term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses
the product associated with this manual
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions in the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations
with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system,
machine, and apparatus with which a user is using.
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or
use, please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference,
please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will
accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric
distributor.
Registration
• Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.
14
Standards
Certification of UL, cUL standards

FX3U main units and FX2N input/output extension units/blocks supporting UL, cUL standards are as follows:
UL, cUL registration number : E95239

Models : MELSEC FX3U series manufactured
FX3U- MR/ES
Where indicates:16,32,48,64,80
FX3U-232ADP FX3U-485ADP
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4DA-ADP FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
FX3U-4HSX-ADP FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Models : MELSEC FX2N series manufactured

FX2N- ER-ES/UL FX2N- ET-ESS/UL
Where indicates:32,48
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
15
Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking)
This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of
this note will comply with the following standards.
Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the
user / manufacturer. For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site.
Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive

The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and
design analysis (through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for
Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation.
Type : Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)

from May 1st, 2005 FX3U- MR/ES
FX3U-4HSX-ADP FX3U-2HSY-ADP
FX3U-FLROM-16 FX3U-FLROM-64L
FX3U-7DM
from June 1st, 2005 FX3U-232ADP FX3U-485ADP
FX3U-232-BD FX3U-422-BD FX3U-485-BD FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-USB-BD
FX3U-FLROM-64
Standard Remark
EN61131-2:2003 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
- Equipment requirements and tests • Radiated Emissions
• Mains Terminal Voltage Emissions
• RF immunity
• Fast Transients
• ESD
• Conducted
• Surge
• Power magnetic fields
16
from July 1st, 1997 FX2N- ER-ES/UL FX2N- ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
from August 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
to March 31st, 2002 [compliance with EN50081-2 (EN61000-6-4) and EN50082-2]

from April 1st 2002: Above mentioned products [compliance with EN50081-2 (EN61000-6-4) and EN61131-2]
Standard Remark
EN50081-2:1993 Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
EN61000-6-4:2001 - Generic emission standard • Radiated Emissions
Industrial environment • Mains Terminal Voltage Emissions
EN61131-2:1994 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
/A11:1996 - Equipment requirements and tests • RF Immunity
/A12:2000 • Fast Transients
• ESD
• Damped oscillatory wave
EN50082-2:1995 Electromagnetic compatibility Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
- Generic immunity standard • RF immunity
Industrial environment • Fast Transients
• ESD
• Conducted
• Power magnetic fields
17
Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive
The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and
design analysis (through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for Low
Voltage (73/23/EEC) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation.
Type : Programmable Controller (Open Type Equipment)

from May 1st, 2005 FX3U- MR/ES
Standard Remark
EN61131-2:2003 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for
- Equipment requirements and tests fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements
of EN61131-2:2003

from July 1st, 1997 FX2N- ER-ES/UL FX2N- ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
from August 1st, 1998 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
to March 31st,2002 (compliance with IEC1010-1)

from April 1st 2002: Above mentioned products (compliance with EN61131-2)
Standard Remark
IEC1010-1:1990 Safety requirements for electrical The equipment has been assessed as a component for
/A1:1992 equipment for measurement, control, fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements
and laboratory use of IEC 1010-1:1990+A1:1992
- General requirements
EN61131-2:1994 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for
/A12:1996 - Equipment requirements and tests fitting in a suitable enclosure which meets the requirements
/A11:2000 of EN61131-2:1994+A11:1996+A12:2000
Caution for compliance with EC Directive
1. Installation in Enclosure
Please use FX3U PLCs while installed in a shielded enclosure. PLCs are open type equipment and should be
installed in enclosures when used. This is not only for the safety but for the shielding of noise. The effect of
noise-shielding by enclosure is important.
2. Caution for Analog Products in use
The analog special adapters (FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP)
have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive. However,
for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices,
Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points;
As analog devices are sensitive by nature, their use should be considered carefully. For users of proprietary
cables (integral with sensors or actuators), these users should follow those manufacturers' installation
requirements.
Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used. If NO other EMC protection is provided, users
may experience temporary induced errors not exceeding +10%/-10% in very heavy industrial areas.
However, Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed with general good EMC
practice for the users complete control system, users can expect errors as specified in this manual.
- Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling.
Where possible, users should run analog cables separately.
- Good cable shielding should be used. When terminating the shield at Earth - ensure that no earth loops
are accidentally created.
- When reading analog values, EMC induced errors can be smoothed out by averaging the readings. This
can be achieved either through functions on the analog special adapters or through a user's program in
the FX3U Series PLC main unit.
18
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 1.1 Introduction of Manuals
Introduction
1. Introduction
This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components, main unit specifications and 2
procedures for installing the main unit, specifications for the input/output powered extension units/blocks, and
Part Names
Features and
procedures for adding input/output devices, and procedures for operating the display module etc.
FX3U PLCs can make various kinds of control in combination with the main unit functions and many extension
devices (expansion board, special adapters and special function units/blocks).
The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions, communication control, analog control and positioning
control are given in separate manuals. 3
→ For information on manual organization, refer to subsection 1.1.2.
Introduction
Product
1.1 Introduction of Manuals
1.1.1 Classification of major components in this manual 4
Specifications
1. Main unit (Chapter 1 to 14)
Division Outline Reference
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining
Introduction of manuals Chapter 1
the manuals and the abbreviations. 5
This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Features and part names Chapter 2
names and functions of the parts.
This chapter contains explanations of the structures for model
Introduction of product Chapter 3
names, extension products, and compliance to overseas standards.
This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power
Specifications supply and input/output, external dimensions and terminal block
layout.
Chapter 4 6
Configuration
System
This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3U PLCs and
Version information Chapter 5
information for the application of programming tools.
Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is
System configuration possible. Chapter 6
Extension device current consumption and configuration examples.
Input/output assignment procedure for input/output powered
7
Input/output No. and unit No.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
extension units/blocks, etc., and unit No. assignment procedure for Chapter 7
assignment
special function unit/blocks.
This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the
Installation procedures for installing with DIN rail or screws and how to connect Chapter 8
extension devices.
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing 8
Electric wiring Chapter 9
for wiring, power supply specifications and instructions for wiring.
Installation
This chapter contains explanations of the input specifications and

Input wiring Chapter 10
instructions for wiring.
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the
High-speed counter Chapter 11
high-speed counter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP) examples of programming.
Output wiring
This chapter contains explanations for the output specifications and
Chapter 12
9
instructions for wiring.
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring

Examples of wiring for each use Chapter 13
input/output devices for main uses.
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test
Test operation, adjustment,
operation and adjustment, maintenance and error check items and Chapter 14
maintenance and error check
measures to be taken upon occurrence of error. 10
Input Wiring
19
2. Extension devices (Chapter 15 to 17)

Input/output powered extension This chapter contains explanations for the input/output Chapter 15
units specifications, external dimensions and wiring examples for each
Input/output extension blocks product. Chapter 16
Extension products for special This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and
functions, such as analog control, terminal layout (For details, refer to the manual for each extension Chapter 17
positioning and communication device).
3. Optional products (Chapter 18 to 21)

This chapter contains explanations of the specifications, external
Display module dimensions, mounting procedures and operating procedures for Chapter 18
products, such as the display module and memory cassette.
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring FX-
FX Series terminal blocks Chapter 19
16/32E -TB.
This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the
Memory cassette Chapter 20
memory cassette and the installation procedures.
This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for replacing
Battery Chapter 21
the battery and detecting battery voltage drop.
4. Others (Appendices A to C)
This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary
List of special devices relays (M8000 to M8511) and special data registers (D8000 to Appendix A
D8511) (For details, refer to the programming manual.)
This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions
List of instructions and applied instructions Appendix B
For details, refer to the programming manual.
This chapter contains an explanation list of the character codes that
List of character codes Appendix C
can be displayed on the display module (FX3U-7DM)
20
1
1.1.2 Manual organization and position of this manual
Introduction
This manual describes detail on the hardware, including the system configuration, selection, installation and
wiring. The instructions, communication control, analog control and positioning control are explained in
separate manuals. Refer to the manuals as needed.
FX3U Series
2
Manual for each use (separate volume)
Part Names
Features and
Built-in functions Refer to the manual for each purpose of use.
(Main unit)
•Sequence instructions
L N
S/S
・
0V
24V
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
0
X12
1 2
X13
3
X14
4
X15
5
X16
6
X17
X20
X21
X22
X23
7 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 6 27
X24
X25
X26
X27
・
•High-speed counter User's Manual - Hardware Edition this manual

•Positioning instructions
IN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
JY997D16501 (Model: FX3U-HW-E)

POWER
POWER
RUN
BATT
•PID
ERROR
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 2 5 26 27
OUT
3
0 111 12
10 2 13
3 14
4 155 166 177 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 6 27
FX3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Details of hardware, including input/

Y0 Y2 ・ Y4 Y6 ・ Y10 Y12 ・ Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 COM5
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27
output specifications, wiring,
Introduction
Product
Additional options FX
FX3U
3U installation and maintenance of PLC
Input/output powered extension separate
ƒ}ƒjƒ…ƒAƒ‹ main unit
units/blocks manual
•Ê û
IN 0
A 1
2
3
4
5
6
COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 7
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER
IN
4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N -48ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FX2N -16EX-C
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 COM5
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7 IN 0
Specifications
B 1
JY997D16601 (Model: FX-P3-E)

2
3
4
5
6
7
Details of sequence program,

Expansion board, Special adapters including basic and applied
FX3U/FX3UC instructions and various devices
•Analog FX3 U-4A D-ADP
separate
•Communication
POWER
manual
5
24+
•High-speed output
24-I1+ V1+
RD
COM1
•High-speed input The manuals for FX3U Series will be

V 2+
SD
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
COM 2 I2+
V3+
available in or after July, 2005.

COM 3I3+
V4+
C OM4I4+
User's Manual - Analog Control Edition

Special function units/blocks JY997D16701 (Model: FX3U-U-ANALOG-E)
Details of analog special function
•Analog
POWER
FX3U/FX3UC
blocks and analog special adapters 6
Configuration
System
FX2N-4AD separate
24V
A/D
manual
As for FX0N and FX2N Series, refer to The manuals for FX3U Series will be
individual manuals. available in or after July, 2005.
Options User's Manual - Data Communication Edition

JY997D16901 (Model: FX-U-COMMU-E)
7
•Memory cassette
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
•Battery Details of simple link between PCs,
parallel link, computer link, no-
FX protocol communication and
Display module separate programming communication
•Display module manual
•Display module holder The manuals for FX3U Series will be
available in or after July, 2005.
8
Installation
Manuals supplied with product

User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
Each product comes with the installation manual or
JY997D16801 (Model: FX3U-U-POS-E)
the User's Manual (except the input/output powered
extension units/blocks). Details of wiring, instructions and
operations of positioning functions in
Installation manual FX3U/FX3UC PLC main unit 9
The part names, installation procedures and separate
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
specifications are shown. manual

As for the functions and program examples, refer to
the separate User's Manual - Edition).
User's manual
The procedures for wiring and installing,
specifications and functions are explained.
10
Input Wiring
To use some products, separate manuals may be

necessary.
21
1.1.3 List of manuals

FX3U Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual.
For the details of the hardware of FX3U Series, refer to this manual.
For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices, refer to the relevant
manuals.
: Indispensable manuals
: Manuals necessary for some purposes
: Manuals with separate volumes for details
Manual Model
Manual title Contents
number name code
Manuals for PLC main unit
FX3U PLC main unit
Extractions of descriptions of input/output
specifications, wiring and installation of
Supplied
FX3U Series FX3U Series PLC main unit from FX3U
with JY997D18801 −
HARDWARE MANUAL Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
product
For the detailed explanation, refer to this
manual.
FX3U Series User's Details of hardware of FX3U Series PLC
Separate Manual - Hardware main unit, including input/output
JY997D16501 09R516
volume Edition specifications, wiring, installation and
(this manual) maintenance
Programming
FX3U/FX3UC Series Details of sequence programming for FX3U
Separate Programming Manual - Series, including explanation for basic
JY997D16601 09R517
volume Basic & Applied instructions, applied instructions and various
Instruction Edition devices
FX Series terminal block
FX INPUT AND
Supplied
OUTPUT TERMINAL Procedures for handling FX Series terminal
with JY992D50401 −
BLOCKS USER’S block
product
GUIDE
Manuals for communication control
Common
Details of simple link between PCs, parallel
FX Series
Separate link, computer link and no-protocol
User's Manual - Data JY997D16901 09R715
volume communication (RS instructions, FX2N-
Communication Edition
232IF)
RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485/USB/DoPa communication
When using each product, refer also to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed.
System configuration of the USB
Supplied communication expansion board and
FX3U-USB-BD
with JY997D13501 procedures for installing the driver −
User's Manual
product When using, refer also to FX Series User's
Manual - Data Communication Edition.
Procedures for handling the RS-232C
Supplied
FX3U-232-BD communication expansion board
with JY997D12901 −
Installation Manual When using, refer also to FX Series User's
product
Supplied
FX3U-232ADP communication special adapter
with JY997D13701 −
Installation Manual When using, sefer also to FX Series User's
product
Supplied
FX2N-232IF communication special function block
with JY992D73501 −
Hardware Manual When using, sefer also to FX Series User's
product
22
1
Introduction
Manual Model
number name code
Supplied
Procedures for handling the RS-422 2
Part Names
Features and
with JY997D13101 −
product
Procedures for handling the RS-485
Supplied
with JY997D13001 −
product
3
Introduction
Product
Procedures for handling the RS-485
Supplied
FX3U-485ADP communication special adapter
with JY997D13801 −
product
Procedures for handling the RS-232C/RS-
Supplied
FX-485PC-IF 485 conversion interface 4
with JY992D81801 −
Hardware Manual When using, refer also to FX Series User's
Specifications
product
CC-Link, CC-Link/LT, MELSEC I/O LINK, and AS-i system
Procedures for handling the CC-Link master
Supplied
with
FX2N-16CCL-M
JY992D93201
special function block
−
5
Hardware Manual When using, refer also to FX2N-16CCL-M
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
product
User's Manual.
Sepa-
FX2N-16CCL-M Details of CC-Link master special function
rate vol- JY992D93101 09R710
User's Manual block
ume
Supplied
with
FX2N-32CCL
JY992D71801
Procedures for handling the CC-Link remote
09R711
6
User's Manual device station special function block
Configuration
System
product
Supplied Remote I/O station and
As for the CC-Link remote I/O station and remote device
with remote device station −
station, refer to the relevant manuals and related documents.
product for CC-Link
Procedures for handling the CC-Link/LT
Supplied FX2N-64CL-M
master special function block 7
with User's Manual - JY997D05401 −
When using, refer also to FX2N-64CL-M
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
product Hardware Volume
User's Manual - Details.
FX2N-64CL-M
Separate Details of the CC-Link/LT master special
User's Manual - JY997D08501 −
volume function block
Detailed Volume
Supplied
Remote I/O power
As for the remote I/O station, power supply adapter and 8
with dedicated power supply for CC-Link/LT, refer to the relevant −
Installation
supply adapter
product manuals and related documents.
Supplied
FX2N-32ASI-M Procedures for handling the AS-i system
with JY992D76901 −
User's Manual master special function block
product
Supplied
with
FX2N-16LNK-M
JY992D72101
Procedures for handling the MELSEC I/O
09R703
9
User's Manual LINK master special function block
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
product
10
Input Wiring
23
Manual Model
number name code
Manuals for analog/temperature control
Common
FX3U/FX3UC Series Details of analog special function block
Separate
User's Manual - Analog JY997D16701 (FX3UC-4AD) and analog special adapter 09R619
volume
Control Edition (FX3U-***-**-ADP)
Analog input, temperature input and temperature control
Supplied
FX2N-2AD Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog
with JY992D74701 −
User's Guide input special function block
product
Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog
Supplied input special adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP
with JY997D13901 When using, refer also to FX3U/FX3UC −
User's Manual
product Series User's Manual - Analog Control
Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4AD Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog
with JY992D65201 −
User's Guide input special function block
product
Supplied Procedures for handling the 8-ch analog
FX2N-8AD
with JY992D86001 input special function block (to be used also 09R608
User's Manual
product for thermocouple input)
Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt-100
Supplied temperature sensor input special adapter
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
User's Manual
Edition.
Supplied Procedures for handling the 4-ch Pt-100
FX2N-4AD-PT
with JY992D65601 temperature sensor input special function −
User's Guide
product block
Procedures for handling the 4-ch
Supplied thermocouple input special adapter
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
User's Manual
Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4AD-TC Procedures for handling the 4-ch
with JY992D65501 −
User's Guide thermocouple input special function block
product
Procedures for handling the 2-ch
Supplied
FX2N-2LC temperature control special function block
with JY992D85601 −
User's Guide When using, refer to FX2N-2LC User's
product
Manual.
Separate FX2N-2LC Procedures for handling the 2-ch
JY992D85801 09R607
volume User's Manual temperature control special function block
Analog output
Supplied
FX2N-2DA Procedures for handling the 2-ch analog
with JY992D74901 −
User's Guide output special function block
product
Procedures for handling the 3-ch analog
Supplied output special adapter
FX3U-4DA-ADP
User's Manual
Edition.
24
1
Introduction
Manual Model
number name code
Supplied
FX2N-4DA Procedures for handling the 4-ch analog
2
with JY992D65901 −
Part Names
Features and
User's Guide output special function block
product
Analog input/output (mixed)
FX0N-3A
with
User's Guide
JY992D49001 input and 1-ch analog output special − 3
product function block
Introduction
Product
FX2N-5A
with JY997D11401 input and 1-ch analog output special 09R616
User's Manual
product function block
Manuals for high-speed counter
High-speed counter 4
Specifications
Supplied
FX3U-4HSX-ADP Procedures for handling the high-speed
with JY997D16301 −
Installation Manual input special adapter
product
Supplied
FX2N-1HC Procedures for handling the 1-ch high-speed
with JY992D65401 −
product
User's Guide counter special function block 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Manuals for positioning control
Common
FX3U/FX3UC Series
Separate User's Manual - Details of positioning functions of FX3U/
JY997D16801 09R620
volume Positioning Control FX3UC Series
Edition
6
Configuration
System
Pulse output and positioning
Procedures for handling the high-speed
Supplied output special adapter
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
product
Installation Manual
Series User's Manual - Positioning Control 7
Edition.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Supplied
FX2N/FX-1PG Procedures for handling the 1-axis pulse
with JY992D65301 09R610
User's Manual output special function block
product
Procedures for handling the 1-axis pulse
Supplied
with
FX2N-10PG
JY992D91901
output special function block
− 8
Installation Manual When using, refer to FX2N-10PG User's
product
Installation
Manual.
Separate FX2N-10PG Details of 1-axis pulse output special
JY992D93401 09R611
volume User's Manual function block
Procedures for handling the 1-axis
Supplied
FX2N-10GM positioning special function unit
with
User's Guide
JY992D77701
When using, refer to FX2N-10GM/FX2N-
− 9
product
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
20GM Handy Manual.

Procedures for handling the 2-axis
Supplied
FX2N-20GM positioning special function unit
with JY992D77601 −
User's Guide When using, refer to FX2N-10GM/FX2N-
product
20GM Handy Manual.
Separate
FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
Procedures for handling the 1-axis/2-axis
10
Hardware/Programing JY992D77801 09R612
Input Wiring
volume positioning special function unit

Manual
25
Manual Model
number name code
Programmable cam switch
Supplied
FX2N-1RM-E-SET Procedures for handling the programmable
with JY992D77101 09R614
User's Manual cam switch special function unit
product
Other manuals
Connector conversion
Procedures for handling the conversion
Supplied
FX3U-CNV-BD function expansion board for connectors for
with JY997D13601 −
Installation Manual connecting communication and analog
product
special adapters
Battery (maintenance option)
Supplied
FX3U-32BL
with JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures −
Hardware Manual
product
Display module
Supplied
FX3U-7DM Procedures for mounting and handling the
with JY997D17101 −
User's Manual display module
product
Display module holder
Supplied
FX3U-7DM-HLD Procedures for mounting and handling the
with JY997D15401 −
User's Manual display module holder
product
26
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
1
1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Introduction
Abbreviation/
Description
generic name
PLCs
FX3U Series Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs 2
Part Names
Features and
FX2N Series Generic name for FX2N Series PLCs
FX0N Series Generic name for FX0N Series PLCs
FX3U PLCs or main units Abbreviation of FX3U Series PLC main units
FX3UC PLCs or main units Abbreviation of FX3UC Series PLC main units
Expansion boards
Generic name for the following models 3
FX3U-USB-BD, FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-CNV-BD
Introduction
Product
Generic name for high-speed input-output special adapters, communication special
Special adapters
adapters and analog special adapters
High-speed input/output Generic name for the following models
special adapters FX3U-4HSX-ADP, FX3U-2HSY-ADP
Communication special Generic name for the following models 4
adapters FX3U-232ADP, FX3U-485ADP
Specifications
Generic name for the following models
Analog special adapters
FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
Generic name for FX2N Series extension devices, FX2NC Series extension devices and
FX0N Series extension devices
Extension devices
The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used. For applicable
devices, refer to the User's Manual - Hardware Edition for the main unit to be used.
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension units, FX2N Series input/
FX2N Series extension
output extension blocks, FX2N Series special function units and FX2N Series special
devices
function blocks
FX0N Series extension
Generic name for FX0N Series special function block
devices
Generic name for FX2N Series input/output powered extension units, FX2N Series input/
6
Configuration
System
Input/output extension output extension blocks
devices The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used. For applicable
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ER, FX2N-32ES, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-32ET, FX2N-
FX2N Series input/output 48ER, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ET-ESS-UL, FX2N-48ER-DS, FX2N- 7
powered extension units 48ER-D, FX2N-48ET-DSS, FX2N-48ET-D, FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
FX2N Series input/output Generic name for FX2N Series input extension blocks and FX2N Series output extension
extension blocks blocks
FX2N Series input extension Generic name for the following models
blocks FX2N-16EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EX, FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C
8
Installation

FX2N Series output
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR, FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL, FX2N-16EYT, FX2N-16EYS,
extension blocks
FX2N-16EYT-C
Generic name for FX2N Series special function units, FX2N Series special function
Special function blocks/ blocks and FX2NC Series special function blocks
units The devices that can be added depend on the main unit to be used. For applicable 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
FX3UC Series special Generic name for the following models

function blocks FX3UC-4AD
FX2N Series special Generic name for the following models
function units FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM, FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET
10
Input Wiring
27
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 1.2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Abbreviation/
Description
generic name
FX2N-232IF, FX2N-16CCL-M, FX2N-32CCL, FX2N-64CL-M, FX2N-16LNK-M, FX2N-
FX2N Series special 32ASI-M, FX2N-2AD, FX2N-4AD, FX2N-8AD, FX2N-4AD-PT, FX2N-4AD-TC, FX2N-2LC,
function blocks FX2N-2DA, FX2N-4DA, FX2N-5A, FX2N-1HC, FX2N-1PG(-E), FX2N-10PG
FX0N Series special Generic name for the following models
function blocks FX0N-3A
Memory cassettes
FX3U-FLROM-16, FX3U-FLROM-64 and FX3U-FLROM-64L
Battery Abbreviation of model FX3U-32BL battery
FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB, FX-16EX-A1-TB, FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-
FX Series terminal blocks TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
Extension cables
FX0N-30EC, FX0N-65EC
Input/output cables FX-16E-500CAB-S, FX-16E- CAB, FX-16E- CAB-R, FX-A32E- CAB
150, 300 or 500 is entered in .
Connectors for input/output
FX2C-I/O-CON, FX2C-I/O-CON-S, FX2C-I/O-CON-SA
CC-Link master Abbreviation of FX2N-16CCL-M
Remote I/O stations Remote stations that handle information in bit units only
Remote stations Generic name for remote I/O stations and remote device stations
Power supply adapter Unit to be connected to supply power to the CC-Link/LT system
Dedicated power supply Power supply to be connected to supply power to the CC-Link/LT system
AS-i master Abbreviation of model FX2N-32ASI-M AS-i system master block
Peripheral devices Generic name for programming software, handy programming panel (HPP) and indicator
Programming tool Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel (HPP)
Programming software Generic name for GX Developer and FX-PCS/WIN (-E)
Abbreviation of programming software packages SW D5C-GPPW-J and SW D5C-
GX Developer
GPPW-E
Abbreviation of model FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E programming software
FX-PCS/WIN (-E)
packages
Handy programming panels Generic name for the following models
(HPP) FX-20P, FX-20P-E, FX-10P, FX-10P-E
RS-232C/RS-422 Generic name for the following models
converters FX-232AW, FX-232AWC, FX-232AWC-H
RS-232C/RS-485 converters Abbreviation of FX-485PC-IF
Indicators
GOT1000 Series Generic name for GT15 and GT11
GOT-900 Series Generic name for GOT-A900 Series and GOT-F900 Series
GOT-A900 Series Generic name for GOT-A900 Series
GOT-F900 Series Generic name for GOT-F900 Series
Manuals
FX3U Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition
Programming manual Abbreviation of FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions
Data Communication
Abbreviation of FX Series User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Edition
Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Analog Control Edition
Positioning Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - Positioning Control Edition
28
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 2.1 Major Features
Introduction
2. Features and Part Names
2
2.1 Major Features
Part Names
Features and
1. Basic functions sequence. In this case, use instructions and
devices within the ranges common to FX 3U
[Up to 384 input/output points] Series and the selected model of PLC.
The number of input/output points (up to 256 3
points) wired directly to the PLC and remote [Remote debugging of program]
Introduction
Product
input/output points (up to 256 points) on the Use of programming software enables you to
network (CC-Link) can be increased to 384 remotely transfer the program and monitor the
points in total. PLC operation through a modem connected to
the RS-232C expansion board and RS-232C
[Powered extension units/blocks that can be communication special adapter.
connected] 4
FX2N Series input/output powered extension
Specifications
2. Input/output high-speed processing
units/blocks can be connected. functions of main unit
Up to 8 FX0N/FX2N Series special function units/
blocks can be connected. [High-speed counter function]
(Among FX0N Series, only FX0N-3A can be → Refer to chapter 11 "Use of High-speed
connected.) Counter (C235 to C255)" in this manual and
Programming Manual.
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
[Program memory] 1) Input terminals of main unit
The PLC has a 64K-step RAM memory.
- Input of open collector transistor output
Use of the memory cassette enables the
program memory to be used as flash memory. - 1-phase 100 kHz x 6 points + 10 kHz x 2
points
[Operation instructions] - 2-phase 50 kHz x 2 points 6
Various instructions, such as floating-point and
Configuration
System
2) Input terminals of high-speed input special
character string processing instructions and
adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP)
scaling instructions, are provided.
- Input of differential line driver
[Built-in RUN/STOP switch] - 1-phase 200 kHz x 8 points (when 2 units
The PLC can be started and stopped with the are connected)
built-in switch. - 2-phase 100 kHz x 2 points (when 2 units
7
RUN and STOP commands can be given to the
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
are connected)
PLC through a general-purpose input terminal or
peripheral device. [Pulse catch function]
Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be
[Writing during running] captured without a complicated program.
The programming software for personal → Refer to chapter 10 "Input Wiring
computer enables you to modify the program Procedures (Input Interruption and Pulse
8
Installation
while the PLC is running. Catch)" in this manual and Programming

Manual.
[Built-in clock function]
The PLC has a clock function to control the time. Input terminal Signal ON/OFF width
X000 to X005 5µs
[Programming tool]
Use a version of GX Developer applicable to
X006, X007 50µs 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
FX3U.
→ Refer to chapter 5 "Version Information
and Application of Programming Tool" in this
manual.
*For peripheral devices not applicable to FX3U
Series, specify FX2N Series or FX2 Series for 10
model selection, and you can program the
Input Wiring
29
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 2.1 Major Features
[Input interruption function (with delay On the display module, you can set the time,
function)] adjust the contrast and display the PLC version
Interruption routines can be processed and error codes.
preferentially by external signals with the
minimum ON or OFF width of 5 µs (X000 to 4. Communication and network functions
X005). The expansion board, special adapter and
(Timer interruption and high-speed counter special function block for each communication
interruption functions are also provided.) function can be connected.
→ Refer to chapter 10 "Input Wiring
Procedures (Input Interruption and Pulse [Kinds of communication functions]
Catch)" in this manual and Programming • Programming communication through RS-
Manual. 232C, RS-422 and USB
→ Refer to Data Communication Edition.
[Pulse output function]
When two high-speed output special adapters • Simple link between PCs
FX3U-2HSY-ADP (differential line driver output) → Refer to Data Communication Edition.
are used, pulses of up to 200 kHz can be output • Parallel link
simultaneously to four axes. → Refer to Data Communication Edition.
The programming can be performed easily with • Computer link
each instruction. → Refer to Data Communication Edition.
→ Refer to Positioning Control Edition.
[Various positioning instructions] • Inverter communication
→ Refer to Positioning Control Edition. → Refer to Data Communication Edition.
Instruc • No-protocol communication through RS-232C/

tion
Description RS-485
→ Refer to Data Communication Edition.
Mechanical zero return instruction with
DSZR • CC-Link
DOG search function
Instruction to read the current value - Master: FX2N-16CCL-M
ABS from our servo amplifier with absolute - Remote device station: FX2N-32CCL
position (ABS) detecting function → Refer to the manual for each product.
Positioning (relative positioning) to • CC-Link/LT
DRVI specify the movement from the current
- Master: FX2N-64CL-M
position
- Remote I/O station
Positioning (absolute positioning) to
→ Refer to the manual for each product.
DRVA specify the target position based on the
current value 0 • MELSEC I/O LINK
Instruction to change the pulse train - Master: FX2N-16LNK-M
PLSV
output frequency - Remote I/O station
Positioning for fixed-feed interruption → Refer to the manual for each product.
DVIT
drive • AS-i system
Instruction for positioning based on - Master: FX2N-32ASI-M
TBL batch setting of positioning operation,
- Slave station
moving distance and speed
→ Refer to the manual for each product.
3. Display functions (display module) 5. Analog functions
FX3U-7DM Display Module (option) can be The special adapter and special function block
incorporated in the PLC. for each analog function are connected.
The display module can be mounted on the → For information not given in Analog
panel by using the display module holder. Control Edition, Refer to the manual for each
[Monitor/test function] product.
Devices can be monitored and tested by [Kinds of analog functions]
operating the buttons on the display module. • Voltage/current input
The button operations can be inhibited by the • Voltage/current output
user program.
• Temperature sensor input (thermocouple and
[Message display function] platinum resistance thermometer sensor)
User messages can be displayed on the display • Temperature control
module by the user program.
[Other functions]
30
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 2.2 Names and Functions of Parts
1
2.2 Names and Functions of Parts
Introduction
2.2.1 Front Panel
Factory default configuration (standard)

2
Part Names
Features and
[1] Top cover [9] Input display LEDs
[2] Battery cover
[10] Terminal block covers
[3] Special adapter
connecting hooks 3
Introduction
Product
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
[11] Extension device connecting
RUN
connector cover
[4] Expansion board
BATT
FX3U-48MR/ES
ERROR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 [12] Operation status display LEDs
dummy cover
OUT
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
[5] RUN/STOP switch R
Specifications
[6] Peripheral device
[13] Output display LEDs
connecting connector [8] Model name
[7] DIN rail mounting hooks
[1] Top cover Mount the memory cassette under this cover.
When FX3U-7DM (display module) is used, replace this cover with the 5
cover supplied with FX3U-7DM.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
[2] Battery cover The battery (standard accessory) is set under this cover. When replacing
it with a new one, open this cover.
[3] Special adapter connecting When connecting the special adapter, secure it with these hooks.
hooks (2 places)
[4] Expansion board dummy cover Remove this dummy cover, and mount an expansion board. 6
Configuration
System
[5] RUN/STOP switch To stop writing (batch) of the sequence program or operation, set the
switch to STOP (slide it downward).
To start operation (run the machine), set it to RUN (slide it upward).
[6] Peripheral device connecting Connect a programming tool to program a sequence.
connector → For the details of applicable peripheral devices,
refer to Chapter 5. 7
[7] The main unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
DIN rail mounting hooks
[8] Model name (abbreviation) The model name of the main unit is indicated.
Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name.
[9] Input display LEDs (red) When an input terminal (X000 or more) is turned on, the corresponding
LED lights.
[10] Terminal block covers The covers can be opened about 90° for wiring. 8
Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running (the unit power is on).
Installation
[11] Extension device connecting Connect the extension cables of input/output powered extension unit/
connector cover block or special function unit/block to the extension device connecting
connectors under this cover.
FX2N Series extension devices and FX0N Series special extension
devices can be connected.
→ For the details of the extension devices, refer to
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
Chapter 15, Chapter 16 and Section 17.1.
10
Input Wiring
31
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 2.2 Names and Functions of Parts
[12] Operation status display LEDs The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs.
The LEDs turn off, light and flash according to the following table.
→ For the details of the operation status, refer to Section 14.5.
LED name Display color Description
POWER Green On while power is on the PLC.
RUN Green On while the PLC is running.
BATT.V Red Lights when the battery voltage drops.
Red Flashing when a program error occurs.
ERROR
Red Lights when a CPU error occurs.
[13] Output display LEDs (red) When an output terminal (Y000 or more) is turned on, the corresponding
LED lights.
When the terminal block covers are open
[16] Input (X) terminals

[14] Power supply terminal
[17] Terminal block mounting screws
L N
S/S 0V
24V
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27 [18] Terminal names
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
RUN
BATT
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES
OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
[17] Terminal block mounting screws

[15] Protective terminal covers
[19] Output (Y) terminals
[14] Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the main unit.
[15] Protective terminal A protective terminal cover (refer to the following drawing) is fitted to the lower
covers stage of each terminal block. The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals,
thereby improving the safety.
[16] Input (X) terminals Wire switches and sensors to the terminals.
[17] Terminal block If the main unit must be replaced, loosen the screws (slightly loosen the left and
mounting screws right screws), and the upper part of the terminal block can be removed. (On FX3U-
16M , the terminal block cannot be removed.)
[18] Terminal names The signal names for power supply, input and output terminals are shown.
[19] Output (Y) terminals Wire loads (contactors, solenoid valves, etc.) to be driven to the terminals.
When the display module (FX3U-7DM) is installed

[20] Display module (FX3U-7DM)
[21] Top cover (accessory to FX3U-7DM)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
RUN
BATT
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
OUT
10
0 11
1 12
2 13
3 14
4 15
5 16
6 17
7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
[20] Display module (FX3U-7DM) The display module (option) can be installed.
[21] Top cover (accessory to FX3U- A square hole is made so that the display module can be seen. Replace
7DM) the original top cover with this cover.
32
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 2.2 Names and Functions of Parts
1
2.2.2 Sides
Introduction
Left side [1] Cover of special adapter Right side
connector
[2] Cover of high-speed input/output
special adapter connector 2
Part Names
Features and
[3] Expansion board securing
screw holes
[4] Nameplate 3
[5] DIN rail mounting groove
Introduction
Product
[1] Cover of special adapter Remove this cover, and connect the 1st special adapter to the connector
connector (when the expansion board is installed).
When the expansion board is not installed, the connector is not provided. 4
[2] Cover of high-speed input/ Remove this cover, and connect the first high-speed input special adapter
Specifications
output special adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP) or high-speed output special adapter (FX3U-2HSY-
connector ADP) to the connector. When the communication/analog special adapter
is connected, this connector is not used.
[3] Expansion board securing These holes are designed to secure the expansion board with screws
screw holes (2 places) (supplied with the expansion board). The expansion board dummy cover
is fitted before shipment. Remove the dummy cover, and fit the board. 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
[4] Nameplate The product model name, control number and power supply
specifications are shown.
Example: FX3U-48MR/ES (manufacturer's serial number: 570001)
MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE
MODEL FX3U-48MR/ES
CONTROLLER
6
Configuration
System
100-240VAC 50/60Hz 40W
OUT:30VDC/240VAC 2A(COSφ=1)
SERIAL 570001
80M1 IND. CONT. EQ.

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
5 7 0 0 0 1
Control number
Month (Example: July):(1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December)
Year (Example: 2005): Last digit of year
8
Installation
[5] DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
33
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products (Compliant with Overseas Standards)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 3.1 List of Products (to be Connected) and Interpretation of Model Names
3. Introduction of Products (Compliant with Overseas Standards)
3.1 List of Products (to be Connected) and Interpretation of Model Names

The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to N in the product introduction sections
given below.
F Display modules G Expansion boards K Battery L Memory cassettes

•FX3U-7DM •FX3U-USB-BD •FX3U-CNV-BD •FX3U-32BL •FX3U-FLROM-16
•FX3U-7DM-HLD RD
SD •FX3U-232-BD •FX3U-FLROM-64
•FX3U-422-BD •FX3U-FLROM-64L
FX3U-32BL
LOT.44
············
•FX3U-485-BD
FX 3U -232ADP
FX 3U -232ADP OUT 0 IN 0
1 1
P O WE R 2 2
P OW E R
3 3
RD
RD 4 4
SD 5 5
SD
6 6
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 ・ 7
L N ・ 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN POWER POWER
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
POWER
RUN
RUN
BATT
ERROR
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
0 11
10 1 122 133 144 155 166 177 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX 3U-48M FX2N -16EYR
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 FX2N -16EX
OUT 0 IN 0
1 1
2 2
R
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
H Special adapters A Main units C Input/output extension blocks

Analog Input/output Input Output
•FX3U-4AD-ADP •FX3U-16MR/ES •FX2N-16EX-ES/UL •FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
•FX3U-4DA-ADP •FX3U-32MR/ES •FX2N-16EX •FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
•FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP •FX3U-48MR/ES •FX2N-16EX-C •FX2N-16EYR
•FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP •FX3U-64MR/ES •FX2N-16EXL-C •FX2N-16EYT
Communication •FX3U-80MR/ES •FX2N-16EYT-C
•FX2N-16EYS
•FX3U-232ADP FX Series terminal blocks can be
•FX3U-485ADP connected to connector type units.
High-speed
input/output
•FX3U-4HSX-ADP
•FX3U-2HSY-ADP
J Extension cables J Connector conversion adapter
·FX0N-30EC ·FX2N-CNV-BC
·FX0N-65EC
RUN
ERR.
MST
TEST1
TEST2
CO M X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 L R UN
L ERR.
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N -48ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N -4AD FX2N -4DA FX 2N-16CCL-M CC - L i nk
COM1 Y1 Y3 CO M2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 CO M4 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
SW E
M/S R
PRM R
TIME O
24 V 24 V LINE R
A/D D/A SD
RD
B Input/output powered D Special function blocks

extension units
Analog Positioning Communication
Input/output •FX2N-2AD •FX2N-1HC •FX2N-232IF
•FX2N-32ER-ES/UL •FX2N-2DA •FX2N-1PG(-E)
•FX2N-4AD •FX2N-10PG Network
•FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
•FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL •FX2N-4AD-TC •FX2N-32CCL
•FX2N-32ER •FX2N-4AD-PT E Special function •FX2N-16CCL-M
•FX2N-48ER •FX2N-4DA units •FX2N-64CL-M
•FX2N-5A •FX2N-16LNK-M
•FX2N-8AD Positioning
•FX2N-32ES •FX2N-32ASI-M
•FX2N-48ES •FX2N-2LC •FX2N-10GM
•FX2N-20GM To Network
•FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL •FX0N-3A •FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET
•FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
•FX2N-32ET
•FX2N-48ET
ＡＪ６５ＢＴＢ１−１６ＤＢＲＡＴＥＡＪ６５ＢＴＢ１−１６ＤＢＲＡＴＥ
０１
２
０１
２
FX-16E-TB
ＰＷＬＲＵＮＳＤＲＤＬＥＲＲ . ３ＰＷＬＲＵＮＳＤＲＤＬＥＲＲ. ３
４４
ＳＴＡＴＩＯＮＮＯ . ＳＴＡＴＩＯＮＮＯ .
０１Ｘ１０９０１Ｘ１０１Ｘ１０９０１Ｘ１
０１２３４５６７８９ＡＢＣＤＥＦ２８２０１２３４５６７８９ＡＢＣＤＥＦ２８２
３７３３７３
６５４６５４６５４６５４
● 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5
I Power supply unit

● 0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4
The configuration is remote I/O for CC-Link.

•FX2N-20PSU N Remote I/O M FX Series terminal block
34
1
3.1.1 [A] Main units
Introduction
The main unit incorporates a CPU, memory, input and output terminals and power supply.
A To establish a system, at least one main unit is necessary.
FX3U M Incorporating power supply, CPU, memory and input/output

2
Part Names
Features and
Series name
Input/output type: Connection on terminal block
Total number of input • R/ES: 24V DC (sink/source) input/relay output
and output points Main unit
: Compliance with standard or self-declaration : Partial compliance − : Not applicable

3
Number of input/output points CE
Introduction
Product
Output type
Total Number of Number of UL
Model name (connection form: Marine
number of input output EMC LVD cUL
terminal block)
points points points
AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input
16 8 8 FX3U-16MR/ES Relay − 4
32 16 16 FX3U-32MR/ES Relay −
Specifications
→ For more information for CE, UL and cUL, refer to Page 15. 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
35
3.1.2 [B] Input/output powered extension units

The input/output powered extension unit incorporates a power supply circuit and input and output terminals.
B It is designed to add input and output terminals.
It can supply power to extension devices connected on the downstream side.
Incorporating power supply
FX2N E and input/output terminals
Series name Classification 1: None: Not compliant with standard

UL:Compliant with standard
Input/output type: Connection on terminal block
• R: 24V DC (sink) input/relay output
• S: 24V DC (sink) input/triac (SSR) output
• T: 24V DC (sink) input/transistor (sink) output
Total number of • R-ES: 24V DC (sink/source) input/relay output
input and output • T-ESS: 24V DC (sink/source) input/transistor (source) output
points Input/output extension • R-UA1: 100V AC input/relay output
: Compliance with standard or self-declaration : Partial compliance − : Not applicable

Number of input/output points CE
Output type
Total Number of Number of UL
Model name (connection form: Marine
number of input output EMC LVD cUL
terminal block)
AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input
32 16 16 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL Relay
32 16 16 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL Transistor (source)
48 24 24 FX2N-48ER-ES/UL Relay
48 24 24 FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL Transistor (source)
AC power supply common to 100V AC sink and source input
48 24 24 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL Relay −
AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input
32 16 16 FX2N-32ER Relay − − − −
32 16 16 FX2N-32ES Triac − − − −
32 16 16 FX2N-32ET Transistor (sink) − − − −
48 24 24 FX2N-48ER Relay − − − −
48 24 24 FX2N-48ES Triac − − − −
48 24 24 FX2N-48ET Transistor (sink) − − − −
→ For more information for CE, UL and cUL, refer to Page 15.
36
1
3.1.3 [C] Input/output extension blocks
Introduction
The input/output extension block has built-in input or output terminals to add input or output terminals.
C
FX2N E Incorporating input or output terminals
Series name
Classification 1: None: Not compliant with standard
UL: Compliant with standard
2
Part Names
Features and
Input/output type: Connection on terminal block or with connector
• X: 24V DC (sink) input/terminal block
• X-C: 24V DC (sink) input/connector
• XL-C: 5V DC input/connector
• X-ES: 24V DC (sink/source) input/terminal block
• YR: Relay output/terminal block
• YS: Triac (SSR) output/terminal block
3
• TY: Transistor (sink) output/terminal block
Introduction
Product
Total number of
input and output • YT-C: Transistor (sink) output/connector
points • YR-ES: Relay output/terminal block
Input/output extension
• YT-ESS: Transistor (source) output/terminal block
: Compliance with standard or self-declaration : Not targeted : Partial compliance

Number of input/
4
CE
Specifications
output points
Total Number Input Connection UL
Number Model name Output type Marine
number of type form cUL
of input EMC LVD
of output
points
points points
Input extension type
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Terminal
16 16 − FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 24V DC −
block
Terminal
16 16 − FX2N-16EX 24V DC − − − − −
block
16 16 − FX2N-16EX-C 24V DC − Connector − − − −
16 16 − FX2N-16EXL-C 5V DC − Connector − − − −
6
Configuration
System
Output extension type
Terminal
16 − 16 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL − Relay
block
Transistor Terminal
16 − 16 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL −
(source) block 7
Terminal
− − − − − −
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
16 16 FX2N-16EYR Relay
block
Terminal
16 − 16 FX2N-16EYS − Triac − − − −
block
Transistor Terminal
16 − 16 FX2N-16EYT − − − − −
(sink) block 8
Transistor
− − − − − −
Installation
16 16 FX2N-16EYT-C Connector
(sink)
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
37
3.1.4 [D] [E] Special function units/blocks

For the details of each product, refer to the product manual.
1. Analog control
D Model name
Analog
Description
CE UL
Marine
Input Output EMC LVD cUL
Analog input
FX2N-2AD 2ch − Voltage/current input
FX2N-4AD 4ch − Voltage/current input
Voltage/current/temperature
FX2N-8AD 8ch − −
(thermocouple) input
Temperature (resistance
FX2N-4AD-PT 4ch −
thermometer sensor) input
Temperature (thermocouple)
FX2N-4AD-TC 4ch −
input
Analog output
FX2N-2DA − 2ch Voltage/current output
FX2N-4DA − 4ch Voltage/current output
Analog input/output mixed
FX0N-3A 2ch 1ch Voltage/current input/output − −
FX2N-5A 4ch 1ch Voltage/current input/output −
Temperature control
Temperature control (resistance
FX2N-2LC 2 loops − thermometer sensor/ −
thermocouple)
2. High-speed counter
D Model name Description
CE UL
Marine
EMC LVD cUL
FX2N-1HC 1-ch high-speed counter
3. Pulse output and positioning

CE UL
Marine
EMC LVD cUL
E Pulse output for independent 1-axis control (manual in
FX2N-1PG D − − − −
Japanese supplied) [100 kHz open collector output]
Pulse output for independent 1-axis control (manual in
FX2N-1PG-E D English supplied) [100 kHz open collector output]
Pulse output for independent 1-axis control
FX2N-10PG D − −
[1 MHz differential line driver output]
Pulse output for independent 1-axis control
FX2N-10GM E −
[200 kHz open collector output]
Pulse output for simultaneous 2-axis (independent 2-
FX2N-20GM E −
axis) control [200 kHz open collector output]
*1 1-axis programmable cam switch (manual in Japanese
FX2N-1RM-SET E − − − −
supplied)
*1 1-axis programmable cam switch (manual in English
FX2N-1RM-E-SET E −
supplied)
38
1
*1. Up to 3 units can be connected to one system. Connect them to the end of the system. For the details,
Introduction
refer to FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET Handy Manual.
Number of Number of input/output Count of number of connected special
connected units points occupied function units/blocks
1 unit
2 units 8 points 1 2
Part Names
Features and
3 units
4.Data link and communication functions


CE UL
Marine
3
EMC LVD cUL
Introduction
Product
FX2N-232IF 1-ch RS-232C no-protocol communication −
Master for CC-Link
FX2N-16CCL-M Connectable stations: Remote I/O station: 7 stations − −
Remote device station: 8 stations
FX2N-32CCL
Remote device station for CC-Link
− −
4
[1 to 4 stations occupied]
Specifications
FX2N-64CL-M Master for CC-Link/LT −
FX2N-16LNK-M Master for MELSEC I/O Link −
FX2N-32ASI-M Master for AS-i system − −
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
3.1.5 [F] Display modules and holder
F Model name Description
CE UL
Marine
EMC LVD cUL
6
Display module that can be incorporated in FX3U Series
Configuration
System
FX3U-7DM *1 − −
main unit
Holder and extension cable to fit FX3U-7DM display module
FX3U-7DM-HLD − − − −
on panel
Display module to be connected to peripheral device
FX-10DM(-SET0) − − − −
connector with cable (manual in Japanese supplied) 7
Display module to be connected to peripheral device
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
FX-10DM-E − −
connector with cable (manual in English supplied)
*1. Products manufactured in and after May, 2005 will comply with the overseas standard.
3.1.6 [G] Expansion boards 8

Installation

G Model name Description
CE UL
Marine
EMC LVD cUL
FX3U-CNV-BD Conversion of connector for fitting special adapter *1 − −
*1
9
FX3U-232-BD For RS-232C communication − −
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
For RS-422 communication

FX3U-422-BD (having the same function as that of peripheral device *1 − −
connector incorporated in main unit)
FX3U-485-BD For RS-485 communication *1 − −
FX3U-USB-BD
For USB communication *1 − −
10
(for personal computer for programming)
Input Wiring
39
3.1.7 [H] Special adapters
1.Analog functions
H Model name Description

CE UL
cUL
Marine
EMC LVD
FX3U-4AD-ADP 4-ch voltage input/current input *1 *1 −
FX3U-4DA-ADP 4-ch voltage output/current output *1 *1 −
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP 4-ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input *1 *1 −
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP 4-ch thermocouple (K, J type) temperature sensor input *1 *1 −
2.Communication functions

CE UL
cUL
Marine
EMC LVD
FX3U-232ADP RS-232C communication *1 *1 −
FX3U-485ADP RS-485 communication *1 *1 −
3.High-speed input/output functions


CE UL
Marine
EMC LVD cUL
FX3U-4HSX-ADP For differential line driver input (for high-speed counter) −
FX3U-2HSY-ADP For differential line driver output (for positioning output) −
3.1.8 [I] Power supply unit

I Model name Description
Driving power CE UL
Marine
supply EMC LVD cUL
FX2N-20PSU 24V DC power supply 100 to 240V AC −
40
1
3.1.9 [J] Extension cables and connector conversion adapter
Introduction
[K] Battery [L] Memory cassettes
J Classification Model name Description
CE UL
Marine
2
EMC LVD cUL
K
Part Names
Features and
0.65m These cables are used to mount input/output
FX0N-65EC*1 − − − −
(2’1") extension blocks for FX2N and special
L Extension 0.3m function units/blocks (except FX2N-10GM and
FX0N-30EC*1 − − − −
(0’11") FX2N-20GM) away from the main unit.
cables J
This cable is used when FX2N-10GM or
FX2N-GM-65EC
0.65m
(2’1")
FX2N-20GM is mounted at the top of the − − − − 3
extension units/blocks.
Introduction
Product
Connector Connector conversion adapter to connect input/
conversion FX2N-CNV-BC output extension blocks for FX2N and special function − − − −
adapter J blocks with model FXON-30/65EC extension cable
This battery backs up the following data.
• Program memory in built-in RAM
4
Specifications
Battery K FX3U-32BL • Keep devices (battery backup devices) − − − −
• Results of sampling trace
• Time on clock
FX3U-FLROM-
16k-step flash memory − −
16
Memory FX3U-FLROM- 5
64
64k-step flash memory *2 − −
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
cassettes L
FX3U-FLROM-
64k-step flash memory (with transfer switch) − −
64L
*1. When the extension cable (FX0N-30EC or FX0N-65EC) is used, use up to one cable for one system.
When an extension block is added, use FX2N-CNV-BC in addition to the cable.
These extension cables are unusable for FX2N-20GM and FX2N-10GM.
6
Configuration
System
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
41
3.1.10 [M] FX Series terminal blocks (cables and connectors)
1. FX Series terminal blocks

M Number
Number
of
CE
UL
Model name of input Function Marine
output EMC LVD cUL
points
points
16 input points or
FX-16E-TB − −
16 output points
32 input points, To be directly connected to the PLC
32 output points or input/output connector
FX-32E-TB − −
16 input/output
points
FX-16EX-A1-TB 16 − 100V AC input − − −
FX-16EYR-TB − 16 Relay output − − −
FX-16EYS-TB − 16 Triac output − − − −
FX-16EYT-TB − 16 Transistor output (sink) − −
FX-16EYT-H-TB − 16 Transistor output (sink) − − − −
2. Input/output cables
Model name Function
FX-16E-500CAB-S 5m(16’4") Bulk wire
FX-16E-150CAB 1.5m(4’11")
FX-16E-300CAB 3m(9’10") Flat cable (with tube). Both ends are provided with 20-pin connectors.
FX-16E-500CAB 5m(16’4")
FX-16E-150CAB-R 1.5m(4’11")
FX-16E-300CAB-R 3m(9’10") Round multicore cable. Both ends are provided with 20-pin connectors.
FX-16E-500CAB-R 5m(16’4")
FX-A32E-150CAB 1.5m(4’11") Flat cable (with tube). The end on the PLC side is provided with two 20-pin
FX-A32E-300CAB 3m(9’10") connectors, and the end on the terminal block side is provided with a
FX-A32E-500CAB 5m(16’4") exclusive connector. 1 common terminal for 32 input/output points
3. Input/output connector
Model name Function
FX2C-I/O-CON 10-piece set Input/output connector for flat cable
FX2C-I/O-CON-S 5-piece set Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.3 mm2 [AGW22]
FX2C-I/O-CON-SA 5-piece set Input/output connector for bulk wire for 0.5 mm2 [AGW20]
3.1.11 [N] Remote I/O

For the remote I/O of CC-Link, CC-Link/LT and AS-i system, refer to the manual and catalog of each master.
N
42
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication
1
3.2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication
Introduction
RS-232C/RS-422 cable
Connection cabling
Connection cabling for extention devices
Peripheral device connector
FX-232AWC-H 3
2
A 2
Part Names
Features and
1
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 ・
2
L N ・ 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27
RS-232C RS-422
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 0 21 2 2 23 2 4 25 2 6 27
IN
10 11 12 1 3 14 1 5 16 1 7
POWER
POWER
RUN
RUN
4
BATT
ERROR
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25 26 27
OUT
0 11
10 1 12
2 133 14
4 155 16
6 17
7 2 0 21 2 2 23 2 4 25 2 6 27
FX3U -48M
10 11 12 1 3 14 1 5 16 1 7
5
3 1
USB 8 FX-USB-AW
3
FX-USB-AW
MITSUBISHI
(RS-422)
RD
SD
PW
FX
B
Special adapter
Introduction
Product
FX3U-232ADP
A
6 FX 3U -232ADP
4
POW ER
RS-232C
RD
SD
4
Expansion board
Specifications
FX3U-232-BD
A
RS-232C 4 6 RD
4 SD
FX-232AWC-H
5
1
FX3U-422-BD 5
RS-232C 2 RS-422
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
7
USB 3 8 FX-USB-AW
FX-USB-AW
MITSUBISHI
(RS-422)
RD
SD
PW
FX
B
6
FX3U-USB-BD
Configuration
System
USB 3
8 RD
B
SD
Shape of connector or combination with

No. Shape of connector or combination with cable No.
cable 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Peripheral device connector [RS-422] USB A plug, 3 USB cable (supplied with
1 MINI DIN 8Pin 5 female FX-USB-AW or FX3U-USB-BD)
FX3U-232-BD D-SUB 9Pin [RS-232C]
2 Expansion board (special adapter) connector
6 FX3U-232ADP D-SUB 9Pin [RS-232C]
3
Extension device (input/output powered extension unit/
block and special function unit/block) connector 7 FX3U-422-BD MINI DIN 8Pin [RS-422] 8
Installation
2 "FX-422CAB0" + 1 "F2-232CAB-1" + FX3U-USB-BD USB MINI B plug female

D-SUB "FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H" 8 [USB2.0]
9Pin
4 FX-232CAB-1
Half pitch
2 "FX-422CAB0" + 1 "F2-232CAB-2" + 9
4 "FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H"
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
14Pin
4 FX-232CAB-2
2 "FX-422CAB0" + 1 "F2-232CAB" +
D-SUB "FX-232AW/FX-232AWC/FX-232AWC-H"
25Pin
4 F2-232CAB-1 10
Input Wiring
*1. When FX-232AW or FX-232AWC is used, the communication baud rate is 19,200 bps or less.
→ For the details, refer to section 3.2.3.
43
3.2.1 Programming tool

The following programming tool supports FX3U Series PLCs.
Model name Description
Version 8.23Z or later of SW D5C-GPPW-J and SW D5C-GPPW-E supports FX3U.
GX Developer Although the tool earlier than version 8.23Z can be used for programming by selecting
FX3U(C) or FX2N(C), restrictions will be made on programming.
→ For more information, refer to chapter 5 "Version Information and Application of Programming
Tool."
3.2.2 Communication cables

1 Model name Description
CE UL
cUL
Marine
EMC LVD
2 USB cable
3 USB MINI B plug USB A plug

For connection between personal computer and
3m
3 FX3U-USB-BD − − − −
4 USB cable (9’10")
USB cable (3m(9’10")) supplied with FX3U-USB-BD or
commercially available cable (up to 5m(16’4"))
RS-232C cable
D-SUB 25Pin D-SUB 9Pin
3m
F2-232CAB-1 1 For connection between personal computer and − − − −
(9’10")
RS-232C/RS-422 converter
3m
F2-232CAB 1 For connection between personal computer and − − − −
(9’10")
D-SUB 25Pin Half-pitch 14-pin
3m
F2-232CAB-2 1 For connection between personal computer and − − − −
(9’10")
3m
FX-232CAB-1 4 For connection between GOT-F900 Series personal − − − −
(9’10")
computer and FX3U-232-BD
D-SUB 9Pin Half-pitch14Pin
3m
FX-232CAB-2 4 For connection between GOT-F900 Series personal − − − −
(9’10")
computer and FX3U-232-BD
RS-422 cable
D-SUB 25Pin MINI DIN 8Pin
1.5m
FX-422CAB0 2 For connection between RS-232C/RS-422 converter and − − − −
(4’11")
FX3U programming port FX3U-422-BD
44
1
3.2.3 Converters and interface
Introduction
CE UL
Model name Description Marine
EMC LVD cUL
RS-232C/RS-422 Converters 2
Part Names
Features and
RS-232C/RS-422 converter (high-speed type)
FX-232AWC-H*1 Communication speed: Applicable to 9,600 to 115,000 bps .
*2 − −
FX-232AW*1 RS-232C/RS-422 converters − − − −

Communication speed: Applicable to 9,600/19,200 bps
FX-232AWC*1 (These converters are applicable only to 9,600 bps depending on − − − −
the PLC version.) 3
USB Interface
Introduction
Product
FX-USB-AW*1 USB-RS-422 converter (with 3m(9’10") USB cable) *3 − −
*1. When the programming software is not applicable to FX3U or FX3UC, the converter is applicable only
to 9,600 or 19,200 bps.
*2. Products manufactured in and after July, 2004 conform to the overseas standard. 4
*3. Products manufactured in and after August, 2004 conform to the overseas standard.
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
45
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.1 Generic Specifications
4. Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal

Layout (Main Units)
This Chapter explains the specifications, external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units.
→ For the specifications for the input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.
→ For the specifications for the input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.
4.1 Generic Specifications
Item Specification
Ambient
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating and -25 to 75°C (-4 to 158°F) when stored
temperature
Ambient
5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating
humidity
Compliant with EN 68-2-6
Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
Vibration Sweep Count for X,
When installed on 10 to 57 − 0.035 Y, Z: 10 times
resistance
DIN rail 57 to 150 4.9 − (80 min in each
direction)
When installed 10 to 57 − 0.075
directly 57 to 150 9.8 −
Shock Compliant with EN 68-2-27
resistance (147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z)
Noise By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1,000 Vp-p, noise width of 1 µs, rise time of 1 ns and period of
resistance 30 to 100 Hz
Dielectric 1.5kV AC for one minute
Compliant with JEM-1021
withstand
500V AC for one minute Between each terminals*2 and ground terminal
voltage*2
Insulation Compliant with JEM-1021
5MΩ or more by 500V DC megger
resistance*2 Between each terminals*2 and ground terminal
Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less)
Grounding
<Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed.>*1
Working
Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts
atmosphere
Working
Compliant with IEC61131-2 (<2000m)*3
altitude
*1. Ground the PLC independently or jointly.

→ Refer to Section 9.4.
PLC Another PLC Another PLC Another

equipment equipment equipment
Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding

Best condition Good condition Not allowed
*2. For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the
terminals of each product, refer to the following.
→ Refer to Subsection 4.1.1.
*3. Do not use the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure. Doing so may damage the
PLC.
46
1
4.1.1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test
Introduction
Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each
terminals and the main unit ground terminal.
Dielectric Insulation
Between terminals
strength resistance
Remarks 2
Part Names
Features and
Terminals of main unit and input/output powered extension unit/block
• Between power supply terminal and 1.5kV AC
−
ground terminal for 1 min
• Between 24V DC service power supply
500V AC for
connected to input terminal (24V DC) −
and ground terminal
1 min 3
5M Ω or
Introduction
Product
• Between input terminal (100V AC) and 1.5kV AC
more on −
500V DC
• Between output terminal (relay) and 1.5kV AC Megger −
• Between output terminal (transistor) 500V AC for Only input/output powered extension unit/
and ground terminal 1 min block 4
Specifications
• Between output terminal (triac) and 1.5kV AC Only input/output powered extension unit/
ground terminal for 1 min block
Terminals of expansion board, special adapter and special function unit/block
Since the communication line and the main
• Between terminal of expansion board
unit CPU are not insulated, it is not allowed to
(except FX3U-USB-BD and FX3U- Not allowed Not allowed
CNV-BD) and ground terminal
perform the dielectric withstand voltage test 5
and insulation resistance test between them.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Do not perform the dielectric withstand
• Between terminal of expansion board voltage test and insulation resistance test
Not allowed Not allowed
(FX3U-USB-BD) and ground terminal between the communication line and the main
unit CPU.
5M Ω or 6
• Between terminal of special adapter 500V AC for more on
−
Configuration
System
and ground terminal 1 min 500V DC
Megger
Refer to the manual for each special function
• Special function unit/block Each manual
unit/block.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
47
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.2 Power Supply Specifications
4.2 Power Supply Specifications

The specifications for the main unit power supply are explained below.
For the power (current) consumed by the special function units/blocks, refer to this manual or special function
units/blocks manual.
Specifications
Item
FX3U-16MR/ES FX3U-32MR/ES FX3U-48MR/ES FX3U-64MR/ES FX3U-80MR/ES
Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC
Allowable supply
85 to 264V AC
voltage range
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or
Allowable
less.
instantaneous
When the supply voltage is 200V AC, the time can be change to 10 to 100 ms by editing
power failure time
the user program.
Power fuse 250V AC, 3.15A 250V AC, 5A
Rush current 30 A max. 5 ms or less/100V AC, 65 A max. 5 ms or less/200V AC
Power
30 W 35 W 40 W 45 W 50 W
consumption*1
24V DC service
400 mA or less 600 mA or less
power supply*2
5V DC built-in
500 mA or less
power supply*3
*1. These power consumption values are maximum values which apply to the main unit's 24V DC service
power supply when there are input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks.
→ For input/output powered extension units/blocks power consumption information,
refer to Section 7.5.
*2. When input/output extension blocks are connected, 24V DC service power is consumed by the blocks,
and the power to be consumed by the main unit is reduced.
→ For the details of 24V DC service power supply, refer to Section 6.5.
*3. The power supply is not for external use.
The current capacity specified above is for the input/output extension blocks, special function blocks,
special adapters and expansion boards.
48
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.3 Input Specifications
1
4.3 Input Specifications
Introduction
The main unit input specifications are explained below.
4.3.1 24V DC Input (sink/source)

2
The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers. "X010 or more" means the numbers
Part Names
Features and
from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has.
(The input numbers for FX3U-16M are X000 to X007.)
→ For the details of sink input and source input, refer to Subsection 10.1.1.
Specifications
Item
3
Introduction
Product
Number of input points 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points
Fixed terminal
Input connecting type block (M3 Removable terminal block (M3 screw)
screw)
Input form sink/source
Input signal voltage 24V DC ±10%
4
Specifications
X000 to X005 3.9 kΩ
Input
X006,X007 3.3 kΩ
impedance
X010 or more − 4.3 kΩ
Input X000 to X005 6 mA / 24V DC
signal X006,X007 7 mA / 24V DC 5
current
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
X010 or more − 5 mA / 24V DC
ON input X000 to X005 3.5 mA or more
sensitivity X006,X007 4.5 mA or more
current X010 or more − 3.5 mA or more
OFF input sensitivity
1.5 mA or less 6
current
Configuration
System
Input response time Approx. 10 ms
No-voltage contact input
Input signal form Sink input: NPN open collector transistor
Source input: PNP open collector transistor
Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation 7
Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Sink input wiring Source input wiring
Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
AC100 to 240V AC100 to 240V
8
Input circuit configuration 24V 24V
Installation
*1 Input impedance 0V 0V
S/S S/S
*1 *1
X X
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
49
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.4 Output Specifications
4.4 Output Specifications

The main unit output specifications are explained below.
4.4.1 Relay output

The output numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers. "Y010 or more" means the numbers
from Y010 to the largest number that the main unit has.
(The output numbers of FX3U-16M are Y000 to Y007.)
Relay output specifications

Item
Number of output points 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points
Fixed terminal
Connecting type block (M3 Removable terminal block (M3 screw)
screw)
Output type Relay
30V DC or less or 240V AC or less
External power supply
(250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)
2 A / point
The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following
value.
Resistance → For the details of the common terminal for each model, refer to the
load terminal block layout.
Max. load • 1 output point/common terminal: 2 A or less
• 4 output points/common terminal: 8 A or less
80 VA
Inductive
→ For the approximate life, refer to Subsection 4.4.2.
load
→ For the cautions in external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.2.4.
Min. load 5V DC, 2 mA (reference value)
Open circuit leakage
−
current
OFF ON Approx. 10 ms
Response
time
ON OFF Approx. 10 ms
Circuit insulation Mechanical insulation

Display of output
LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil.
operation
Load
Y
DC power
supply
COM
Fuse
Output circuit Load
configuration Y
External
power supply
COM
Fuse
A number (1 or more) is entered in of [COM ].
50
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.4 Output Specifications
1
4.4.2 Life of relay output contact
Introduction
The standard life of the contact used for conductive AC loads, such as contactors and solenoid valves, is
500,000 times at 20 VA.
The following table shows the approximate life of the relay based on the results of our life test.
Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF 2
Part Names
Features and
Example of applicable loads
Load capacity Contact life
(Magnetic switch manufactured by our company)
0.2 A / 100V AC
20 VA 3,000,000 times S-K10 to S-K95
0.1 A / 200V AC
35 VA
0.35 A / 100V AC
1,000,000 times S-K100 to S-K150
3
0.17 A / 200V AC
Introduction
Product
0.8 A / 100V AC
80 VA 200,000 times S-K180,S-K400
0.4 A / 200V AC
If rush overcurrent is shut off even under the above condition, the life of the relay contact is considerably
decreased. 4
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
51
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.5 Performance Specifications
4.5 Performance Specifications

The performance specifications are common to FX3U Series PLCs.
Item Performance
Stored program repetitive operation system (dedicated LSI) with
Operation control system
interruption function
Batch processing system (when END instruction is executed)
Input/output control system
Input/output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided.
Programming language Relay symbol system + step-ladder system (SFC notation possible)
64000-step (2k-, 4k-, 8k-, 16k- or 32k-step memory can be selected by
parameter settings.)
Comments and file registers can be created in the program memory by
Max. memory capacity parameter settings.
• Comments: Up to 6350 points (50 points/500 steps)
• File registers: Up to 7000 points (500 points/500 steps)
64000-step RAM (backed up by built-in lithium battery)
Built-in memory
• Battery life: Approx. 5 years (guarantee for 1 year)
Program capacity/type
• With password protection function (with entry code function)
memory
Flash memory (The max. memory capacity varies depending on the
model of the memory cassette.)
Memory cassette • FX3U-FLROM-64L:64000 steps (with loader function)
(Option) • FX3U-FLROM-64: 64000 steps (without loader function)
• FX3U-FLROM-16: 16000 steps (without loader function)
Max. allowable write: 10,000 times
Writing function
Provided (Program can be modified while the PLC is running.)
during running
Real-time Built-in
Clock function
clock 2- or 4-digit year, accuracy within ±45 seconds/month at 25°C
• Sequence instructions: 27
Kinds of Basic instructions
• Step-ladder instructions: 2
instructions
Applied instructions 209 kinds, 486 instructions
Processing Basic instructions 0.065 µs/instruction
speed Applied instructions 0.642 µs to several hundred µs/instruction
(1)Extension-
combined number 248 points
of input points Total number (1) + (2) ≤ (3) total number of points is
(2)Extension- of points 256 or less.
combined number 248 points
Number of of output points
input/output
(4)Remote I/O number
points 224 points or less Either the CC-Link or AS-i master can be
of points (CC-Link)
used (the two cannot be used
(4)Remote I/O number concurrently)
248 points or less
of points (AS-i)
(3) + (4) total number
384 points or less
of points
Input relay X000 to X367 248 points The device numbers are octal.
Input/output
The total number of input and output
relay Output relay Y000 to Y367 248 points points is 256.
For general
M0 to M499 500 points
[changeable] The retentive status can be changed by
For keeping parameter settings.
M500 to M1023 524 points
[changeable]
Auxiliary relay
For keeping M1024 to
6656 points −
[fixed] M7679
M8000 to
For special 512 points −
M8511
52
Introduction
Item Performance
Initial state
(for general) S0 to S9 10 points
[changeable]
The retentive status can be changed by
For general
S10 to S499 490 points parameter settings.
[changeable] 2
For keeping
Part Names
Features and
State S500 to S899 400 points
[changeable]
For annunciator
(For keeping) S900 to S999 100 points −
[changeable]
For keeping
S1000 to S4095 3096 points −
3
[fixed]
Introduction
Product
100 ms T0 to T191 192 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
100 ms
[for subroutine/
T192 to T199 8 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
interruption
Timer (on-
subroutine] 4
10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0.01 to 327.67 sec
Specifications
delay timer)
1 ms accumulating
T246 to T249 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
type
100 ms accumulating
T250 to T255 6 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
type
1 ms T256 to T511 256 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec 5
Increment for general
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
C0 to C99 100 points Counting from 0 to 32,767
(16 bits) [changeable]
Increment for keeping
C100 to C199 100 points parameter settings.
Counter Both directions for
general (32 bits) C200 to C219 20 points Counting from -2,147,483,648 to 6
[changeable] +2,147,483,647
Configuration
System
Increment for keeping
C220 to C234 15 points parameter settings.
1-phase 1-count input
in both directions (32 C235 to C245 Counting from -2,147,483,648 to
Up to 8 +2.147,483,647
bits) [changeable]
points can The retentive status can be changed by 7
be used in parameter settings.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
High-speed
in both directions (32 C246 to C250
counter range from → For the high-speed
bits) [changeable]
C235 to counter operating
2-phase 2-count input C255. frequency, refer to the table
in both directions (32 C251 to C255 shown in the next page.
bits) [changeable]
For general (16 bits)
8
D0 to D199 200 points
Installation
[changeable] The retentive status can be changed by

For keeping (16 bits) parameter settings.
D200 to D511 312 points
[changeable]
Data register D1000 and later in 7488 points of fixed
For keeping (16 bits) D512 to D7999 7488 points
(32 bits when data register for keeping can be set as
paired)
[fixed]
<File register>
<D1000 to
D7999>
<7000
points>
file register points in 500-point units by 9
changing the parameter settings.
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
For special (16 bits) D8000 to D8511 512 points −

V0 to V7
For index (16 bits) 16 points −
Z0 to Z7
32768
Extension register (16 bits) R0 to R32767
points
Retained by battery during power failure 10
Input Wiring
ER0 to 32768 Usable only when memory cassette is

Extension file register (16 bits)
ER32767 points mounted
53
Item Performance
For branching of For CJ instructions and CALL
P0 to P4095 4096 points
JAMP and CALL instructions
Input interruption and
Pointer input delay I0 to I5 6 points
interruption −
Timer interruption I6 to I8 3 points

Counter interruption I010 to I060 6 points For HSCS instructions
Nesting For master control N0 to N7 8 points For MC instructions
16 bits -32,768 to +32,767
Decimal number (K)
32 bits -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Hexadecimal number 16 bits 0 to FFFF
(H) 32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF
Constant
Real number (E) 32 bits -1.0 x 2128 to -1.0 x 2-126,0,1.0 x 2-126 to -1.0 x 2128
Decimal-point and exponential notations are possible.
Designation by characters enclosed with " "
Character string (" ") Character string Up to 32 one-byte characters can be used for a
constant in an instruction.
Operating frequency of high-speed counter

For hardware and software counter device numbers, refer to the following section.
Input terminals (X000 to X007) High-speed input special adapter
Kind of high-speed counter
of main unit (FX3U-4HSX-ADP)
1-phase 100 kHz x 6 points, 10 kHz x 2 points 200 kHz x 8 points
Hardware counter 50 kHz (multiply by 1), 100 kHz (multiply by 1),
2-phase
50 kHz (multiply by 4) 100 kHz (multiply by 4)
1-phase 40 kHz 40 kHz
Software counter 40 kHz (multiply by 1), 40 kHz (multiply by 1),
2-phase
10 kHz (multiply by 4) 10 kHz (multiply by 4)
54
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.6 External Dimensions (Weight and Installation)
1
4.6 External Dimensions (Weight and Installation)
Introduction
The external dimensions of the main unit are explained.
4.6.1 FX3U-16MR/ES, FX3U-32MR/ES

2
Part Names
Features and
2-φ 4.5 mounting holes Unit: mm (inches)
(mounting hole pitch)

S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7
IN
0 1 2 3
3
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
4 5 6 7
POWER
RUN
Introduction
Product
BATT
ERROR
0 1 2 3
OUT
4 5 6 7
FX3U-16M
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
22 (0.87") W1 (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36") 4

W
86 (3.39")
Specifications
Series Model name W: mm (inches) W1: mm (inches) MASS (weight): kg (lbs)
FX3U-16M FX3U-16MR/ES 130 (5.12") 103 (4.06") 0.6 (1.32 lbs)
FX3U-32M FX3U-32MR/ES 150 (5.91") 123 (4.85") 0.65 (1.43 lbs)
5
1) Installation
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
• 35 mm (1.38") wide DIN rail or Direct installation (with screws) (M4 x 2))
4.6.2 FX3U-48MR/ES, FX3U-64MR/ES, FX3U-80MR/ES

6
Configuration
System
4-φ 4.5 mounting holes Unit: mm (inches)
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
22 (0.87") W1 (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")
W
86 (3.39") 8
Installation
Series Model name W: mm (inches) W1: mm (inches) MASS (weight): kg (lbs)

FX3U-48M FX3U-48MR/ES 182 (7.17") 155 (6.11") 0.85 (1.87 lbs)
FX3U-64M FX3U-64MR/ES 220 (8.67") 193 (7.6") 1.00 (2.2 lbs)
9
FX3U-80M FX3U-80MR/ES 285 (11.23") 258 (10.16") 1.20 (2.64 lbs)
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
1) Installation
• 35 mm (1.38") DIN rail or Direct installation (with screws) (M4 x 4))
10
Input Wiring
55
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 4.7 Terminal Layout and Examples of Wiring
4.7 Terminal Layout and Examples of Wiring

The terminal layout in the main unit and examples of wiring are shown below.
4.7.1 Interpretation
1. Interpretation of terminal block layout

Power supply 24V DC service
terminals power supply Input terminal [ • ] Vacant terminal (Do not use.)
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16

L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17
Output terminals
FX3U-32MR/ES (Output side terminals of FX3U-16MR/ES)
connected to COM4
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Common terminal
(4 points/common Output terminal Partition Same signal name Partition
terminal)
• Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal (COM )

One common terminal covers 1, 4 or 8 output points.
The output numbers (Y) connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines.
• Output terminals of FX3U-16MR/ES (top right figure)
One output point is connected to one common terminal. Both ends of a relay output contact are wired, and
the same signal name is shown on both sides.
2. Interpretation of wiring examples

• External wiring of power supply input terminals
Schematic drawings are given.
For the external wiring, refer to the explanation of power supply wiring stated below.
→ Refer to Chapter 9.
• Wiring of external load power supply to output terminal
When the polarity of the DC power supply is not specified, the wiring is indicated as shown below.
• Protection fuse of output circuit

For the fuse specifications, refer to the explanation of output wiring stated below.
→ Refer to Chapter 12.
56
1
4.7.2 FX3U-16MR/ES
Introduction
1. Terminal layout
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 2
Part Names
Features and
FX3U-16MR/ES
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
3
Introduction
Product
2. Examples of input wiring
1) Sink
4
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7
Specifications
2) Source
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7
3. Example of output wiring
Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y3 Y3 Y4 Y4 Y5 Y5 Y6 Y6 Y7 Y7 6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
57
4.7.3 FX3U-32MR/ES
1. Terminal layout
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17
FX3U-32MR/ES
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16

COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17

1) Sink
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17
2) Source
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17
58
1
4.7.4 FX3U-48MR/ES
Introduction
1. Terminal layout
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 2
Part Names
Features and
FX3U-48MR/ES

3
Introduction
Product
1) Sink
4
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27
Specifications
2) Source
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27
COM1 Y0 Y3 COM2 Y4 Y7 COM3 Y10 Y13 COM4 Y14 Y17 Y20 Y27 COM5 6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
59
4.7.5 FX3U-64MR/ES
1. Terminal layout
S/S 0V 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36
L N 24V 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33 X35 X37
FX3U-64MR/ES
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36 COM6
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17 COM5 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37

1) Sink
L N S/S 0V 24V 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27 X30 X37
The 0V and 24V terminals are connected internally. They can be

used without external short-circuiting.
2) Source
L N S/S 0V 24V 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27 X30 X37
The 0V and 24V terminals are connected internally. They can be

used without external short-circuiting.
COM1 Y0 Y3 COM2 Y4 Y7 COM3 Y10 Y13 COM4 Y14 Y17 COM5 Y20 Y27 Y30 Y37 COM6
60
1
4.7.6 FX3U-80MR/ES
Introduction
1. Terminal layout
terminal block 1
terminal block 2
2
S/S 0V 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16
Part Names
Features and
L N 24V 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15
X20 X22 X24 X26 X30 X32 X34 X36 X40 X42 X44 X46
X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 X31 X33 X35 X37 X41 X43 X45 X47
FX3U-80MR/ES
Y30 Y32 Y34 Y36 Y40 Y42 Y44 Y46 3
Y27 COM6 Y31 Y33 Y35 Y37 COM7 Y41 Y43 Y45 Y47
Introduction
Product
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17 COM5 Y21 Y23 Y25
terminal block 2
terminal block 1 4
Specifications
1) Sink
5
L N S/S 0V 24V 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27 X30 X37 X40 X47
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
The 0V and 24V terminals are connected internally. They can be used without
external short-circuiting.
2) Source
6
Configuration
System
L N S/S 0V 24V 0V 24V X0 X7 X10 X17 X20 X27 X30 X37 X40 X47
The 0V and 24V terminals are connected internally. They can be used without
external short-circuiting.
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
COM5 Y20 Y27 COM6 Y30 Y37 COM7 Y40 Y47
10
Input Wiring
61
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 5 Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 5.1 Version Upgrade History
5. Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade

History
5.1 Version Upgrade History
5.1.1 Version check method

In FX3U PLCs, users can obtain the PLC version information by monitoring special data register D8001
(decimal number), or the PLC version can be checked in "PLC Status" in the display module.
→ For the operating procedure of the display module, refer to
chapter 18.
D8001 2 4 2 2 0
PLC type and
version Version information (Example: Ver. 2.20)
PLC type (Example: 24 = FX2N/FX2NC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC)
5.1.2 How to look at manufacturer’s serial number

The year and month of production of the product can be checked in the control number indicated in "SERIAL"
on a label adhered on the right side seen from the front face.
Example: FX3U-48MR/ES (manufacturer's serial number: 570001)
MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
FX3U-48MR/ES
IN
0 1 2 3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Right side MODEL
POWER
POWER
100-240VAC 50/60Hz 40W

RUN
RUN
BATT
ERROR
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES
OUT:30VDC/240VAC 2A(COSφ=1)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
OUT
0 11
10 1 12
2 13
3 14
4 155 16
6 17
7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SERIAL 570001
R
80M1 IND. CONT. EQ.

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
5 7 0 0 0 1
Control number
Month (Example: July):(1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December)
Year (Example: 2005): Last digit of year
5.1.3 Version upgrade history
Manufacturer’s
Version Contents of version upgrade
serial number
55****** First product
Ver.2.20
(May, 2005) Corresponds to FX3UC PLC Ver. 2.20.
62
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 5.2 Programming Tool Applicability
1
5.2 Programming Tool Applicability
Introduction
5.2.1 Applicable versions of programming tool
GX Developer is applicable to FX3U PLCs from the following version: 2
Part Names
Features and
Model name Applicable GX
FX3U PLC FX3UC PLC
(Media model name is Developer Remarks
version version
shown below.) version
Available with Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.1.00 or later).
Ver.1.00 to Ver.8.13P or later
restrictions Model selection: FX3UC
Available with
Ver.1.30 to
GX Developer
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-J Ver.8.18U or later
Supports FX3UC PLCs (Ver.1.30 or later). 3
restrictions Model selection: FX3UC
Introduction
Product
SW D5C(F)-GPPW-E
Supports FX3U PLCs (Ver.2.20 or later).
Ver.2.20 to Ver.2.20 to Ver.8.23Z or later
Model selection: FX3U(C)
5.2.2 In the case of programming tool (version) not applicable

4
Inapplicable programming tools can programme by setting alternative model.
Specifications
1. Alternative model setting
Model to be
Model to be set Priority High → Low
programmed
FX3U PLC FX3U(C) → FX3UC → FX2N → FX2 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
2. Contents of restrictions
Even using a programming tool not applicable to the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, programming is enabled when
an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions, device ranges
and program sizes available in a PLC selected as the alternative model.
6
Configuration
System
5.2.3 Program transfer speed and programming tool
When either of the following interfaces is used for GX Developer (Ver.8.13P or later), writing and reading of
programs and monitoring of devices can be executed at high speed (115.2 kbps) in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
1. Applicable interface 7
• Standard built-in port or function extension board FX3U-422-BD for RS-422
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
When the RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX-232AWC-H or USB/RS-422 converter FX-USB-AW is connected
• Function extension board FX3U-232-BD for RS-232C
• Special adapter FX3U-232ADP for RS-232C
• Function extension board FX3U-USB-BD for USB 8
Installation
2. Communication speed setting by GX Developer

The communication speed can be set in the following position:
Select "Online" → "Transfer setup..." → "PC side I/F", and double-click the "Serial" icon.
3. In programming software not applicable to the FX3U Series

Communication is executed at 9,600 or 19,200 bps. 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
63
5.2.4 Cautions on write during RUN

In FX3U PLCs, write during RUN (program changes in the RUN mode) is enabled using the following
programming tools.
→ For the operating procedure of and cautions on write during RUN,
refer to the manual of the used programming tool.
Programming tools supporting write during RUN

Programming tool Version Remarks
Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs
Ver.2.00A or later
Ver.1.00 or later.
Ver.7.00A or later
Ver.3.00 or later.
Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3UC PLCs
GX Developer Ver.8.13P or later
Ver.1.00 or later.
Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3UC PLCs
Ver.8.18U or later
Ver.1.30 or later.
Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3U and
Ver.8.23Z or later
FX3UC PLCs Ver.2.20 or later.
Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2 PLCs
Ver.1.00 or later
Ver.3.30 or later.
FX-PCS/WIN(-E) Ver.2.00 or later
Ver.1.00 or later.
Ver.4.20 or later
Ver.3.00 or later.
Cautions on write during RUN

Item Caution
Program memories which can be written in Built-in RAM and optional memory cassette (whose write protect switch is set
RUN mode to OFF)
Number of program • GX Developer 256 steps or less after edition (addition/deletion) (including NOP immediately
steps which can be Ver.8.23Z or later after circuit blocks except final circuit)
written for circuit • GX Developer
change in RUN 127 steps or less after edition (addition/deletion) (including NOP immediately
Ver.8.22Y or former
mode after circuit blocks except final circuit)
• FX-PCS/WIN(-E)
Circuit blocks in which labels P and I are added, deleted or changed in edited
circuits
Circuit blocks in which 1-ms timers (T246 to T249 and T255 to T511) are
Circuit blocks which cannot be written in added in edited circuits
RUN mode Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits
• Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 (OUT instruction)
• SORT2 (FNC149), TBL (FNC152), RBFM (FNC278) and/or WBFM
(FNC279) instruction
64
1
Item Caution
Introduction
Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions
during execution. If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block, the
PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.
• DSZR (FNC150), DVIT (FNC151), ZRN (FNC156), PLSV (FNC157)
instruction [with acceleration/deceleration operation], DRVI (FNC158) and/
or DRVA (FNC159) instruction 2
Part Names
Features and
Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction
during execution. If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block, the
PLC immediately stops pulse output.
• PLSV (FNC157) instruction [without acceleration/deceleration operation]
Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions
during execution of communication. If write during RUN is executed to such a
circuit block, the PLC may stop communication after that.
3
If the PLC stops communication, set the PLC to the STOP mode once, and
Introduction
Product
then set it to the RUN mode again.
• IVCK (FNC270), IVDR (FNC271), IVRD (FNC272), IVWR (FNC273) and/or
IVBWR (FNC274) instruction
• Instructions for falling edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for
falling edge pulse (LDF, ANDF, or ORF instruction), the instruction for 4
falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/OFF status of
Specifications
Circuit blocks which require attention on the target device.
operation after write during RUN When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for
falling edge pulse (PLF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is
not executed without regard to the ON/OFF status of the device that is set
as the operation condition.
It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device 5
once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
pulse.
• Instructions for rising edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for
rising edge pulse, the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target
device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition
device is ON.
Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse
6
Configuration
System
operation type applied instructions (such as MOVP)
Contact ON/OFF status Instruction for Instruction for
(while write during RUN is rising edge falling edge
executed) pulse pulse
OFF Not executed Not executed
ON Executed*1 Not executed
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
*1. The PLS instruction is not executed.
When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts, coils
Others and applied instructions, the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as
the reduced number of steps.
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
65
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 5.3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series
5.3 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000

Series
When monitoring circuits, device registration, etc. or reading/writing programs in an FX3U PLC from GX
Developer Ver.8.22Y or later using the transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series, make
sure to execute the following setting.
If the following setting is not provided, a communication error occurs.
GX Developer Ver.8.21X or former GX Developer Ver8.22Y or later*1
When using transparent function by way of
Not supported (not available) Setting shown below is required.
USB in GOT1000 Series
When using transparent function by way of
RS-232 in GOT1000 Series Set "COM port" and "Transmission Select "RS-232C" in setting shown
speed" on "PC side I/F Serial setting" below, and set "COM port" and
When directly connecting GX Developer to dialog box. "Transmission speed".
PLC
*1. GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later supports the FX3U Series.
Setting in GX Developer (Ver. 8.22Y or later)
1 Select [Online] → [Transfer setup...] to open the "Transfer setup" dialog box.
2 Double-click [Serial] in [PC side I/F] to open the "PC side I/F Serial setting"
dialog box.
3 Select "USB (GOT Transparent mode)".
Double-click it.
Select "USB (GOT

transparent mode)"
4 Click the [OK] button to finish the setting.
66
User's Manual - Hardware Edition 5.4 Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series
1
5.4 Cautions on using transparent port (2-port) function of GOT-F900
Introduction
Series
When monitoring circuits, device registration, etc. in an FX3U PLC from GX Developer Ver. 8.13P or later
using the transparent (2-port) function in the GOT-F900 Series, make sure to execute the following setting.
If the following setting is not provided, monitoring cannot be executed normally. 2
Part Names
Features and
GX Developer GX Developer
Ver.8.12N or later Ver.8.13P or later GX Developer Ver.8.22Y or later*1
When using Select "RS-232C" on "PC side I/F Serial

Setting shown below is Setting shown below is
transparent function in setting" dialog box, and execute setting
required. not required.
GOT-F900 Series shown below.
When directly
Set "COM port" and "Transmission speed" on "PC
Select "RS-232C" on "PC side I/F Serial 3
connecting GX setting" dialog box, and set "COM port" and
Introduction
Product
side I/F Serial setting" dialog box.
Developer to PLC "Transmission speed."
*1. GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later supports the FX3U Series.
Setting in GX Developer (Ver.8.13P or later) 4
Specifications
1 Select [Online] → [Transfer setup...] to open the "Transfer Setup" dialog box.
2 Double-click [PLC module] in [PLC side I/F] to open the [PLC side I/F Detailed
setting of PLC module] dialog box. 5
3
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Put a check mark to the check box [via GOT-F900 transparent mode] as
shown below.
Configuration
System
Double-click it.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Put a check mark to the
check box "via GOT-F900
transparent mode."
8
Installation
4 Click the [OK] button to finish the setting.

9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
67
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.1 Configuration of Whole System
6. Examination of System Configuration
6.1 Configuration of Whole System

The configuration of the whole system is shown below.
Configuration of whole system
1 Expansion board and special adapters

2 Determination of number of extension devices to be connected to main unit
Expansion board
Main unit Extension devices for FX2N/FX0N Series
RD
SD
Output Input extension Output Special

extension block block extension block function block
Special FX3U-48MR/ES FX2N-16EYR FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL FX2N-8AD
adapters X000 to X027 − X030 to X047 − Unit No.0
FX3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -232ADP OUT 0 IN 0
1 1
2 2
POWER POWER 3 3
RD
4 4
5 5
SD
6 6
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X10 X12 X14 X16 X20 X22 X24 X26 ・ 7 7 V1+ I1+ COM1 V3+ I3+ COM3
24+
L N ・ 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 24 + 24- V2+ I2+ COM2 V4+ I 4+ COM4
24-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 POWER POWER
IN
MITSUB IS HI
I1+ V1+
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
POWER
FX 2N -8AD
COM1
RUN
V2+
BATT
POWER
COM2I2+
ERROR
ERROR
24V
FX3U-48MR/ES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 2 4 2 5 26 27
FX2N -16EYR FX2N -16EX
V3+
OUT
100 11
1 122 133 144 155 166 177 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX 3U-48M
CO M3I3+
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
V 6+ I6+ COM6 V8+ I8+ COM8
Y0 Y2 ・ Y4 Y6 ・ Y10 Y12 ・ Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 COM5 V5+ I5+ COM5 V 7+ I7+ COM7
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y11 Y13 COM4 Y15 Y17 Y21 Y23 Y25 Y27 OUT 0 IN 0
V4+
1 1
COM4I4+
2 2
3 3
4 4
R 5 5
6 6
7 7
Y000 to Y027 Y030 to Y047 − Y050 to Y067

Range of devices powered from main unit
3 Selection of extension cable

4 Determination of number of devices to be connected to extension unit Refer to this chapter.
FX2N input/output powered

Extension devices for FX2N/FX0N Series
extension unit
Input extension Special function Special function Special function
block block block block
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL FX2N-16EX-C FX2N-4AD FX2N-4DA FX2N-16CCL-M
X050 to X077 X100 to X117 Unit No.1 Unit No.2 Unit No.3
IN 0
A 1 RUN
2 ERR.
3 MST
4 TEST1
5
6
TEST2
COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 7
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 L RUN
L ERR.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER POWER POWER
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N -48ER O UT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FX2N -16EX-C
FX2N-4AD FX2N-4DA
COM1
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3 COM2
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7 COM3
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3 COM4
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
COM5
IN 0
FX2N-16CCL-M CC - L i nk
B 1
2
3
4 SW E
5 24V 24 V M/S R
6 PRM R
7 A/D D/A TIME O
LINE R
SD
RD
Y070 to Y117
Range of devices powered from FX2N input/output
powered extension unit
6 FX Series terminal block Refer to Chapter 19. 5 When CC-Link is used
ＡＪ６５ＢＴＢ１−１６ＤＢＲＡＴＥ
０１
ＡＪ６５ＢＴＢ１−１６ＤＢＲＡＴＥ
FX-16E-TB ＰＷＬＲＵＮＳＤＲＤＬＥＲＲ.

２
３
０１
２
４ＰＷＬＲＵＮＳＤＲＤＬＥＲＲ. ３
ＳＴＡＴＩＯＮＮＯ . ４
０１Ｘ１０
９０１
Ｘ１ＳＴＡＴＩＯＮＮＯ .
０１２３４５６７８９ＡＢＣＤＥＦ２８２０１Ｘ１０９０１Ｘ１
３７３２８２
６４６４０１２３４５６７８９ＡＢＣＤＥＦ
５５３７３
６５４６５４
● 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5
● 0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4
68
1
6.1.1 List of system components
Introduction
Other items to be considered
Max.
Types (extracted) number of Max. number Number of
Classification
*1 connect- of input/
input/output
5V DC
power
24V DC
power
Reference 2
able units output points (occupied)
Part Names
Features and
supply supply
points
FX3U-16MR/ES
A ... 1 unit 256 points or *6 − −
Subsection
Main unit 6.7.1
FX3U-80MR/ES less
3
D FX2N-32ER Not
Introduction
Product
256 points or *6 − −
Input/output powered FX2N-48ER specified
extension unit less
Subsection
6.7.4
D FX2N-16EX Not
256 points or *6 −
Input/output FX2N-16EYR specified
extension block less 4
FX3U-232-BD
Specifications
B FX3U-422-BD 1 unit − − −
Subsection
6.7.2
Expansion board FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-4AD-ADP Up to 4 *4
Analog − −
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP units
Commu- FX3U-232-ADP Up to 2
− − −
5
nication FX3U-485-ADP units*2
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
C High- Subsection
Special Up to 2 6.7.3
speed FX3U-4HSX-ADP − −
adapter units
input
High-
Up to 2
speed FX3U-2HSY-ADP
units
− − 6
output
Configuration
System
FX0N-3A
FX2N-2AD 256 points or *7
FX2N-2DA less
Analog
FX2N-4AD
*7 *4
FX2N-8AD
FX2N-2LC
256 points or
less
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Commu- *7 *4
FX2N-232IF 256 points or
E nication
Up to 8 less Subsection
Special
function FX2N-10PG units*2 6.7.5
Position- *7 *4
FX2N-10/20GM 256 points or
unit/block ing
FX2N-1RM-SET less 8
Installation
FX2N-64CL-M 256 points or *7 − *4

less
Network
FX2N-16CCL-M *3 −
384 points or *7 *4
FX2N-32ASI-M less 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
FX0N-30EC One of Subsection

Extension cable FX0N-65EC − − −
FX2N-GM-65EC them*5 6.7.1
*1. For the types of connectable products, refer to the following chapter.
→ For the details, refer to Chapter 3 "Introduction of products (complying with overseas standards)."
10
*2. For some products, there are restrictions on combination and number of connected units.
Input Wiring
→ For the details of the special adapters, refer to Subsection 6.4.1.

→ For the details of the special function units/blocks, refer to Subsection 6.4.2.
69
*3. When CC-Link master or AS-i master is used, the maximum number of input/output points is 384.
→ For the outline of CC-Link master, refer to Subsection 6.3.2 "Maximum number of input/output
points when CC-Link master is used."
→ For the outline of AS-i master, refer to Subsection 6.3.3 "Maximum number of input/output points
when AS-i master is used."
*4. When the special function units/blocks are externally wired to 24V DC power supply, the current
consumed by them is added to the current consumption.
*5. One extension cable can be used on a system. The cable to be used depends on the products to be
added. The extension cable must be selected carefully.
→ For the outline of the extension cable, refer to Subsection 6.4.3 "Extension cable."
*6. The number of input/output points varies depending on the type.
*7. The special function units/blocks (except FX2N-16LNK-M) occupy eight input/output points each.
→ For the details of the special function units/blocks, refer to Subsection 6.4.2.
70
1
6.1.2 System configuration with special adapters
Introduction
1. When high-speed input/output special adapters are used
When only high-speed input/output special adapters are connected, the adapters can be used without an
expansion board.
2
Part Names
Features and
Good Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter
(high-speed input) (high-speed input) (high-speed output)
Expansion board Main unit
Good Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter

(high-speed input) (high-speed input) (high-speed output)
Expansion board Main unit
3
Introduction
Product
When the board is not connected
2. When analog and communication special adapters are used

1) Analog and communication special adapters must be used with an expansion board. 4
Specifications
Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit
Good (communication) (analog)

Bad (communication) (analog) 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
The adapters do not function. When the board is not connected
2) When an expansion board (except FX3U-CNV-BD) is used, one communication special adapter is usable.
Special adapter Special adapter Expansion board Main unit 6

Good (communication) (communication) (FX3U-CNV-BD)
Configuration
System
Bad (communication) (communication) (Except FX3U-CNV-BD)
The adapters do not function.

FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-422-BD
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-USB-BD
3. When high-speed input/output, analog and communication adapters are used

When these adapters are used, connect the high-speed input/output special adapters on the left side of the 8
main unit.
Installation
The high-speed input/output special adapters cannot be connected on the downstream side of any
communication/analog special adapter.
Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Main unit
Good (communication) (analog) (high-speed output) (high-speed input)
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
Interchangeable
Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Main unit
Bad (analog) (high-speed input) (high-speed output) (communication)
10
The adapters cannot be connected in this order.
Input Wiring
71
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.2 Rules of System Configuration
6.2 Rules of System Configuration

The system configuration must meet the following three requirements.
1 Number of input/output points

The total number of input/output points and remote I/O points on CC-Link or AS-i system must be
384 points or less on the whole system.
→ For the details, refer to Section 6.3 "Number of input/output points and maximum number of input/
output points."
Number of input/output points on whole system Up to 384 points
1. Number of input/output points (including input/output occupied points) Up to 256 points
• Expansion board Input/output Special CC-Link CC-Link master

Main unit extension function
• Special adapter unit/block unit/block master or AS-i master
CC-Link/LT
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
2. Number of remote I/O points Up to 256 points*1
CC-Link or AS-i system
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station Remote I/O station
*1. Regarding the type of network, the number of remote I/O is up to 224 points in CC-Link and is up to 248 points in
AS-i.
2 Number of connected special extension devices

The numbers of connectable expansion boards, special adapters and special function units/blocks
are shown below.
→ For the details, refer to Section 6.4 "Number of connected special extension devices (including
extension cable)."
Special adapter (up to 10 units*1)
Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Special adapter Expansion Main unit
(analog) (communication) (high-speed output) (high-speed input) board
Up to 4 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 1 unit

When an expansion board other than FX3U-CNV-BD is used, up to 1 adapter can be connected.
Special function unit/block (up to 8 units)
Input/output Input/output Special function Special function

extension block powered unit block
extension unit
*1. When an expansion board other than FX3U-CNV-BD is used, up to 9 adapters can be connected.
72
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.2 Rules of System Configuration
1
3
Introduction
Calculation of current consumption
Power is supplied to each connected device from the main unit or the built-in power supply of the
input/output powered extension unit.
There two types of built power supplies; 24V DC service power and 5V DC power. The power to be con-
sumed varies depending on the type of product to be added. 2
Part Names
Features and
Extension block Input/output Extension block Input/output Extension block
Special Expansion Main unit (some blocks can powered (some blocks can powered (some blocks can
adapter board be connected) extension be connected) extension be connected)
unit (1st) unit (2nd)
Power supply Power supply Power supply from Power supply from
from main unit from main unit input/output powered input/output powered 3
extension unit (1st) extension unit (2nd)
Introduction
Product
Refer to Section 6.5. Refer to Section 6.6. Refer to Section 6.6.
→ For the details, refer to Section 6.5 "Possibility of Addition to Main Unit (Calculation of Current
Consumption)."
→ For the details, refer to Section 6.6 "Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit 4
(Calculation of Current Consumption)."
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
73
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output Points
6.3 Number of Input/Output Points and Maximum Number of Input/Output

Points
6.3.1 Calculation of number of input/output points

To obtain the total number of input/output points, count the input/output points of input/output powered
extension units/blocks and the input/output occupied points of special function units/blocks.
The number of remote I/O points on CC-Link or AS-i master network must be excluded.
1 Total the number of input/output points on the main unit and the number of
those on the input/output powered extension units/blocks.
To obtain the total number of input/output points, count the input points (X000 and more) and output
points (Y000 and more) of the main unit and input/output powered extension units/blocks.
The number of input/output points of each type of device is shown on the list below.
→ The list of numbers of input/output points is shown in Section 6.7.
2 Count the input/output points of the remote I/O stations connected on FX2N-
64CL-M or FX2N-16LNK-M network.
Add the number of remote I/O points to the number of input/output points from the main unit and
input/output powered extension units/blocks calculated in the above step.
→ For the method of calculating the number of remote I/O points, refer to the manual for each master.
3 Count the number of input/output occupied points of special function units/

blocks.
The number of occupied input/output points per unit is 8.
The number of occupied input/output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following
formula or from the list shown below.
→ For the number of occupied input/output points, refer to Section 6.7.
Number of special function Number of occupied

Number of points per unit
units/blocks input/output points
units 8 points points
Number of special
× Each special function unit/block = Total number of
occupied input/
used for FROM/TO instructions output points
funcition units/blocks occupies eight input or output
points.
Observe the following instructions when using the following products.

• FX2N-1RM(-SET)
Up to 3 units can be sequentially connected to the end of one system.
However, when three units are connected, they are counted as one unit, and the number of input/output
occupied points is 8.
• FX2N-16CCL-M(CC-Link master)
This master cannot be used together with FX2N-32ASI-M.
When more than one master station is connected, a remote I/O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and
following master stations.
• FX2N-32ASI-M(AS-i master)
This master cannot be used together with FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
74
1
4
Introduction
Calculate the total number of input/output points.
Total the number of points counted in Steps 1, 2 and 3, and check that it does not exceed 256
points (maximum number of input/output points).
Maximum number of
Number of input/output points
Number of input/output occupied 2
input/output points points
Part Names
Features and
256 points (A) + (B) + (C) (E) units × 8 points
Maximum number of ≥ + (D) + Each special function unit/block

3
points controllable on used for FROM/TO instructions
Introduction
Product
system Total number of input/output points of input/output powered occupies eight input or output
extension units and input/output extension blocks points.
(A): Number of input/output points of main unit (D): Number of remote I/O points of FX2N-64CL-M or FX2N-
(B): Number of input/output points of input/output 16LNK-M
powered extension units (E): Number of special function units/blocks
(C): Number of input/output points of input/output 4
extension blocks
Specifications
5 When CC-Link or AS-i master is used, count the remote I/O points.
When CC-Link or AS-i master is used, (the total number of input/output points of the remote I/O
stations connected on the network) and the number of input/output points calculated in the previ- 5
ous step is 384 or less.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
For the details, refer to the following subsection.
1. FX2N-16CCL-M(CC-Link master)
Calculate the number of remote I/O points connected on the network in the following step.
→ When CC-Link master is used, refer to Subsection 6.3.2. 6
Configuration
System
2. FX2N-32ASI×M(AS-i master)
Calculate the number of remote I/O points connected on the network in the following step.
→ When AS-i master is used, refer to Subsection 6.3.3.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
75
6.3.2 Maximum number of input/output points when CC-Link master is used
1. Calculation of maximum number of input/output points

When CC-Link master block is used, the following maximum number of input/output points can be connected.
Maximum number of Number of input/ Number of input/output occupied

CC-Link remote I/O
input/output points output points points
×8 × 32
384 points (A)(B)(C)(D) (E) units (F) stations
points points
Maximum number
of points
≥ Total number of + Number of points occupied by + Total number of points obtained by
formula "number of remote I/O
input/output points special function units/blocks stations × 32 points" (The number is
controllable on
multiplied by 32 points regardless of
system
the number of remote I/O points.)
For the details, refer to Subsection 6.3.1.
powered extension units (E): Number of input/output points occupied by special
(C): Number of input/output points of input/output function units/blocks
extension blocks (F): Number of remote I/O stations (units) connected to CC-
Link master
*1. When seven 32-point type remote I/O stations are used, the number of CC-Link remote I/O points
reaches the maximum number.
The number of CC-Link points is calculated by the formula "32 points × number of stations" even when
remote I/O stations having less than 32 points are used.
For the details, refer to FX2N-16CCL-M User’s Manual.
2. Procedures for calculating number of input/output points based on example of system

configuration
As to the main unit, input/output powered extension units/blocks and CC-Link remote I/O stations, the number
of input/output points and the total number of points are restricted.
X000 to X027 X030 to X057 X060 to X077 X100 to X117 − −

Input/output Input Input
Special FX2N-16CCL-M
Main unit powered extension extension
function unit
extension unit block block
Y000 to Y027 Y030 to Y057 − − − −
24/24 24/24 16/0 16/0
= 48 points = 48 points = 16 points = 16 points 8 points 8 points
CC-Link network
Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O Remote I/O
(8 points) (16 points) (32 points) (32 points) (32 points)
Number of input/output points occupied by special function units/blocks
0 points 128 144 160 224 256 384 points
Number of
Number of input/output points (128 points)
remaining points
Number of input/output points (except remote I/O points on CC-Link) + Number of
input/output occupied points
Up to 256 points
Number of
remaining 32 points × 5 units = 160 points
points
Number of CC-Link input/output points
Up to 224 points
384 points or less in total
76
1
6.3.3 Maximum number of input/output points when AS-i master is used
Introduction
1. Calculation of maximum number of input/output points
When AS-i system master block is used, the following maximum number of input/output points can be
connected.
2
Maximum number of Number of input/ Number of input/output occupied
Number of active slaves
Part Names
Features and
input/output points output points points
384 points (A)(B)(C)(D) (E) units × 8 points (F) × 8 points
Maximum number
of points
≥ Total number of + Number of points occupied by + Total number of points obtained by
formula "number of active slaves × 8
points"
3
input/output points special function units/blocks
Introduction
Product
controllable on (The number is calculated by
system multiplying by 8 points regardless of
the number of input/output points of
the active slaves.)
For the details, refer to Subsection 6.3.3.

4
Specifications
powered extension units (E): Number of input/output points occupied by special
(C): Number of input/output points of input/output function units/blocks
extension blocks (F): Number of active slaves connected to AS-i system
master block
*1. Up to 31 slaves can be connected to the AS-i system master block. 5
The maximum number is calculated by the formula "8 points × number of slaves" regardless of the
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
number of I/O points used on one slave.
For the details, refer to AS-i System User’s Manual.
2. Procedures for calculating number of input/output points based on example of system

configuration
As to the main unit, input/output powered extension units/blocks and AS-i system, the number of input/output 6
points and the total number of points are restricted.
Configuration
System
X000 to X027 X030 to X057 X060 to X077 X100 to X117 − −
Input/output Input Input
Special FX2N-32ASI-M
Main unit powered extension extension
function unit
extension unit block block
Y000 to Y027 Y030 to Y057 − − − − 7
24/24 24/24 16/0 16/0
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
= 48 points = 48 points = 16 points = 16 points 8 points 8 points
AS-i system
Repeater
Slave 5 Slave 4 Slave 3 Slave 2 Slave 1 AS-i power

(4 points) (4 points) (8 points) (8 points) (4 points) supply 8
Installation
Number of input/output points occupied by special function units/blocks
0 points 128 136 144 160 256 344 384 points
Number of
Number of input/output points (128 points)
remaining points
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
Number of input/output points (except number of input/output points on AS-i system) +

Number of input/output occupied points
Up to 256 points
8 points
Number of remaining points × 5 units
= 40 points
Number of AS-i system input/output points

10
Input Wiring
Up to 248 points (31 slaves × 8 points)

384 points or less in total
77
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices (Including Extension Cable)
6.4 Number of Connected Special Extension Devices (Including Extension

Cable)
6.4.1 Expansion board and special adapter

The number of connected special adapters is restricted depending on the type of special adapters attached
as explained below.
The number of communication special adapters is restricted depending on the combination of a
communication expansion board.
The number of special adapters other than communication adapters is restricted as shown in the following
table.
Number of connectable special adapters of each type
Type and function of expansion board to be used Communi- High-speed High-speed
Analog
cation input output
When expansion board is not used Cannot be connected. 2 unit 2 unit
When FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-485-BD or
1 unit 4 unit 2 unit 2 unit
FX3U-USB-BD is used
When FX3U-CNV-BD is used 2 unit 4 unit 2 unit 2 unit
6.4.2 Special function units/blocks

Up to eight special function units/blocks can be connected in one system.
When connecting the following products, take into consideration the combination, number of units/blocks and
connecting order.
Type Limitations
• It cannot be used together with FX2N-32ASI-M.
FX2N-16CCL-M • When some units are used, a remote I/O station cannot be connected to the second and
following master stations.
• It cannot be used together with FX2N-16CCL-M.
FX2N-32ASI-M
• Only one unit can be used on the whole system.
• Up to 3 units can be sequentially connected to the end of one system.
FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET However, when three units are connected, they are counted as one unit, and the number of
input/output occupied points is 8.
When any of these products is connected to FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit,
the current consumption is restricted.
FX0N-3A
The total current consumption of FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA must be the following
FX2N-2AD
value or less.
FX2N-2DA
- FX2N-32E :190mA or less
- FX2N-48E :300mA or less
6.4.3 Extension cable

One extension cable can be used in a system.
The type of cable varies according to the product being connected.
• FX0N-65EC
• FX0N-30EC
• FX2N-GM-65EC (for FX2N-10GM and FX2N-20GM)
78
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.5 Expansion of Main Unit (Calculation of Current Consumption)
1
6.5 Expansion of Main Unit (Calculation of Current Consumption)
Introduction
Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the main unit by the following method.
• When only input/output extension devices are added, use the quick reference matrix.
→ Refer to Subsection 6.5.1 "Quick reference matrix - when only input/output devices are added."
• When also special extension devices are added, calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total
2
Part Names
Features and
current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built-in power supply.
→ Refer to 6.5.2 "When also special extension devices are added (calculation of current
consumption)."
6.5.1 Quick reference matrix - when only input/output devices are added
3
Introduction
Product
In the following quick reference matrix, the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added
(horizontal axis) with the number of output points to be added (vertical axis) indicates the remaining power
supply capacity.
1 Select the input/output extension block (number of points) to be connected 4
Specifications
to the main unit.
Check that the number of input/output points can be added.
1. AC power supply/DC input type

1) FX3U-16MR/ES, FX3U-32MR/ES 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Output
(Example) 150 mA or less when 16 input points
40 25 and 16 output points are added
added points
Number of
AC power supply 32 100 50 0 Not allowed to add

DC input type
24 175 125 75 25
FX3U-16M 16 250 200 150 100 50 0 6
Configuration
System
FX3U-32M 8 325 275 225 175 125 75 25
0 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input
Number of added points
When a 16-input and 16-output point extension block is connected to FX3U-16/32M , the current of 24V 7
DC service power supply becomes 150 mA or less.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
2) FX3U-48MR/ES, FX3U-64MR/ES, FX3U-80MR/ES
Output
64 0 (Example) 250 mA or less when 32 input points
AC power supply 56 75 25 and 16 output points are added 8
DC input type
Installation
48 150 100 50 0
added points
Number of
FX3U-48M 40 225 175 125 75 25

FX3U-64M 32 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
FX3U-80M
24 375 325 275 225 175 125 75 25
16 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 9
8 525 475 425 375 325 275 225 175 125 75 25
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
0 600 550 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 Input
When a 32-input and 16-output point extension block is connected to FX3U-48~80M , the current of 24V 10
DC service power supply becomes 250 mA or less.
Input Wiring
79
2 Confirm the current capacity of 24V DC service power supply from the value
shown in the quick reference matrix.
This remaining power supply capacity (current) can be used as a power supply to external loads
(sensors or the like) by the user.
→ Refer to "quick reference matrix" described previously.
When special adapters and special function units/blocks are connected, it is necessary to consider
whether they can be covered by this remaining power supply capacity.
6.5.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current
consumption)
1 Select a main unit.

Select a main unit.
Select one main unit appropriate to the required number of input/output points from the following table.
Number of Capacity of built-in power supply

Input/output
Classification Type input/output 5V DC power 24V DC power
type
points [points] supply[mA] supply[mA]
A 1-1 1-2 1-3

FX3U-16MR/ES 16
400
FX3U-32MR/ES 24V DC 32
A FX3U-48MR/ES input/relay 48 500
main unit FX3U-64MR/ES output 64 600
FX3U-80MR/ES 80
When the number of input/output points is insufficient, add input/output extension blocks.
2 Enter the specifications for the selected main unit.

Enter the number of input/output points and power supply type of the main unit according to the
above table.
Number of Number of Capacity of built-in power supply

Classification connected Type input/output 5V DC power 24V DC power
units points [points] supply[mA] supply[mA]
1-1 1-2 1-3

With built-in
power A 1 FX3U-
1 supply main unit
Example of entry→ FX3U-32MR/ES 32 500 400
80
1
3
Introduction
Enter the specifications for the products to be added.
Enter the data on the input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks to be connected to the
main unit in the following table, and calculate the current.
→ For the data on the number of input/output occupied points and current consumption of each type,
2
Part Names
Features and
Calculation of current
Number of Number of input/ consumption of built-in power
Classification connected Type output (occupied) supply
units points [points] 5V DC power 24V DC power
supply[mA] supply[mA]
B
3
Introduction
Product
1 FX3U- − −
Expansion
board
FX3U- −
FX3U- −
FX3U- − 4
−
Specifications
FX3U-
C 10
FX3U- −
FX3U- −
Special adapter
FX3U- −
FX3U- − 5
FX3U- −
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
FX3U- −
FX2N- −
Enter the FX2N- −
products FX2N- −
connected to
FX2N- −
6
the main
Configuration
System
unit. D2 FX2N- −
− FX2N- −
Input/output
extension block FX2N- −
FX2N- −
FX2N- − 7
−
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
FX2N-
FX2N- −
FX0N/FX2N-
FX0N/FX2N-
E FX0N/FX2N- 8
8
Special function FX0N/FX2N-
Installation
unit/block FX0N/FX2N-
FX0N/FX2N-
G 1 FX3U-7DM
2 Display module 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
2-1 2-2 2-3

Calculate the totals.
10
Input Wiring
81
4 Determine whether the devices can be connected to the main unit.

Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected.
1. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 24V DC power supply (24V DC service
power supply).
The value obtained by this calculation (when the value is positive) indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC
service power supply, and the capacity can be used for external loads.
Capacity of 24V DC
power supply Current consumption Calculation result
Main unit Total of current consumed

by extension devices
1-3 2-3
mA
- mA
= mA
≥ 0mA
2. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 5V DC power supply.

Capacity of 5V DC

1-2 2-2
mA
- mA
= mA
≥ 0mA
If the results of calculation of current consumption of 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are
negative values, this means that the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built-in power supply.
Reexamine the system configuration adding input/output powered extension units.
82
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit (Calculation of Current Consumption)
1
6.6 Expansion of FX2N Series I/O Powered Extension Unit (Calculation of
Introduction
Current Consumption)
If the selected devices could not be connected in the previous section, select an input/output powered
extension unit.
Since input/output powered extension units have built-in input/output terminals, reexamine the input/output devices 2
connected to the main unit to ensure the required number of points.
Part Names
Features and
Range to be covered by main unit
Range exceeding power supply capacity
Input/output
Before Special Input extension Output extension Special
selection
Main unit extension
block function block block (16 points) block (16 points) function block 3
Introduction
Product
Input/output Input/output powered
After Main unit extension Special extension unit Special
selection function block function block
block (32 points)
Replaced with input/output powered 4

extension unit
Specifications
Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the input/output powered extension unit by the
following method.
• When only input/output extension devices are added, use the quick reference matrix.
→ Refer to Subsection 6.6.1 "Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added)."
• When also special extension devices are added, calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total 5
current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built-in power supply.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
→ Refer to 6.6.2 "When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current
consumption)."
6.6.1 Quick reference matrix (when only input/output devices are added)
6
In the following quick reference matrix, the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added
Configuration
System
(horizontal axis) with the number of output points to be added (vertical axis) indicates the remaining power
supply capacity.
1 Select the input/output extension block (number of points) to be connected

to the main unit. 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Check that the number of input/output points can be added.
1. AC power supply/DC input type

1) FX2N-32ER, FX2N-32ET, FX2N-32ES
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL 8
Installation
AC power supply Output

DC input type
24 25 (Example) 150 mA or less when 16 input
added points
Number of
points are added

FX2N-32E 16 100 50 0
8 175 125 75 25
0 250 200 150 100 50 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
0 8 16 24 32 Input
When a 16-input and 0-output point extension block is connected to FX2N-32E , the current of 24V DC
service power supply becomes 150 mA or less.
10
Input Wiring
83
2) FX2N-48ER, FX2N-48ET, FX2N-48ES

FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL

DC input type (Example) 110 mA or less when 32 input
48 10 points and 16 output points
are added
added points
40 85 35
Number of
FX2N-48E
32 160 110 60 10
24 235 185 135 85 35
16 310 260 210 160 110 60 10
8 385 335 285 235 185 135 85 35
0 460 410 360 310 260 210 160 110 60
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input
When a 32-input and 16-output point extension block is connected to FX2N-48E , the current of 24V DC
service power supply becomes 110 mA or less.
2. AC power supply/AC input type

1) FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
(24V DC service power supply is not provided.)

DC input type (Example) Up to 32 output points can be
48 added when 24 input points
added points
40 are added.
Number of
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
32
24
16
8
0 −
0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Input
2 Check the current capacity of 24V DC service power supply based on the
value shown in the quick reference matrix.
1. In the case of AC power supply/DC input type
The remaining power supply capacity (current) can be used as a power supply to loads (sensors or the like).
When special adapters and special function units/blocks are connected by external wiring, it is necessary to
consider whether they can be covered by the remaining power supply capacity.
2. In the case of AC power supply/AC input type

24V DC service power supply is not provided.
3 When the power supply capacity is insufficient, connect another input/output

powered extension unit.
When two input/output powered extension units or more are connected, calculate the power supply
capacities of the input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks connected to them,
and check the capacity.
84
1
6.6.2 When special extension devices are also added (calculation of current
Introduction
consumption)
1 Select an input/output powered extension unit.

2
Part Names
Features and
refer to Section 6.7
Number of Capacity of built-in power

Power Number of supply
input/output
supply Classification connected Type
points 5V DC power 24V DC power
classification units
[points] supply[mA] supply[mA] 3
3-1 3-2 3-3
Introduction
Product
D1
With built-in
Input/output − FX2N-
3 power supply
powered
extension unit 4
Specifications
Example of entry→ FX2N-48ER-ES/UL 48 690 460
2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added.

Enter the data on the input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks to be con-
nected to the input/output powered extension unit, and calculate the current. 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
refer to Section 6.7
Power Number of Number of consumption of built-in power
supply Classification connected Type input/output supply
classification units points [points] 5V DC power 24V DC power 6
Configuration
System
FX2N- −
FX2N- −
D2 FX2N- −
− FX2N- −
Input/output
FX2N- −
7
Enter the extension block
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
products FX2N- −
connected to FX2N- −
the input/
FX0N/FX2N-
output
powered FX0N/FX2N-
extension FX0N/FX2N- 8
unit. E
Installation
FX0N/FX2N-
8*1
Special function FX0N/FX2N-
unit/block FX0N/FX2N-
FX0N/FX2N-
FX0N/FX2N- 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
4-1 4-2 4-3

4 Calculate the totals.
*1. The number of connected special function units/blocks including the units/blocks connected to the
main unit must be up to 8.
10
Input Wiring
85
3 Determine whether FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA can be added.

Determine the number of analog special function blocks (FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA) to be
connected to the input/output powered extension unit by the following method.
• When connecting to FX2N-32E
Analog special function block Total current

consumption
FX0N-3A FX2N-2AD FX2N-2DA
90mA × units
+ 50mA × units
+ 85mA × units
=
mA
≤ 190mA
• When connecting to FX2N-48E
Analog special function block Total current

consumption
FX0N-3A FX2N-2AD FX2N-2DA
90mA × units
+ 50mA × units
+ 85mA × units
=
mA
≤ 300mA
4 Determine whether the devices can be added to the input/output powered

extension unit.
Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected.
power supply).
Capacity of 24V DC
Input/output powered Total of current consumed by

extension unit extension devices
3-3 4-3
mA
- mA
= mA
≥ 0mA

Capacity of 5V DC
3-2 4-2
mA
- mA
= mA
≥ 0mA
If the results of calculation of current consumption of 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are
negative values, this means that the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built-in power supply.
Reexamine the system configuration adding input/output powered extension units.
86
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.7 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption
1
6.7 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption
Introduction
The following tables show the number of input/output points or the number of input/output occupied points of
each type of device, power supply type and current consumption necessary for selection of products.
• Number of input/output points or input/output occupied points on each type of device
• Output current of 5V DC power supply and 24V DC service power supply of main unit and input/output
2
Part Names
Features and
powered extension units
• Current consumed by expansion boards, special adapters, input/output extension blocks, special function
units/blocks and display module
The current consumption is determined differently in the following cases.

3
• 5V DC and internal 24V DC are supplied to the products through the extension cable, and the current
Introduction
Product
consumption must be calculated
Subtract the consumption current of internal 24V DC from the current of 24V DC service power supply.
• External 24V DC is consumed when the power supply terminal of any of the following products is
connected to 24V DC service power supply terminal on the main unit or the input/output powered
extension unit. Include the current in the calculation of current consumption. 4
When the terminal is connected with an external power supply, the current is not included in the calculation
Specifications
of current consumption.
6.7.1 [A] Main units
A Input/output Output current (mA) 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
No. Type Number of input/
Input/output 5V DC power 24V DC service
output points
[points] supply power supply
[points]
24V DC input/relay output type
FX3U-16MR/ES 16 8/8
400 6
FX3U-32MR/ES 32 16/16
A1
Configuration
System
FX3U-48MR/ES 48 24/24 500
FX3U-64MR/ES 64 32/32 600
FX3U-80MR/ES 80 40/40
6.7.2 [B] Expansion boards

7
−: Need not be calculated
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
B No. Type
Number of input/
output occupied
Current consumed (mA)
points 5V DC Internal 24V DC
FX3U-232-BD − 20 −
FX3U-422-BD − 20*1 − 8
B1
Installation
FX3U-485-BD − 40 −
FX3U-USB-BD − 15 −
FX3U-CNV-BD − − −
*1. When FX3U-422-BD is connected, add the current consumed by GOT/programming tool F .
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
87
GOT/programming tool
F No. Type
Number of input/
output occupied
points 5V DC Internal 24V DC
FX-20P(-E) − 150*1 −
FX-10P(-E) − 120 −
FX-232AW − 220 −
FX-232AWC − 220 −
F1 FX-232AWC-H − 120 −
FX-USB-AW − 15 −
FX-10DM(-SET0)(-E) − 220 −
F920GOT-BBD5-K(-E) − 220 −
*1. When FX-20P-RWM is used, the current is 180 mA.
6.7.3 [C] Special adapters

C No. Type
Number of input/
output occupied
points 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC
FX3U-4HSX-ADP − 30 30 0
C1 FX3U-2HSY-ADP − 30 60 0
FX3U-4AD-ADP − 15 0 40
FX3U-4DA-ADP − 15 0 150
C2 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP − 15 0 50
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP − 15 0 45
FX3U-232ADP − 30 0 0
C3 FX3U-485ADP − 20 0 0
6.7.4 [D] Input/output powered extension units/blocks
1. Input/output powered extension units
D Number of input/
Output current (mA)
No. Type 5V DC power 24V DC service
output points
supply power supply
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL 32
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL 32
FX2N-32ER 32 250
FX2N-32ES 32
FX2N-32ET 32
D1 FX2N-48ER-ES/UL 48
690
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL 48
FX2N-48ER 48 460
FX2N-48ES 48
FX2N-48ET 48
88
1
2. Input/output extension blocks
Introduction
D No. Type
Number of input/ Current consumed (mA)
output points 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC
Types for addition of input
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 16 − 100 0
2
Part Names
Features and
FX2N-16EX 16 − 100 0
FX2N-16EX-C 16 − 100 0
FX2N-16EXL-C 16 − 100 0
Types for addition of output
D2 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL 16 − 150 0 3
Introduction
Product
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL 16 − 150 0
FX2N-16EYR 16 − 150 0
FX2N-16EYS 16 − 150 0
FX2N-16EYT 16 − 150 0
FX2N-16EYT-C 16 − 150 0 4
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
89
6.7.5 [E] Special extension devices
1. Special function blocks
E No. Type
Number of input/
occupied output
FX2N-2AD 8 20 50*6 0
FX2N-2DA 8 30 *6 0
85
FX2N-4AD 8 30 0 55
FX2N-4DA 8 30 0 200
FX2N-4AD-TC 8 30 0 50
FX2N-4AD-PT 8 30 0 50
FX2N-8AD 8 50 0 80
FX2N-5A 8 70 0 90
FX2N-2LC 8 70 0 55
E1 FX2N-1HC 8 90 0 0
FX2N-1PG(-E) 8 55 0 40
FX2N-10PG 8 120 0 70*1
FX2N-232IF 8 40 0 80
FX2N-16CCL-M 8*2 0 0 150
FX2N-32CCL 8 130 0 50
Supplied from power supply for CC-
FX2N-64CL-M 8*3 190
Link/LT
FX2N-16LNK-M 0*4 200 0 90
FX2N-32ASI-M *5 150 0 70
8
E2 FX0N-3A 8 30 90*6 0
*1. When the voltage of the external DC power supply is 24V DC and 5V DC, the current is 70 mA and
100 mA, respectively.
*2. This block cannot be used together with FX2N-32ASI-M.
The following number of points is added according to the products connected on the network.
Number of remote I/O stations × 32 points
*3. The following number of points is added according to the products connected on the network.
Total number of input/output points of remote I/O stations
*4. The number of points varies according to the products connected on the network.
For the details, refer to FX2N-16LNK-M Manual.
*5. This block cannot be used together with FX2N-16CCL-M. Only one unit can be added on the whole
system.
The following number of points is added according to the products connected on the network.
Number of active slaves × 8 points
*6. When analog special function blocks (FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA) are connected to the input/
output powered extension unit (FX2N-32E or FX2N-48E ), the following limitation must be taken into
consideration. (When the blocks are connected to the main unit, this limitation is not applied.)
The total current consumption of the analog special function blocks (FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-
2DA) should be less than the following current value.
- Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N-32E : 190 mA or less
- Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N-48E : 300 mA or less
90
1
2. Special function units
Introduction
E No. Type
Number of input/
occupied output
FX2N-10GM 8 − − 5
2
E3 FX2N-20GM 8 − − 10
Part Names
Features and
FX2N-1RM(-SET)(-E) 8 − − 5
6.7.6 [G] Display module

3
Introduction
Product
G No. Type
Number of input/
occupied output
G1 FX3U-7DM − 20 0 0
4
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
91
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 6.8 Example of System Configuration and System Modification
6.8 Example of System Configuration and System Modification
The procedures for evaluating the suitability of the system configuration are explained using an
example system configuration consisting of an expansion board, special adapters, input/output
powered extension units/blocks and special function blocks.
6.8.1 Example system configuration

The system configuration is examined using the following example.
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX3U-48MR/ES
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
FX3U-
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-485-ADP
232-BD
FX2N-1HC
Extension cable
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-CNV-BC
FX2N-64CL-M
CC-Link To CC-Link
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-16CCL-M
FX2N-10PG
master station
FX2N-2LC
CC-Link/LT CC-Link
4 input Power Remote Remote I/O Remote

supply device device
points adapter station station station
8 output
points
4 input
points
92
1
6.8.2 Expansion of main unit
Introduction
The suitability of the above system configuration is evaluated as shown below.
1 Enter the specifications for the main unit.

2
Capacity of built-in power
Part Names
Features and
Number of Number of supply
Classification connected Type input/output 24V DC service
units points [points] 5V DC power
power
supply[mA]
supply[mA]
1-1 1-2 1-3 3
Introduction
Product
With built-in
power A 1 FX3U-48MR/ES 48 500 600
supply Main unit
2 Enter the specifications for the products to be connected to the main unit.
4
Specifications
Number of consumption of built-in
Number of
input/output power supply
Classification connected Type
(occupied)
units
points [points] 5V DC power 24V DC power
B 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
1 FX3U-232-BD − 20 0
Expansion
board
FX3U-4HSX-ADP − 30 30
FX3U-2HSY-ADP − 30 60
C 6
FX3U-2HSY-ADP − 30 60 6
FX3U-485ADP − 20 0
Configuration
System
Special adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP − 15 0
Enter the FX3U-4AD-ADP − 15 0
products
connected to FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 16 − 100
the main unit. D2 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL 16 − 150 7
4
Input/output FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 16 − 100
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
extension block FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL 16 − 150
FX2N-1HC 8 90 0
FX2N-10PG 8 120 0
E FX2N-2LC 8 70 0
Special function
6
FX2N-64CL-M 8+16*1 190 0
8
Installation
unit/block
FX2N-16CCL-M 8 0 0
FX2N-32CCL 8 130 0
2-1 2-2 2-3

Calculate the totals. 128 760 650
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
*1. The number for FX2N-64CL-M is calculated by adding the number of input/output points at the
connected remote I/O station to 8 points.
10
Input Wiring
93
3 Calculate the number of input/output points.

Calculate the number of input/output points on the whole system.
1. Calculate the number of input/output points of the main unit and extension devices.
Total input/output points Calculation result Max. number of

Main unit input/output points
of extension devices
OK
1-1 2-1 A
48 points + 128 points = 176 points ≤ 256 points
2. Calculate the number of remote I/O points on the network.

Since this system uses CC-Link, calculate the number of the remote I/O stations.
Input/output on network Calculation result Max. number of

input/output points
Number of CC-Link
remote I/O stations
1 station × 32 points =
B
32 points ≤ 224 points OK
FX2N-16CCL-M: up to 7 stations
3. Calculate the total number of input/output occupied points (number of input/output points).
Total number of input/output points Calculation Max. number of

result input/output points
Number of input/output
Input/output on network
occupied points
A
176 points +
B
32 points = 208 points ≤ 384 points OK
Total obtained in Step 1 Total obtained in Step 2
94
1
4
Introduction
Determine whether the devices can be added to the main unit.
Calculate the current consumption to confirm whether the extension devices selected in the above
step can be connected.
4. Calculate the current consumption of the built-in 5V DC power supply. 2
Part Names
Features and
Capacity of 5V DC

1-2
500mA -
2-2
760mA = -260mA NG 3
Introduction
Product
power supply).
Capacity of 24V DC
4
Specifications
1-3
600mA -
2-3
650mA = -50mA NG 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Since the calculated values of the current consumption of the 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies
are negative, it is necessary to reexamine the configuration.
The next subsection explains the procedures for evaluating the reexamined and modified configu-
ration.
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
95
6.8.3 Re-examination of suitability for configuration
When the main unit is short of 5V DC or 24V DC current, use an input/output powered extension
unit.
Reexamine the above system configuration using an input/output powered extension unit.
Example of reexamined system configuration
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX3U-48MR/ES
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
FX3U-
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX3U-485-ADP
FX2N-1HC
232-BD
FX2N-64CL-M Extension cable

FX2N-CNV-
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-16CCL-M
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-
CC-Link
FX2N-2LC
To CC-Link
BC
32ER
master station
-ES/UL
CC-Link/LT CC-Link
4 input Power Remote Remote I/O Remote

supply device device
points adapter station station station
8 output
points
4 input
points
96
Introduction
1 Enter the specifications for the main unit.
Number of Number of supply
Classification connected Type input/output
units points [points] 5V DC power
24V DC service
power
2
supply[mA]
Part Names
Features and
supply[mA]
1-1 1-2 1-3

With built-in
power A 1 FX3U-48MR/ES 48 500 600
supply Main unit 3
Introduction
Product
2 Enter the specifications for the products to be added to the main unit.
Number of consumption of built-in
Number of power supply
input/output
Classification connected
units
Type
(occupied) Internal 24V 4
points [points] 5V DC power
Specifications
DC power
supply[mA]
supply[mA]
B
1 FX3U-232-BD − 20 0
Expansion
board
FX3U-4HSX-ADP − 30 30
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
C 6
FX3U-485ADP − 20 0
Enter the Special adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP − 15 0
products
connected to FX3U-4AD-ADP − 15 0 6
the main unit.
Configuration
System
−
D2 FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 16 100
2
Input/output
extension block FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL 16 − 150
FX2N-1HC 8 90 0
E 7
2
Special function
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
unit/block FX2N-10PG 8 120 0
2-1 2-2 2-3

Calculate the totals. 48 370 400 8
Installation
3 Enter the specifications for the input/output powered extension unit.

Power Number of Number of supply
supply Classification connected Type input/output 24V DC
classification units points [points] 5V DC power
supply[mA]
service power 9
supply[mA]
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
3-1 3-2 3-3
D1
With built-in
Input/output 1 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL 32 690 250
power supply
powered
10
Input Wiring
extension unit
97
4 Enter the specifications for the products to be added to the input/output pow-
ered extension unit.
Number of consumption of built-in power
Number of supply
input/output
Classification connected Type
occupied Internal 24V
units 5V DC power
points [points] DC power
supply[mA]
supply[mA]
Enter the FX2N-2LC 8 70 0
products
connected to E FX2N-64CL-M 8+16*1 190 0
the Input/ 4
Special function FX2N-16CCL-M 8 0 0
output
unit/block
powered
extension unit FX2N-32CCL 8 130 0
4-1 4-2 4-3

Calculate the totals 48 390 0
*1. The number for FX2N-64CL-M is calculated by adding the number of input/output points at the
connected remote I/O station to 8 points.
5 Calculate the number of input/output points.

Calculate the number of input/output points on the whole system.
1. Calculate the number of input/output points of the main unit and extension devices.

Total input/output points Input/output powered Total input/output points
Main unit
of extension devices extension unit of extension devices
1-1 2-1 3-1 4-1
48 points + 48 points + 32 points + 48 points
Calculation result Max. number of

input/output points
= A
2. Calculate the number of remote I/O points on the network.
Since this system uses CC-Link, calculate the number of the remote I/O stations.
Input/output on network Calculation result Max. number of

input/output points
Number of CC-Link
remote I/O stations
1 station × 32 points =
B
FX2N-16CCL-M: up to 7 stations
98
1
3. Calculate the total number of input/output occupied points (number of input/output points).
Introduction
Total number of input/output points Calculation Max. number of
result input/output points
Number of input/output
Input/output on network
occupied points
2
A
176 points +
B
32 points = 208 points ≤ 384 points OK
Part Names
Features and
Total obtained in Step 1 Total obtained in Step 2
6 Determine whether the devices can be added to the main unit.

3
Introduction
Product
Calculate the current by the following formula to confirm whether the extension devices selected in
Step 2 can be connected.

4
Capacity of 5V DC
Specifications
Main unit Total of current consumed by

extension devices
1-2
500mA -
2-2
370mA = 130mA ≥ 0mA OK 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
power supply).
6
Configuration
System
Capacity of 24V DC
Main unit Total of current consumed by

extension devices
1-3
600mA -
2-3
400mA = 200mA ≥ 0mA OK 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
99
7 Determine whether the devices can be connected to the input/output pow-

ered extension unit.
Calculate the current by the following formula to confirm whether the extension devices selected in
Step 4 can be connected.
Capacity of 5V DC
3-2
690mA -
4-2
390mA = 300mA ≥ 0mA OK
power supply).
service power supply, and the capacity can be used for external loads
Capacity of 24V DC
3-3
250mA -
4-3
0mA = 250mA ≥ 0mA OK
8 Verify the evaluation results.
Since the capacities of the 5V DC and 24V DC power supplies and the number of input/output
points are within the specified ranges, the reexamined system configuration is feasible.
100
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y) and Unit Numbers
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)
Introduction
7. Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y) and Unit
Numbers
2
Part Names
Features and
7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)
If input/output powered extension units/blocks have been connected when power is turned on, the main unit
automatically assigns the input/output numbers (X/Y) (octal) to the units/blocks. 3
Therefore, it is unnecessary to specify the input/output numbers with parameters.
Introduction
Product
Input/output numbers are not assigned to special function units/blocks.
Input/output numbers are assigned to the special function blocks FX2N-64CL-M and FX2N-16LNK-M.
7.1.1 Concept of assigning

When power is turned on, input/output numbers (X/Y) are assigned in accordance with the following rules. 4
For special function blocks, such as FX2N-64CL-M and FX2N-16LNK-M, that assign input/output numbers to
Specifications
connected remote I/O stations, refer to the manual for each block.
1. Input/output numbers (X/Y) are octal.

Octal numbers are assigned as input/output numbers (X/Y) as shown below.
- X000 to X007, X010 to X017, X020 to X027......, X070 to X077, X100 to 107... 5
- Y000 to Y007, Y010 to Y017, Y020 to Y027......, Y070 to Y077, Y100 to Y107...
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
2. Numbers for added input/output unit/block
To an added input/output powered extension unit/block, input numbers and output numbers following the
input numbers and output numbers given to the preceding device are assigned.
The last digit of the assigned numbers must begin with 0.
For example, when the last number on the preceding device is Y103, the output numbers are assigned to the
6
Configuration
System
next device starting from Y110.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
101
7.1.2 Example of assigning

An example of assignment of input/output numbers (X/Y) is shown below.
1. Example of configuration
Special Input extension Output Special
Expansion
adapter Main unit block extension block function
board
FX3U-4AD- FX3U-64MR/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYT block
FX3U-232-BD
ADP -ES/UL -ESS/UL FX2N-4AD
Input/output
Input extension Special Special function Output extension
powered extension
block function block block block
unit
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-10PG FX2N-64CL-M FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
Station Station Station

No.1 No.2 No.3
4 input 4 input 4 input
CL1X4-D1B2 CL1XY4-DT1B2 CL1XY4-DT1B2
2. Assignment of input/output numbers

Input/output numbers are assigned to the above example configuration as shown below.
− − X000 to X037 X040 to X057 −
Special Input extension Output Special
Expansion
adapter Main unit block extension block function
board
FX3U-4AD- FX3U-64MR/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYT- block
FX3U-232-BD
ADP -ES/UL ESS/UL FX2N-4AD
Y000 to Y037 Y040 to Y057
The input numbers are carried from 70s to 100s.
X060 to X077 X100 to X117 − X120 to X127

Input/output Input extension Output extension
powered block Special Special function block
extension unit function block block
FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYR
FX2N-32ET FX2N-10PG FX2N-64CL-M
-ESS/UL -ES/UL -ES/UL
Y060 to Y077 Y100 to Y103 Y110 to Y127
The output numbers are carried

from 70s to 100s.
No.1 No.2 No.3
X120 to X123 X124, X125 X126, X127
Y100, Y101 Y102, Y103
102
1
7.1.3 Application of I/O number label
Introduction
The input/output powered extension units/blocks come with an I/O number label.
Apply the I/O number label to spaces on the enclosure (see the following figure) so that the input/output
numbers can be identified.
2
Part Names
Features and
For X050
I/O NUMBER
LABEL
JY818D25401B
60
10
X0
L N
20 2 3 4 5 6 7
30 50
2 3 4 5 6 7
3
40 40
Introduction
Product
2 3 4 5 6 7
50 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y0
60
70
100
110 For Y040 4
Specifications
120
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
103
User’s Manual - Hardwaer Edition 7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units/Blocks
7.2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Units/Blocks
7.2.1 Concept of assigning

When power is turned on, the main unit (CPU) automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function
units/blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit.
Unit numbers are not given to input/output powered extension units/blocks.
1. special function units/blocks connected to main unit

The numbers 0 to 7 are assigned to the special function units/blocks starting from the one closest to the main
unit.
2. FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET
Up to three FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET can be sequentially connected to the end of one system.
All these connected units have the same number as the unit number of the first unit (FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET).
→ For FX2N-1RM, refer to FX2N-1RM-SET Handy Manual.
3. Products to which unit numbers are not assigned

• Input/output powered extension units: FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL, etc.
• Input/output extension blocks: FX2N-16EX-ES/UL, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL, etc.
• special function block: FX2N-16LNK-M
• Connector conversion adapter: FX2N-CNV-BC
• Expansion boards: FX3U-232-BD, etc.
• Special adapters: FX3U-232ADP, etc.
104
1
7.2.2 Example of assigning
Introduction
Unit numbers are assigned to the special function units/blocks in the following configuration.
→ For the assignment of input/output numbers, refer to Section 7.1.
Input/output Input/output Special

Special adapter
Expansion
board
Main unit extension block extension block function 2
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-64MR/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYT block
Part Names
Features and
FX3U-232-BD
-ES/UL -ESS/UL FX2N-4AD
Input/output
Special Special Special Special
powered extension
function block function block function unit function unit
unit
FX2N-10PG FX2N-64CL-M FX2N-1RM FX2N-1RM
3
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
Introduction
Product
No.1 No.2 No.3
points points points 4
Specifications
Unit numbers are assigned to the special function units/blocks in the above configuration as shown below.
Unit No.
No.0
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Input/output Input/output Special
Expansion
Special adapter Main unit extension block extension block function
board
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-64MR/ES FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EYT block
FX3U-232-BD
-ES/UL -ESS/UL FX2N-4AD
Unit No. Unit No. Unit No. Unit No.

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.3 6
Configuration
System
Input/output
Special Special Special Special
powered extension
function block function block function unit function unit
unit
FX2N-10PG FX2N-64CL-M FX2N-1RM FX2N-1RM
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
No.1 No.2 No.3
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
105
7.2.3 Application of unit number labels

The special function units/blocks come with unit number labels.
Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure (see the following figure) so that the unit numbers
can be identified.
Y818D33101
No.0
No.1
No.2 RUN
ERR.
MST
TEST1
TEST2
No.3 L RUN
L ERR.
No.4 POWER POWER
No.5
No.6 FX2N-4AD No.0 FX 2N-16CCL-M No.1 CC - L i nk

SW E
No.7 M/S
PRM
R
R
TIME O
LINE R
24V
SD
A/D RD
106
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
Introduction
8. Installation In Enclosure
2
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
Part Names
Features and
• Provide a safety circuit on the outside of the PLC so that the whole system operates to ensure the safety even
when external power supply trouble or PLC failure occurs.
Otherwise, malfunctions or output failures may result in an accident.
1) An emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements, such as normal
and reverse rotations, and an interlock circuit for preventing damage to the machine at the upper and lower
3
Introduction
Product
positioning limits should be configured on the outside of the PLC.
2) When the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all outputs are
turned off. When an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output control block,
output control may be disabled.
Design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe operations of the machine in such a case.
3) The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/ 4
presence of extension blocks. If overload is applied, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the PLC are
Specifications
disabled, and all outputs are turned off.
4) When some sort of error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor of the output unit, output may be kept on or off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe
operations of the machine in such cases.
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Do not bundle the control line together with the main circuit or power line. Do not lay the control line near them.As
a rule, lay the control line at least 100mm(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
Noise may cause malfunctions. 6
• Install in a manner which prevents excessive force from being applied to the connectors for peripheral device
Configuration
System
connections.
Failure to do so may result in wire breakage or failure of the PLC.
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
107
INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
• Use the product in the environment within the generic specifications described in section 4.1 of this manual.
Never use the product in areas with dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or
NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or wind and rain.
If the product is used in such a place described, electrical shock, fire, malfunctions, damage, or deterioration may
be caused.
• Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly, thus avoiding failure or malfunctions.
• Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM, and terminal block DIN rail only
Main unit, FX2N Series I/O extension unit/block, and FX0N/FX2N
DIN rail or direct mounting
Series special extension block/special adapter
• Install the product on a flat surface.

If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
• Make sure to fix the function extension board with tapping screws for fixation.
Tightening torque: 0.3 to 0.6 N•m
Contact failures may cause malfunctions.
• When drilling screw holes or wiring, cutting chips or wire chips should not enter ventilation slits. such an accident
may cause fire, failures or malfunctions.
• Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC's ventilation port when the installation work is completed.
Failure to do so could cause fires, equipment failures, and malfunctions.
• Fit the extension cables, peripheral device connecting cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable
securely to the designated connectors.
• Fit the display module, memory cassette, and function extension board securely to the designated connectors.
• Before attaching or detaching the following devices, turn off power.
Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module , expansion boards and special adapters
- Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal block
- Battery and memory cassette
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will be
burnt out.
• Cut off all phases of the power source externally before installation or wiring work in order to avoid electric shock
or damage of product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory to the product before turning on the power or
starting the operation after installation or wiring work.
108
Introduction
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Do not supply power to the [24+] and [24V] terminals (24V DC service power supply) in the main unit and
extension units from the outside.
Such power supply may cause damages to the product. 2
• Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) to the grounding terminal in the main unit and
Part Names
Features and
extension units with a 2mm2 or thicker wire.
Do not connect the grounding terminal at the same point as a heavy electrical system (refer to section 9.4).
• Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual.
burnt out.
• Do not wire vacant terminals externally. 3
Doing so may damage the product.
Introduction
Product
• Perform wiring properly to the FX0N/FX2N Series extension equipment of the terminal block type in accordance
with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, short-circuit, wire breakage, or damages to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual. 4
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 to 0.8 N•m.
Specifications
• Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board. Ignorance of the following items may
cause electric shock, short circuit, disconnection, or damage of the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
- Do not connect electric wires of unspecified size or beyond the specified number of electric wires.
- Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed.
• Properly perform wiring to the FX Series terminal blocks following the precautions below in order to prevent
electrical shock, short-circuit, breakage of wire, or damage to the product:
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. 6
Configuration
System
This chapter explains the procedures for installing the PLC in enclosure.
The procedures for wiring the input and output terminals are described in the following chapters.
• Installation location and layout in enclosure
• Procedures for connecting extension devices
• Procedures for power supply wiring 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
109
8.1 Generic Specifications
Item Specification
Ambient
0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) when operating and -25 to 75°C (-4 to 158°F) when stored
temperature
Ambient
5 to 95%RH (no condensation) when operating
humidity
Complies with EN 68-2-6
Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude
(Hz) (m/s2) (mm)
Vibration Sweep Count for X,
When installed on 10 to 57 − 0.035 Y, Z: 10 times
resistance
DIN rail 57 to 150 4.9 − (80 min in each
direction)
When installed 10 to 57 − 0.075
directly 57 to 150 9.8 −
Shock Complies with EN 68-2-27
resistance (147 m/s2 Acceleration, Action time: 11ms, 3 times by half-sine pulse in each direction X, Y, and Z)
Noise By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1,000 Vp-p, noise width of 1 µs, rise time of 1 ns and period of
resistance 30 to 100 Hz
Dielectric 1.5kV AC for one minute
Complying with JEM-1021
withstand
500V AC for one minute Between each terminals and ground terminal
voltage*2
Insulation Complying with JEM-1021
5MΩ or more by 500V DC megger
resistance*2 Between each terminals and ground terminal
Class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less) <Common grounding with a heavy
Grounding
electrical system is not allowed.>*1
Working
Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts
atmosphere
Working
Complies with IEC61131-2 (<2000m)*3
altitude
*1. Ground the PLC independently or jointly.



Best condition Good condition Not allowed
*2. For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the
terminals of each product, refer to the following subsection.
→ Refer to Subsection 4.1.1.
*3. Do not use the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure. Doing so may damage the
PLC.
110
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.2 Installation location
1
8.2 Installation location
Introduction
Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications (Section 8.1).
Notes
• Keep a space of 50 mm (1.97") away between the unit main body and other devices and structure.
Install the unit as far away as possible from high-voltage lines, high-voltage devices and power equipment.
2
Part Names
Features and
• To prevent temperature rise, do not install the PLC on a floor or a ceiling or in the vertical direction.
Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below.
• Arrange the extension cable in such a way that the left connectors of the input/output powered extension units/
blocks or special function units/blocks are connected on the side closer to the main unit.
8.2.1 Installation location in enclosure 3
Introduction
Product
4
Specifications
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
111
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.2 Installation location
8.2.2 Spaces in enclosure

Extension devices can be connected on the left and right sides of the main unit of the PLC.
If you intend to add extension devices in the future, keep necessary spaces on the left and right sides.
1. Configuration without extension cable
FX2N-16EYT
FX2N-16EX
A FX3U Series A
-ESS/UL
-ES/UL
main unit
A
A ≥ 50mm (1.97")
2. Configuration in 2 stages with extension cable
A
equipment
Another
A
FX2N-16EYR
FX3U-4AD-ADP
FX2N-16EYT
FX2N-16EX
A
FX2N-4AD
FX3U Series
-ESS/UL
-ES/UL
-ES/UL
main unit
A
Extension cable
·FX0N-65EC
FX2N-CNV-
·FX0N-30EC
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-16EX
Input/output
FX2N-8AD
BC
powered
-ES/UL
A extension unit A
Another
A equipment
Another equipment
A ≥ 50mm (1.97")
112
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.3 Layout in Enclosure
1
8.3 Layout in Enclosure
Introduction
The PLC components can be laid out in one stage or in two stages, upper and lower. The connecting
procedures in each case are explained below.
8.3.1 1-stage layout 2
Part Names
Features and
Input/output powered extension units/blocks
Special adapter Special function units/blocks
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
A Input/output A 3
block
block
block
block
FX3U Series
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 main unit powered
Introduction
Product
extension units
Up to 10 units (approx. For the dimensions of each product, refer to the

18 mm(0.71") x number of units) external dimensions diagram.
A ≥ 50mm (1.97") 4
Specifications
8.3.2 2-stage layout
In the case of a 2-stage layout, connect the first stage and the second stage with the extension cable.
When an extension block is connected at the top of the second stage, FX2N-CNV-BC (connector conversion 5
box) is necessary.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
1. When an input/output powered extension unit is connected at the top of the 2nd stage
Input/output powered extension
Special adapter units/blocks
Special function units/blocks
6
Extension
Extension
Extension
A
block
block
block
FX3U Series
Configuration
System
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
main unit
Up to 10 units (approx. 18mm For the dimensions of each product, refer to the
(0.71") x number of units) external dimensions diagram.
A 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Input/output A
block
block
block
block
powered
extension
units*1
Extension cable
•FX0N-65EC (650mm (25.59"))
8
For the dimensions of each product, refer to the
Installation
•FX0N-30EC (300mm (11.81")) external dimensions diagram.
*1 Including FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET A ≥ 50mm (1.97")

In this case, however, only an FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET can be
connected at the subsequent stage.
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
113
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.3 Layout in Enclosure
2. When an input/output extension block or a special function block is connected at the top of
the 2nd stage
Extension
Extension
Extension
A
block
block
block
FX3U Series
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 main unit
Up to 10 units (approx. 18mm For the dimensions of each product,

(0.71") x number of units) refer to the external dimensions diagram.
A
FX2N-CNV-BC
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Input/output A
block*1
block
block
block
powered
extension units
Extension cable
•FX0N-65EC (650mm (25.59")) For the dimensions of each product, refer to the
•FX0N-30EC (300mm (11.81")) external dimensions diagram.
*1 Except FX2N-8AD A ≥ 50mm (1.97")
3. When a special function block (FX2N-10GM/20GM) is connected at the 2nd stage

→ Refer to previous page for FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET information.

Extension
Extension
Extension
A
block
block
block
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FX3U Series
main unit
Up to 10 units (approx. 18mm For the dimensions of each product, refer to the
(0.71") x number of units) external dimensions diagram.
A
Extension
Extension
Extension
A
block
block
block
FX2N-10GM
FX2N-20GM
Extension cable
•FX2N-GM-65EC (650mm) For the dimensions of each product, refer
to the external dimensions diagram.
114
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure
1
8.4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure
Introduction
Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions (generic
specifications).
8.4.1 Installing methods 2
Part Names
Features and
The PLC can be installed by the following two methods.
1. Installing on DIN rail

• The PLC can be installed on a DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).
• The PLC can be easily moved and removed. 3
Introduction
Product
• The PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail.
→ For the details of the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail, refer to Section 8.5.
2. Direct installing (with screws)

• The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws.
→ For the mounting hole pitch, refer to Section 8.6. 4
Specifications
8.4.2 Cautions in examining installing method
1. Cautions when FX2N-8AD is used 5

When the system is laid out in two stages, do not mount FX2N-8AD at the top of the second stage, or FX2N-
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
CNV-BC cannot be installed directly.
2. Cautions when FX2N-10GM or FX2N-20GM is used

FX2N-10GM and FX2N-20GM can be installed only on the DIN rail.
They cannot be installed directly in the enclosure.
6
Configuration
System
8.4.3 Examples of installation
As shown in the following example, when the main unit is installed on the DIN rail, the extension devices
connected with the extension cable can be installed directly in the enclosure.
1. Example of installation on DIN rail 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")
FX3U Series FX2N- FX2N-

main unit 16EX- 16EYT-
ES/UL ESS/UL
8
DIN rail
Installation
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08") Extension cable
*1 •FX0N-65EC
FX2N-CNV-BC •FX0N-30EC
FX2N-
16EX- FX2N- DIN rail 9
ES/UL 10PG
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
(+ indicates an M4 screw.)
*1. FX2N-CNV-BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail.
10
Input Wiring
115
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.4 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure
2. Example of direct installation

1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")

ES/UL ESS/UL
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
FX2N-CNV-BC Extension cable
•FX0N-65EC
FX2N- •FX0N-30EC
16EX- FX2N-
ES/UL 10PG
3. Example of combination of installation on DIN rail and direct installation

1 to 2mm (0.04" to 0.08")

ES/UL ESS/UL
DIN rail
1 to 2mm
(0.04" to 0.08")
*1
Extension cable
FX2N-CNV-BC •FX0N-65EC
FX2N- •FX0N-30EC
16EX- FX2N-
ES/UL 10PG
*1. FX2N-CNV-BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail.
116
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail
1
8.5 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail
Introduction
The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).
8.5.1 Preparation for installation

2
Part Names
Features and
1. Connecting extension devices
Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure.
• Mount the expansion board and special adapters on the main unit before installing it in the enclosure.
• Mount the input/output powered extension units/blocks and the special function units/blocks in the
enclosure after installing the main unit in the enclosure. 3
Introduction
Product
• The memory cassette and the display module can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed.
• The battery can be replaced with a new one in the state where the main unit is in the enclosure.
→ For the replacement procedures, refer to Subsection 14.4.4.
2. Affixing The Dust Proof Sheet

The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work. 4
→ For the affixing procedure, refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet.
Specifications
Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
117
8.5.2 Installation of main unit

The main unit must be installed before installing a expansion board or special adapter on the enclosure.
→ For the connection procedure, refer to Subsections 8.7.2, 8.7.3, and 9.5.2.
1 Connect the expansion board and special adapters to the main unit.
→ For the connecting procedures, refer to Subsection 9.5.2.
2 Push out all DIN rail mounting hooks (A in

the right figure).
2 A 2
3 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting C
groove (C in the right figure) onto the DIN

rail.
2 2
4 Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks (D in the

figure) while pressing the PLC against the
DIN rail.
D D
4 4
118
1
8.5.3 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function unit/
Introduction
block
1 Push out the DIN rail mounting hook (A in the right fig- Rear panel Rear panel
2
ure) of the input/output extension block.
Part Names
Features and
• For an input/output powered extension unit or a special function unit/block, 1
this step is unnecessary.
A
3
Introduction
Product
2 Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove (B in
the right figure) onto the DIN rail.
3 Push the product against the DIN rail.

B
4
Specifications
• Keep a gap of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between the products.
3
4 Connect the extension cable.

→ For the procedures on connecting the extension cable, refer to Subsection 8.7.4.
5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
8.5.4 Removal of main unit
1 Open the terminal block covers, and B 6
Configuration
System
remove the protective terminal covers (A
in the right figure). L N
S/S 0V
24V
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
IN
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
2 Gradually loosen the left and right termi- FX3U-48MR/ES

OUT
ERROR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
RUN
BATT
7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
FX3U-48M
nal block mounting screws (B in the right

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
figure), and remove the terminal blocks.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
R
• The terminal block cannot be removed from the FX3U- B

16M main unit. A
3 Disconnect the extension cables and the connecting cables (including

8
expansion board and special adapters).
Installation
4 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the

hole of the DIN rail mounting hook (C in the right
figure).
• This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special 9
adapters.
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
D 6
5 Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the

right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting
hooks of all devices. 10
C 5
6
Input Wiring
Remove the product from the DIN rail (D in the 4
right figure).
119
7 Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks (E in the

right figure).
• For FX0N/FX2N Series input/output extension blocks and FX0N/

FX2N Series special function blocks, this step is unnecessary.
7 E 7
120
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.6 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)
1
8.6 Procedures for Installing Directly (with M4 Screws)
Introduction
The product can be installed directly in the enclosure (with screws).
Point
2
Position the holes so that there is a gap of 1 to 2 mm (0.04" to 0.08") between the products.
Part Names
Features and
8.6.1 Hole pitches for direct mounting
The product mounting hole pitches are shown below.
For the pitch that varies depending on the product, refer to the table. 3
Introduction
Product
1. Main unit (A or B)
22 5 Unit: mm (inches)
(0.87") W1 (0.2")
Mounting hole
Model name
pitch (W1)
FX3U-16MR/ES 103 (4.06")
4
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
Specifications
A FX3U-32MR/ES 123 (4.85")
FX3U-48MR/ES 155 (6.11")
B FX3U-64MR/ES 193 (7.6")
FX3U-80MR/ES 258 (10.16")
22 5
(0.87") W1 (0.2") 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
Configuration
System
2. Special adapter (C)
2.5 15.1 Unit: mm (inches)

(0.1") (0.6")
Mounting hole
7
Model name
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
pitch(W1)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
105 (4.14")
FX3U-4DA-ADP
98 (3.86")
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP
C FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP Refer to the
C
FX3U-232ADP figure shown left. 8
FX3U-485ADP
Installation
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
121
3. Input/output powered extension unit (D or E)
5 5 Unit: mm (inches)
(0.2") W1 (0.2")
Mounting hole
Model name
pitch(W1)
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
D D FX2N-32ER 140 (5.52")
FX2N-32ET
FX2N-32ES
5 FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
5
(0.2") W1 (0.2") FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
172 (6.78")
E FX2N-48ER
FX2N-48ET
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL 210 (8.27")
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
E
4. Input/output extension block (F)
Unit: mm (inches)
20 20 Model name
Mounting hole
(0.87") (0.87") pitch (W1)
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
FX2N-16EX
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
FX2N-16EX-C
F FX2N-16EXL-C
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL Refer to the
F
FX2N-16EYR figure shown left.
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
FX2N-16EYT
FX2N-16EYT-C
FX2N-16EYS
122
1
5. Special function unit/block (G, H or I)
Introduction
Unit: mm (inches)
Mounting hole
4 4 75 4 Model name
(0.16") W1 (0.16") (2.96") (0.16") pitch(W1)
FX0N-3A 2
FX2N-2AD
Part Names
Features and
80 (3.15")
FX2N-2DA
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
90 (3.55")
FX2N-1PG
G H FX2N-1PG-E 39 (1.54")
FX2N-10PG
FX2N-64CL-M
FX2N-32CCL
3
FX2N-16LNK-M
Introduction
Product
4 4
(0.16") W1 (0.16")
G FX2N-4AD
FX2N-4DA
FX2N-4AD-PT
FX2N-4AD-TC
105 (4.14")
4
98 (3.86")
FX2N-5A
I FX2N-2LC 51 (2.01")
Specifications
FX2N-1HC
FX2N-1RM-SET
FX2N-1RM-SET-E
FX2N-232IF
FX2N-32ASI-M
H FX2N-16CCL-M
Refer to the 5
figure shown left.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
FX2N-8AD 67 (2’64")
I
FX2N-20PSU 52 (2’05")
These units can-
FX2N-10GM
− not be installed
FX2N-20GM
directly. 6
Configuration
System
8.6.2 Example of mounting hole pitches
37.1 27 26 45 67 11
(1.47") 155 (6.11") (1.07") (1.03") (1.78") (2.64") (0.44") 140 (5.52") Unit:mm (inches)
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
80 (3.15")
98 (3.86")
C B F G I D
8
Installation
2* 2* 2*
FX3U-48MR/ES (0.08") (0.08") (0.08") 2 * (0.08") FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
FX3U-232ADP FX2N-16EX-ES/UL FX2N-2AD FX2N-8AD
* The gap between products is 2 mm (0.08").

9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
123
8.6.3 Installation of main unit

Mount the expansion board and special adapters on the main unit before installing the unit in the enclosure.
→ For the connection procedure, refer to Subsections 8.7.2, 8.7.3, and 9.5.2.
1 Make mounting holes in the mounting sur-

face according to the external dimensions
diagram.
B
2 Fit the main unit (A in the right figure)
based on the holes, and secure it with M4
screws (B in the right figure).
The positions and number of screws depend on the
product. Refer to the external dimensions diagram.
→ For the external dimensions, refer to Section 4.6.
8.6.4 Installation of input/output powered extension unit/block and special function unit/
block
1 Make mounting holes in the mounting sur- Rear panel Rear panel
face according to the external dimensions

diagram
2 Push in the DIN rail mounting hook (A in

the right figure) of the input/output exten-
sion block.
If the DIN rail mounting hook is not pushed in, the
A
screw hole is covered, and the block cannot be
1
mounted.
For input/output powered extension units and special
function units/blocks, this operation is unnecessary.
3 Fit the input/output extension block (B in

the right figure) based on the holes, and
secure it with M4 screws (C in the right fig-
ure).
FX
3U
-48
M
The positions and number of screws depend on the

IN 0
1
10 2
11 3
12 4
13 5
14 6
15 7
16 20
17 21
22
23
product. Refer to the external dimensions diagram.

24
25
OU 26
T PO 27
PO
WER
WER
0
1 RURU
10 2 N N
11 3
12 4 BA BA
13 5 TT TT
14 6
→ For the external dimensions of the input/output

15 7 ERER
20 RORO
16 R R
17 21
22
23
24
25
26
27
powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.

C
→ For the external dimensions of the input/output
extension block, see Chapter 16.
→ For the external dimensions of the special function
units/blocks, see Chapter 17. B
124
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 8.7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices
1
8.7 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices
Introduction
This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices.
8.7.1 Connection of extension devices

2
The connecting method varies depending on the combination of the products, i.e. the main unit, expansion
Part Names
Features and
board, special adapters, input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks.
The connecting methods are explained with the following configuration examples.
Example of configuration
Special Expansion FX2N Series input/output FX0N/X2N Series special 3

adapter board extension blocks function blocks
Introduction
Product
FX3U Series
main unit
4
Specifications
Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting method D
method B method A method C
FX2N Series FX2N Series input/output FX2N Series special function units
extension block powered extension unit
Extension cable 5
•FX0N-65EC
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
•FX0N-30EC
FX2N- FX2N Series
CNV- Input/output powered
BC extension unit
Connecting Connecting Connecting Connecting method D 6

method E method F method G
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
125
8.7.2 Connecting method A - connection of expansion board

To connect an expansion board to the main unit in the enclosure, it is necessary to remove the main unit from
the enclosure.
→ Refer to Subsection 8.5.4 for the "removal from DIN rail" procedure.
→ Refer to Section 8.6 for the "direct mounting" removal procedure.
1 Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into

the part A of the expansion board com-
partment dummy cover (B in the right fig-
ure) on the left side of the main unit, and
slightly lift the dummy cover.
B
• Put the main unit on the edge of a desk or so to insert the
screwdriver.
Caution
Take care not to damage the wiring board and electronic A
components with the screwdriver.
1
2 Remove the expansion board compart-

ment dummy cover (B in the right figure).
3 Hold the expansion board (C in the right

figure) parallel to the main unit, and fit the
board to the expansion board connector.
4 Secure the expansion board (C in the right

figure) on the main unit with the supplied
M3 tapping screws (D in the right figure). 2
• Tightening torque: 0.3 to 0.6 N•m
4
D
C 3
D
126
1
8.7.3 Connecting method B - connection of special adapter
Introduction
When an expansion board is used, connect the board as stated in the previous subsection before connecting
the special adapter.
When a high-speed input/output special adapter is used, fit the adapter before connecting other special
adapters. 2
1
Part Names
Features and
Remove the special adapter connector cover (A 25
26
27
24
23
in the right figure) from the expansion board.

22
R
E
W
21
N
P
U
20
TT
27
A
7
B
17
R
26
O
16
R
25
R
E
15 24
4
14 23
3
13 22
2
12 21
1
11 20
0
10
IN
7
17
6
16
5
15
4
14
3
13
2
12
1
11
T
0
U
10
O
• When fitting a high-speed input/output special adapter, also FX3U-4
FX3 M
U-488M
remove the high-speed input/output special adapter connector 2 FX

M
-48 FX3U-4
8M
R/E
S
3U
cover (C in the right figure).
Introduction
Product
N
U
R
P
TO
S
• When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has B 1
been connected to the expansion board, read "expansion board" 2
as "special adapter." A
C
2 Slide the special adapter connecting hooks (B in B
4
Specifications
the right figure) of the main unit.
• When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the main unit, read "main
unit" as "special adapter." (This applies to the following steps.)
5
3 Connect the special adapter (C in
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
the right figure) to the main unit as
shown in the right figure.
B
4 Slide the special adapter connecting
C
4
6
hooks (B in the right figure) of the
Configuration
System
main unit to secure the special 3 4
adapter (C in the right figure).
3
3
B
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8.7.4 Connecting method C - connection of powered extension unit/block to main unit
The procedures for connecting an powered extension unit/block to the main unit are explained below.
1 Remove the extension device connector cover A

8
(A in the right figure) on the right side of the
Installation
main unit. 3
1
B
2 Connect the extension cable (B in the right fig-
ure) from the extension block to be connected
(right side) to the extension device connector 9
of the main unit.
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
• When connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension

unit, FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM or FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET, connect
the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (main unit) 10
with the supplied extension cable.
Input Wiring
3 Fit the extension device connector cover (A in the right figure).
127
8.7.5 Connecting method D - connection of powered extension units/blocks

This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/
blocks or FX0N/FX2N Series special function units/blocks.
B
1 Remove the top cover (B in the right figure) of
1 3
the existing unit/block (left side) (A in the right
C
figure).
A
• When connecting FX2N-10GM or FX2N-20GM, remove the
PLC extension block connector cover.
• When connecting FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET, remove the top cover of
FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET.
2 Connect the extension cable (C in the above figure) of the block to be con-
nected (right side) to the existing unit/block (A in the above figure).
• When FX2N Series input/output powered extension units, FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM or FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET
units are connected, connect the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (left side) with the
supplied extension cable.
3 Fit the top cover (B in the above figure) (except when connecting FX2N-10GM
or FX2N-20GM).
128
1
8.7.6 Connecting method E - connection of extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC
Introduction
This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N-CNV-BC to the
extension cable of the powered extension unit/block.
1 Separate the case of FX2N-CNV-BC into two 2

pairs as shown right.
Part Names
Features and
To separate the case, use a precision flathead screw-
B
driver. A
Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A
shown in the right figure, and the hook (B in the right fig- A 3
ure) will come off (4 places). A
Introduction
Product
1
A
1
2 Connect the extension cable on the upstream
side (C in the right figure). 4 4
4
Specifications
E
3 Connect the extension cable on the down-
stream side (D in the right figure).
C
4 Fit the upper cover (E in the right figure) and FXON-30EC
2
3
5
the lower cover (F in the right figure), and FXON-65EC
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
press down the upper cover until it is D
hooked.
F
Configuration
System
8.7.7 Connecting method F - connection of input/output powered extension unit
This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input/output powered extension unit.
1 Remove the top cover (A in the right figure) 7

on the left side of the input/output powered
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
extension unit.
A 2N
FX
-32
ET
2 Connect the connector of the extension cable

1
8
(supplied) (B in the right figure) to the exten- B
Installation
sion connector. 4
3 Connect the connector of the extension cable 9

(supplied) (B in the right figure) to the exten-
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
sion connector of the unit to be added (right

side).
4 Fit the top cover (A in the right figure).

10
Input Wiring
129
8.7.8 Connecting method G - connection of extension block to input/output powered

extension unit
This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input/output extension block to an input/output
powered extension unit.
1 Remove the extension connector cover (A in A

the right figure) on the right side of the input/
output powered extension unit. B
FX 0
IN
2N 0 1
-32 1 2
3
ET 2
3 4
5
4 6
5 7
0 6
O
U
0 1 7
T
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
7
2
6
2
7
Connect the extension cable (B in the right

figure) from the extension block to be added
(right side) to the extension connector of the
input/output powered extension unit.
• When connecting FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM or FX2N-1RM(-E)-

SET, read "input/output powered extension unit" as the unit.
• When connecting FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit, FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM or FX2N-
1RM(-E)-SET, connect the unit to be added (right side) and the existing unit (main unit) with the supplied
extension cable or the optional extension cable.
- For FX2N Series input/output powered extension unit or FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET, the extension cable FX0N-
30EC or FX0N-65EC can be used.
- For FX2N-10GM or FX2N-20GM, the extension cable FX2N-GM-65EC can be used.
3 Fit the extension connector cover (A in the right figure).
130
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures
Introduction
9. Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring
Procedures
2
Part Names
Features and
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
3
Introduction
Product
output control may be disabled. 4
Specifications
3) The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
6
Configuration
System
Noise may cause malfunctions.
connections.
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
131
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Such power supply may cause damages to the product.
burnt out.
• Do not wire vacant terminals externally.
• Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board. Ignorance of the following items
may cause electric shock, short circuit, disconnection, or damage of the product.
This chapter explains the procedures for wiring, cabling and wiring the power supply.
The input/output wiring procedures are stated in the following chapter.
• Wiring procedures
• Procedures for connecting cables to various shapes of power supply and input/output terminals
• Procedures for the wiring power supply
132
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 9.1 Preparation for Wiring
1
9.1 Preparation for Wiring
Introduction
9.1.1 Wiring procedures
Before starting the wiring work, make sure that the main power is off. 2
Part Names
Features and
1 Prepare the parts for wiring.
Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring.
→ For details, refer to Section 9.2.
3
2
Introduction
Product
Wire the power supply terminals L and N.
Connect the power supply to the terminals.
Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection.
→ For details, refer to Section 9.5. 4
Specifications
3 Wire the ground terminal [ ] at a grounding resistance of 100Ω or less
(Class D).
Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal.
→ For details, refer to Section 9.4 and Section 9.5. 5
4
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Wire the input [X] terminals.
For a type (24V DC input type) common to sink/source input, select sink or source input by the
following connection.
• For sink input, connect the 24V and S/S terminals. 6
• For source input, connect the 0V and S/S terminals.
Configuration
System
Connect sensors and switches to the terminals.
→ For details, refer to Chapter 10.
5 Wire the output [Y] terminals. 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
Connect loads to the terminals.
→ For details, refer to Chapter 12.
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
133
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures
9.2 Cable Connecting Procedures

For cable connection, a terminal block or a connector is used. The cable connecting procedures are
explained below.
9.2.1 Input/output terminal block (power supply and input/output wiring)
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
For the main unit, FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/blocks and FX0N/FX2N Series special
function units/blocks, an M3 or M3.5 screw terminal block is used.
1. Applicable products
Product type Model name
Main unit All models of FX3U Series main units
Input/output powered extension unit All models of FX2N Series input/output powered extension units
All models of FX2N Series input/output extension blocks
Input/output extension block
(except FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C and FX2N-16EYT-C)
Special function unit/block Refer to the manual for each special function unit/block.
FX Series terminal block All models
Power supply unit FX2N-20PSU
2. Terminal block screw size

The size of the terminal screws for each product is shown below. For the solderless terminals, refer to the
following page.
Product Terminal screw Tightening torque
Main unit
FX2N Series input/output powered extension
units M3
FX2N Series input/output extension blocks 0.5 to 0.8N•m
FX2N Series special function unit/block*1
FX Series terminal block M3.5
*1. M3.5 screws may be used for terminals.

For the details, refer to the manual for each special extension device.
134
1
3. Wire end treatment
Introduction
The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method.
- Use solderless terminals of the following size.
- Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0.5 N•m to 0.8 N•m.
In the case of M3 terminal screw 2

Main unit, input/output powered extension unit/block and special function unit/block
Part Names
Features and
• When one wire is connected to one terminal
Terminal Crimp
φ 3.2(0.13") screw terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less 3
Introduction
Product
φ 3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24") Terminal
or less
• When two wires are connected to one terminal

4
φ 3.2(0.13")
Specifications
6.2mm(0.24") Terminal Crimp
or less screw terminal
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
φ 3.2(0.13") 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
or less 6.3mm(0.25")
or more
In the case of M3.5 terminal screw 6

FX Series terminal block, FX2N-20PSU
Configuration
System
• When one wire is connected to one terminal
Terminal Crimp
6.8mm(0.27")
or less 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
φ 3.7(0.15")
or less
• When two wires are connected to one terminal

8
φ 3.7(0.15")
Installation

6.0mm(0.24")
or more
φ 3.7(0.15") 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
or more
10
Input Wiring
135
9.2.2 Input/output connectors (FX2N input/output extension blocks)

The input/output connectors of FX2N Series input/output extension blocks (connector type) and special
function units/blocks conform to MIL-C-83503.
Prepare the input/output cables, referring to the following tables.
Classification Model names
Input/output extension blocks FX2N-16EX-C, FX2N-16EXL-C, FX2N-16EYT-C
Special function units/blocks FX2N-10PG, FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM
2. Preparation of input/output connectors

1) Compliant connectors (commercially available connectors)
Use 20-pin (1-key) sockets conforming to MIL-C-83503.
In advance, make sure that no interference is caused with peripheral parts, such as the connector cover.
2) Input/output cables (our options)
Input/output cables with attached connectors are available.
Model names Length Description Shape
A 20-pin connector is fitted
FX-16E-500CAB-S 5m(10’4") General-purpose input/output cable only to one end of bulk wire.
(Wire color: red)
FX-16E-150CAB 1.5m(4’11") Cables for connecting FX Series terminal
Flat cables (with tube) with a
FX-16E-300CAB 3m(9’10") block and input/output connector
For the connection with FX Series terminal 20-pin connector at both ends
FX-16E-500CAB 5m(10’4") block, refer to the following section.
FX-16E-150CAB-R 1.5m(4’11") → Chapter 19 "Specifications
FX-16E-300CAB-R 3m(9’10") for FX Series Terminal Blocks Round multicore cables with a
and Examples of External 20-pin connector at both ends
FX-16E-500CAB-R 5m(10’4") Wiring"
FX-A32E-150CAB 1.5m(4’11") Flat cables (with tube) that
have two 20-pin connectors in
Cables for connecting A Series Model
FX-A32E-300CAB 3m(9’10") 16-point units on the PLC side
A6TBXY36 connector/terminal block
and a dedicated connector on
conversion unit and input/output connector
the terminal block side. One
FX-A32E-500CAB 5m(10’4") type common terminal covers 32
input/output terminals.
3) Connectors for making input/output cables by users (our options)

The users should prepare the electric wires and pressure bonding tool.
Applicable electric wire (UL-1061 are
Model name and composition of input/output connector
recommended) and tool
Details of part Pressure bonding tool
Our model name Electric wire size
(made by DDK Ltd.) (made by DDK Ltd.)
FX2C-I/O-CON for Solderless connector FRC2- AWG28 (0.1mm2), 357J-4674D: Main body
10-piece set
flat cable A020-30S 1.27 pitch, 20-core 357J-4664N: Attachment
FX2C-I/O-CON-S Housing HU-200S2-001 2
5-piece set 357J-5538
for bulk wire Solderless contact HU-411S AWG22 (0.3mm )
FX2C-I/O-CON-SA Housing HU-200S2-001 2
5-piece set 357J-13963
for bulk wire Solderless contact HU-411SA AWG20 (0.5mm )
136
1
4) Certified connectors (commercially available connectors)
Introduction
Connectors made by DDK Ltd. shown in Item (3) described in the previous page and connectors made by
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. shown in the following table
Compliant electric wires
Model name of connector Pressure bonding tool
(UL-1061 is recommended)
Housing AXW1204A 2
AWG22 (0.3mm2)
Part Names
Features and
Contact AXW7221 AXY52000
AWG24 (0.2mm2)
Semi-cover AXW62001A
9.2.3 Terminal block (for europe) [expansion board and special adapters]
3
Introduction
Product
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Observe the following items to wire the lines to the European terminal board. Ignorance of the following items may 4
cause electric shock, short circuit, disconnection, or damage of the product.
Specifications
- Fix the electric wires so that the terminal block and connected parts of electric wires are not directly stressed. 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
The expansion board and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for Europe.
Classification Model names
Expansion Board FX3U-485-BD 6
FX3U-485ADP, FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP,
Configuration
System
Special Adapters
FX3U-4HSX-ADP, FX3U-2HSY-ADP
2. Electric wires
Compliant electric wires and tightening torque

7
Electric wire size Tightening
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
End treatment
(stranded wire/solid wire) torque
2 2
One electric wire 0.3mm to 0.5mm • Remove the coating of the stranded wire, twist
(AWG22 to 20) the core wires, and connect the wires directly.
Two electric • Remove the coating from the solid wire, and
0.3mm2 (AWG22) connect the wire directly.
wires
0.22 to 0.25N•m • Bar terminal with insulating sleeve
8
2 2
0.3 mm to 0.5 mm
Installation
(recommended product)
Bar terminal with (AWG22 to 20)
(Refer to the following AI 0.5-8WH (Phoenix Contact)
insulating sleeve
outline drawing of bar • Caulking tool
terminal.) CRIMPFOX UD6 (Phoenix Contact)
3. Treatment of electric wire ends 9

Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve.
• Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating
• Stranded wire/solid wire
- Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not
stick out.
9mm 10
(0.36")
Input Wiring
137
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 9.3 Power Supply Specifications
• Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve • Bar terminal with insulating sleeve
It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve
Insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath. Select the Contact portion
electric wire referring to the outline drawing.
Manufacturer Model names Caulking tool 8mm
Phoenix Contact AI 0.5-8WH CRIMPFOX UD6 2.6mm (0.32")
(0.11") 14mm(0.56")
4. Tool
• For tightening the terminal, use a commercially available small
screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as
shown right. With
straight tip
Manufacturer Model names
Phoenix Contact SZS 0.4 x 2.5 0.4mm 2.5mm
(0.02") (0.1")

The specifications for power supply input to the main unit are explained below.
For the power consumption by the special function units/blocks, refer to this manual or the manual of each
product.
Specifications
Item
Allowable supply voltage
85 to 264V AC
range
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or
Allowable instantaneous less.
power failure time When the supply voltage is 200V AC, the time can be changed to 10 to 100 ms by editing
the user program.
Power fuse 250V AC 3.15A 250V AC 5A
30 A max. 5 ms or less/100V AC
Rush current
65 A max. 5 ms or less/200V AC
Power consumption*1 30W 35W 40W 45W 50W
24V DC service power
400 mA or less 600 mA or less
supply*2
5V DC built-in power
500 mA or less
supply*3
*1. These power consumption values are maximum values which apply to the main unit's 24V DC service
power supply when there are input/output extension blocks and special function units/blocks.
→ For input/output powered extension units/blocks power consumption information,
*2. When input/output extension blocks are connected, 24V DC service power is consumed by the blocks,
and the power to be consumed by the main unit is reduced.
→ For the details of the service power supply 24V DC, refer to Section 6.5.
*3. The power supply is not for external use.
The current capacity specified above is for the input/output extension blocks, special function blocks,
special adapters and expansion boards.
138
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 9.4 Grounding
1
9.4 Grounding
Introduction
Ground the PLC as stated below.
• Perform class D grounding. (Grounding resistance: 100Ω or less)
• Ground the PLC independently if possible. 2
If it cannot be grounded independently, ground it jointly as shown below.
Part Names
Features and

Best condition Good condition Not allowed 3
Introduction
Product
Extension devices of PLC (except expansion board and special communication/high-speed input/output
adapter)
PLC
Special Expansion Input/output Special Another
adapter board
Main unit
extension unit extension equipment
4
Specifications
Independent grounding
Class D grounding
(grounding resistance : 100Ω or less)
5
2
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
• Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 (2 mm ).
• Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire.
Configuration
System
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
139
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 9.5 Examples of External Wiring
9.5 Examples of External Wiring
9.5.1 Example of input/output wiring with 24V DC service power supply

24V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads.
However, the power consumed by extension devices should be subtracted from the 24V DC service power,
and the remainder can be used as power for loads.
AC power supply of
100 to 240V
Power on
PL
MC
MC
Emergency
In the case of sink input wiring stop
Main unit *1
L
Class D
grounding
N
MC MC
S/S
0V 0V
24V Power supply for loads
24V
connected to sequencer
output terminals
X0
As for the details of
X1 emergency stop, see
"DESIGN
PRECAUTIONS" at PL
field.
X7
Input
In the case of source input wiring
impedance
S/S
0V 0V
COM1
24V 24V
Y0 Fuse
Y1
Y3
5V 0V 24V Load
*2
Input extension block S/S
X0
5V 0V 24V X1
*1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N *2 Connect the 24V terminal (in the case of sink input)
terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and or the 0V terminal (in the case of source input) to
200V AC system). the S/S terminal on the input extension block.
As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS"
at PL field.
140
1
9.5.2 Example of sink input [-common] wiring
Introduction
An example of sink input [-common] wiring is given below. When connecting input/output powered extension
units/blocks, carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type
units/blocks and the sink input type units/blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block.
2
Sink and source input type
Part Names
Features and
Class D
AC power supply of
Special adapter 24+ grounding
5V 0V 24V 100 to 240V
24-
Class D Power supply ON
Main unit *1
grounding
3
L PL
Introduction
Product
MC
N
MC
5V 0V 24V S/S Emergency
0V stop
24V *5
24V DC 4
service
Specifications
*2,3
Input / output power MC MC
S/S
extension block supply
Sink 5V 0V 24V output
and DC
source Class D power
input Input / output powered extension unit *1
grounding supply
5
type L
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
N
S/S DC AC
5V 0V 24V 24V DC
0V Power supply for loads to
service power
24V
*5 supply output
be connected to PLC
output terminals
6
Configuration
System
*2,3
Input extension As for the details of
S/S
block emergency stop
5V 0V 24V operation, see "DESIGN
PRECAUTIONS" at PL
*4 Class D field.
Special function
24+
grounding 7
block Sink input type
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
5V 0V 24V 24-
24V DC
COM
service power
Output extension 24+
supply output
block *5
8
5V 0V 24V
Installation
Sink *2,3
and Input extension
S/S
source block
input 5V 0V 24V
type 9
*1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N *3 In the case of the sink input type, the S/S terminal
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and is used as the 24+ terminal.
200V AC system). *4 Some special function units/blocks do not have the
As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" power supply terminal.
at PL field. *5 Do not connect the 24V terminals (24V DC service
*2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit or the power supply) of the main unit and the input/output
input/output extension unit to the S/S terminal of extension unit with each other. Connect the 0V
10
Input Wiring
the input extension block. terminal.
141
9.5.3 Example of source input [+common] wiring

An example of source input [+common] wiring is shown below.
Class D
grounding AC power supply of
Special adapter
5V 0V 24V 24+ 100 to 240V
24-
Class D Power supply ON
Main unit *1
grounding
L PL
MC
N
MC
5V 0V 24V S/S Emergency
0V stop
24V *4
24V DC
Sink *2 service
Input / output power MC MC
and S/S
extension block supply
source
input 5V 0V 24V output
type DC
Class D power
Input/output powered extension unit *1
grounding supply
L
N
5V 0V 24V S/S DC AC
24V DC
0V Power supply for loads to
service
24V be connected to PLC
*4 power
supply output terminals
*2 output
Input extension As for the details of
S/S
block emergency stop
5V 0V 24V operation, see "DESIGN
PRECAUTIONS" at PL
Class D
*3 field.
Special function grounding
24+
block
5V 0V 24V 24-
Output extension
block
5V 0V 24V
Sink *2
and Input extension
S/S
source block
input 5V 0V 24V
type
*1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N *3 Some special function units/blocks do not have the
terminals (in any case of 100V AC system and power supply terminal.
200V AC system). *4 Do not connect the 24V terminals (24V DC service
As for the details, see "WIRING PRECAUTIONS" power supply) of the main unit and the input/output
at PL field. extension unit with each other. Connect the 0V
*2 Connect the 0V terminal of the main unit or terminal.
extension unit to the S/S terminal of the input
extension block.
142
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures (Input Interruption and Pulse Catch)
Introduction
10. Input Wiring Procedures
(Input Interruption and Pulse Catch)
2
Part Names
Features and
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
3
Introduction
Product
output control may be disabled. 4
Specifications
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, design external circuits and mechanisms to ensure safe 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
6
Configuration
System
connections.
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
143
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
This chapter explains the followings.

• Sink/source input (24V DC input)
• Input specifications (main unit), instructions for wiring and examples of external wiring
• Input interruption function
• Pulse catch function
144
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring
1
10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring
Introduction
10.1.1 Sink and source input (24V DC input type)
The input terminals (X) of the main unit are common to sink/source input of 24V DC internal power. 2
FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/blocks have input terminals common to sink/source input
Part Names
Features and
or only for sink input.
1. Difference between circuits

• Sink input [-common] 3
Sink input means a DC input signal with current-flow from the input
L
Introduction
Product
(X) terminal.
N
When sensor with a transistor output is connected, NPN open
collector transistor output can be used. 24V
0V
S/S
4
Specifications
X
• Source input [+common]

Source input means a DC input signal with current-flow into the input
(X) terminal. L
When sensor with a transistor output is connected, PNP open N 5
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
collector transistor output can be used. 24V
0V
S/S
X
6
Configuration
System
2. Method of switching between sink/source input
To switch the input type to sink or source input, wire the S/S terminal to the 0V or 24V terminal.
→ Refer to Subsections 10.2.4 and 10.2.5 for wiring examples.
• Sink input: 24V terminal and S/S terminal are connected. 7
• Source input: 0V terminal and S/S terminal are connected.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
3. Instructions for using
• Concurrent use of sink/source input
It is possible to set all input terminals (X) of the main unit to the sink input mode or the source input mode.
However, sink and source input terminals cannot be used concurrently. 8
- The main unit and input/output powered extension units are individually set to the sink or source input
Installation
mode.
- The input mode of an input/output extension block is determined according to the selection of the sink or
source input mode on the powered extension unit (power source).
• Caution in selecting model
A type common to sink/source input and a type only for sink input are both available. Select a proper type. 9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
Differences from FX2N PLCs in input specifications (reference)

FX2N PLCs only for sink input (manuals in Japanese are supplied) and those common to sink/source input
(manuals in English are supplied) have different model names.
• In FX2N PLCs only for sink input, the S/S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected unlike in FX3U
PLCs.
10
• FX2N PLCs common to sink/source input are switched to the sink or source input mode by external wiring
Input Wiring
like FX3U PLCs.
145
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.2 24V DC Input Type (Common to Sink/Source Input)
10.2 24V DC Input Type (Common to Sink/Source Input)

The input specifications for the main unit, cautions in wiring the unit and examples of wiring are given below.
10.2.1 Input specifications (main unit)

The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers. "X010 or more" means the numbers
from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has.
(The input numbers of FX3U-16M are X000 to X007.)
→ For the details of sink/source input, refer to subsection 10.1.1.
Specifications
Item
Number of input points 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points
Fixed terminal
Input connecting type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)
block (M3 screw)
Input signal voltage 24V DC ±10%
X000 to X005 3.9 kΩ
Input
X006, X007 3.3 kΩ
impedance
X010 or more − 4.3 kΩ
X000 to X005 6 mA/24V DC
Input signal
X006, X007 7 mA/24V DC
current
X010 or more − 5 mA/24V DC
ON input X000 to X005 3.5 mA or more
sensitivity X006, X007 4.5 mA or more
current X010 or more − 3.5 mA or more
OFF input sensitivity
1.5 mA or less
current
Input signal form Sink input: NPN open collector transistor
Source input: PNP open collector transistor
Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation
Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven.

Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
AC100 to 240V AC100 to 240V
Input circuit configuration 24V 24V
*1 Input impedance 0V 0V
S/S S/S
*1 *1
X X
146
1
10.2.2 Handling of 24V DC input
Introduction
1. Input terminals
Fuse
L
Sink input
N
When a no-voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor 100 to 240V AC
2
output is connected between an input (X) terminal and the 0V S/S
Part Names
Features and
terminal and the circuit is closed, the input (X) is turned on. 0V
Then, the input display LED lights. 24V
* X000
X001
3
Introduction
Product
X007
* Input impedance
Source input
When a no-voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor Fuse
L
output is connected between an input (X) terminal and the 24V N 4
terminal and the circuit is closed, the input (X) is turned on. 100 to 240V AC
Specifications
Then, the input display LED lights. S/S
0V
Display module (option) 24V
When the display module is mounted, the ON/OFF status can
be checked on the LCD display. * X000
X001 5
RUN terminal setting
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
X000 to X017 (up to the largest input number in the main
unit*1) of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by X007
setting parameters. * Input impedance
*1. The FX3U-16M main unit input range is X000 to X007.
→ For the functions of the RUN terminals, refer to subsection 14.2.1. 6
Configuration
System
2. Input circuit
Function of input circuit
The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler, and the second circuit is
provided with a C-R filter.
The C-R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from 7
the input line.
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
There is a delay of approx. 10ms in response to input-switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON.
Change of filter time

X000 to X017 (up to the largest number in the main unit) have digital filters, and the filter time can be changed
in increments of 1ms in the range from 0 to 60ms through applied instructions. When 0 is specified for the
time, the input filter values are set as shown in the following table. 8
Installation
Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified Remarks

X000 to X005 5 µs*1 −
X006, X007 50 µs −
X010 to X017*2 200 µs Except FX3U-16MR/ES
9
*1. When the circuit is used at an input filter value of 5µs, be careful when wiring.
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
(The details are stated later.)

*2. The FX3U-16M main unit input range is X000 to X007.
The filter time for input numbers X010 to X017 is kept 10 ms because the input filters of the input/
output powered extension units/blocks are used for them.
10
Input Wiring
147
Cautions in wiring when changing filter time

When setting the input filter to 5µs or capturing pulses of a response frequency of 50 to 100kHz with a high-
speed counter, wire the terminals as stated below.
1) The wiring length should be 5m or less.
2) Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, so that the sum of the load
current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device and the input current of the main body
is 20 mA or more.
3. Input sensitivity
The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table.
When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact or there is a parallel resistance or leakage
current at the input contact, wire the terminals in accordance with the following table.
→ For the instructions for connecting input devices, refer to subsection 10.2.3.
X010 to max input number
Item X000 to X005 X006 to X007
of the main unit
Input voltage 24V DC ±10%
Input current 6 mA 7 mA 5 mA
Input sensitivity ON 3.5 mA or more 4.5 mA or more 3.5 mA or more
current OFF 1.5 mA or less 1.5 mA or less 1.5 mA or less

For the wiring of input interruption, pulse catch and rotary encoder, refer to the following sections.
→ Example of wiring of input interruption: Refer to section 10.4.
→ Example of wiring of pulse catch: Refer to section 10.5.
→ Example of wiring of rotary encoder: Refer to section 11.10.
10.2.3 Instructions for connecting input devices
1. In the case of no-voltage contact

The input current of this PLC is 5 to 7 mA/24V DC.
Use input devices applicable to this minute current.
If no-voltage contacts (switches) for large current are used, contact failure may occur.
Input number Input current
X000 to X005 6 mA/24V DC
X006, X007 7 mA/24V DC
X010 or more 5 mA/24V DC
<Example> Products of OMRON

Type Model name Type Model name
Microswitch Models Z, V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P
Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S
2. In the case of input device with built-in series diode

The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx. 4V or less.
When lead switches with a series LED are used, up to two switches can be connected in series.
24V 0V
S/S S/S
LED LED
PLC PLC
(sink input) X (source input) X
0V 24V
*1
*1 In the case of a type only for sink input,

connect the device to the COM terminal.
148
1
3. In the case of input device with built-in parallel resistance
Introduction
Use a device having a parallel resistance, Rp, of 15kΩ or more.
If the resistance is less than 15kΩ, connect a bleeder resistance, Rb, obtained by the following formula as
shown in the following figure.
4Rp
Rb ≤ (kΩ) 2
15-Rp
Part Names
Features and
24V Bleeder 0V Bleeder
resistance resistance
S/S Rb S/S
Rb
PLC PLC 3
Introduction
Product
15kΩ or 15kΩ or
more Rp Rp
more
0V 24V
*1

4
Specifications
4. In the case of 2-wire proximity switch
Use a two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current, I , is 1.5 mA or less when the switch is off.
When the current is 1.5 mA or more, connect a bleeder resistance, Rb, determined by the following formula 5
as shown in the following figure.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
6
Rb ≤ (kΩ)
I -1.5
24V Bleeder
resistance
0V Bleeder
resistance
6
Configuration
System
2-wire 2-wire
S/S Rb proximity S/S Rb proximity
PLC I sensor PLC I sensor
7
0V 24V
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
*1

8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
149
10.2.4 Examples of external wiring (sink input)
Main unit Fuse *1

L
N
Class D
S/S grounding
*3
0V
24V
X0
X1
Three-
Input Input wire
5V 0V 24V impedance terminal sensor
Input extension block 0V 24V

S/S
X0
Sink and source *2
input type X1 Two-wire
5V 0V 24V
Input proximity
terminal sensor
Input / output powered extension unit
L
N
Class D
*3 grounding
S/S
0V
24V
X0
X1
5V 0V 24V
Input
terminal *1 Handle the power supply circuit
Input extension block 0V 24V correctly in accordance with
S/S
Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring
and Power Supply Wiring
X0 Procedures."
*2 For an input device having a
X1
5V 0V 24V parallel resistance or a two-wire
Input proximity switch, a bleeder
terminal resistance may be required.
Special function block
24+ *3 In the case of sink input wiring,
24- short-circuit the terminals of the
extension units as well as the S/S
5V 0V 24V terminal and the 24V terminal of
Class D
the main unit.
grounding
150
Introduction
Use of input/output extension units/blocks of sink input type
Main unit Fuse *1

L
2
N
Part Names
Features and
Class D
grounding
S/S
*3
Sink and source 0V
input type 24V
3
Introduction
Product
X0
X1 Three-
Input Input wire
4
Specifications
Input extension block 0V 24V
24+
X0
*2
5V 0V 24V
X1 Two-wire 5
Input proximity
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
terminal sensor
L
N
Class D 6
grounding
Configuration
System
Sink input type
COM
24+
X0 7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
X1
5V 0V 24V
Input
terminal
Input extension block 0V 24V *1 Handle the power supply circuit
24+ correctly in accordance with
Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring 8
X0 and Power Supply Wiring
Installation
Procedures."
X1 *2 For an input device having a
5V 0V 24V Input parallel resistance or a two-wire
terminal proximity switch, a bleeder
Special function block
24+
resistance may be required. 9
*3 In the case of sink input wiring,
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
24- short-circuit the S/S terminal and

the 24V terminal of the main unit.
5V 0V 24V
Class D
grounding
10
Input Wiring
151
10.2.5 Example of external wiring (source input)
Main unit Fuse *1

L
N
Class D
grounding
S/S
*3
0V
24V
X0 Three-
wire
X1 sensor
Input Input
5V 0V 24V impedance terminal
0V 24V
Input extension block
S/S
X0 Two-wire
proximity
Sink and source X1 sensor
input type 5V 0V 24V *2
Input
terminal
L
N
Class D
*3
S/S grounding
0V
24V
X0
X1
5V 0V 24V
Input *1 Handle the power supply circuit
terminal correctly in accordance with
Input extension block 0V 24V Chapter 9 "Preparation for Wiring
S/S and Power Supply Wiring
Procedures."
X0 *2 For an input device having a
parallel resistance or a two-wire
X1 proximity switch, a bleeder
5V 0V 24V resistance may be required.
Input
terminal *3 In the case of source input wiring,
Special function block short-circuit the terminals of the
24+ extension units as well as the S/S
24- terminal and the 0V terminal of
the main unit.
5V 0V 24V
Class D
grounding
152
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.3 100V AC Input (Except Main Unit)
1
10.3 100V AC Input (Except Main Unit)
Introduction
10.3.1 Input specifications
Select the input for the input/output powered extension units/blocks. 2
Main units of a 100V AC input type are not available.
Part Names
Features and
→ For the specifications on input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.
→ For the specifications on input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.
10.3.2 Handling of 100V AC Input

3
Introduction
Product
1. Input terminal
When voltage of 100 to 120V AC is applied between the input Fuse
terminal and COM terminal, the input terminal is turned on. L
The input display LED lights. N
Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input type input/ 100 to 240V AC
output powered extension unit/block with the COM terminal of
COM 100 to 120V AC 4
a DC system.
Specifications
* Fuse
2. Input circuit X000
X001
The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are
insulated with a photocoupler.
There is a delay of approx. 25 to 30ms in response to input 5
X007
switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
* Input impedance
3. Input sensitivity
The input current and input sensitivity of these PLCs are
shown in the following table. 6
Input Specifications
Configuration
System
Input voltage 100 to 120V AC +10%, -15% 50/60Hz
6.2 mA/110V 60Hz Percentage of simultaneous power-on:
Input current
4.7 mA/100V 50Hz 70% or less
Input ON 3.8 mA/80V AC
sensitivity OFF 1.7 mA/30V AC
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
153
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.3 100V AC Input (Except Main Unit)
10.3.3 Example of external wiring
Main unit Fuse *1

L
N
Class D
S/S grounding
0V
24V
24V DC X0
input type
(Sink wiring) X1 Three-
Input Input wire
0V 24V
Input extension block
S/S
X0
*2
X1 Two-wire
5V 0V 24V
Input proximity
terminal sensor
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
L
N
Class D
grounding
100V AC
input type
COM
COM
X0
*1 H a n d l e t h e p o we r s u p p l y c i r c u it
X1 correctly in accordance with Chapter 9
5V 0V 24V
Input "Preparation for W iring and Power
terminal Supply Wiring Procedures."
*2 For an input device having a parallel
resistance or a two-wire proximity
switch, a bleeder resistance may be
required.
154
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.4 Input Interruption (I00 to I50 ) - With Delay Function
1
10.4 Input Interruption (I00 to I50 ) - With Delay Function
Introduction
The PLC (main unit) is provided with an input interruption function (input delay interruption function) and has
six interruption input points.
The ON or OFF duration of interruption input signals should be 5µs or more.
→ For the details of programming, refer to the programming manual. 2
Part Names
Features and
10.4.1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers (input signal ON/OFF duration)
Interrupt pointer
Interrupt disable ON or OFF duration of input
Input No. Interruption on Interruption on control signal
leading edge trailing edge 3
X000 I001 I000 M8050
Introduction
Product
X001 I101 I100 M8051
X002 I201 I200 M8052
5µs or more
X003 I301 I300 M8053
X004 I401 I400 M8054 4
X005 I501 I500 M8055
Specifications
10.4.2 Input interruption delay function
This input interruption has a function to delay execution of interruption routine in 1ms units.
With this delay function, the position of the sensor used for input interruption can be adjusted in the sequence 5
program. It is necessary to adjust the actual position of the sensor.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
→ For the programming, refer to the programming manual.
10.4.3 Cautions for input interruption
1. Non-overlap of of input numbers 6

The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, SPD,
Configuration
System
ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions and general-purpose inputs.
Take care not to overlap the input numbers.
Example:
When the input interrupt pointer "I001" is used, X000 is occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235, 7
C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, input interruption (including delay interruption) pointer I000,
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD, ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time.
2. Cautions in wiring
• The wiring length should be 5m or less.
• Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, so that the sum of the load 8
current of the open collector transistor output on the other side device and the input current of the main
Installation
body is 20 mA or more.
- Source input: PNP open collector transistor
- Sink input: NPN open collector transistor
24V Bleeder 0V Bleeder 9

resistance resistance
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
2-wire 2-wire
S/S Rb proximity S/S Rb proximity
PLC I sensor PLC I sensor
10
0V 24V
Input Wiring
155
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.4 Input Interruption (I00 to I50 ) - With Delay Function
10.4.4 Examples of external wiring

Use shielded twisted-pair cables for connecting cables.
Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side.
1. Examples of input interruption (I000 or I001) wiring using X000

When another input terminal is used, wire it according to the following diagrams.
1) When 24V DC service power supply is used
Sink wiring Source wiring
Fuse Fuse
L L
Class D grounding * Class D grounding *
N N
S/S S/S
0V 0V
24V 24V
1.5 1.5
kΩ kΩ Three-
X000 X000 wire
Three-wire
* The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less.
2) When 24V DC external power supply is used
Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
24V DC 24V DC
S/S S/S
0V 0V
24V 24V 1.5
1.5 kΩ
kΩ Three-
X000 X000 wire
Three-wire
156
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8177)
1
10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8177)
Introduction
The PLC (main unit) is provided with a pulse catch function and has 8 pulse catch input points.
→ For the details of programming, refer to the programming manual.
10.5.1 Allocation of special memories to Iinput numbers (ON duration of input signals) 2
Part Names
Features and
Input No. Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal
X000 M8170
X001 M8171
X002 M8172
5µs or more 3
X003 M8173
Introduction
Product
X004 M8174
X005 M8175
X006 M8176
50µs or more
X007 M8177
4
Specifications
10.5.2 Cautions for pulse catch
1. Non-overlap of input numbers

The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, pulse
density (SPD) instructions and general-purpose input. 5
Take care not to overlap the input numbers.
Devices
Peripheral
Version and
Example:
When the pulse catch input contact M8170 is used, X000 is occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235,
C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, input interruption (including delay interruption) pointers
I000 and I001 and SPD, ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time.
6
2. Cautions in wiring
Configuration
System
• The wiring length should be 5 m (16’4") or less.
• Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, so that the sum of the load
current of the open collector transistor output on the other side device and the input current of the main
body is 20 mA or more.
7
Nos., Unit Nos.

Input/Output
8
Installation
9
Wiring
Power Supply
Preparation and
10
Input Wiring
157
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 10.5 Pulse Catch (M8170 to M8177)
10.5.3 Examples of external wiring

Use shielded twisted-pair cables for connecting cables.
Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on the PLC side.
1. Examples of pulse catch (M8170) wiring using X000

When another input terminal is used, wire it according to the following diagrams.
1) When 24V DC service power supply is used
Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
S/S S/S
0V 0V
24V 24V
1.5 1.5
kΩ kΩ Three-
X000 X000 wire
Three-wire
2) When 24V DC external power supply is used
Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
24V DC 24V DC
S/S S/S
0V 0V
24V 24V 1.5
1.5 kΩ
kΩ Three-
X000 X000 wire
Three-wire
158
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High-speed Counters (C235 to C255)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.1 Outline
11
Counters
High-Speed
11. Use of High-speed Counters (C235 to C255)
12
11.1 Outline
External Wiring
The high-speed counters can count the signals to the general-purpose input terminals to the main unit or the
signals to the high-speed input special adapters (options).
These two types of counters differ in the maximum response frequency and type of input signals to be
counted. 13
→ For the details, refer to Section 11.2.
Various Uses
Wiring for
• General-purpose input terminals of main unit
Signals of the open collector transistor output can be input to the counters. The counters can count signals
of up to 100kHz (1-phase).
• High-speed input special adapters
Signals of the differential line driver output can be input to the counters. The counters can count signals of 14
up to 200kHz (1-phase).
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Rotary encoder, etc.
Main unit (Output form: Open collector transistor)
General-purpose input terminal block X000 to X007
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
POWER
RUN
RUN
BATT
ERROR
ERROR
FX3U-48MR/ES OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
0 11
10 1 12
2 13
3 14
4 15
5 16
6 17
7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
FX 3U-48M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
R
16
Rotary encoder
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
(Output form: Differential line driver)
1st unit : X000,X001,X002,X006
2nd unit : X003,X004,X005,X007
High-speed input special adapters
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Cautions for high-speed input special adapters
Do not use the same input number for both high-speed input special adapter terminal and main unit terminal.
• When wiring the input numbers assigned to a high-speed input special adapter, do not wire the same input
18
Display Module
number in main unit.

• When not wiring the input numbers assigned to a high-speed input special adapter, terminals of input
numbers in main unit can be used as general inputs.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
159
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.2 Input Specifications
11.2 Input Specifications

For input of the high-speed counters, the input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit or high-speed input
adapter are used.
→ For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit, refer to Section 10.2.
11.2.1 High-speed input special adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP)
1. Performance specifications
Item Specification
Number of input points 4 points (These points are not included in the total number of PLC input/output points.)
Input form Differential line receiver (equivalent to AM26C32)
1-phase 1-input
200kHz
Max. input frequency 1-phase 2-input High-speed counter operating with hardware counter*1
2-phase 2-input 100kHz
Min. pulse width 1 µs or more
The external wiring of the input block and the PLC are insulated with a photocoupler or a
Insulation
transformer.
Wiring length Up to 10m
*1. The maximum input frequency to the software counters*2 is the same as that of signals to be captured
to the input terminals of the main unit.
→ For the details of the responce frequency, refer to Subsection 11.9.2.
*2. The software counters include hardware counters that operate as software counters.
→ For the conditions under which the hardware counters operate as software counters, refer to
Subsection 11.8.1.
2. Internal circuit of input interface

Rotary encoder, etc. High-speed input special adapter
5V DC
Twisted-pair shielded wire 5V DC

*1
Non-inverted output X00 + Equivalent to
Phase A/B/Z *1 AM26C32
X00 - 330Ω
Inverted output
Phase A/B/Z
SG
0V
*2
SG
*1 X00 indicates input number of the high-speed input

special adapter.
*2 SG of the first unit and SG of the second unit are Class D
insulated from each other. grounding
11.2.2 Cautions in connecting mating device

Encoders of the output forms shown in the following table can be connected to the terminals. (The encoders
may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility. Check the specifications in advance.)
Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high-speed counter input
terminals.
Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected
Open collector transistor output form
Input terminals of main unit
(applicable to 24V DC)
Differential line driver output form
Input terminals of FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Set the input voltage of FX3U-4HSX-ADP to 5V DC or less.
160
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.3 Types of Counting and Operations
11
11.3 Types of Counting and Operations
Counters
High-Speed
The main unit has 32-bit high speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count input, 1-phase 2-count input and
2-phase 2-count input) built-in. The high-speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software
counters according to the counting method.
For some high-speed counters, external reset input terminals or external start input terminals (start of 12
counting) can be selected.
External Wiring
11.3.1 Classification according to counting method
Classification Details
Hardware counters
Counting by hardware 13
They are switched to software counters under some working conditions.
Various Uses
Wiring for
Counting through interrupt handling by CPU
Software counters Each counter must be used within limitations on maximum response frequency and overall
frequency.
11.3.2 Types and input signal forms 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
The types and input signals (waveforms) of high-speed counters (1-phase 1-count input, 1-phase 2-count
input and 2-phase 2-count input) are shown below.
Type of counter Input signal form Counting direction
Down-counting or up-counting is specified by
1-phase 1-count UP/ turning on or off M8235 to M8245. 15
input DOWN ON: Down-counting
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
OFF: Up-counting
Up-counting or down-counting
+1 +1
The counting direction can be checked with
1-phase 2-count UP
M8246 to M8250.
input -1 -1
ON: Down-counting
DOWN
OFF: Up-counting
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Phase A
1 edge +1 +1 -1 -1
count Phase B
Automatic up-counting or down-counting
Up-counting Down-counting
according to change in input status of phase A/B
2-phase
2-count
The counting direction can be checked with 17
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 M8251 to M8255.
Options
Units and
Other Extension
input Phase A ON: Down-counting
4 edge OFF: Up-counting
count Phase B
+1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1
18
Display Module
11.3.3 High-speed counter device notations

The input terminal assignments for FX3U PLC high-speed counters can be switched when used in
combination with a special auxiliary relay.
This section classifies these high-speed counter devices under the following notations. Note that an "(OP)"
input cannot be programmed.
19
Terminal Block
Standard Device Switched Device Standard Device Switched Device

Numbers Numbers Numbers Numbers
C244 C244(OP) C248 C248(OP)
C245 C245(OP) C253 C253(OP)
20
Cassette
Memory
161
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.4 List of Device Numbers and Functions
11.4 List of Device Numbers and Functions
→ For the details of the counter number (OP), refer to Subsection 11.3.3.
Counter Device No. 1 edge count/ External reset External start
Classification Data length
type (counter) 4 edge count input terminal input terminal
C235*2
C236*2
C237*2
−
C238*2 Hardware
None None
C239*2 counter*1
1-phase C240*2 32-bit
1-count C244(OP)*3 bi-directional
input − counter
C245(OP)*3
C241
C242 − Provided*5 None
C243 Software
counter
C244*3
− Provided*5 Provided
C245*3
C246*2 Hardware
− None None
C248(OP)*2*3 counter*1
1-phase 32-bit
2-count C247 bi-directional
− Provided*5 None
input C248*3 Software counter
C249 counter
C250
− Provided*5 Provided
1 edge count*4
C251*2 None
Hardware 4 edge count*4
None
counter*1 1 edge count*4
*2 *5
C253 Provided
4 edge count*4
2-phase 32-bit
1 edge count*4
2-count C252 bi-directional Provided*5
input 4 edge count*4 counter None
Software 1 edge count*4
C253(OP)*6 counter
None
4 edge count*4
C254 1 edge count*4
C255 Provided*5 Provided
4 edge count*4
*1. These counters are handled as software counters depending on working conditions. When they are
handled as software counters, they have limitations on maximum response frequency and overall
frequency.
→ For the conditions under which they are handled as software counter, refer to Section 11.8.
→ For the overall frequency, refer to Section 11.9.
*2. When the input terminals of the main unit receive pulses having a response frequency of 50k to
100kHz, wire the terminals as stated below.
- The wiring length should be 5m (16’4") or less.
- Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1W or more) to the input terminal, so that the load current
of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side is 20mA or more.
→ For the wiring, refer to Section 11.10.
*3. C244, C245 and C248 are useally used as software counters. When they are used in combination
with special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8390 to M8392), they can be used as hardware counters
C244(OP), C245(OP) and C248(OP).
→ For the procedures on switching the counter function, refer to Subsection 11.11.3.
*4. The 2-phase 2-input counters are 1 edge count counters. When they are used in combination with
special auxiliary relays (M8388, M8198 and M8199), they can be used as 4 edge count counters.
→ For the procedures on using them as 4 edge count counters, refer to Subsection 11.11.4.
162
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.4 List of Device Numbers and Functions
11
*5. The external reset input terminals are reset when they are turned on. When they are used in
Counters
High-Speed
combination with special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8389), they can be reset when turned off.
→ For the procedures on changing the external reset input logic, refer to Subsection 11.11.3.
*6. C253 is usually used as a hardware counter. When it is used in combination with the special auxiliary
relay (M8388 and M8392), it can be used as a counter C253(OP) without reset input.
In this case, C253(OP) is handled as a software counter. 12
External Wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
163
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers
11.5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers

The high-speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following
table.
The input terminals not allocated for high-speed counters can be used as general input terminals.
11.5.1 Allocation table

The allocation of the first unit of FX3U-4HSX-ADP is shown in the heavy-line frames.
H/W: Hardware counter S/W: Software counter U: Up-count input D: Down-count input
A: A-phase input B: B-phase input R: External reset input S: External start input
Input allocation
Terminals to be connected
X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007
• Input terminals of main unit
• FX3U-4HSX-ADP 1st unit − − − −
High-speed input special adapters 2nd unit − − − −
Classifi- Input allocation

Type of counter Counter No.
cation X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007
C235*1 H/W*2 U/D
C236*1 H/W*2 U/D
*1 *2
C237 H/W U/D
C238*1 H/W*2 U/D
C239*1 H/W*2 U/D
*1 *2
1-phase 1-count C240 H/W U/D
input C241 S/W U/D R
C242 S/W U/D R
C243 S/W U/D R
C244 S/W U/D R S
C244(OP)*3 H/W*2 U/D
C245 S/W U/D R S
C245(OP)*3 H/W*2 U/D
C246*1 H/W*2 U D
C247 S/W U D R
1-phase 2-count C248 S/W U D R
input C248(OP)*1*3 H/W*2 U D
C249 S/W U D R S
C250 S/W U D R S
C251*1 H/W*2 A B
C252 S/W A B R
2-phase 2-count C253*1 H/W*2 A B R
input*4 C253(OP)*3 S/W A B
C254 S/W A B R S
C255 S/W A B R S
*1. When the input terminals of the main unit receive pulses having a response frequency of 50k to
100kHz, wire the terminals as stated below.
- The wiring length should be 5m (16’4") or less.
- Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, so that the load current
of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side to 20mA or more.
→ For the wiring, refer to Section 11.10.
164
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.5 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers
11
*2. When the comparison set/reset instructions (DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ and DHSCT) for high-speed
Counters
High-Speed
counters are used, the hardware (H/W) counters are switched to software (S/W) counters.
When the input signal logic is inverted by the reset input signal logic switching function (M8388 and
M8389), C253 is switched from a hardware counter to a software counter.
→ For the conditions under which it is handled as a software counter, refer to Section 11.8.
*3. The input terminals to be used and the functions are switched by driving the special auxiliary relays in 12
the program.
External Wiring
→ For the procedures on switching to hardware counters, refer to Subsection 11.11.3.
*4. The 2-phase 2-count input counters are 1 edge count counters. The use of special auxiliary relays
changes them to 4 edge count counters.
→ For the procedures on operating them as 4 edge count counters, refer to Subsection 11.11.4.
13
11.5.2 Inhibition of redundant use of input numbers
Various Uses
Wiring for
• The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high-speed counters, input interruption, pulse catch,
SPD, ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions and general-purpose inputs. Take care not to overlap the input
terminals.
For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. Therefore, it is impossible to use C235, 14
C236, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254, input interruption pointers I000 and I101, pulse
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD, ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions at the same time.
• The same input numbers are allocated to the input terminals on FX3U-4HSX-ADP and the input terminals
of the main unit of FX3U PLC. Use one of the terminals with the same number. If both input terminals are
being used, intended operation cannot be realized because the input terminals on FX3U-4HSX-ADP and
the main unit operate in the OR relation.
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
165
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.6 Handling of High-speed Counters
11.6 Handling of High-speed Counters
11.6.1 1-phase 1-count input
Examples of program
1) For C235
X010 • C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000
M8235 Down-count/ is switched from OFF to ON while X012 is on.
up-count
X011 • While X011 is on, the counter is reset when the RST
RST C235 Reset instruction is executed.
X012 • The counters C235 to C245 are switched to the down-

C235 K-5 count or up-count mode by turning on or off M8235 to
M8245.
Count input
X000
Main unit
2) For C244
X010 • C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal
M8244 Down-count/ X006 is turned on while X012 is on. The count input
up-count
terminal is X000. The setting for this example is the data of
X011
Reset the indirectly designated data register (D1,D0).
RST C244
• C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence. For C244,
X012 X001 is allocated as the external reset input. The counter
C244 D0(D1)
is reset immediately when X001 is turned on.
• The counters C235 to C245 are switched to the down-
The setting is (D1,D0).
count or up-count mode by turning on or off M8235 to
M8245.
Count input External reset External start
input input
X000 X001 X006

Main unit
Example of operation
The above counter C235 operates as shown below.
X010 Up-count Down-count Up-count
X011 Reset input
X012 Start input
X000
Count
input 5
4 4
3 3
C235 2 2
Current 1 1
valu 0 0 0
-1
-2
-3 -3
When output has -4 -4
operated -5 -5
-6 -6
-7 -7
-8
C235 output contact
166
11
C235 is set to the up-count or down-count mode through interruption by the count input X000.
Counters
High-Speed
• When the current value is increased from -6 to -5, the output contact is set, and when the value is
decreased from -5 to -6, it is reset.
• The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. However,
when the counter’s value increments from 2,147,483,647, it changes to -2,147,483,648. In the same
manner, when it decrements from -2,147,483,648, it changes to 2,147,483,647. (This type of counter is 12
called a ring counter.)
External Wiring
• When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 is turned on, the current counter’s value is
reset to 0, and the output contact is restored.
• The current values, output contact operations and reset status of the high-speed counters for retention
upon power failure are kept even if power is turned off.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
These counters are 32-bit up-count/down-count binary counters.
The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above-
mentioned 1-phase 1-count input high-speed counters.
14
Examples of program
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
1) For C246
X011 • While X012 is on, C246 increments the value when the input
RST C246 terminal X000 is switched from OFF to ON and decrements the
value when the input terminal X001 is switched from OFF to
X012
D2(D3)
ON. 15
C246
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
• The down-count/up-count operations of C246 to C250 can be
monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8246 to M8250.
The setting is (D3,D2)
ON: Down-counting
Up-counting Down-counting OFF: Up-counting
input input
16
X000 X001
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Main unit
2) For C249 17
X011 • While X012 is on, C249 starts counting immediately when
Options
Units and
Other Extension
RST C249 the input terminal X006 is turned on.
The up-counting input terminal is X000, and the down-
X012
C249 K1234 counting input terminal is X001.
• C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011.
Down-counting External start
For C249, X002 is allocated as reset input. When X002 is 18
input input turned on, C249 is immediately reset.
Display Module
Up-counting External
input reset input • The down-count/up-count operations of C246 to C250 can
be monitored through the ON/OFF operations of M8246 to
X000 X001 X002 X006 M8250.
ON: Down-counting
Main unit
OFF: Up-counting 19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
167

These counters are 32-bit up-count/down-count binary counters.
The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above-
mentioned 1-phase 1-count input high-speed counters.
Examples of program
1) For C251
X011 • While X012 is on, C251 counts the operations of the input terminals
RST C251 X000 (A-phase) and X001 (B-phase) through interruption.
X012 While X011 is turned on, the counter is reset when RST instruction
C251 K1234 is executed.
• When the current value exceeds the setting, Y002 is turned on, and
C251
Y002 when the current value becomes lower than the setting, Y002 is
turned off.
M8251
• Y003 is turned on (down-count) or off (up-count) according to the
Y003
counting direction.
A-phase input B-phase input
X000 X001
Main unit
2) For C254
X011 • C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal
RST C254 X006 is turned on while X012 is on.
The count input terminals are X000 (A-phase) and X001 (B-
X012
C254 D0(D1) phase).
• C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence, and it is reset
C254 immediately when X002 is turned on.
Y004 The setting is (D1,D0).
• When the current value exceeds the setting (D1,D0), Y004
M8254 operates, and when the current value becomes lower than
Y005 the setting, Y004 is turned off.
B-phase input External start input • Y005 is turned on (down-count) or off (up-count) according
A-phase input External reset to the counting direction.
input
X000 X001 X002 X006

Main unit
• A 2-phase encoder generates A-phase output and B-phase output between which there is a 90° phase
difference. The high-speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown
below.
- Operation by 1 edge count
Phase A
+1 +1 -1 -1
Phase B
- Operation by 4 edge count
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Phase A
Phase B
+1 +1 +1 +1 -1 -1 -1 -1
• The down-count/up-count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON/OFF operations
of M8251 to M8255.
ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
168
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value
11
11.7 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value
Counters
High-Speed
11.7.1 Timing of updating of current value
When a pulse is input to a high-speed counter input terminal, the counter increments or decrements. The 12
current value of the device is updated at the timing shown in the following table.
External Wiring
Therefore, when the hardware counter directly handles the current value of the high-speed counter for MOV
instruction or CMP instruction or an applied instruction (such as a contact comparison instruction), it uses the
current value updated at the timing shown in the following table. As a result, the counter operation is affected
by the scan time.
Classification Timing of updating of current value 13
OUT instruction of counter
Various Uses
Wiring for
Hardware counter
HCMOV instruction
Software counter When count is input
11.7.2 Comparison of current value

14
To compare and output the current value of a high-speed counter, the following two methods are available.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
1. Use of comparison instruction (CMP), band comparison instruction (ZCP) or contact
comparison instruction
When the comparison results are necessary for counting operation, the value can be compared with time *1
in the main program by using HCMOV instruction just before a comparison command (CMP command/ZCP 15
command) or a contact comparison instruction.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
*1. To compare the value with the high-speed counter's changing value and to change the output contact
(Y), use Comparison instruction for high-speed counter (HSCS/HSCR/HSZ/HSCT instruction).
2. Use of Comparison instruction for high-speed counter (HSCS/HSCR/HSZ/HSCT instruction)

Comparison instructions for high-speed counter (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ and HSCT instructions) perform
comparison and output the comparison results when the relevant high-speed counting operation. These 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
instructions have limitations on the number of times of use as shown in the following table.
When the output relay (Y) has been designated for comparison results, the ON/OFF status of output is
affected directly until END instruction output is refreshed.
When the PLC is a relay output type, a mechanical delay in operation (approx. 10ms) is caused. Therefore,
use a transistor output type PLC.
Applied instruction Limitation on number of times of use of instruction 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
HSCS
HSCR Up to 32 times including the number of times of use of
HSCT instruction
HSZ*1
HSCT*1 Only once
18
*1. When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used, the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of
Display Module
all software counters becomes limited.

→ For the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters, refer to
Section 11.9.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
169
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter
11.8 Conditions for Hardware Counter to be Handled as Software Counter

The high-speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters.
Some hardware counters are handled as software counters depending on the operating conditions.
In this case, use hardware counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency
determined for software counters.
11.8.1 Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters

The hardware counters can perform counting with the hardware of FX3U regardless of the overall frequency.
However, under the following conditions, they are handled as software counters.
When using them in the condition below, the maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of the
counters are considered to be the same as those of other software counters.
Hardware
Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters
counter No.
When DHSCS (FNC53), DHSCR (FNC54), DHSZ (FNC55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction is used
for a hardware counter number, the hardware counter is handled as a software counter.
Ex.: C235
C235
K
DHSCS K100 C235 Y000
C235 In this case, C235 works as a software counter.

C236 When the index register is used for the counter number designated by DHSCS (FNC53), DHSCR
C237 (FNC54), DHSZ (FNC55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction, all hardware counters are handled as
C238 software counters.
C239 Ex.: C235Z0
C240
C244(OP) DHSCS K100 C235Z0 Y000
C245(OP)
C246
C248(OP) When the logic is inverted by the external reset input signal logic change function, C253 is switched
C251 to a software counter.
C253 Ex.: The logic of the external reset input signal of C253 (software counter) is inverted.
→ For the inversion of the logic of external reset input signal, refer to
Subsection 11.11.2.
M8388
M8389
C253
K
11.8.2 Method of confirming operation status of counters

The high-speed counter mode, hardware or software, can be confirmed by checking whether the operation
status (M8380 to M8387) is on or off.
→ For the list of operation status of high-speed counters, refer to Subsection 11.11.1.
170
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency
11
11.9 Calculation of Response Frequency and Overall Frequency
Counters
High-Speed
11.9.1 Response frequencies of hardware counters
The maximum response frequencies of the hardware counters are shown in the following table. 12
Depending on the working conditions, the maximum response frequencies of hardware counters are the
External Wiring
same as those of the software counters, and limitations on overall frequency are set up.
→ For the conditions under which the hardware counters are handled as software counters, refer to
the previous page.
Max. response frequency
Counter type Counter Nos.
Main unit FX3U-4HSX-ADP 13
C235,C236,C237,C238,C239,C240 100kHz
Various Uses
Wiring for
C244(OP),C245(OP) 10kHz 200kHz
1-phase 2-count input C246,C248(OP) 100kHz
2-phase 2-count 1 edge count 50kHz 100kHz
C251,C253
input 4 edge count 50kHz 100kHz
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
11.9.2 Response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters
The maximum response frequencies and overall frequency of software counters are shown below.
When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used in the program, limitations are put on the maximum response
frequencies and overall frequency of all software counters regardless of the instruction operand.
When examining the system or creating the program, use the counters within the maximum response 15
frequency and overall frequency ranges suitable to the conditions in consideration of the limitations.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
1. When FX3U Series special function units/blocks and analog special adapters are not used
Examples of calculation are given in the heavy-line frame.
Software Magni- Response frequency and overall frequency depending
counters fication
with for
on conditions of instruction to be used 16
Neither HSZ nor Only HSCT Both HSZ and HSCT
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
HSCS, calcu- Only HSZ instruction
Counter HSCT instruction instruction instructions
Counter type HSCR, lation
Nos. Max. Max. Max. Max.
HSZ or of Overall Overall Overall Overall
HSCT overall response frequency response frequency response frequency response frequency
instruc- frequ- frequency frequency frequency frequency
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
tion*1 ency (kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
C241,
C235, 17
C236,
Options
Units and
Other Extension
C242,
C237,
C243,
C238,
×1 40 30
1-phase C244,
1-count input C245 C239,
C240 40 - 30 -
C244(OP), (number of (number of
− ×1 10 10
C245(OP) instruc-
tion) 80 - 1.5 ×
instruc-
tion) 60 - 1.5 × 18
C247, (number of (number of
Display Module
80 60 *2 *2
1-phase C248, C246, instruc- instruc-
2-count input C249, C248(OP)
×1 40 30
tion) tion)
C250
1 edge
2- count C252,
×1 40 30
phase
2-
C253
(OP),
C251, (40 - (30 - 19
C253
count 4 edge C254, ×4
number of number of
Terminal Block
10 7.5
input count C255 instruc- instruc-
tion) / 4 tion) / 4
*1. When the index register is added to the counter number specified by HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT
instruction, all hardware counters are switched to software counters.
*2. The high-speed counters C244(OP) and C245(OP) cannot count signals of 10kHz or more. 20
Cassette
Memory
171
1) Calculation of overall frequency

The overall frequency is calculated by the high-speed comparison instruction used in the program based
on the above table.
Overall frequency ≥ Sum of "response frequency of high-speed counter × Magnification for

calculation of overall frequency"
2) Example of calculation
When only HSZ instruction is used six times in the program, the frequency is calculated by the formulas
shown in the "Only HSZ instruction" column in the above table.
Magnification
for
High-speed counter No. to be Input Calculation of max. Instruction
calculation of
used frequency response frequency to be used
overall
frequency
Operation as
C237 30kHz 40 - 6(times) = 34kHz ×1
software counter HSZ instruc-
C241 20kHz 40 - 6(times) = 34kHz ×1 tion is used
C253(OP) Software counter six times.
4kHz {40 - 6(times)} / 4 = 8.5kHz ×4
[4 edge count]
1) The overall frequency is calculated as shown below because HSZ instruction is

used six times.
Overall frequency = 80 - 1.5 × 6 = 71kHz
2) The sum of the response frequencies of the high-speed counters used is
calculated as shown below.
"30kHz × 1[C237]" + "20kHz × 1[C241]" + "4kHz × 4[C253(OP)]" = 66kHz ≤ 71kHz
2. When FX3U Series special function units/blocks and analog special adapters are used
Software Magni- Response frequency and overall frequency depending on
counters fication conditions of instruction to be used
with for Neither HSZ nor Only HSCT Both HSZ and HSCT
HSCS, calcu- Only HSZ instruction
Counter HSCT instruction instruction instructions
Counter type HSCR, lation
Nos. Max. Max. Max. Max.
HSZ or of Overall Overall Overall Overall
HSCT overall response frequency response frequency response frequency response frequency
instructio frequ- frequency (kHz)
frequency
(kHz)
frequency
(kHz)
frequency
(kHz)
n *1 ency (kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
C235,
C241,
C236,
C242,
C237,
C243,
C238,
×1 30 25
1-phase C244,
1-count input C245 C239,
C240 30 - 25 -
C244(OP), (number of (number of
−
C245(OP)
×1 10 10 instruc- instruc-
tions) 50 - 1.5 × tions) 50 - 1.5 ×
C247, *2 (number of *2 (number of
60 50
1-phase C248, C246, instruc- instruc-
2-count input C249, C248(OP)
×1 30 25
tions) tions)
C250
1 edge
2- count C252,
×1 30 25
phase C253
C251, (30 - (25 -
2- (OP),
C253
count 4 edge C254, ×4 7.5 6.2
number of number of
input count C255 instruc- instruc-
tions) / 4 tions) / 4
*1. When the index register is added to the counter number specified by HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT
instruction, all hardware counters are switched to software counters.
*2. The high-speed counters C244(OP) and C245(OP) cannot count signals of 10 kHz or more.
172
11
1) Calculation of overall frequency
Counters
High-Speed
The overall frequency is calculated by the high-speed comparison instruction used in the program based
on the above table.
Overall frequency ≥ Sum of "response frequency of high-speed counter × Magnification for

calculation of overall frequency"
2) Example of calculation
12
External Wiring
When only HSZ instruction is used six times in the program, the frequency is calculated by the formulas
shown in the "Only HSZ instruction" column in the above table.
Magnification
for
High-speed counter No. to be Input Calculation of max. Instruction
calculation of
used frequency response frequency
overall
to be used 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
frequency
Operation as
C237 20kHz 30 - 6(times) = 24kHz ×1
software counter HSZ instruc-
C241 10kHz 30 - 6(times) = 24kHz ×1 tion is used
C253(OP) Software counter six times.
[4 edge count]
2kHz {30 - 6(times)} / 4 = 6kHz ×4 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
1) The overall frequency is calculated as shown below because HSZ instruction is used six times.
Overall frequency = 50 - 1.5 × 6 = 41kHz
2) The sum of the response frequencies of the high-speed counters used is
calculated as shown below.
"20kHz × 1[C237]" + "10kHz × 1[C241]" + "2kHz × 4[C253(OP)]" = 38kHz ≤ 41kHz 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
173
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.10 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)
11.10 Examples of External Wiring (Rotary Encoder)
11.10.1 1-phase 1-input [C235 to C245]

The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C235 is used. When another high-speed counter
number is used, wire the counter referring to the following diagrams.
1. When the input terminals of the main unit are used

When pulses having a response frequency of 50 k to 100 kHz are captured to the high-speed counter using
the input terminals X000 to X005, wire the counter as stated below.
• The wiring length should be 5m (16’4") or less.
• As connecting cables, use shielded twisted-pair cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on
the PLC side.
• Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1W or more) to the input terminal, so that the sum of the load
current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side and the input current of the main
unit is 20 mA or more.
1) NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder
In the case of sink wiring

Rotary encoder
Fuse 24V DC
L 24V
0V
N
Class D
grounding*
S/S
0V
24V Phase A
1.5kΩ
X000 Phase B
20mA or
more Phase Z
PLC
2) PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder
In the case of source wiring

Rotary encoder
Fuse 24V DC
L 24V
0V
N
Class D
grounding*
S/S
0V
24V 1.5 Phase A
kΩ
X000 Phase B
20mA or
more Phase Z
PLC
174
11
2. When high-speed input special adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP) is used
Counters
High-Speed
1) Differential line driver output rotary encoder
In the case of differential line driver wiring

Input No. of first/second Rotary encoder
unit
+
12
External Wiring
-
X000 Twisted-pair
Equivalent to shielded wire Non-inverted
AM26C32 X0/3+
output
Phase A+
X000
X0/3- Phase A-
330Ω Inverted 13
output
Various Uses
Wiring for
Phase B+
SG Phase B-
SG
Class D Phase Z+
grounding*
High-speed input
special adapter
Phase Z- 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
11.10.2 2-phase 2-input [C251 to C255] 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
The following examples of wiring apply to the cases where C251 is used. When another high-speed counter
number is used, wire the counter referring to the following diagrams.
1. When the input terminals of the main unit are used

When pulses having a response frequency of 50 k to 100 kHz are captured to the high-speed counter using
the input terminals X000 to X005, wire the counter as stated below. 16
• The wiring length should be 5m (16’4") or less.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
• For connecting cables, use shielded twisted-pair cables. Ground the shield of each shielded cable only on
the PLC side.
• Connect a bleeder resistance of 1.5kΩ (1W or more) to the input terminal, so that the sum of the load
current of the open collector transistor output on the mating device side and the input current of the main
unit is 20mA or more.
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
1) NPN open collector transistor output rotary encoder

Rotary encoder
Fuse 24V DC
L 24V 18
0V
Display Module
N
Class D
S/S grounding*
0V
1.5kΩ
24V Phase A 19
Terminal Block
X000 Phase B
X001 Phase Z
PLC
20mA or
* The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. more 20
Cassette
Memory
175
2) PNP open collector transistor output rotary encoder

Rotary encoder
Fuse 24V DC
L 24V
0V
N
Class D
grounding*
S/S
0V
24V 1.5 Phase A
kΩ
X000 Phase B
X001 Phase Z
PLC
20mA or
* The grounding resistance should be 100Ω or less. more
2. When high-speed input special adapter (FX3U-4HSX-ADP) is used

1) Differential line driver output rotary encoder
In the case of differential line driver wiring

Input No. of first/second Rotary encoder
unit
+
-
X000 Twisted-pair Non-inverted
Equivalent to shielded wire
AM26C32 X0/3+ output
Phase A+
X000 Inverted output
X0/3- Phase A-
330Ω
Equivalent to X001 Non-inverted
AM26C32 X1/4+ output
Phase B+
X001 Inverted output
X1/4- Phase B-
330Ω
SG
Phase Z+
SG
Class D Phase Z-
High-speed input grounding*
special adapter
11.10.3 Cautions for the other side device

Encoders having the output forms shown in the following table can be connected to the terminals. (The
encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility. Check the specifications in
advance.)
Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high-speed counter input
terminals.
Terminal for connecting Output form that can be directly connected
Open collector transistor output form
Input terminals of main unit
(applicable to 24V DC)
Differential line driver output form
Input terminals of FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Set the input voltage of FX3U-4HSX-ADP to 5V DC or less.
176
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 11.11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures
11
11.11 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures
Counters
High-Speed
11.11.1 Related devices
1. For switching 1-phase 1-count input counter mode to up-count or down-count

12
External Wiring
Counter Counter Specifying Up- Down-
type No. device counting counting
C235 M8235
C236 M8236
C237 M8237 13
C238 M8238
Various Uses
Wiring for
1-phase C239 M8239
1-count C240 M8240 OFF ON
input C241 M8241
C242 M8242
C243 M8243
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
C244 M8244
C245 M8245
2. For monitoring of up-count/down-count counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input and 2-

phase 2-count input counters
15
Counter Counter Monitoring Up- Down- Counter Counter Monitoring Up- Down-
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
type No. device counting counting type No. device counting counting
C246 M8246 C251 M8251
1-phase C247 M8247 2-phase C252 M8252
2-count C248 M8248 OFF ON 2-count C253 M8253 OFF ON
input C249 M8249 input C254 M8254 16
C250 M8250 C255 M8255
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
3. For switching high-speed counter function
Device No. Name Description Reference
Contact for
M8388
changing high-
Contact for changing the high-speed counter function −
17
speed counter
Options
Units and
Other Extension
function
Subsection
M8389 Switching of logic of external reset input
11.11.2
Subsection
M8390 Function switching device for C244
11.11.3 18
Subsection
M8391 Function switching device for C245
Display Module
Function switching 11.11.3

devices Subsection
M8392 Function switching device for C248 and 253
11.11.3
Device for switching C251, C252 and C254 to single or 4 edge Subsection
M8198
count 11.11.4
Device for switching C253, C255 and C253 (OP) to single or 4 edge Subsection
19
M8199
Terminal Block
count 11.11.4
20
Cassette
Memory
177
4. Operation status of hardware counter/software counter

Device No. Name Description ON OFF
Operation status of C235, C241, C244, C246,
M8380*1
C247, C249, C251, C252 and C254
M8381*1 Operation status of C236
M8382*1 Operation status of C237, C242 and C245
Operation status of C238, C248, C248(OP), Software Hardware
M8383*1 Operation status C250, C253 and C255 counter counter
M8384*1 Operation status of C239 and C243
M8385*1 Operation status of C240
M8386*1 Operation status of C244(OP)
M8387*1 Operation status of C245(OP)
*1. To be cleared when the device turns RUN from STOP.
178
11
11.11.2 [Function switching] switching of logic of external reset input signal
Counters
High-Speed
The external reset input for the counters C241 to C245, C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 resets the counters
when it is turned ON. If the logic is inverted by the following program, the counters can be reset by turning
OFF the input.
Counter No.
Inversion of logic of external reset input
Details of change
12
signal
External Wiring
M8388
M8389 The logic of external reset input is inverted to
C241 to C245
reset the counters when the input is turned OFF.
C247 to C250
(The logic for all applicable counter numbers is
C252 to C255
C253 inverted.)
K 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Cautions in inverting the logic of the external reset input signal
Although C253 is a hardware counter, it is switched to a software counter by inverting the logic of the external
reset input signal.
11.11.3 [Function switching] switching of allocation and functions of input terminals 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
When the software counters C244, C245, C248 and C253 are combined with the following special auxiliary
relays, the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed.
Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters.
Counter No. When used as hardware counter Details of change
M8388 • The count input terminal is changed from X000 to

15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
M8390 X006.
C244(OP) • Reset input is not given.
• Start input is not given.
C244
K • The counter functions as a hardware counter.
M8388 • The count input terminal is changed from X001 to 16

M8391 X007.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
C245(OP) • Reset input is not given.
• Start input is not given.
C245
K • The counter functions as a hardware counter.
M8388
M8392
17
• Reset input is not given.
Options
Units and
Other Extension
C248(OP)
• The counter functions as a hardware counter.
C248
K
M8388
M8392
• Reset input is not given.
18
C253(OP)
Display Module
• The counter functions as a software counter.

C253
K
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
179
11.11.4 [Function switching] procedures for using 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to
C255 in 4 edge count mode
The 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 are in the 1 edge count mode. The counters can be
operated in the 4 edge count mode by programming as shown below.
Counter No. To use 4 edge count 2-phase 2-input counter Details of change
M8000
M8198
C251
C251 1 edge count (before change)
K
Phase A
M8000 +1 +1
M8198 Phase B
C252 Up-counting
C252
K
Phase A
M8000 -1 -1
M8199
Phase B
C253 Down-counting
C253
K
M8000 4 edge count (after change)

M8199
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1
M8388 Phase A
C253(OP) M8392
Phase B
C253 +1 +1 +1 +1
K Up-counting
M8000 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
M8198 Phase A
C254
C254 Phase B
K -1 -1 -1 -1
Down-counting
M8000
M8199
C255
C255
K
180
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 12 External Wiring Procedures
11
Counters
High-Speed
12. External Wiring Procedures
12
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
External Wiring
1) An emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for opposite movements, such as normal 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
3) The output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/ 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
a rule, lay the control line at least 100mm(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line. 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
connections.
17
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Options
Units and
Other Extension
burnt out.
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
181
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
This chapter explains the procedures for wiring the output terminals.
• Wiring procedures
• Procedures for cabling according to shape of output terminal
• Output wiring procedures
182
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 12.1 Sink and Source Output (Transistor)
11
12.1 Sink and Source Output (Transistor)
Counters
High-Speed
FX2N Series input/output powered extension units/blocks of transistor sink and source output types are
available.
1. Differences in circuit 12
• Sink output [-common]
External Wiring
Output to make load current flow into the output (Y) terminal is
called sink output. Load
Y
13
COM
Various Uses
Wiring for
Fuse DC
power
supply
• Source output [+common]

Output to make load current flow out of the output (Y) terminal is
called source output.
Load
Y
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
+V
Fuse DC
power
supply 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
183
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 12.2 External Wiring for Relay Output
12.2 External Wiring for Relay Output

This section explains the relay output specifications (main unit) and external wiring.
• For the main unit, refer to Subsection 12.2.1 "Specifications," Subsection 12.2.3 "Handling of relay output,"
Subsection 12.2.4 "Cautions in external wiring" and Subsection 12.2.5 "Examples of wiring" in this section.
• For the input/output powered extension units/blocks, refer to Subsection 12.2.3 "Handling of relay output"
and Subsection 12.2.4 "Cautions in external wiring" in this section. For their specifications and examples of
wiring, refer to the specification for each model.
→ For the specifications on the input/output powered extension unit, refer to Chapter 15.
→ For the specifications on the input/output extension block, refer to Chapter 16.
12.2.1 Output specifications (main unit)
Relay output specifications

Item
Number of output points 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points
Fixed terminal
Output connecting type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)
block (M3 screw)
Output form Relay
30V DC or less or 240V AC or less
External power supply
(250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)
2 A/point
The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the
following value.
Resistance → For details on the common terminal for each model, refer to
load the terminal block layout.
Max. load • 1 output point/common terminal: 2 A or less
80 VA
Inductive
→ For the approximate life, refer to Subsection 12.2.2.
load
→ For cautions on external wiring, refer to Subsection 12.2.4.
Min. load 5V DC, 2mA (reference value)
Open circuit leakage
−
current
Response OFF ON Approx. 10ms
time ON OFF Approx. 10ms
Circuit insulation Mechanical insulation
Display of output operation LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil.
Load
Y
DC power
supply
COM
Fuse
Output circuit Load
configuration Y
External
power supply
COM
Fuse
Number of output points per common terminal

• On FX3U-16M , one common terminal is used for one output point.
• On models other than FX3U-16M , one common terminal is used for four or eight output points.
184
11
12.2.2 Contact life of relay output contact
Counters
High-Speed
500,000 times at 20 VA.
Test condition: On for 1 sec and off for 1 sec 12
External Wiring
0.2A/100V AC
20VA 3,000,000 times S-K10 to S-K95
0.1A/200V AC
35VA
0.35A/100V AC
1,000,000 times S-K100 to S-K150
13
0.17A/200V AC
Various Uses
Wiring for
0.8A/100V AC
80VA 200,000 times S-K180,S-K400
0.4A/200V AC
If rush overcurrent is shut off even under the above conditions, the life of the relay contact is considerably
decreased. 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
12.2.3 Handling of relay output
1. Output terminal
Load
One common terminal is used for 1, 4 or 8 relay output points. Y 0
The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit Y 1
15
voltage systems (for example, 200V AC, 100V AC and 24V
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Fuse 24V DC
DC). COM1
Load
Y 4
Y 5
Fuse 100V AC
COM2
16
PLC
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
2. External power supply
Use an external power supply of 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not
comply with CE, UL or cUL standards) for loads.
3. Circuit insulation 17
The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and
Options
Units and
Other Extension
contact. The common terminal blocks are separated from one another.
4. Display of operation
When power is applied to the output relay coil, the LED is lit, and the output contact is turned on.
5. Response time 18
The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is
Display Module
turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx. 10ms.
6. Output current
At a circuit voltage of 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or cUL
standards), a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80VA or less (100V AC or 200V AC) can 19
be driven.
Terminal Block
→ For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load, refer to Subsection 12.2.2.
When an inductive load is switched, connect a diode (for commutation) or a surge absorber in parallel with
this load.
DC circuit Diode (for commutation)
AC circuit Surge absorber 20
Cassette
Memory
7. Open circuit leakage current

When the output contact is turned off, no current leaks.
185
12.2.4 Cautions on external wiring
1. Protection circuit for load short-circuiting

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could Load
cause burnout at the PCB. To prevent this, a protection fuse Y 0
should be inserted at the output. Fuse
COM1
PLC
2. Contact protection circuit for inductive loads

The relay output circuit in the terminal block is not equipped with a protection circuit.
Therefore, when an inductive load is connected. For the expected product life and noise reduction, it is
recommended to insert a contact protection circuit.
1) DC circuit
Connect a diode in parallel with the load.
The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following Inductive load
specifications. PLC output
contact Diode
Item Guide
(for commutation)
Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage
Forward current Load current or more
2) AC circuit
Connect the surge absorber shown below (combined CR
components such as a surge killer and spark killer, etc.), Inductive load
parallel to the load. PLC output
Item Guide contact Surge
absorber
240V AC or less
Rated voltage (250V AC or less when the unit does not
comply with CE, UL or cUL standards)
Electrostatic capacity Approx. 0.1µF
Resistance value Approx. 100 to 120Ω
Reference
Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name
Marcon Electronics Co., Ltd. RFD2E104K Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201
3. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a Inter- Limit of normal
hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously, lock rotation
an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC output
PLC’s internal programs as shown to the right. contact
PLC output Limit of reverse
contact rotation
4. In-phase
PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase"
manner. *
Bad
*
*
Good
*
186
11
Counters
High-Speed
AC power supply Fuse* Main unit
100 to 240V COM1 relay output
Y0
Y1 12
Y2
External Wiring
Power ON
Y3
Load (Vacant terminal)
PL Fuse*
MC
COM2
MC Y4
Emergency Y5 13
stop Y6
Various Uses
Wiring for
MC MC Y7
Fuse* Output extension block

COM1 relay output 14
DC power Y0
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
supply
Y7
Fuse*
COM2
Y0 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Y7
Fuse* Input/output powered

COM1 extension unit 16
Y0 relay output
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Y1
Y2
Y3
Fuse*
COM5 17
Y0
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Y7
18
Power supply for load Output extension block
Display Module
Fuse*
connected to PLC output COM1 relay output
Y0
For details on emergency stop
operation, refer to "DESIGN
Y7
PRECAUTIONS" at PL field. Load
Fuse*
(Vacant terminal) 19
COM2
Terminal Block
* The output circuit of this PLC does not have a Y0

built-in fuse.
Provide a fuse suitable to each load to Y7
prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit Load (Vacant terminal)
board caused by output element fracture due
to load short-circuiting. 20
Cassette
Memory
Cautions in wiring
Do not wire the vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product.
187
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 12.3 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type
12.3 External Wiring of Transistor Output (Sink/Source) Type

This section explains the handling and external wiring of transistor output.
• There are not transistor output type of main units.
Select from the input/output powered extension units/blocks.
• For the input/output powered extension units/blocks, refer to Subsection 12.3.1 "Handling of Transistor
Output" and Subsection 12.3.2 "Cautions on External Wiring" in this section. For the specifications and
examples of wiring, refer to the specifications for each model.
→ For the specifications on the input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.
→ For the specifications on the input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.
12.3.1 Handling of transistor output
1. Output terminals
4 or 8 transistor output points are covered by one common terminal.
Sink output
FX2N-16EYT (sink output)
Load current flows into the output (Y) terminals.
Connect each COM (number) terminal to the minus side of Load
Y0
the load power supply. Y1
The COM terminals are not connected internally. Fuse DC power
supply
COM1
Load
Y0
Y1
Fuse DC power
supply
COM2
PLC
Source output
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (source output)
Load current flows out of the output (Y) terminals.
Connect each +V (number) terminal to the plus side of the Load
Y0
load power supply. Y1
The +V terminals are not connected internally. Fuse DC power
supply
+V0
Load
Y0
Y1
Fuse DC power
supply
+V1
PLC
2. External power supply

For driving the load, use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30V DC that can output current two or more times
the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit.
3. Insulation of circuit
The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler.
The common blocks are separated from one another.
4. Display of operation
The input/output powered extension units and output extension blocks have LEDs for displaying the operation
condition. When any photocoupler operates, the corresponding LED is lit.
If the display module (optional) is mounted on the main unit, the condition can be monitored on the screen.
188
11
5. Response time
Counters
High-Speed
The time from when the PLC drives (or shuts down) the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on (or off) is
shown in the following table.
Classification Response time Load current
Output extension block
0.2ms or less 24V DC 100mA*1 12
External Wiring
*1. The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads.
PLC
For example, under a load of 24V DC 40mA, the Dummy
Fuse Load resistance
response time is approx. 0.3ms. When response
performance is required under light loads, provide a Y
dummy resistance as shown to the right to increase
the load current.
13
COM1
Various Uses
Wiring for
6. Output current
The maximum resistance loads for the input/output powered extension units and output extension blocks are
shown in the following table. 14
The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx. 1.5V.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
When driving a semiconductor element, carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied
element.
Model Output current Limitation
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
Input/output powered FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
The total load current of resistance loads per 15
common terminal should be the following value.
extension units
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
FX2N-32ET 4 points/common: 0.8A or less
0.5A/point
FX2N-48ET 8 points/common: 1.6A or less
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL
For FX2N-16EYT-C:
Extension blocks FX2N-16EYT 16 points/common: 1.6A or less
FX2N-16EYT-C 0.3A/point 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
7. Open circuit leakage current
0.1mA or less
12.3.2 External wiring precautions

17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
1. Protection circuit for load short-circuits
cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent Y
this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. Fuse
Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger
than the total rated fuse capacity. COM1 18
PLC
Display Module
2. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a Interlock
hazardous condition could result if switched ON simultaneously,
an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the
Limit of normal
rotation
19
PLC’s internal programs, as shown to the right.
Terminal Block
Limit of reverse PLC output

rotation element
20
Cassette
Memory
189

Inductive
When an inductive load is connected, connect a diode (for load
commutation) in parallel with the load as necessary. Y
Fuse
The diode (for commutation) must comply with the following
specifications.
Item Guide COM1
PLC
Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage
190
11
Counters
High-Speed
1. Transistor output (sink)
AC power supply Main unit
100 to 240V COM1 relay output 12
Y0
External Wiring
Power ON Y3
For the relay output wiring of (Vacant terminal)
PL the main unit, refer to
MC Subsection 12.2.5 "Relay COM2
MC
Output." Y4 13
Emergency
Various Uses
Wiring for
stop Y7
(Vacant terminal)
MC MC

Fuse* transistor output (sink) 14
COM1
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Y0
DC power
supply Y7
Load
Fuse*
COM2 15
Y0
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Y7
Load
Input/output powered extension unit 16

transistor output (sink)
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Fuse*
COM1
Y0
Y7
Load
Fuse* 17
COM2
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Power supply for load
Y0
connected to PLC output
For details on emergency Y7

Load
stop operation, refer to
"DESIGN PRECAUTIONS" at
PL field.
18
Display Module
* The output circuit of this PLC does not Fuse* transistor output (sink)
have a built-in fuse. COM1
prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit
board caused by output element fracture Y7
due to load short-circuiting. Load 19
Terminal Block
WIRING PRECAUTIONS

Doing so may damage the product. 20
Cassette
Memory
191
2. Transistor output (source)

Y0
Power ON Y3
For the relay output wiring of (Vacant terminal)
PL the main unit, refer to
MC COM2
subsection 12.2.5 "Relay
Output." Y4
MC
Emergency
stop Y7
(Vacant terminal)
MC MC

Fuse* transistor output (source)
+V0
Y0
DC power
supply Y7
Load
Fuse*
+V1
Y0
Y7
Load

transistor output (source)
Fuse*
+V0
Y0
Y7
Load
Fuse*
+V1
Y0
For details on emergency Y7

stop operation, refer to Load
"DESIGN PRECAUTIONS"
at PL field.
* The output circuit of this PLC does not transistor output (source)
Fuse*
have a built-in fuse. +V0
board caused by output element fracture Y7
due to load short-circuiting. Load
WIRING PRECAUTIONS

192
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 12.4 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type
11
12.4 External Wiring for Triac (SSR) Output Type
Counters
High-Speed
This section explains the procedures for handling triac output and external wiring.
• There are not triac output type of main units.
Select from the input/output powered extension units/blocks.
• For the input/output powered extension units/blocks, refer to Subsection 12.4.1 "Handling of Triac Output"
12
External Wiring
and Subsection 12.4.2 "Cautions in External Wiring." For the specifications and wiring examples, refer to
the specifications for each model.
→ For specifications on the input/output powered extension units, refer to Chapter 15.
→ For specifications on the input/output extension blocks, refer to Chapter 16.
12.4.1 Handling of triac output 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
1. Output terminals
On the triac output type units/blocks, one common terminal is FX2N-16EYS
used for 4 or 8 points. Load
Y0
Therefore, the common terminal blocks can drive loads of Y1 14
different circuit voltage systems (for example, 100V AC and Fuse 100VAC
U
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
200V AC). COM1
Load
Y0
Y1 U
Fuse 200VAC
COM2
PLC
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2. Circuit insulation
The PLC internal circuit and the output element (triac) are insulated with a photo-thyristor.
The common terminal blocks are separate from one another.
3. Display of operation 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
When the photo-thyristor is driven, the LED is lit, and the output triac is turned on.
4. Response time
The time from when the photo-thyristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is
turned off is 1ms or less and 10ms or less, respectively.
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
5. Output current
The max current per output point is 0.3A. However, to restrict temperature rise, the max current per one
output from four points should be 0.8A (average per point is 0.2A).
When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently, the root-mean-square current should be
0.2A or less.
<Example> 18
0.4A
Display Module
4A
42 × 0.02 + 0.42 × 0.7
= 0.2A
0.02 + 0.7 + 10
0.02 0.7 10
sec sec sec
6. Open circuit leakage current 19

Terminal Block
A C-R absorber is connected for turn-off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC.
Therefore, when the circuit opens, a leakage current will be 1mA at 100V AC and 2mA at 200V AC.
Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open, small-size relays and micro
current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the triac output is turned off.
Therefore, use a load of 0.4VA or more at 100V AC or 1.6VA or more at 200V AC. If the load is less than this 20
value, connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load.
Cassette
Memory
→ For the connection of the surge absorber, refer to Subsection 12.4.2 "Cautions in External Wiring."
193

cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent Y
this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the output. Fuse
COM1
PLC
2. Micro current load

The PLC’s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn- Micro current load
off C-R absorber. When a micro current load is connected, be
sure to connect a surge absorber parallel to the load.
In this manual, the term "micro current load" refers to a load of Surge
0.4VA/100V AC or less, and 1.6VA/200V AC or less. absorber
Item Standard
Rated voltage 250V AC
Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1µF
Reference
3. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where a Inter- Limit of normal
hazardous condition could result if switched ON lock rotation Normal
simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided for rotation
interlocking the PLC’s internal programs as shown to the Reverse
right. Limit of reverse rotation
PLC output rotation
element
4. In-phase
PLC output contacts (*) should be used in an "in-phase" *
manner.
Bad *
*
Good *
194
11
Counters
High-Speed
Y0
12
External Wiring
Power ON Y3
For the relay output wiring of
(Vacant terminal)
the main unit, refer to
PL Subsection 12.2.5 "Relay COM2
MC
Output." Y4
MC
Emergency
Y7
13
stop
Various Uses
Wiring for
(Vacant terminal)
MC MC

Fuse* triac output
COM1
Y0
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
U
Y7
Load
U
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
For details on emergency Input/output powered extension unit
stop operation, refer to triac output
Fuse*
"DESIGN PRECAUTIONS" COM1
at PL field. Y0 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
U
Y3
Load
U
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Fuse* triac output
COM1
Y0
* The output circuit of this PLC does not
have a built-in fuse. U 18
Display Module
Provide a fuse suitable to each load to

Y7
board caused by output element fracture Load
due to load short-circuiting. U
19
Terminal Block
WIRING PRECAUTIONS

20
Cassette
Memory
195
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses
13. Examples of Wiring for Various Uses
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
connections.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
196
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring
11
Counters
High-Speed
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
External Wiring
burnt out.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there is no loose wires. 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
- Tightening torque should be between 0.5 to 0.8 N•m. 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring
The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions.
17
• The input/output numbers are the actual numbers on the program. (They may differ from the numbers
Options
Units and
Other Extension
shown on the product terminals.)
• Some examples show wiring to be used for transistor output. They are examples of wiring for the transistor
output types of input/output powered extension units/blocks.
• Product input/output specifications
Check the product input/output specifications when using any example of wiring. 18
- Products only for sink input and products both for sink input and for source input are available.
Display Module
- Products for sink output and products for source output are available.
• The examples of programming (applied instructions) are given based on the allocation of the input/output
numbers for wiring.
→ For the applied instructions, refer to the Programming Manual.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
197
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]
13.2 Digital Switch [DSW Instructions (FNC72)/BIN Instructions (FNC19)]
13.2.1 When DSW instructions are used

Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4-digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below.
1. Main unit + input/output powered extension unit/block

Example of program
M8000
DSW X010 Y050 D100 K1
Examples of wiring

When the main unit and a transistor output (sink) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used
Digital 100 101 102 103

switch of
BCD
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary.
*1
1 2 4 8 *2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 COM 24+ X
Main unit Output extension block
Transistor output (sink)
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
100 101 102 103
*1 To use the input terminal (X) of the input/output extension unit, wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line.
*2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output extension units (ex.: FX2N-32ET). Output extension
blocks do not have the terminals.

When the main unit and a transistor output (source) type input/output powered extension unit/block are used
Digital 100 101 102 103

switch of
BCD
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary.
*1
1 2 4 8 *2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 S/S 0V 24V X
Transistor output (source)
+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
100 101 102 103
*2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input/output extension units (ex.: FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL). Output
extension blocks do not have the terminals.
198
11
2. Input/output powered extension unit
Counters
High-Speed
Example of program
M8000
DSW X060 Y050 D100 K1
12
External Wiring
Examples of wiring

When an input /output powered extension unit/block with transistor-output (sink) is used with main unit.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Digital 100 101 102 103
switch of
BCD
0.1A 50V
diode is
14
necessary.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
1 2 4 8
COM X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067
First input group Input/output powered
extension unit
FX2N-32ET 15
FX2N-48ET
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
100 101 102 103
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
When an input /output powered extension unit/block with transistor-output (source) is used with main unit.
17
Digital 100 101 102 103
Options
Units and
Other Extension
switch of
BCD
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary. 18
Display Module
1 2 4 8
S/S 0V 24V X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067
First input group Input/output powered
extension unit
Transistor output (source) FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL 19
Terminal Block
100 101 102 103
20
Cassette
Memory
199
13.2.2 When BIN instructions are used

Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2-digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below.
Example of program
M8000
BIN K2X010 D102
Examples of wiring
When a sink and source input type unit is used

100 101
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017
Main unit and input/output powered extension units
When a sink input type unit is used

100 101
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
COM X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017
Input/output powered extension units
100 101
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017
200
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.3 10-key Input [TKY Instructions (FNC70)]
11
13.3 10-key Input [TKY Instructions (FNC70)]
Counters
High-Speed
This section gives examples of wiring for capturing values from ten-key pad to D100 using TKY instructions.
Example of program
M8000 12
TKY X000 D100 M10
External Wiring
Examples of wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
14
S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,

15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
COM X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011

16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output

17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011 18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
201
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.4 16-key Input [HKY Instructions (FNC71)]
13.4 16-key Input [HKY Instructions (FNC71)]

This section gives examples of wiring for capturing values (0 to 9) and function keys (A to F) from 16 switches
(16 keys) to D100 and M0 to M5 using HKY instructions. (Hexadecimal values can be captured.)

Example of program
M8000
HKY X010 Y050 D100 M0
Examples of wiring
External wiring
C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
*1
1 2 4 8 *2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 COM 24+ X
Input/output powered extension unit/block
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053

External wiring
C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
*1
1 2 4 8 *2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 S/S 0V 24V X
Input/output powered extension unit/block
+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
202
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.4 16-key Input [HKY Instructions (FNC71)]
11
Counters
High-Speed
Example of program
M8000
HKY X060 Y050 D100 M0
12
External Wiring
Examples of wiring

External wiring 13
C D E F
Various Uses
Wiring for
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
0 1 2 3
COM X060 X061 X062 X063

Input/output powered FX2N-32ET
15
extension unit FX2N-48ET
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
When a source input type unit is used
External wiring
C D E F 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
18
Display Module
0 1 2 3
S/S 0V 24V X060 X061 X062 X063

Input/output powered
extension unit
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
19
Terminal Block

+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053
20
Cassette
Memory
203
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.5 Matrix Input [MTR Instructions (FNC52)]
13.5 Matrix Input [MTR Instructions (FNC52)]

This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON/OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37, M40 to
M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions.

Example of program
M8000
MTR X010 Y050 M30 K3
Examples of wiring
M50
M51
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
M57
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary. X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
*1
*2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017 COM 24+ X
extension unit/block
Main unit
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052

M50
M51
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
M57
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary. X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17

M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
*1
*2
S/S 0V 24V X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017 S/S 0V 24V X
extension unit/block
Main unit
+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052
204
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.5 Matrix Input [MTR Instructions (FNC52)]
11
Counters
High-Speed
Example of program
M8000
MTR X060 Y050 M30 K3
12
Examples of wiring
External Wiring
M50
13
M51
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
M57
Various Uses
Wiring for
0.1A 50V
diode is X61 X62 X63 X64 X65 X66 X67
necessary.
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
X61 X62 X63 X64 X65 X66 X67 14
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
COM X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067
Input/output powered extension unit FX2N-32ET
FX2N-48ET 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
COM1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 Y054 Y055 Y056 Y057
In the case of source wiring 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
When a source input type unit is used
M50
M51
M52
M53
M54
M55
M56
M57
0.1A 50V
diode is
necessary.
X61 X62 X63 X64 X65 X66 X67 17
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M46
M47
Options
Units and
Other Extension
X61 X62 X63 X64 X65 X66 X67
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
18
Display Module
S/S 0V 24V X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067
Input/output powered extension unit FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
+V0 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 Y054 Y055 Y056 Y057 19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
205
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.6 7-segment Display [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]
13.6 7-segment Display [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions

(FNC18)]
13.6.1 When SEGL instructions are used

This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4-digit 7-segment
display.
1. Input/output powered extension unit/block

Example of program
M8000
SEGL D100 Y020 K1
Examples of wiring

7-segment display to be used for sink wiring
(in the case of transistor output)
FX2N-32ET PLC 7-segment display
FX2N-48ET
+
COM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103 Y Signal Internal
circuit
COM1 -
103 102 101 100
1 *
2
4
8
* Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder.
In the case of source wiring 7-segment display to be used for source wiring
(in the case of transistor output)
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL PLC 7-segment display
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
+V0 +
+V0 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103 Y Signal Internal
circuit
-
103 102 101 100
1 *
2
4
8
* Use a 7-segment display with a latch and a built-in BCD decoder.
206
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 13.6 7-segment Display [SEGL Instructions (FNC74)/BCD Instructions (FNC18)]
11
13.6.2 When BCD instructions are used
Counters
High-Speed
This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2-digit 7-segment
display.
1. Main unit and input/output powered extension units

12
Example of program
External Wiring
M8000
BCD D100 K2Y020
Examples of wiring 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
7-segment display to be used for sink
wiring (in the case of transistor output)

FX2N-32ET PLC 7-segment display
FX2N-48ET
+ 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
COM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027
Y Signal
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
COM1 -
1248 1248
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
7-segment display to be used for source
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
wiring (in the case of transistor output)

FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL PLC 7-segment display
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
+V0 +
+V0 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027
17
Y Signal
Options
Units and
Other Extension
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
-
1248 1248
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
207
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting
14. Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and

Troubleshooting
STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, externally cut off all phases of the power supply.
Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.
• Correctly connect the battery for memory backup.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat or short-circuit the battery. Do not throw it into the fire.
Doing so may rupture or ignite it.
• Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output, running or stopping,
carefully read the manual, and sufficiently ensure the safety.
An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents.
• Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment (such as the programming tool and
GOT) at the same time.
Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC.

PRECAUTIONS
• Before attaching or detaching the memory cassette, turn off power. If it is attached or detached while PLC's
power is on, the data in the memory may be destroyed, or the memory cassette may be damaged.
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions or fire.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable, turn off power.
Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions.
Failure to do so may cause device failure or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards and special adapters
- Extension blocks, connector conversion adapter and FX Series terminal block
DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS
• Please contact a company certified in the disposal of electronic waste for environmentally safe recycling and
disposal of your device.
TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS
• Before transporting the PLC, turn on power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off and check the battery
life.
If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted, the backed up data may be unstable
during transportation.
• The PLC is precision equipment. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than that is specified in the manual
(section 4.1) of the PLC main unit. Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC.
After transportation, check the operations of the PLC.
208
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.1 Preparation for Test Operation
11
14.1 Preparation for Test Operation
Counters
High-Speed
14.1.1 Preliminary inspection [power OFF]
Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal, contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire, or 12
short-circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage.
External Wiring
Before applying power, check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input/
output devices are wired properly.
Notes
The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the
following procedures. 13
1) Remove all input/output wires and power supply wires from the PLC.
Various Uses
Wiring for
2) Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals (power supply terminal, input terminals and output
terminals) except the ground terminal.
For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal, refer to the generic specifications for the product.
3) Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground
terminal. 14
Dielectric withstand voltage: 1.5kV AC or 500V for 1min (The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage.)
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Insulation resistance: 500V DC / 5MΩ or more
14.1.2 Connection to built-in programming connector

When connecting the communication cable of a peripheral device, align the positioning mark of the cable with 15
that of the main unit.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Programming
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
FX3U-48M
connector
FX
3U
-48
M IN 0
1
17
10 2
11 3
12 4
13 5
14 6
15 7
16 20
17 21
22
23
Positioning mark
24
25
OU 0 26
PO 27
Options
Units and
Other Extension
T 1 PWO
10 2 EWRER
11 3
12 4 RUR
13 5 NUN
14 6
15 7 BA B
16 20 TTAT
17 21 E E T
22 RR R
23 ORROR
24
25
26
27
Communication cable
Positioning
mark
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
209
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.1 Preparation for Test Operation
14.1.3 Writing of program and program check [power ON and PLC stopped]
1 Turn on the PLC power.

Make sure that the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP, and turn the power on.
2 Check the program.

Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the
programming tool.
3 Transfer the sequence program.

Write the program to the memory cassette with the programming tool.
Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to
OFF (shown right). PROTECT
→ For the details of handling of the memory cassette, refer to Chapter switch
20.
4 Verify the sequence program.

Verify that the program has been correctly written to the memory cassette.
5 Execute PLC diagnosis.

Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool.
→ For the details of the PLC diagnosis with the display module or GX Developer, refer to Section 14.6.
210
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]
11
14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]
Counters
High-Speed
14.2.1 Methods of running and stopping
FX3U PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods. 12
Two of the methods can be combined.
External Wiring
1. Operation with built-in RUN/STOP switch
Operate the RUN/STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and stop the
PLC (refer to the right figure).
Turn the switch to RUN, and the PLC will start. Turn it to STOP, and the PLC will stop.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
2. Running and stopping with general-purpose input (RUN terminal)
Operation with one switch (RUN)
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit (X000 to X007 on a 16-point type unit) can be used
as a RUN input terminal by parameter setting (refer to the figure below).
When the specified input terminal is turned on, the PLC starts. When it is turned off, the PLC is started or
stopped depending on the state of the built-in RUN/STOP switch.
→ For details, refer to "Kinds of Parameters and Setting" in Programming Manual.
15
General-purpose General-purpose
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
input terminal input terminal
RUN specified as RUN RUN specified as RUN
input by parameter input by parameter
S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002 S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002
Main unit (sink input) Main unit (source input)
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Operation with two switches (RUN and STOP)
The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches.
For this operation, a sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary.
→ For details, refer to "Operations of Special Devices" in Programming Manual.
General-purpose General-purpose 17
input terminal input terminal
Options
Units and
Other Extension
RUN STOP specified as RUN RUN STOP specified as RUN
input by parameter input by parameter
S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002 S/S 0V 24V X000 X001 X002
Main unit (sink input) Main unit (source input)
18
3. Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software
Display Module
The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control (remote RUN/
STOP function).
However, when power is reapplied, the remote RUN/STOP function is disabled. The RUN/STOP status is
then determined by the RUN/STOP switch or RUN terminal.
The remote operation for starting and stopping from the programming software is used in combination with 19
the built-in RUN/STOP switch.
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
211
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.2 Running and Stopping Procedures [Power ON]
14.2.2 Use of several running/stopping methods
1. When the built-in RUN/STOP switch and the general-purpose RUN terminal are used
(without remote running/stopping operation from the programming software)
The RUN/STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table.
Condition of built-in Condition of general-purpose input terminal
Status of PLC
RUN/STOP switch specified as RUN terminal by parameter
OFF RUN
RUN
ON RUN
OFF STOP
STOP
ON RUN
Use either built-in RUN/STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal.
(When specifying the general-purpose terminal as the RUN terminal, always set the built-in RUN/STOP
switch to STOP.)
2. When the remote running/stopping operation from the programming software is performed
For this operation, keep both the built-in RUN/STOP switch and the general-purpose input RUN terminal in
the STOP position.
If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built-in
RUN/STOP switch or the general-purpose input RUN terminal, the PLC will be restored to the running status
by giving the RUN command from the programming software. This can also be accomplished by setting the
built-in RUN/STOP switch or the general-purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN.
212
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]
11
14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]
Counters
High-Speed
14.3.1 Self-diagnostic function
When the PLC's power is turned on, its self-diagnostic function starts automatically. If there are no problems 12
with the hardware, parameters or program, the PLC will start and the RUN command (refer to Section 14.2) is
External Wiring
given (RUN LED is lit).
If any problems are found, the "ERROR" LED flashes or lights.
14.3.2 Test functions

Functions of the programming tool to turn on/off the PLC devices and change the current values/settings are
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below.
: Effective : Conditionally effective − : Ineffective
In running In stopped
Item
status status
Forcible ON/OFF*1
Devices used in program *1 *1 14
Devices not in use
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Change of current values of timers, counters, Devices used in program *2*3 *3
data registers, extension registers, extension
Devices not in use *3 *3
file registers and file registers*4
When the program memory is the built-in
RAM 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
When the program memory is in the memory
Change of settings of timers and counters*5 cassette and the PROTECT switch is on
− −
When the program memory is in the memory

−
cassette and the PROTECT switch is off
*1. Forcible ON/OFF

- The forcible ON/OFF function is effective on the input relays (X), output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
(S), timers (T) and counters (C). On the display module, the function cannot be operated for the input relays
(X).
- The forcible ON/OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan.
While the PLC is running, the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers (T),
counters (C), data registers (D), index registers (Z and V) and extension registers (R) and in controlling the
SET/RST circuit and self-retaining circuit. (The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the
timers are driven by the program.)
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
- The results of forcible ON/OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for
devices not used in the program are retained.
However, the results of the operation performed for the input relays (X) are not retained because the relays
refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state. (They are updated according to the input terminal
conditions.)
*2. Since the current values may be changed according to the MOV instruction in the program and the operation
results, the most recently obtained values are retained.
18
Display Module
*3. Only display modules can change the current value by the extension file register test function.
*4. The current values of the file registers stored in the program memory cannot be monitored or tested on the display
module.
*5. Change of timer and counter settings
The settings of the timers (T) and counters (C) can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
213
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.3 Operation and Test [Power ON and PLC Running]
14.3.3 Program modification function

The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as shown below.
: Effective − : Ineffective
In running In stopped
Item
status status
Batch writing of file registers (D) and extension file registers (ER) −
Partial modification of program *1
Writing of program to PLC
Modification of whole program (batch writing) −
Writing of parameters to PLC −
Writing of comments to PLC −
*1. Since the writing function is used during running, the programming tool must be applicable to the writing function
white running, such as GX Developer.
214
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection
11
14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection
Counters
High-Speed
This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life.
However, the batteries and output relays (points of contact) have a limited life expectancy.
14.4.1 Procedures for checking model name 12
External Wiring
The model name of the main unit can be checked on the nameplate on the right side. After extension devices
are connected, the nameplate cannot be seen. Check the model name in the following places.
When the terminal block cover (output side) When the top cover is removed
is opened
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Model name
Model name
(abbreviation) 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Output form R: Relay output
15
14.4.2 Periodic inspection - battery life, etc.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
1. Battery
Part Life
Model FX3U-32BL battery

Standard life: 5 years (at ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F)) 16
[Guarantee for 1 year]
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Standard life of FX3U-32BL: 5 years (at ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F))
[Free guarantee period: 1 year after delivery or up to 18 months after manufacture]
Standard frequency of replacement of FX3U-32BL: 4 to 5 years

Although the standard life is 5 years, the life varies depending on the ambient temperature. Replace the 17
battery every 4 to 5 years. Batteries discharge spontaneously. Purchase the battery in advance in
Options
Units and
Other Extension
consideration of the frequency of replacement shown above.
2. Other devices
When inspecting the battery, check the following points.
• Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or 18
direct sunlight.
Display Module
• Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel.
• Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
215
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection
14.4.3 Maintenance - life of relay contacts
1. Main unit, input/output powered extension units and output extension blocks
Applicable models: FX3U-16MR/ES, FX3U-32MR/ES, FX3U-48MR/ES, FX3U-64MR/ES, FX3U-80MR/ES,
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL, FX2N-32ER,
FX2N-48ER, FX2N-16EYR, FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL
500,000 times at 20 VA.
Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF

0.2A/100V AC
20VA 3,000,000 times S-K10 to S-K95
0.1A/200V AC
0.35A/100V AC
35VA 1,000,000 times S-K100 to S-K150
0.17A/200V AC
0.8A/100V AC
80VA 200,000 times S-K180, S-K400
0.4A/200V AC
2. FX Series terminal blocks

Applicable models: FX-16EYR-TB
500,000 times at 35 VA.
Test condition: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec.OFF

0.35A/100V AC S-K10 to S-K150
35VA 3,000,000 times
0.17A/200V AC S-N10 to S-N35
0.8A/100V AC
80VA 1,000,000 times S-K180 to S-K400
0.4A/200V AC
1.2A/100V AC
120VA 200,000 times S-K600, S-K800
0.6A/200V AC
14.4.4 Procedures for replacing battery

When the battery voltage drops while the PLC power is on, the "BATT" LED on the panel is lit in red, and
M8005 and M8006 (latch) are turned on.
The memory can be retained for about one month after the lamps turn on. However, the operators may not
immediately find the lamps to be on. Prepare a new battery promptly, and replace the battery with the new
one.
→ For details on the specifications and functions of the battery, refer to Chapter 21 "Battery (FX3U-
32BL)."
216
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs
11
14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs
Counters
High-Speed
When trouble occurs, check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC.
14.5.1 POWER LED [on/flashing/off]

12
External Wiring
State of
State of PLC Remedies
LED
Power of the specified voltage is
On being correctly supplied to the power The power supply is normal.
supply terminal.
One of the following problems may 13
have occurred. • Check the supply voltage.
Various Uses
Wiring for
• Power of the specified voltage and • After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable, re-
Flashing current is not being supplied to the apply power to the PLC, and check for changes in the state. If
power supply terminal. no improvement is obtained, consult your local Mitsubishi
• External wiring is incorrect. Electric distributer.
• Internal error of PLC
One of the following problems may • If the power is not off, check the power supply and the power
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
have occurred. supply route.
• The power supply is off. If power is being supplied correctly, consult your local
• External wiring is incorrect. Mitsubishi Electric distributer.
Off
• Power of the specified voltage is • After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable, re-
not being supplied to the power apply power to the PLC, and check for changes in the state. If
supply terminal. no improvement is obtained, consult your local Mitsubishi 15
• The power cable is broken. Electric distributer.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
14.5.2 BATT LED [on/off]
State of
LED
State of PLC Remedies 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Immediately replace the battery. Refer to Chapter 21 "Battery
On The battery voltage is low.
(FX3U-32BL)."
The battery voltage is higher than the
Off Normal
value set with D8006.
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
217
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.5 Troubleshooting with LEDs
14.5.3 ERROR LED [on/flashing/off]
State of
State of PLC Remedies
LED
1) Stop the PLC, and re-apply power.
If ERROR LED goes off, a watchdog timer error may have
occurred. Take any of the following measures.
- Review the program.
The maximum value (D8012) of the scan time should not
exceed the setting (D8000) of the watchdog timer.
- Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse
catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan.
- Check that the frequency of the pulse (duty of 50%) input to
the high-speed counter does not exceed the specified
range.
- Add the WDT instructions.
Add some WDT instructions to the program, and reset the
A watchdog timer error may have watchdog timer several times in one scan.
On occurred, or the hardware of the PLC - Change the setting of the watchdog timer.
may be damaged. Change the watchdog timer setting (D8000) in the program
so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the
scan time (D8012).
2) Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power
supply on a desk.
If the ERROR LED goes off, noise may have affected the
PLC. Take the following measures.
- Check the ground wiring, and reexamine the wiring route
and installation location.
- Fit a noise filter onto the power supply line.
3) If the ERROR LED does not go off even after the measures
stated in (1) and (2) are taken, consult your local Mitsubishi
Electric distributer.
One of the following errors has
occurred in the PLC. Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the
programming tool.
Flashing • Parameter error
For the remedies, refer to Section 14.6 "Judgment by Error
• Syntax error
Codes and Representation of Error Codes."
• Ladder error
If the operations of the PLC are abnormal, perform PLC
No errors that stop the PLC have
Off diagnosis and program check with the programming tool.
occurred.
An I/O error, Comms.error or Runtime error may have occurred.
218
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes
11
14.6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes
Counters
High-Speed
Error codes can be checked with the programming tool or on the display module (FX3U-7DM).
14.6.1 Operation and check on display module (FX3U-7DM)

12
1) Move the cursor to "ErrorCheck" pressing the + or - button on the menu screen (shown right).
External Wiring
For the menu configuration, refer to Section 18.6.
The buttons on the menu screen work as stated below. Mo n i t o r / T e s t
Operation E r r o r Ch e c k
Operation
button L A NGU A G E
ESC The screen returns to the top screen (time display). Co n t r a s t
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
The cursor moves upward. When the button is held
for 1 second or more, the cursor moves quickly. C l o c kMe n u
-
When the cursor is in the uppermost position, the En t r yCo d e
button is ineffective. C l e a r A l l De v
The cursor moves downward. When the button is
PLC S t a t u s
held for 1 second or more, the cursor moves 14
+ quickly. S c a n T i me
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
When the cursor is in the lowermost position, the Ca s s e t t e
button is ineffective.
OK The flashing item at the cursor is selected.
2) When the OK button is pressed, an error check is performed.

The results are displayed on the error display screen (shown to the When no errors have occurred 15
right).
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
E r r o r Ch e c k
Pressing the ESC button on the menu screen cancels the operation No E r r o r
and returns the screen to the top screen (time display).
3) If some errors have occurred, the pages can be switched with the +
or - button.
Operation When one error has occurred
16
Operation
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
button E r r o r Ch e c k
ESC The screen returns to the Menu screen. M8 0 6 6 [1]
1 error Ladde r er ror [2]
Ineffective operation
or less
- Er r or code 6612 [3]
2 errors The previous page of the error display screen is
or more displayed.
17
When more than one error has
Options
Units and
Other Extension
1 error occurred
Ineffective operation
or less E r r o r Ch e c k 1 / 2 [4]
+
2 errors The following page of the error display screen is M8 0 6 0 [1]
or more displayed.
I /O er r [2]
OK The screen returns to the Menu screen.
Er r or code 1020 [3] 18
Displayed data
Display Module
- +
Displayed data
[1] Flag of occurred error
E r r o r Ch e c k 2 / 2 [4]
[2] Error name M8 0 6 3 [1]
[3] Error code L i nk er ror1 [2] 19
Number of simultaneously occurring errors
Terminal Block
[4] Er r or code 6301 [3]

(displayed only when more than one error has occurred)
4) Pressing the ESC button cancels the operation and returns the screen to the Menu screen.
20
Cassette
Memory
219
14.6.2 Operation and check by GX developer
1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC.
2 Execute the PLC diagnosis.

Click [Diagnostics] → [PLC diagnostics] on the tool menu, and the diagnosis of PLC will start.
3 Check the results of diagnosis.

Display the following window to check the errors.
<Example of error display screen>
Display of
conditions of
LEDs on FX
PLC The help function of
GX Developer opens,
and you can check
the details of the
The PLC error error code.
is displayed.
<Example of screen displayed

in normal state>
220
11
14.6.3 Representation of errors
Counters
High-Speed
Errors are represented in this manual, GX Developer, and the display module as shown in the following table.
GX Developer Display module
This manual Display in Display in
Japanese version English version
Japanese English 12
External Wiring
I/O configuration error I/O config err I/O error
PLC hardware error PLC H/W error PC H/W error
PLC/PP communication error PLC/PP comm err Comms.error
Serial communication error 1
Link error Link error1
[ch1]
13
Serial communication error 2
Link error2 Link error2
Various Uses
Wiring for
[ch2]
Parameter error Param error Parameter error
Syntax error Syntax error Grammer error
Circuit error Ladder error Ladder error
Operation error Operation err Runtime error 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
I/O refresh error − − − −
Unconnected I/O designation
− − − −
error
BFM initialization failure − − − −
− − SFB error
Special block error
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
221
14.6.4 Error Code List and Action

When a program error occurs in the PLC, the error code is stored in special data registers D8060 - D8067 and
D8438. The following actions should be followed for diagnostic errors.
Error codes in shaded columns are added in FX3U PLCs.
Error PLC operation at
Contents of error Action
code error occurrence
I/O configuration error [M8060(D8060)]
The head number of unconnected I/O device
Example: When X020 is unconnected
1 0 2 0 BCD conversion value

Unconnected I/O relay numbers are programmed.
Ex- Device number: 10 to 337
Continues The PLC continues its operation. Modify the
ample:
operation 1: Input (X), 0: Output (Y) program, check wiring connection, or add the
1020
• 1st to 3rd digits: Device number appropriate unit/block.
• 4th digit: I/O type
(1 = input (X), 0 = output (Y))
Example: When 1020 is stored in D8060
Inputs X020 and later are unconnected.
Serial communication error 2 [M8438 (D8438)]
0000 ⎯ No error
3801 Parity, overrun or framing error
3802 Communication character error • Inverter communication, computer link and
3803 Communication data sum check error programming:
Ensure the communication parameters are
3804 Communication data format error
correctly set according to their applications.
3805 Command error • N:N network, parallel link, etc.:
3806 Continues Communication time-out detected Check programs according to applications.
3807 operation Modem initialization error • Remote maintenance:
3808 N:N network parameter error Ensure modem power is ON and check the
settings of the AT commands.
3812 Parallel link character error
• Wiring:
3813 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct
3814 Parallel link format error wiring.
3820 Inverter communication error
PLC hardware error [M8061(D8061)]
0000 ⎯ No error
6101 RAM error
6102 Operation circuit error
6103 I/O bus error (M8069 = ON) Check for the correct connection of extension
6104 Powered extension unit 24 V failure (M8069 = ON) cables.
Check user program.
6105 Watchdog timer error
The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000.
Stops When turning the power ON to the main unit, a
operation 24V power failure occurs in a powered extension
6106 I/O table creation error (CPU error) unit. (The error occurs if the 24V power is not
supplied for 10 seconds or more after the main
power is turned ON.)
Check the number of the connected special function
6107 System configuration error units/blocks. For a few special function units/blocks,
the connectable number is limited.
222
11
Counters
High-Speed
PLC/PP communication error (D8062)
0000 ⎯ No error
Check the cable connection between the 12
6202 Communication character error programming panel (PP) / programming device and
External Wiring
Continues
6203 Communication data sum check error the PLC. This error may occur when a cable is
operation
6204 Data format error disconnected and reconnected during PLC
monitoring.
6205 Command error
Serial communication error 1 [M8063 (D8063)]
0000 ⎯ No error 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
6302 Communication character error • Inverter communication, computer link and
6303 Communication data sum check error programming:
Ensure that the communication parameters are
6304 Communication data format error
correctly set according to their applications.
6305 Command error • N:N network, parallel link, etc.:
6306 Continues Communication time-out detected Check programs according to applications. 14
6307 operation Modem initialization error • Remote maintenance:
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
6308 N:N network parameter error Ensure modem power is ON and check the
settings of the AT commands.
6312 Parallel link character error
• Wiring:
6313 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct
6314 Parallel link format error wiring.
6320 Inverter communication error 15
Parameter error [M8064(D8064)]
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
0000 ⎯ No error
6401 Program sum check error
6402 Memory capacity setting error
6403 Latched device area setting error
6404 Comment area setting error 16
6405 Stops File register area setting error
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
STOP the PLC, and correctly set the parameters.
operation Special unit (BFM) initial value setting, positioning
6406
instruction setting sum check error
Special unit (BFM) initial value setting, positioning
6407
instruction setting error
6409
Syntax error [M8065(D8065)]
Other setting error
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
0000 ⎯ No error
Incorrect combination of instruction, device symbol
6501
and device number
6502 No OUT T or OUT C before setting value
• No setting value after OUT T or OUT C
6503 • Insufficient number of operands for an applied 18
instruction
Display Module
• Same label number is used more than once. During programming, each instruction is checked. If
6504 Stops • Same interrupt input or high speed counter a syntax error is detected, modify the instruction
operation input is used more than once. correctly.
6505 Device number is out of allowed range.
6506 Invalid instruction 19
6507 Invalid label number [P]
Terminal Block
6508 Invalid interrupt input [I]

6509 Other error
6510 MC nesting number error
20
Cassette
Memory
223

Circuit error [M8066(D8066)]
0000 ⎯ No error
6610 LD, LDI is continuously used 9 times or more.
More ANB/ORB instructions than LD/LDI
6611
instructions
Less ANB/ORB instructions than LD/LDI
6612
instructions
6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or more.
6614 No MPS instruction
6615 No MPP instruction
No coil between MPS, MRD and MPP, or incorrect
6616
combination
Instruction below is not connected to bus line:
6617 STL, RET, MCR, P, I, DI, EI, FOR, NEXT, SRET,
IRET, FEND or END
STL, MC or MCR can be used only in main
6618 program, but it is used elsewhere (e.g. in interrupt
routine or subroutine).
This error occurs when a combination of
Invalid instruction is used in FOR-NEXT loop:
6619 instructions is incorrect in the entire circuit block or
STL, RET, MC, MCR, I (interrupt pointer) or IRET.
Stops when the relationship between a pair of instructions
6620 operation FOR-NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded is incorrect.
Numbers of FOR and NEXT instructions do not Modify the instructions in the program mode so that
6621
match. their mutual relationship becomes correct.
6622 No NEXT instruction
6623 No MC instruction
6624 No MCR instruction
STL instruction is continuously used 9 times or
6625
more.
Invalid instruction is programmed within STL-RET
6626 loop:
MC, MCR, I (interrupt pointer), SRET or IRET.
6627 No RET instruction
Invalid instruction is used in main program:
6628
I (interrupt pointer), SRET or IRET
6629 No P or I (interrupt pointer)
6630 No SRET or IRET instruction
6631 SRET programmed in invalid location
6632 FEND programmed in invalid location
Operation error [M8067(D8067)]
0000 No error
• No jump destination (pointer) for CJ or CALL
instruction
• Label is undefined or out of P0 to P4095 due to
6701 indexing
• Label P63 is executed in CALL instruction; This error occurs in the execution of operation.
cannot be used in CALL instruction as P63 is for Review the program, or check the contents of the
jumping to END instruction. operands used in the applied instructions.
6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct, an
6703 Continues Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more operation error may still occur.
operation For example:
FOR-NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or
6704 "T200Z" itself is not an error. But if Z had a value of
more.
400, the timer T600 would attempt to be accessed.
Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable This would cause an operation error since there is
6705
device. no T600 device available.
Device number range or data value for operand of
6706
applied instruction exceeds limit.
File register is accessed without parameter setting
6707
of file register.
224
11
Counters
High-Speed
This error occurs in the execution of the operation.
• Review the program, or check the contents of
the operands used in the applied instructions.
12
External Wiring
6708 FROM/TO instruction error • Check whether the specified buffer memories
exist in the equipment.
• Check whether the extension cables are
correctly connected.
This error occurs in the execution of operation.
Review the program, or check the contents of the
operands used in the applied instructions.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct, an
operation error may still occur.
6709 Other (e.g. improper branching)
For example:
"T200Z" itself is not an error. But if Z had a value of
400, the timer T600 would attempt to be accessed.
This would cause an operation error since there is
no T600 device available. 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
This error occurs when the same device is used
6710 Mismatch among parameters within the source and destination in a shift
instruction, etc.
6730 Incorrect sampling time (TS) (TS ≤ 0)
Incompatible input filter constant (α)
6732
(α < 0 or 100 ≤ α) <PID instruction is stopped.> 15
6733 Incompatible proportional gain (KP) (KP < 0) This error occurs in the parameter setting value or
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
6734 Incompatible integral time (TI) (TI < 0) operation data executing PID instruction.
Continues Incompatible derivative gain (KD) Check the contents of the parameters.
6735 operation (KD < 0 or 201 ≤ KD)
6736 Incompatible derivative time (TD) (TD < 0)
<Auto tuning is continued.>
6740 Sampling time (TS) ≤ Scan time The operation is continued in the condition
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
"sampling time (TS) = cyclic time (scan time)".
Variation of measured value exceeds limit.
6742
( PV < −32768 or +32767 < PV)
Deviation exceeds limit.
6743
(EV < −32768 or +32767 < EV)
6744
Integral result exceeds limit.
<PID operation is continued.>
17
(Outside range from −32768 to +32767)
Options
Units and
Other Extension
The operation is continued with each parameter set
Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative to the maximum or minimum value.
6745
gain (KD).
Derivative result exceeds limit.
6746
(Outside range from −32768 to +32767)
PID operation result exceeds limit.
6747
(Outside range from −32768 to +32767) 18
Display Module
<Transpose of output upper limit value and output

PID output upper limit set value < PID output lower lower limit value. → PID operation is continued.>
6748
limit set value. Check whether the target setting contents are
correct.
<Alarm output is not given. → PID operation is
Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or continued.>
6749
output variation alarm set value (Set value < 0) Check whether the target setting contents are
19
correct.
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
225

<Auto tuning is finished. → PID operation is
started.>
• When auto tuning was started, the difference
between the measured value and the target
<Step response method> value was 150 or less. (SV−PV≤150)
6750
Improper auto tuning result • When auto tuning was started, the difference
between the measured value and the target
value was 1/3 or more.
• Check the measured value and target value, and
then execute auto tuning again.
<Auto tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is
not started.>
The operation direction estimated from the
measured value at the start of auto tuning was
<Step response method>
6751 different from the actual operation direction of the
Auto tuning operation direction mismatch
output during auto tuning.
Correct the relationship among the target value,
output value for auto tuning, and the measured
value, and then execute auto tuning again.
<Auto tuning is finished. → PID operation is not
started.>
Because the set value was fluctuated during auto
tuning, auto tuning was not executed correctly.
<Step response method>
6752 Set the sampling time to a value larger than the
Improper auto tuning operation
output change cycle, or set a larger value for the
input filter constant.
After changing the setting, execute auto tuning
again.
<Limit cycle method>
6753 Abnormal output set value for auto tuning <Auto tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is
Continues [ULV (upper limit) ≤ LLV (lower limit)] not started.>
operation <Limit cycle method> Check whether the target setting contents are
6754 Abnormal PV threshold (hysteresis) set value for correct.
auto tuning (SHPV < 0)
<Limit cycle method> <Auto tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is
Abnormal auto tuning transfer status not started.>
6755
(Data of device controlling transfer status is Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are
abnormally overwritten.) not overwritten in the program.
<Auto tuning is forcibly finished. → PID operation is
not started.>
The auto tuning time is longer than necessary.
<Limit cycle method> Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the
6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning upper limit and lower limit of the output value for
measurement time (τon > τ, τon < 0, τ < 0) auto tuning, set a smaller value to the input filter
constant (α), or set a smaller value to the PV
threshold (SHPV) for auto tuning, and then check
the result for improvement.
<Auto tuning is finished (KP = 32767). → PID
operation is started.>
<Limit cycle method>
The variation of the measured value (PV) is small
6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain. (KP =
compared with the output value. Multiply the
outside range from 0 to 32767)
measured value (PV) by "10" so that the variation of
the measured value will increase during auto tuning.
<Limit cycle method> <Auto tuning is finished (KP = 32767). → PID
6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time. operation is started.>
(TI = outside range from 0 to 32767) The auto tuning time is longer than necessary.
Increase the difference (ULV - LLV) between the
upper limit and lower limit of the output value for
<Limit cycle method> auto tuning, set a smaller value to the input filter
6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time. constant (α), or set a smaller value to the PV
(TD = outside range from 0 to 32767) threshold (SHPV) for auto tuning, and then check
the result for improvement.
226
11
Counters
High-Speed
Check servo wiring and parameter setting. Also
6760 ABS data read from servo sum check error
Port specified by inverter communication

check the ABS instruction.
12
Check to make sure the port is not specified by
External Wiring
6762 instruction is already used in another
another instruction.
communication.
1) Check to make sure the input (X), as specified
by DSZR, DVIT or ZRN instruction, is not being
used for the following purposes:
1) Input (X) specified by DSZR, DVIT or ZRN
instruction is already used in another
- Input interrupt (including the delay function)
- High speed counter C235 to C255
13
6763 instruction.
Various Uses
Wiring for
- Pulse catch M8050 to M8057
2) The interrupt signal device for DVIT instruction
- SPD instruction
is outside the allowable setting range.
2) Check the contents of D8336 for the correct
interrupt signal specification for DVIT
Continues instruction.
operation
6764
Pulse output number is already used in a
positioning instruction or pulse output instruction
Check to make sure the pulse output destination is 14
not being driven by another positioning instruction.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
(PLSY, PWM, etc.).
The number of times an applied instruction is used
6765 Number of applied instruction exceeds limit.
in the program exceeds the specified limit.
6770 Writing error to flash memory cassette
Check for the correct attachment of the memory
6771 Flash memory cassette is not connected.
cassette. 15
The write-protect switch of the flash memory
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Flash memory cassette is protected against
6772 cassette was set to ON when data was transferred
writing.
to the flash memory.
While data was written in the RUN mode, data was
Access error to flash memory during writing in RUN
6773 transferred to (read from or written to) the flash
mode
memory.
Special block error [M8449 (D8449)]
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
020*1 General data sum error Check for the correct connection of extension
021*1 General data message error cables.
This error occurs in the execution of operation.
• Review the program, or check the contents of
the operands used in the applied instructions.
080*1 FROM/TO error • Check whether the specified buffer memories 17
Continues exist in the counterpart equipment.
Options
Units and
Other Extension
operation • Check for the correct connection of extension
cables.
• Check the cable connection between the
programming panel (PP) / programming device
090*1 Peripheral equipment access error and the PLC.
• Check for the correct connection of extension 18
cables.
Display Module
*1. The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit/block error is put in .
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
227
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.7 Troubleshooting
14.7 Troubleshooting
→ For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC, refer to Section 14.2.
→ For the procedures on operating the display module, refer to Chapter 18.
→ For the procedures on operating peripheral devices, refer to the manuals for the peripheral
devices.
→ For the phone numbers and addresses of Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd., refer to
the service network at the end of this manual.
14.7.1 Output does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)
1. Output does not turn on.

Stop the PLC, and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device or the display
module to check its operation.
Check for troubles with external wiring.
• When the output operates
The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program. Reexamine the program.
(Duplicate coil or RST instructions)
• When the output does not operate
Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables.
If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension
cables are acceptable, the output circuit may be damaged.
Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer.
2. Output does not turn off.

Stop the PLC, and check that the output turns off.
Check for trouble with external wiring.
→ For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC, refer to Section 14.2.
• When the output turns off
The output may be turned on unintentionally in the program.
Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program.
• When the output does not turn off
The output circuit may be damaged. Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer.
14.7.2 24V DC input does not operate (main unit and input/output extension blocks)
1. Input does not turn on.

Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S/S terminal and the 0V terminal or the 24V terminal.
Short-circuit the 0V terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S/S terminal and the input terminal, then
check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on.
Measures
Check that the input device does not have a built-in diode or parallel resistance.
When input turns on
If so, refer to Subsection 10.2.3.
Measure the voltage between the 0V terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S/S
When input does not terminal and the input terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24V DC.
turn on • Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of
the extension cables.
2. Input does not turn off.

Check for leakage current from input devices.
If the leakage current is 1.5mA or more, it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance.
→ For details on the measures, refer to Subsection 10.2.3.
228
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 14.7 Troubleshooting
11
14.7.3 Cautions in registering keyword
Counters
High-Speed
1. Cautions in registering keyword
The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices.
Keep the keyword carefully.
If you forget the keyword, you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the 12
type of the programming tool and the registered keyword.
External Wiring
2. Cautions in using peripheral devices not applicable to 2nd keyword
A sequence program for which the second keyword has been registered with a programming tool (GX
Developer earlier than Ver. 8.23Z) cannot be cleared.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
229
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 15 FX2N-32/48E*-* (Input/Output Powered Extension Units)
15. FX2N-32/48E*-* (Input/Output Powered Extension Units)
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
3) The output current of 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence/
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
230
11
Counters
High-Speed
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
External Wiring
burnt out.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
231
15.1 Outline
An input/output powered extension unit is used to expand inputs/outputs.
Power can be supplied to subsequent extension blocks from an input/output powered extension unit with a
built-in 24V DC power supply.
An input/output powered extension unit is required when the capacity of the main unit's built-in power supply
is insufficient for the current consumption demands of the extension blocks.
15.1.1 Product configuration

There are various types of input/output powered extension units. They differ in supply voltage, number of
input/output points, input form, output form and connection type.
Power supply Number of points Input form Output form Connection type
100 to 240V AC 32 24V DC Relay Terminal block

(sink/source)
48 Triac
24V DC
(sink)
Transistor (source)
100V AC
Transistor (sink)
15.1.2 Product list

Each model of input/output powered extension unit has a sink and source type and a sink type. If you intend
to add input/output powered extension units, we recommend you to add the same types of units as the main
unit or the sink and source type.
→ For the details on sink and source, refer to Subsection 10.1.1.
Sink :Sink [-common], Source :Source [+common]

Input Output
Connection
Model Number Common Number Common
Type Type type
of points wiring system of points wiring system
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL 16 Sink Source 16 −
Relay
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL 24 Sink Source 24 − Terminal
24V DC
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL 16 16 block
Sink Source Source
Transistor
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL 24 Sink Source 24 Source
Sink input type
FX2N-32ER 16 Sink 16 −
Relay
FX2N-48ER 24 Sink 24 −
FX2N-32ES 24V DC 16 Sink Triac(SSR) 16 − Terminal

block
FX2N-32ET 16 Sink 16 Sink
Transistor
FX2N-48ET 24 Sink 24 Sink
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL 100V AC 24 − Relay 24 −
232
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.2 Power Supply Specifications (Power Supply Input/24V DC Service Power Supply)
11
Counters
High-Speed
(Power Supply Input/24V DC Service Power Supply)
FX2N-32ER
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER
Item FX2N-32ES
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-32ET
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET 12
External Wiring
Classification FX2N powered extension unit
Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Power fuse 250V 3.15 A(3 A) 5φ x 20mm (0.79") 250V 5 A 5φ x 20mm (0.79") 13
100V AC Up to 40 A, 5 ms or less
Various Uses
Wiring for
Rush current
Power consumption 30 W (35 VA) 35 W (45 VA)
Without extension
24V DC, 250 mA or less 24V DC, 460 mA or less
24V DC block
service power When input/output extension blocks are connected, 24V DC service power is
14
supply With extension
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
consumed by them.
block
→ For details, refer to Section 6.6.
Connection type Removable terminal block (M3 screw)
Item FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Classification FX2N powered extension unit 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC
Power fuse 250V 5 A 5φ x 20mm (0.79")
Rush current
16
Power consumption 35 W (45 VA)
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
24V DC service power supply None
15.2.1 Weight, accessories, etc.

17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
FX2N-32ER
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER FX2N-48ER-
Item FX2N-32ES
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET UA1/UL
FX2N-32ET
Weight 0.65 kg (1.43 lbs) 0.85 kg (1.87 lbs) 1.00 kg (2.2 lbs)
• Terminal protective cover (2 pcs.)
(Fitted to FX2N-32ER-ES/UL, FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ER-ES/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL and 18
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL)
Display Module
Accessories
• Extension cable (55 mm (2.16"))
Optional extension cables (FX0N-30EC and FX0N-65EC) are available.
• Input/output number label
• The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws.
Others
• Installation of the DIN46277 (35 mm (1.37") wide) rail or screws. 19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
233
15.2.2 Part names
1. Front
[4] Input display LEDs
[1] Top cover [5] Terminal block covers
IN
0 1
0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[6] Extension device connecting
connector cover
POWER
FX2N-48ER OUT
0 1
0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 [7] POWER LED
[2] DIN rail mounting hooks [8] Output display LEDs

[3] Model name
[1] Top cover When adding this to the main unit, connect the supplied extension cable or
the optional extension cable to the connector under this top cover.
[2] DIN rail mounting hooks The input/output powered extension unit can be installed on DIN rail
(2 places) (35 mm (1.38") wide).
[3] Model name (abbreviation) The model name of the input/output powered extension unit is indicated.
[4] Input display LEDs (red) When an input terminal (X0, X1, etc.) is turned on, the corresponding LED
lamps are also turned on.
The input numbers change depending on input/output allocation.
[5] Terminal block covers The covers can be opened about 90° for wiring.
Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running (the unit power is on).
[6] Extension device connecting Connect the extension cable of input/output powered extension unit/block
connector cover or special function unit/block to the extension device connecting connector
under this cover.
FX2N Series extension devices and FX0N Series special function devices
are compatible and can be connected.
→ For details on extension devices, refer to Chapter 15,
Chapter 16 and Section 17.1.
[7] POWER LED (green) The LED lamp is on (green) while the power supply terminal is on.
[8] Output display LEDs (red) When an output terminal (Y0, Y1, etc.) is turned on, the corresponding
LED lamps are also turned on. The output numbers change depending on
input/output allocation.
234
11
When the terminal block covers are open
Counters
High-Speed
[10] Input (X) terminals
[9] Power supply terminal [11] Terminal block fitting screws
L N
S/S 0V
24V
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7 [12] Terminal names
12
External Wiring
IN
0 1
0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[13] Terminal block covers
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y0
COM1 Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
COM2 Y5
Y6
Y7
Y0
COM3 Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
COM4 Y5
Y6
Y7
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
COM5
[12] Terminal names
13
[15] Protective terminal [14] Output (Y) terminals
Various Uses
Wiring for
covers [11] Terminal block mounting screws
[9] Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the input/output powered extension unit at
this terminal.
14
[10] Input (X) terminals Wire switches and sensors to these terminals.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
[11] Terminal block mounting screws If the input/output powered extension unit must be replaced, loosen these
screws to remove the upper part of the terminal block.
[12] Terminal names The signal names for the power supply, input terminals and output
terminals are shown.
[13] Terminal block covers Protects the upper and lower stages of the terminal block. 15
[14] Output (Y) terminals Wire the intended loads (contactors, solenoid valves, etc.) to these
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
terminals.
[15] Protective terminal covers A protective terminal cover (refer to the following drawing) is fitted to the
lower stage of each terminal block to prevent fingers from touching
terminals, thereby improving the safety.
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
2. Side
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
[1] Nameplate
[2] DIN rail mounting groove
[1] Nameplate The product model name, control number and power supply 18
specifications are shown.
Display Module
[2] DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35 mm (1.38") wide).
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
235
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL and FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
15.3 FX2N-32ER-ES/UL and FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
15.3.1 Product specifications

The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit.
→ For the generic specifications, refer to Section 4.1.
1. Power supply specifications

→ For the power supply specifications, refer to Section 15.2.
2. Input specifications (for sink input [-common] and source input [+common])
Item FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
Number of input points 16 points 24 points
Input signal voltage 24V DC ± 10%
Input signal current 5 mA/24V DC
Input impedance 4.3 kΩ
Input ON
3.5 mA or more/24V DC
Input sensitivity current
current Input OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Input response time About 10 ms
Input signal form Sink: NPN open collector transistor
Source: PNP open collector transistor
Input circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler
Indication of input operation LED on panel is lit when there is input.

Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
100 to 240V AC 100 to 240V AC
S/S S/S
Input circuit diagram 0V 0V
24V 24V
4.3kΩ 4.3kΩ
X X
236
11
3. Output specifications (relay output type)
Counters
High-Speed
Item FX2N-32ER-ES/UL FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
Number of output points 16 points 24 points
Output unit Relay 12
30V DC or less
External Wiring
External power supply 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or
cUL standards)
Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation
Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil, LED is lit.
2A/point 2A/point 13
The total load current per common The total load current per common
Various Uses
Wiring for
terminal should be the following value. terminal should be the following value.
Resistance
• 4 output points/common terminal: 8 A • 4 output points/common terminal: 8 A
load
or less or less
Max. load
• 8 output points/common terminal: 8 A
or less
80 VA
14
→ For the approximate contact life, refer to Subsection 4.4.2.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Inductive load
Open circuit leakage current −
OFF→ON Approx. 10 ms
Response time
ON→OFF Approx. 10 ms
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Load
Y
DC power
supply
COM
Output circuit diagram

Fuse 16
Y
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
External
power supply
COM
Fuse
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
15.3.2 External dimensions
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit : mm (inches) 18
Display Module
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-32ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y0
COM1 Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
COM2 Y5
Y6
Y7
Y0
COM3 Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
COM4 Y5
Y6
Y7 19
Terminal Block
140 (5.52") (mounting hole pitch) 9 (0.36")

150 (5.91") 87 (3.43") The terminal block uses
M3 terminal screws.
20
Cassette
Memory
237
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
4-φ4.5 mounting holes
Unit : mm (inches)

80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")
The terminal block uses
M3 terminal screws.
15.3.3 Terminal layout
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
238
11
15.3.4 Examples of wiring
Counters
High-Speed
1. Input wiring
1) Sink input [-common]
12
External Wiring
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Input circuit Input circuit
Main unit ‘ Ýƒ†ƒjƒbƒg
2) Source input [+common]

14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2. Output wiring 16
FX2N-48ER-ES/UL
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
FX2N-32ER-ES/UL
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
COM1 Y0 Y3 COM2 Y4 Y7 COM3 Y0 Y3 COM4 Y4 Y7 COM5 Y0 Y7
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
239
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
15.4 FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL, FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL


2. Input specifications (for sink input [-common] and source input [+common])
Item FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
Input ON
current Input OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Input signal form Sink: NPN open collector transistor
Source: PNP open collector transistor

Fuse Fuse
L L
N N
100 to 240V AC 100 to 240V AC
S/S S/S
Input circuit diagram 0V 0V
24V 24V
4.3kΩ 4.3kΩ
X X
240
11
3. Output specifications (transistor output type)
Counters
High-Speed
Item FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
Output unit/type Transistor/source output 12
External power supply 5 to 30V DC
External Wiring
Output circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler
Indication of output operation When photocoupler is driven, LED on panel is lit.
0.5A/point 0.5A/point
The total load current per common ter- The total load current per common ter-
Resistance
minal should be the following value. minal should be the following value. 13
• 4 output points/common terminal: 0.8 • 4 output points/common terminal: 0.8
Various Uses
Wiring for
Max. load load
A or less A or less
• 8 output points/common terminal: 1.6
A or less
Inductive load 12 W/24V DC
Open circuit leakage current 0.1 mA/30 A DC 14
Min. load −
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
OFF→ON 0.2 ms or less/100 mA (at 24V DC)
Response time
ON→OFF 0.2 ms or less/100 mA (at 24V DC)
Load
DC power
Y 15
supply
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
+V
Fuse
Output circuit diagram Y
DC power
supply
+V
Fuse 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
A number (0 or more) is entered in of [+V ].

17
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Unit : mm (inches)
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
18
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
Display Module
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-32ET OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRANSISTOR UNIT
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
+V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7

150 (5.91") 87 (3.43")
19
Terminal Block
M3 terminal screws.
20
Cassette
Memory
241
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
Unit : mm (inches)

80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ET OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRANSISTOR UNIT
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 +V4
+V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7

182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")
M3 terminal screws.
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
S/S 0V X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24V X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
+V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 +V4
+V0 Y1 Y3 +V1 Y5 Y7 +V2 Y1 Y3 +V3 Y5 Y7 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
242
11
Counters
High-Speed
1. Input wiring
12
External Wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
2) Source input [+common]

14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 L N S/S 0V 24V X0 X1 X2 X3 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2. Output wiring 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
FX2N-48ET-ESS/UL
FX2N-32ET-ESS/UL
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
+V0 Y0 Y3 +V1 Y4 Y7 +V2 Y0 Y3 +V3 Y4 Y7 +V4 Y0 Y7
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
243
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER
15.5 FX2N-32ER, FX2N-48ER


2. Input specifications (sink input [-common])

Item FX2N-32ER FX2N-48ER
Input form Sink
Input ON
current Input OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Input signal form No-voltage contact input or NPN open collector transistor
Sink input wiring

Fuse
L
N
100 to 240V AC
Input circuit diagram 24+
COM
X
4.3kΩ
244
11
Counters
High-Speed
Item FX2N-32ER FX2N-48ER
Output unit Relay 12
External power supply 250V AC/30V DC or less
External Wiring
Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil, LED on panel is lit.
2 A/point 2 A/point
The total load current per common ter- The total load current per common ter-
Resistance
minal should be the following value. minal should be the following value. 13
• 8 output points/common terminal: 8 A • 4 output points/common terminal: 8 A
Various Uses
Wiring for
load
or less or less
Max. load
• 8 output points/common terminal: 8 A
or less
80 VA
Inductive load → For the approximate contact life, refer to Subsection 4.4.2.
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Response time
15
Load
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Y
DC power
supply
COM
Fuse
Y
External
power supply 16
COM
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Fuse
15.5.2 External dimensions 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
FX2N-32ER
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit : mm (inches)
L N
COM
24+
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
18
Display Module
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-32ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
19
Terminal Block

M3 terminal screws.
20
Cassette
Memory
245
FX2N-48ER
Unit : mm (inches)

COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ER OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")
M3 terminal screws.
FX2N-32ER
COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
FX2N-48ER
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
1. Input wiring
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 L N COM 24+ X0 X7 X0 X7
Main unit Powered extension unit
246
11
2. Output wiring
Counters
High-Speed
FX2N-48ER
FX2N-32ER
12
External Wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
247
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET
15.6 FX2N-32ET, FX2N-48ET



Item FX2N-32ET FX2N-48ET
Input form Sink
Input ON
current Input OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Sink input wiring

Fuse
L
N
100 to 240V AC
COM
X
4.3kΩ
248
11
3. Output specifications (transistor output type)
Counters
High-Speed
Item FX2N-32ET FX2N-48ET
Output unit/type Transistor/sink output 12
External Wiring
Output circuit insulation Insulation with photocoupler
Indication of output operation When photocoupler is driven, LED on panel is lit.
0.5A/point 0.5A/point
Resistance
terminal should be the following value. terminal should be the following value. 13
• 8 output points/common terminal: 1.6 • 4 output points/common terminal: 0.8
Various Uses
Wiring for
Max. load load
A or less A or less
• 8 output points/common terminal: 1.6
A or less
Open circuit leakage current 0.1 mA or less/30V DC 14
Min. load −
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
OFF→ON 0.2 ms or less/100 mA (at 24V DC)
Response time
ON→OFF 0.2 ms or less/100 mA (at 24V DC)
Load
DC power
Y 15
supply
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
COM
Fuse
DC power
supply
COM
Fuse 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output

17
FX2N-32ET
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Unit : mm (inches)
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
80 (3.15")
18
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
Display Module
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-32ET OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRANSISTOR UNIT
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6

19
Terminal Block
M3 terminal screws.
20
Cassette
Memory
249
FX2N-48ET
Unit : mm (inches)

L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
80 (3.15")
90 (3.55")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ET OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRANSISTOR UNIT

182 (7.17") 87 (3.43")

M3 terminal screws.
FX2N-32ET
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
FX2N-48ET
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
250
11
Counters
High-Speed
1. Input wiring
12
External Wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
2. Output wiring
14
FX2N-48ET
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
FX2N-32ET
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
251
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.7 FX2N-32ES
15.7 FX2N-32ES



Item FX2N-32ES
Number of input points 16 points
Input form Sink
Input ON
current Input OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Sink input wiring

Fuse
L
N
100 to 240V AC
COM
X
4.3kΩ
252
11
3. Output specifications (triac output type)
Counters
High-Speed
Item FX2N-32ES
Number of output points 16 points
Output unit Triac output (SSR) 12
External power supply 85 to 242V AC
External Wiring
Output circuit insulation Insulation with photo-thyristor
Indication of output operation When photo-thyristor is driven, LED on panel is lit.
0.3A/point
Resistance
The total load current per common terminal should be the following value.
Max. load load
• 4 output points/common terminal: 0.8 A or less 13
Inductive load 15 VA/100V AC, 30 VA/200V AC
Various Uses
Wiring for
Open circuit leakage current 1 mA/100V AC, 2 mA/200V AC
Min. load 0.4 VA/100V AC, 1.6 VA/200V AC
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 10 ms or less
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Load
Y
External
power supply U
COM
Fuse
External
Y 15
power supply
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
U
COM
Fuse
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
FX2N-32ES
Unit : mm (inches)
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
90 (3.55")
80 (3.15")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-32ES OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TRIAC UNIT
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
18
Display Module

M3 terminal screws.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
253
FX2N-32ES
COMX0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N 24+ X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4Y5 Y7
15.7.4 Examples of Wwiring
1. Input wiring
2. Output wiring
U U U U U U U U
254
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
11
15.8 FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Counters
High-Speed
The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit. 12
External Wiring
2. Input specifications (100V AC Input)

13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Number of input points 24 points
Input form AC input
Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC +10%,-15% 50/60 Hz
4.7 mA/100V AC 50 Hz (70% or less when turned on simultaneously) 14
Input signal current
6.2 mA/110V AC 60 Hz (70% or less when turned on simultaneously)
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Approx. 21 kΩ/50 Hz
Input impedance
Approx. 18 kΩ/60 Hz
Input ON
3.8 mA or more/80V AC
current Input OFF 15
1.7 mA or less/80V AC
current
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Input response time Approx. 25 to 30 ms
Input signal form Contact input
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Fuse
L
N
100 to 240V AC
Input circuit diagram COM
*1
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
X
*1 Input impedance
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
255

Number of output points 24 points
Output unit Relay
30V DC or less
External power supply 240V AC or less (250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL or
cUL standards)
Indication of output operation When power is applied to relay coil, LED on panel lights.
2A/point
The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the fol-
Resistance
lowing value.
load
Max. load
80 VA
Response time
Load
Y
DC power
supply
COM
Fuse
Y
External
power supply
COM
Fuse
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Unit : mm (inches)
COM COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7
110VAC INPUT
80 (3.15")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
90 (3.55")
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POWER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FX2N-48ER-UA1 OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 C0M5 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7

220 (8.67") 87 (3.43")

M3 terminal screws.
256
11
Counters
High-Speed
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
COM COM X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6
L N X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 X7 12
External Wiring
FX2N-48ER-UA1/UL
Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
COM1 Y1 Y3 COM2 Y5 Y7 COM3 Y1 Y3 COM4 Y5 Y7 COM5 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
1. Input wiring
1) 100V AC Input
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 L N COM COM X0 X1 X2 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
The terminals are vacant terminals. Do not

The main unit has 24V DC input only.
connect wires to them.
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
2. Output wiring
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
257
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 16 FX2N-16E*-*(Input/Output Extension Blocks)
16. FX2N-16E*-*(Input/Output Extension Blocks)
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
a rule, lay the control line at least 100 mm(3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
burnt out.
258
11
16.1 Outline
Counters
High-Speed
Connect input/output extension blocks to the PLC to add more input/output points. 16 points can be added by
an input/output extension block.
Since the power is supplied from the main unit, it is not necessary to prepare another power supply unit for
each input/output extension block. 12
External Wiring
16.1.1 Product type
There are various types of input/output extension blocks. Select optimum blocks considering the input type,
output type, and connection unit of your system.
13
Input/output extension blocks
Various Uses
Wiring for
Power supply Number of points Input type Output type Connection unit
Power supply to 16 24V DC Relay Terminal block

inside of PLC (Sink, source)
Triac Connector
14
24V DC
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
(Sink) Transistor
(Source)
5V DC
Transistor
100V AC system (Sink)
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
259
16.1.2 List of products
1. For input extension

Input Output
Connection
Type Type unit
of points system of points system
Common to both sink and source inputs
Terminal
FX2N-16EX-ES/UL 24V DC 16 Sink Source − − −
block
Dedicated to sink input only
Terminal
FX2N-16EX 24V DC 16 Sink − − −
block
FX2N-16EX-C 24V DC 16 Sink − − − Connector
FX2N-16EXL-C 5V DC 16 Sink − − − Connector
2. For output extension

Input Output
Connection
Type Type unit
of points system of points system
Dedicated to source output only
Terminal
FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL − − − Relay 16 −
block
Terminal
FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL − − − Transistor 16 Source
block
Dedicated to sink output only
Terminal
FX2N-16EYR − − − Relay 16 −
block
Terminal
FX2N-16EYS − − − Triac(SSR) 16 −
block
Terminal
FX2N-16EYT − − − Transistor 16 Sink
block
FX2N-16EYT-C − − − Transistor 16 Sink Connector
260
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.2 FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)
11
16.2 FX2N-16EX-ES/UL (24V DC Sink/Source Input)
Counters
High-Speed
The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 12
→ Refer to Section 4.1 for generic specifications.
External Wiring
Item FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
Product type FX2N extension block
Rated voltage 24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit) 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
2. Weight and Other specifications
MASS (Weight) 0.3 kg (0.66lbs)
• The extension cable is already connected to the extension block.
Other • Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
• The DIN46277 rail (width: 35 mm (1.38")) or direct installation.
3. Input specifications (common to both sink and source inputs)

Input points 16 points
15
Vertical terminal block (M3 screws) / For a detailed description of wiring, refer to
Connection unit
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
the input line connection diagram of the main unit.
Input type sink/source
Input impedance 4.3kΩ 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Input-ON
3.5 mA or more at 24V DC
current Input-OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Sink input: No-voltage contact input, NPN open collector transistor
17
Input signal type
Source input: No-voltage contact input, PNP open collector transistor
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input.
Sink input line Source input line

connection connection 18
Main unit S/S Main unit S/S
Display Module
0V 0V
24V 24V
Input circuit diagram
S/S S/S 19
Terminal Block
X X
4.3kΩ 4.3kΩ
20
Cassette
Memory
261
16.2.2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers,
and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers.
With cover Without cover FX2N-16EX-ES/UL
Input indicator
S/S X1 X3
X0
lamps
S/S X1 X3 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X3 X5 X7
X2 X4
(LED lamps)
X0 X2 X4
X5
Rear line
X6
extension
X7
X0
connector Lower
X1
X2
Input indicator numbers
X3 X5
X4
lamps
X6
X7
(LED lamps)
X2 X4 X6
Higher
numbers
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")
16.2.4 Example of terminal arrangement
1. Wiring on input side

Sink input
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 S/S X0 X1 X3
main unit or ‘ Ýƒ†ƒjƒbƒg

input/output powered extension unit
262
11
Source input
Counters
High-Speed
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 S/S X0 X1 X3
12
External Wiring
main unit or ‘ Ýƒ†ƒjƒbƒg

13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
263
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.3 FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C (24V DC Input: 16 Points)
16.3 FX2N-16EX and FX2N-16EX-C (24V DC Input: 16 Points)

The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications.

Item FX2N-16EX FX2N-16EX-C
Product type FX2N extension block FX2N connector type extension block
Rated voltage 24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit)

3. Input specifications
Input points 16 points
Vertical terminal block (M3 screws) /
For a detailed description of wiring, refer
Connection unit Connector terminal block
to the input line connection diagram of
the main unit.
Input type Sink
Input impedance 4.3kΩ
Input-ON
3.5 mA or more at 24V DC
current Input-OFF
1.5 mA or less
current
Input signal type
NPN open collector transistor
Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation
Sink input line

connection
Main unit S/S
0V
24V
24+
X
4.3kΩ
264
11
Counters
High-Speed
FX2N-16EX
When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers,
and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers.
12
With cover Without cover FX2N-16EX
External Wiring
Input indicator
24+ X1 X3
X0
24+ X1 X3 X5 X6 X7 X0 X1 X3 X5 X7
lamps
X2 X4
(LED lamps)
X0 X2 X4
X5
Rear line
X6
extension
X7
13
X0
connector Lower
X1
Various Uses
Wiring for
numbers
X2
Input indicator
X3 X5
lamps X4 X6
X7
(LED lamps)
14
X2 X4 X6
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Higher
numbers
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
FX2N-16EX-C
When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8
points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers.
With cover Without cover Side No. No. Side 16

Input indicator A B
lamps Connector type X0 1 11 X0
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
(LED lamps) X1 2 12 X1
Rear line X2 3 13 X2
extension X3 4 14 X3
connector X4 5 15 X4
Input indicator X5 6 16 X5 17
lamps X6 7 17 X6
Options
Units and
Other Extension
(LED lamps) Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7
9 19
24+ 10 20 24+

Display Module
FX2N-16EX
19
Terminal Block
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
20
Cassette
Memory
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")
265
FX2N-16EX-C

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")
16.3.4 Example of wiring

Sink input
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 24+ X0 X1 X3
main unit or
How to connect connector (FX2N-16EX-C)
(Socket)
Connection face of connector
The polarity is shown in the following table.
20
FX-16E-
CAB type cable
Cross section of 20-core flat cable

(Be sure to check the wire number.)
20
19 17 15 13 11
B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11
20 18 16 14 12
10 8 6 4 2
A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
Side B is for the higher input numbers,

Side B 24+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
and side A is for the lower input numbers.
Side A 24+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0 (Exe.) Side B X050 to X057
Side A X040 to X047
266
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.4 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)
11
16.4 FX2N-16EXL-C (5V DC Input: 16 Points)
Counters
High-Speed
The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications. 12
External Wiring
Item FX2N-16EXL-C
Product type FX2N connector type extension block for each application
Rated voltage 24V DC (supplied from main unit and input/output powered extension unit) 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Item FX2N-16EXL-C
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
3. Input specifications
Item FX2N-16EXL-C
Input points 16 points 15
Connection unit Connector terminal block
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Input type TTL level
Input signal current 20 mA (at 5V DC), maximum
Input impedance 2.2kΩ
Input sensitivity ON(Low) 1 mA or more
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
current OFF(High) 0.4 mA or less
Input sensitivity ON(Low) 1.5V DC or less
voltage OFF(High) 3.5V DC or more
OFF→ON
1 ms +1 ms, -0.5 ms
Input response (High→Low) 17
time ON→OFF
Options
Units and
Other Extension
1 ms +1 ms, -0.5 ms
(Low→High)
Input signal type TTL input
Input circuit insulation Photo-coupler insulation
18
External unit
Display Module
5V DC
5+
X
2.2kΩ TTL 19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
267

When an input (X) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers, and 8
points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers.
With cover Without cover Side No. No. Side

Input indicator A B
lamps Connector type X0 1 11 X0
(LED lamps) X1 2 12 X1
Rear line X2 3 13 X2
extension X3 4 14 X3
connector X4 5 15 X4
X5 6 16 X5
Input indicator
lamps X6 7 17 X6
(LED lamps) Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7
9 19
5+ 10 20 5+

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")

Sink input
External
5V DC TTL unit
L N S/S 0V 24V X0 5+ X0 X1 X3
main unit or
268
11
How to connect connector
Counters
High-Speed
(Socket)
20
FX-16E-
CAB type cable 12
External Wiring
20
19 17 15 13 11
B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11
20 18 16 14 12 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
10 8 6 4 2
A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Side B 5+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
Side A 5+ X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
(Exe.) Side B X050 to X057
Side A X040 to X047
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
269
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.5 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output: 16 Points)
16.5 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output: 16 Points)


Item FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL

Others • Accessories: Label for indication of input/output number
3. Output specifications (Relay output type)

Output points 16 points
Connection unit Vertical terminal block (M3 screws)
Output unit Relay
5 to 30V DC
External power supply 240V AC or less
(250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE, UL, or cUL standards)
Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation
Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.
2 A/point
Resistance
The total resistance load current per common should be as follows:
load
• 8 output points/common: 8A or less
Maximum load
80 VA
Minimum load 24V DC, 2 mA (reference values)
Response time
Load
Y
Fuse
COM
DC power
supply unit
Fuse
COM
AC power
supply unit
COM : represents a number (1 or more).
270
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.5 FX2N-16EYR-ES/UL (Relay Output: 16 Points)
11
Counters
High-Speed
When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers,
and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers.
With cover Without cover 12
COM1 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Output indicator
COM1 Y1 Y3
External Wiring
Y0 Y2 Y4
Y0
lamps
Y2 Y4
(LED lamps)
Y5
Rear line
Y6
extension Lower
Y7
numbers
Y0
connector
13
Y1
Y2
Output indicator
Y3 Y5
Y4
Various Uses
Wiring for
lamps
Y6 COM2
Y7
(LED lamps)
Y2 Y4 Y6 COM2
Higher
numbers
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")

18
Display Module
1. Wiring on output side
19
Terminal Block
COM1 Y0 Y7 COM2 Y0 Y7
20
Cassette
Memory
271
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.6 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output: 16 Points)
16.6 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output: 16 Points)


Item FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL

3. Output specifications (Transistor output type)

Output unit/type Transistor/source output
Output circuit insulation method Photo-coupler insulation
Indication of output operation Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.
0.5 A/point
Resistance
The total load current per common should be as follows:
Maximum load load
• 8 output points/common: 1.6A or less
Open circuit leakage current 0.1 mA/30 A DC
Minimum load −
OFF→ON 0.2 ms or less for 100 mA (at 24V DC)
Response time
ON→OFF 0.2 ms or less for 100 mA (at 24V DC)
Load
Y
Fuse
+V
DC power
supply unit
Fuse
+V
DC power
supply unit
+V : represents a number (0 or more).
272
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.6 FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL (Transistor Output: 16 Points)
11
Counters
High-Speed
With cover Without cover

FX2N-16EYT-ESS/UL 12
Output indicator
External Wiring
+V0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
+V0 Y1 Y3
Y0
lamps
Y0 Y2 Y4
Y2 Y4
(LED lamps)
Y5
Rear line
Y6
extension
Y7
Lower
13
Y0
connector
numbers
Y1
Y2
Output indicator
Y3 Y5
Various Uses
Wiring for
Y4
lamps
Y6 +V1
(LED lamps) Y7
14
Y2 Y4 Y6 +V1
Higher
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
numbers
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")
16.6.4 Example of wiring 18

Display Module
19
Terminal Block
+V0 Y0 Y7 +V1 Y0 Y7
20
Cassette
Memory
273
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.7 FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output: 16 Points)
16.7 FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output: 16 Points)


Item FX2N-16EYR

Item FX2N-16EYR
3. Output specifications (Relay output type)

Item FX2N-16EYR
Output unit Relay
External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less
Output circuit insulation method Mechanical insulation
Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.
2 A/point
Resistance
The total resistance load current per common should be as follows:
load
8 output points/common: 8A or less
Maximum load
80 VA
Minimum load 5V DC, 2 mA (reference values)
Response time
Load
Y
Fuse
COM
DC power
supply unit
Fuse
COM
AC power
supply unit
274
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.7 FX2N-16EYR (Relay Output: 16 Points)
11
Counters
High-Speed
COM1 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Output indicator
External Wiring
COM1 Y1 Y3
Y0
lamps
Y0 Y2 Y4
Y2 Y4
(LED lamps)
Y5
Rear line
Y6
extension
Y7
Lower
13
Y0
connector numbers
Y1
Y2
Output indicator
Y3 Y5
Various Uses
Wiring for
Y4
lamps
Y6 COM2
Y7
(LED lamps)
Y2 Y4 Y6 COM2
Higher 14
numbers
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")

18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
275
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.8 FX2N-16EYT and FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output: 16 Points)
16.8 FX2N-16EYT and FX2N-16EYT-C (Transistor Output: 16 Points)


Item FX2N-16EYT FX2N-16EYT-C
Product type FX2N extension block FX2N connector type extension block
2. Weight and Other spesifications

3. Output specifications (Transistor output type)

Connection unit Removable terminal block (M3 screws) Connector terminal block
Output unit/type Transistor/sink output
Indication of output operation Activation of the photo-coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.
0.5 A/point 0.3 A/point
Resistance
should be as follows: should be as follows:
Maximum load load
• 8 output points/common: 1.6A or less • 16 output points/common: 1.6A or
less
Inductive load 12 W/24V DC 7.2 W/24V DC
Open circuit leakage current 0.1 mA/30 A DC
Minimum load −
OFF→ON 0.2 ms or less for 100 mA (at 24V DC)
Response time
ON→OFF 0.2 ms or less for 100 mA (at 24V DC)
Load Load
Y Y
Fuse Fuse
COM1 COM
DC power DC power
Output circuit diagram supply unit supply unit
Y Y
Fuse Fuse
COM2 COM
DC power DC power
supply unit supply unit
276
11
Counters
High-Speed
FX2N-16EYT
12
With cover Without cover
External Wiring
COM1 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Output indicator
COM1 Y1 Y3
Y0 Y2 Y4
Y0
lamps
Y2 Y4
(LED lamps)
Y5
Rear line
Y6
extension Lower 13
Y7
numbers
Y0
connector
Various Uses
Wiring for
Y1
Y2
Output indicator
Y3 Y5
Y4
lamps
Y6 COM2
Y7
(LED lamps)
14
Y2 Y4 Y6 COM2
Higher
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
numbers
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
FX2N-16EYT-C
When an output (Y) number is assigned, 8 points on side A will be used for the lower output numbers, and 8
points on side B will be used for the higher output numbers.
With cover Without cover Side No.

Output indicator No. Side 16
A B
lamps Connector type
Y0 1 11 Y0
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
(LED lamps)
Y1 2 12 Y1
Rear line Y2 3 13 Y2
extension Y3 4 14 Y3
connector Y4 5 15 Y4
Output indicator Y5 6
Y6 7
16 Y5
17 Y6
17
lamps
Options
Units and
Other Extension
(LED lamps) Terminal arrangement Y7 8 18 Y7
COM 9 19 COM
10 20

Display Module
FX2N-16EYT
19
Terminal Block
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
20
Cassette
Memory
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")
277
FX2N-16EYT-C

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
9(0.36")
40(1.58") 87(3.43")

FX2N-16EYT
FX2N-16EYT-C
COM Y0 Y7 COM Y0 Y7
278
11
How to connect connector (FX2N-16EYT-C)
Counters
High-Speed
(Socket)
20
FX-16E-
CAB type cable 12
External Wiring
20
19 17 15 13 11
B 20 18 16 14 12 19 17 15 13 11
20 18 16 14 12 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
10 8 6 4 2
A 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Side B COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Side A COM Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
(Exe.) Side B X050 to X057
Side A X040 to X047
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
279
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.9 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)
16.9 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)


Item FX2N-16EYS

Item FX2N-16EYS
3. Output specifications (Triac output type)

Item FX2N-16EYS
Output unit Triac output (SSR)
External power supply 85 to 242V AC
Indication of output operation Activation of the photo-thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel.
0.3 A/point
Resistance
The total load current per common should be as follows:
Maximum load load
• 8 output points/common: 0.8A or less
Inductive load 15 VA/100V AC, 30 VA/200V AC
Open circuit leakage current 1 mA/100V AC, 2 mA/200V AC
Minimum load 0.4 VA/100V AC, 1.6 VA/200V AC
OFF→ON 1 ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 10 ms or less
Load
Y
AC power
supply unit U
COM
Fuse
Load
AC power
supply unit U
COM
Fuse
280
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 16.9 FX2N-16EYS (Triac Output: 16 Points)
11
Counters
High-Speed
COM1 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y5 Y7
Output indicator
COM1 Y1 Y3
Y0 Y2 Y4
External Wiring
Y0
lamps
Y2 Y4
(LED lamps)
Y5
Rear line
Y6
extension Lower
Y7
numbers
Y0
connector
13
Y1
Y2
Output indicator
Y3 Y5
Y4
Various Uses
Wiring for
lamps
Y6 COM2
Y7
(LED lamps)
Y2 Y4 Y6 COM2
Higher
numbers 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
9(0.36")
Options
Units and
Other Extension
40(1.58") 87(3.43")

18
Display Module
U U U U
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
281
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 17 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units (External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.1 Special Function Units/Blocks
17. Other Extension Devices and Optional Units

(External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement)
17.1 Special Function Units/Blocks
17.1.1 FX0N-3A
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 0.2kg (0.44lbs)
•Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in
width or screws.
•Accessories: Label for indication of special

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
•Terminal block: M3 screws
•The extension cable is already connected to
the extension block.
4(0.16") 87(3.43")
43(1.7")
Terminal Layout
VIN2 IIN2 COM2 VOUT
VIN1 IIN1 COM1 IOUT COM
17.1.2 FX2N-2AD
External Dimensions
width or screws.
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
VIN2 IIN2 COM
VIN1 IIN1 COM
282
11
17.1.3 FX2N-2DA
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
•Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in 12
width or screws.
External Wiring
80(3.15") •Accessories: Label for indication of special
90(3.55")
unit/block number
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
VOUT2 IOUT2 COM2

14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
VOUT1 IOUT1 COM1
15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
17.1.4 FX2N-4AD
External Dimensions
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
•The extension cable is already connected to 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout 18
Display Module
24- V+ I+ V+ I+ V+ I+ V+ I+
24+ VI- FG VI- FG VI- FG VI-
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
283
17.1.5 FX2N-4DA
External Dimensions
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
24- V+ I+ V+ I+ V+ I+ V+ I+
24+ VI- VI- VI- VI-
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
17.1.6 FX2N-4AD-PT
External Dimensions
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
24- I- L- I- L- I- L- I- L-
24+ L+ FG L+ FG L+ FG L+
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
284
11
17.1.7 FX2N-4AD-TC
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
width or screws.
External Wiring
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
24- SLD L- SLD L- SLD L- SLD L-
24+ L+ L+ L+ L+
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
17.1.8 FX2N-5A
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs) 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
•Terminal block: M3 screws 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
18
Terminal Layout
Display Module
24- V+ I+ VI- V+ I+ VI- V+ I+

24+ VI- V+ I+ VI- V+ I+ VI-
OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
285
17.1.9 FX2N-2LC
External Dimensions
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
TC- TC-
24- OUT1OUT2 CT FG PTB CT FG PTB
TC+ TC+
24+ COM CT PTA PTB CT PTA PTB
CH1 CH2
17.1.10 FX2N-8AD
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes •MASS(Weight): 0.4kg (0.88lbs)
Unit:mm (inches)
width or screws.

unit/block number
105(4.14")
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
•Terminal block: M3.5 screws

67(2.64") 8(0.32")
75(2.96") 75(2.96")
Terminal Layout
V1+ I1+ COM1 V3+ I3+ COM3

24+ 24- V2+ I2+ COM2 V4+ I4+ COM4

286
11
17.1.11 FX2N-1HC
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
width or screws.
External Wiring
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
A24+ A5+ B24+ B5+ XD24 XP24 XP5 YH+ YS+
A12+ A- B12+ B- XD5 COMD COMP YH- YS-
15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
17.1.12 FX2N-1PG(-E)
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in 16
width or screws.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
unit/block number
80(3.15")
90(3.55")

•The extension cable is already connected to 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
18
Terminal Layout
Display Module
COM0 RP PG0+ CLR STOP DOG

VIN FP PG0- COM1 S/S S/S
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
287
17.1.13 FX2N-10PG
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight):0.2kg (0.44lbs)
width or screws.

90(3.55")
unit/block number
•Terminal block: Connector
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 74(2.92")
87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
VIN+ VIN-
FP+ FP-
RP+ RP-
PG0+ PG0-
CLR+ CLR-
Notch
φA+ φA-
φB+ φB-
DOG START
S/S S/S
X0 X1
17.1.14 FX2N-10GM
External Dimensions
Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs)
•Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in
width only can be used for
installation.
90(3.55")
•Accessories: FX2NC-100MPCB power

cable, FX2N-GM-5EC
extension cable, label for
indication of special unit/
block number
60(2.37") 13(0.52") 74(2.92")
Terminal Layout
CON1 CON2
START X0 SVRDY SVEND
STOP X1 COM2 COM2
ZRN X2 CLR PG0
FWD X3 COM3 COM4
RVS Y0
Notch
DOG Y1 FP RP
LSF Y2 VIN VIN
LSR Y3 VIN VIN
COM1 COM1 COM5 COM5
Y4 Y5 ST1 ST2
288
11
17.1.15 FX2N-20GM
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
•Installation: DIN rail of 35mm (1.38") in 12
width only.
External Wiring
•Accessories: FX2NC-100MPCB power
90(3.55")
cable, FX2NC-100BPCB
crossover power cable,
FX2N-GM-5EC extension
cable, label for indication of 13
special unit/block number
Various Uses
Wiring for
86(3.39") 13(0.52") 74(2.92")
Terminal Layout
CON1 Y axis CON2 X axis CON3 (X axis) CON4 (Y axis) 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Y00 X00 START START SVRDY SVEND SVRDY SVEND
Y01 X01 STOP STOP COM2 COM2 COM6 COM6
Y02 X02 ZRN ZRN CLR PG0 CLR PG0
Y03 X03 FWD FWD COM3 COM4 COM7 COM8
Y04 X04 RVS RVS
Notch
Y05 X05 DOG DOG FP RP FP RP 15
Y06 X06 LSF LSF VIN VIN VIN VIN
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
Y07 X07 LSR LSR VIN VIN VIN VIN
COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM5 COM5 COM9 COM9
ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
289
17.1.16 FX2N-1RM(-E)-SET
External Dimensions
FX2N-1RM Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 0.5kg (1.1lbs)
2-φ4.5 mounting holes •Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in
width or screws.
(0.83")
21
•Accessories: FX2N-RS-5CAB signal cable
(5m(16’4")), F2-720RSV

resolver, extension cable
(55mm(2.06")), label for
111(4.38")
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
indication of special unit/
block number
9 50 4 30
(0.36") (1.97") (0.16") (1.19")
97(3.82") 55(2.17")
Unit:mm (inches)
(0.38") 45(1.78")
φ40
φ33.32
φ10
0
φ5
(0.56") (1.78")
10
14 45
9.5
(0.4")
3 4
(0.12") (0.16")
9.5(0.38") 28 60
45(1.78") (1.11") (2.37")
Terminal Layout
S/S 24+ 24-

B0 B1
290
11
17.1.17 FX2N-232IF
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
width or screws.
External Wiring
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
•Connector: RS-232C
(D-SUB 9-pin, male)
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
55(2.17") 85(3.35")
Terminal Layout 14
1 CD(DCD)
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
2 RD(RXD)
5
9 3 SD(TXD)
4
8 4 ER(DTR)
3
7 5 SG
2
6 6 DR(DSR)
1
7 RS(RTS) 15
8 CS(CTS)
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
9 CI(RI)
17.1.18 FX2N-32ASI-M
External Dimensions
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
•installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in
width or screws.

17
80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4(0.16") 9(0.36") 18
55(2.17") 87(3.43")
Display Module
Terminal Layout
ASI+ ASI- 19
ASI+ ASI-
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
291
17.1.19 FX2N-64CL-M
External Dimensions
width or screws.
(mounting hole pitch) •Accessories: Label for indication of special

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
•The connector for CC-Link/LT interface is on
the front face of the product.
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
17.1.20 FX2N-16CCL-M
External Dimensions
width or screws.

80(3.15")
90(3.55")
unit/block number
Terminal resistor:
2 resistors for standard cable
2 resistors for high-
performance cable
•Terminal block: M3 screw for power supply
75(2.96") 9(0.36") terminal
(mounting hole pitch) 87(3.43") M3.5 screw for signal
85(3.35") terminal
Terminal Layout
24-
24+ FG SLD DG DA DB
292
11
17.1.21 FX2N-32CCL
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
width or screws.
External Wiring
90(3.55")
unit/block number,
Label for indication of link
station number
•Terminal block: M3 screws 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
24- DA DB DG
24+ FG DA DB SLD
15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
17.1.22 FX2N-16LNK-M
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in 16
width or screws.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
unit/block number
80(3.15")
90(3.55")

the extension block. 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4(0.16") 9(0.36")
43(1.7") 87(3.43")
Terminal Layout
18
Display Module
24- DG RUNB
24+ DATA RUNA
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
293
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.2 Power Supply
17.2 Power Supply
17.2.1 FX2N-20PSU
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 •MASS(Weight): 0.3kg (0.66lbs)
(0.3")
mounting holes
7.5
Unit:mm (inches) •Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in
4(0.16") width or screws.
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
4(0.16") 52(2.05") 9(0.36")

(mounting hole pitch) 75(2.96")
60(2.37")
Terminal Layout
L N
24V+ 24V-
24V+ 24V-
17.3 Special Adapters
17.3.1 FX3U-4AD-ADP
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout

24+ •MASS(Weight): 0.1kg (0.22lbs)
24- •Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in
width or screws.
V1+
•Terminal block: European type
10 I1+
poles COM1
106(4.18")
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
V2+
I2+
COM2
V3+
I3+
COM3
7(0.28") 5
74 15.5 15.1(0.6") V4+
poles
(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") I4+
COM4
294
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.3 Special Adapters
11
17.3.2 FX3U-4DA-ADP
Counters
High-Speed
•MASS(Weight): 0.1kg (0.22lbs)
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+
24- •Installation: DIN rail of 35 mm (1.38") in 12
width or screws.
External Wiring
V1+ •Terminal block: European type

10 I1+
COM1
106(4.18")
poles
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
V2+
I2+
COM2
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
V3+
I3+
7(0.28")
COM3
74 15.5 15.1(0.6") 5
V4+
(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") poles
I4+
COM4 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
17.3.3 FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP

24+ •MASS(Weight): 0.1kg (0.22lbs) 15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
width or screws.
L1+
10 L1-
poles I1-
106(4.18")
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
L2+
L2-
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
I2-
L3+
L3-
I3-
7(0.28") 5
74 15.5 15.1(0.6") L4+
(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7")
poles
L4- 17
I4-
Options
Units and
Other Extension
17.3.4 FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP
External Dimensions, Terminal Layout 18

•MASS(Weight): 0.1kg (0.22lbs)
Display Module
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) 24+

width or screws.
10
poles 19
106(4.18")
J-type
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
J-type
Terminal Block
L1+
L1-
L2+
L2-
7(0.28")
74 15.5 15.1(0.6") 5
L3- 20
L3-
poles
Cassette
Memory
(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7") L4+

I4-
295
17.3.5 FX3U-232ADP
External Dimensions
2-φ4.5 mounting holes Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 80g (0.18lbs)
width or screws.

(D-SUB 9-pin, male)
106(4.18")
90(3.55")
7(0.28") 74 7.5 98(3.86")
15.1(0.6")
(0.3")
(2.92") 17.6(0.7")
Terminal Layout
1 CD(DCD)
2 RD(RXD)
5
9 3 SD(TXD)
4
8 4 ER(DTR)
3
7 5 SG(GND)
2
6 6 DR(DSR)
1
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 Not used
17.3.6 FX3U-485ADP
External Dimensions
width or screws.
•Accessories: Label for indication of link

station number
106(4.18")
90(3.55")
98(3.86")

•Terminal resistance:330Ω/110Ω, built-in
7(0.28")
74 15.5 15.1(0.6")
(2.92") (0.62") 17.6(0.7")
Terminal Layout
RDA Terminal resistance

RDB setting switch
5 poles SDA 330Ω
SDB OPEN
SG 110Ω
296
11
17.3.7 FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Counters
High-Speed
X0/3+ width or screws.
External Wiring
X0/3-
X1/4+
106(4.18")
90(3.55")
98(3.86")
X1/4-
10 X2/5+
poles X2/5-
X6/7+ 13
X6/7-
Various Uses
Wiring for
SG
SG
7(0.28") 15.1(0.6")
74 15.5 17.6(0.7")
(2.92") (0.62") 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
17.3.8 FX3U-2HSY-ADP

Y0/2+ width or screws.
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
Y0/2-
Y4/6+
106(4.18")
Y4/6- •Switch: Output form switching

90(3.55")
98(3.86")
10 SGA between PLS•EDIR and

poles Y1/3+ FP•ERP
Y1/3-
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Y5/7+
Y5/7-
SGB
7(0.28") 15.1(0.6")
74 15.5 17.6(0.7")
(2.92") (0.62") 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
297
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.4 Expansion Board
17.4 Expansion Board
17.4.1 FX3U-USB-BD
External Dimensions
2-φ3.2 •MASS(Weight): 20g (0.05lbs)
mounting holes Unit:mm (inches)
•Accessories: Two M3 tapping screws (for
46.1(1.82") installation of board), USB
driver software (CD-ROM),
USB cable (3m(9’10"))
•Connector: USB (MINI B plug, female)
53.5(2.11") 19.6
(0.78")
17.4.2 FX3U-232-BD
External Dimensions
installation of board)
46.1(1.82")
(D-SUB 9-pin, male)
53.5(2.11") 9.2 19.3

62.7(2.47") (0.37") (0.76")
Terminal Layout
1 CD(DCD)
2 RD(RXD)
1
6 3 SD(TXD)
2
7 4 ER(DTR)
3
8 5 SG(GND)
4
9 6 DR(DSR)
5
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 Not used
17.4.3 FX3U-422-BD
External Dimensions
46.1(1.82")
•Connector: RS-422
(MINI DIN 8-pin, female)
53.5(2.11") 19.6
(0.78")
298
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.5 Connector Conversion Adapter
11
17.4.4 FX3U-485-BD
Counters
High-Speed
External Dimensions
•Accessories: Two M3 tapping screws (for 12
installation of board),
External Wiring
46.1(1.82")
Label for indication of link
station number
•Terminal resistance:330Ω/110Ω, built-in
19.6 13
53.5(2.11") 15.5
(0.78")
Various Uses
Wiring for
69.0(2.72") (0.62")
Terminal Layout
RDA Terminal resistance

RDB setting switch 14
5 poles SDA 330Ω
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
SDB OPEN
SG 110Ω
17.4.5 FX3U-CNV-BD
15
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
External Dimensions
16
46.1(1.82")
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
53.5(2.11") 19.6
(0.78") 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
17.5 Connector Conversion Adapter
17.5.1 FX2N-CNV-BC
18
Display Module
External Dimensions
•Installation: Screws only
19
30(1.19")
40(1.58")
Terminal Block
60.5(2.39")
(0.65")
20
16.4
Cassette
Memory
299
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.6 Interface Module
17.6 Interface Module
17.6.1 FX-232AWC-H
External Dimensions
(D-SUB 25-pin, female)
RS-422
MITSUBISHI
POWER (D-SUB 25-pin, female)
60(2.37")
CONPUTER
(RS232C)
(RS422)
FX
FX-232AWC-H
80(3.15") 25
(0.99")
17.6.2 FX-USB-AW
External Dimensions
•MASS(Weight): 20g (0.05lbs)
Unit:mm (inches)
•Accessories: USB driver software
(CD-ROM),
(0.6")
15
USB cable (3m(9’10"))
17(0.67") 45(1.78") •Connector: RS-422

(MINI DIN 8-pin, male)
USB (MINI B plug, female)
MITSUBISHI
(0.83")
FX-USB-AW
(RS-422)
21
FX
PW
RD
SD
300
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 17.7 Display Module
11
17.7 Display Module
Counters
High-Speed
17.7.1 FX3U-7DM
External Dimensions
12
External Wiring
Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 20g (0.05lbs)
35 (1.38")
•Accessories: Display module mounting top
cover
11.5 Approx.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
48 (1.89") (0.46") 8.5 (0.34")
17.7.2 FX3U-7DM-HLD
14
External Dimensions
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
70 (2.76") Unit:mm (inches) •MASS(Weight): 20g (0.05lbs)
53 (2.09")
•Accessories: PLC cover
Mounting bracket × 2 pieces
Tightening bolt (M4 × 25) × 2
pieces 15
1.5m (4’11") extension cable
Extension Units
Powered
IInput/Output
Mounting
bracket Clamp × 5 pieces
Display module fixing hooks
59 (2.33")
4 28 (1.11")
5 (0.2") 49 (1.93") Guides
(0.16")
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
36 (1.42")
46 (1.82")
40 (1.58")
17
5 (0.2")
Guides Panel thickness must be
Options
Units and
Other Extension
between 1 and 5 mm
(0.04" and 0.19").
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
301
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 18 FX3U-7DM (Display Module)
18. FX3U-7DM (Display Module)

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, externally cut off all phases of the power supply.
Failure to do so may expose you to shock hazard.
• Correctly connect the battery for memory backup.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat or short-circuit the battery. Do not throw it into the fire.
Doing so may rupture or ignite it.
• Before modifying the program under operation or performing operation for forcible output, running or stopping,
carefully read the manual, and sufficiently ensure the safety.
An operation error may damage the machine or cause accidents.
• Do not change programs in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment (such as the programming tool and
GOT) at the same time.
Such changes may cause destruction or malfunction of programs in the PLC.

PRECAUTIONS
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause failures, malfunctions or fire.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable, turn off power.
Failure to do so may cause unit failure or malfunctions.
Failure to do so may cause device failure or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module, expansion boards and special adapters
- Extension blocks, connector conversion adapter and FX Series terminal block
302
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.1 Description of Products (Introduction of Related Products)
11
18.1 Description of Products (Introduction of Related Products)
Counters
High-Speed
The FX3U-7DM display module can be incorporated in the main unit, or can be installed in the enclosure using
the FX3U-7DM-HLD display module holder.
Optional Optional 12
External Wiring
13
Display module Display module holder Extension cable
Various Uses
Wiring for
FX3U-7DM FX3U-7DM-HLD (Supplied with FX3U-7DM-HLD)
Installation on main unit: Installation in enclosure:

The display module can be The FX3U-7DM display module can be installed and used on
incorporated into the main unit. an outside panel. 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
POWER
POWER
FX 3U-48M
FX3U-48MR/ES
OUT
0
0 11
10
1
1 12
2 13
2
3 14
4 15
3
5 16
4 5 6
ERROR
ERROR
7 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
6 177 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
RUN
RUN
BATT
15
・
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Y0 Y2 ・ Y4 Y6 ・ Y10 Y12 Y14 Y16 Y20 Y22 Y24 Y26 COM5
FX3U PLC
For a detailed description of the display module holder, refer to the "FX3U-7DM-HLD User’s Manual".
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
303
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.2 Specifications
18.2 Specifications
18.2.1 Display/switch specifications
Item Description
Display device/ backlight STN monochrome liquid crystal display/Backlight: LED (green)
Number of letters 16 letters × 4 lines (2 byte letters: 8 letters × 4 lines)
Displaed
Characters English Alphabet, Numbers, Japanese Characters, Shift JIS Level-1, 2
letters
Language for menu display Japanese/English
Button 4 operation buttons (OK, ESC, +, and -)
Notes for displaying symbols(ASCII Code)
• (ASCII Code:5C) symbol is displayed as " " even if the language display setting at FX3U-7DM is set to
English(LANGUAGE:ENGLISH).
• The Character at ASCII Code:7E "~" is not displayed.
18.2.2 Parts layout
Liquid crystal screen
ESC button
"-" button
"+" button
OK button
Functions of operation buttons:

The display module has 4 operation buttons as shown in the following table.
Name of button Function of operation button
ESC Use this button to cancel the operation and to return to the previous screen.
- Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value.
+ Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value.
OK Use this button to select an item or to determine the set numeric value.
Unit:mm (inches)
35(1.38")
11.5 Approx. 8.5

(0.46") (Approx. 0.34")
48(1.89")
For FX3U PLC installation: Unit:mm (inches)

After installing the display
module on the main unit, the
main unit will be approximately
88.5(3.49")
2.5 mm (0.1") higher than the

initial height.
For the other dimensions, refer
to the dimensional outline
drawing of the main unit.
304
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.3 Installation and Removal
11
18.3 Installation and Removal
Counters
High-Speed
This section describes how to install and remove the display module.
1 Turn off the power of the PLC.

12
Before installing or removing the display module, be sure to turn off the power to the PLC.
External Wiring
2 Remove the top cover. B
A
While pressing the top cover hook ("A"), remove the top cover
("B") as shown in the right figure. 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
3 Install/remove the display module.
D
Installation: Push the display module ("C") down at C 15

position "E" shown in the lower right figure to install
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
the display module on the main unit ("D").
Removal: Pull the display module outward ("C") to

remove the display module from the main unit ("D"). 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Enlarged view
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
E
18
Display Module
4 Attach the top cover. F

D
G
Put side "G" of the display module's top cover ("F") on the main
unit ("D") as shown, then push down on the top cover ("F") until
it locks into place.
19
Terminal Block
The top cover of the display module is supplied with the FX3U-7DM
(display module).
20
Cassette
Memory
305
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.4 Summary of Functions
18.4 Summary of Functions

The display module functions are summarized below.
Item Function Remarks Reference
Displays the time indicated by the main unit’s internal Button Refer to
Top screen (time display)
real-time clock. operation Subsection 18.5.2
Menu screen functions
Input (X)*1, output (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state (S),
Devices timer (T), counter (C), data register (D) [16-bit/32-bit], Button Refer to
extended register (R), and extended file register (ER) operation Section 18.7
[16-bit/32-bit] monitor/test function.
Monitor/Test
User Refer to
(User- Up to 4 data registers (D) [16-bit/32-bit] can be Requires Section 18.8
registered registered. program Refer to
device) Section 18.19
Button Refer to Section
ErrorCheck Performs error checks and displays the results.
operation 18.9
LANGUAGE (selects the Selects either Japanese or English as the menu Button Refer to Section
menu display language) display language. operation 18.10
Button Refer to Section
Contrast Adjusts the contrast (-5 to 10); default setting: 0
operation 18.11
Refer to
Setting Sets the current time.
ClockMenu Button Subsection 18.12.1
(Time setting) operation Refer to
Display Displays the current time.
Subsection 18.12.2
Button Refer to
EntryCode The currently specified entry code can be canceled.
operation Section 18.13
Initializes the Input (X)*1, output (Y), auxiliary relay
(M), state (S), timer (T), counter (C), data register (D)
ClearAllDev [16-bit/32-bit], and extended register (R). The file Button Refer to
(Device all clear) register (D) is excluded from this function. (Bit operation Section 18.14
devices are turned OFF, and word device current
values are set to "0".)
Verifies the version information, entry code status, Button Refer to
PLC Status
program memory type status, and battery voltage, etc. operation Section 18.15
Button Refer to
ScanTime Displays the scan time (max./min./current value)
operation Section 18.16
Cassette Allows data transfers (and consistency checks) Button Refer to
(Memory cassette transfer) between the internal RAM and the memory cassette. operation Section 18.17
Non-menu functions
Requires
Operation button ON/OFF Refer to
Allows monitoring of operation button ON/OFF status. program or
information Section 18.20
monitor
Changes the display format of the current values and
Hexadecimal current value setting values for the timer, counter, data register, Requires Refer to
display setting extended register, and extended file register to a program *2 Section 18.21
hexadecimal display format.
Display screen protect Enables all functions, prohibits change (test) Requires Refer to
function functions, and protects the top screen (time display). program Section 18.22
The following codes saved at the display device can
be used as display commands:
Requires Refer to
User message display Alphanumeric: 20H to 7DH ASCII code
program Section 18.23
Katakana: A1H to DFH ASCII code
Japanese character: Shift JIS Level-1, 2
*1. There is no test function for "Input (X)".

*2. A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer (T), counter (C), data register (file
register) (D), extended register (R) [16-bit/32-bit], and extended file register (ER) [16-bit/32-bit] current values.
→ Refer to Section 18.21 for the setting procedure.
306
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen
11
18.5 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen
Counters
High-Speed
All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English. When the menu display
language is set to Japanese, please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations.
→ Refer to Section 18.25 for the Japanese & English display character correspondence table.
→ Refer to Section 18.10 for menu display language setting details. 12
External Wiring
18.5.1 Title screen
The screen shown at right is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the power
is turned on. ME L S E C - F
Content FX3U Se r i e s [1] 13
[1] Model name Ve r . 2 . 00 [2]
Various Uses
Wiring for
[2] Version
18.5.2 Top screen (time display) 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Following the title screen display, the "Current Time screen" is then
displayed.
31 . 5 . 05
23 : 59 : 59 [ Tue ]
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
A user screen can also be displayed by using the user message display function.
→ Refer to Section 18.23 for user message display function details.
Although the year displays in a 2-digit format (05), this can be changed to a 4-digit format (2005) by revising
the program. 16
→ Refer to Subsection 18.12.3 for the 2-digit year to 4-digit year change procedure.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
18.5.3 Menu screen
As shown in the figure at right, the menu screen displays 4 lines of the
total menu. Press the [+] button to scroll downward through the menu. Mo n i t o r / T e s t 17
E r r o r Ch e c k
Options
Units and
Other Extension
L A N GU A G E
Button operations at this menu screen are explained below.
Co n t r a s t
Button Operation Description
ESC Returns to the "top screen" (time display). C l o c kMe n u
Scrolls upward through the menu. En t r yCo d e 18
Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.
Display Module
- C l e a r A l l De v
This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the
beginning of the menu. PLC S t a t u s
Scrolls downward through the menu. S c a n T i me

Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling. Ca s s e t t e
+
This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of
the menu.
19
Terminal Block
OK Selects the item where the cursor is blinking.
20
Cassette
Memory
307
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.6 Menu Structure
18.6 Menu Structure
Title screen
Operation keys
ME L S E C - F OK Press the [OK] button
FX3U Se r i e s ESC Press the [ESC] button
Ve r . 2 . 00
- + The [+] / [-] button are used to move
the cursor and switch between display
screens.
Approx. 1.5 secs.
Top screen (Time display) Menu screen
OK Mo n i t o r / T e s t OK D( 16b i t )
31 . 5 . 05 ESC ESC DD ( 3 2 b i t )
23 : 59 : 59 [ Tue ] T
C
R( 16b i t )
Switched by system information setting DR ( 3 2 b i t )
ER ( 1 6 b i t )
OK DER ( 3 2 b i t )
ESC X
User message display function Y
M
<P r o d u c t i o n> S
Ta r ge t 10000 Us e r
Pr oduc t i on 100
R ema i n i n g 9900 Display example
E r r o r Ch e c k OK E r r o r Ch e c k
User creation screen (example)
ESC No e r r o r s
L A NGU A G E OK L A NGU A G E
ESC
Eng l i s h
Display example
Co n t r a s t OK Co n t r a s t
ESC 0
( - 5 ~ 10 )
C l o c kMe n u OK Cu r r e n t t i me
ESC Cl ock Se t t i ng
308
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.6 Menu Structure
11
Counters
High-Speed
Display example
OK
En t r yCo d e The En t r y Co d e 12
ESC I s no t se t
External Wiring
13
OK
Various Uses
Wiring for
C l e a r A l l De v Cl ea r
ESC a l l dev i ces
OK Execu t e
ESC Ca n c e l
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Display example
PLC S t a t u s OK PLC S t a t u s ( 1 / 3 )
ESC Ve r . 2 . 0 0
The En t r y Co d e
i s no t se t 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
- +
Display example
ESC PLC S t a t u s ( 2 / 3 )
Memo r y casse t t e
Pr o t ec t i on OF F 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Ca p a c i t y 64K
- +
Display example
ESC PLC S t a t u s ( 3 / 3 )
Ba t t e r y 2 . 9V
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
C o mm e n t s
0 / 0
Display example
S c a n T i me OK S c a n T i me
18
Display Module
ESC Cu r r : 0 . 5ms
Ma x : 0 . 8ms
Mi n : 0 . 3ms
Display example
19
Terminal Block
Ca s s e t t e OK Memo r y Ca s s e t t e
ESC C a s s e t t e  R AM
Ca s s e t t e R AM
C a s s e t t e : R AM
20
Cassette
Memory
309
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.7 Monitor/Test Mode [Excluding User-Registered Devices]
18.7 Monitor/Test Mode [Excluding User-Registered Devices]
18.7.1 Relevant devices

Monitoring and testing can be performed from the "Monitor/Test" menu for the devices listed below.
(Monitoring/testing is not possible for the file register (D) and the index register (V/Z)).
: Possible : Possible under certain conditions
: Not possible −: Item not supported by this device
Monitored Items Test Items
Device Forced Current

Operation Current Setting Setting
Contact Reset ON/ Value
Direction Value Value Change
OFF Change
Input [X] − − − − − − −
Output [Y] − − − − *1 − −
Auxiliary relay [M] − − − − *1 − −
State [S] − − − − *1 − −
Timer [T] − *2*3
Counter [C] *4 *2*3
Data register [D, DD] − − − − − −

File register [D, DD] − − − − − −
Extended register [R, DR] − − − − − −
*5 − − − − − −
Extended file register [ER, DER]
Index register (V,Z) − − − − − −
*1. A forced ON or OFF is executed for only one operation cycle, and therefore has a considerable effect
on the SET/RST and self retaining circuits when the PLC is running.
Moreover, a forced ON/OFF result is retained for devices (Y,M,S) which are not being driven by an
OUT instruction, etc., in the program.
*2. Setting values of timer and counter can be changed when the PLC status is as shown below.
Program Memory Type RUN/STOP Status Setting Change Enabled/Disabled
RUN Enabled
Internal RAM
STOP Enabled
RUN Disabled
PROTECT switch ON
STOP Disabled
Memory cassette
RUN Enabled
PROTECT switch OFF
STOP Enabled
*3. The following setting changes are possible.

Changeable
Selectable Setting Values Setting Description
Content
The directly specified value becomes the
Without index modifier [Direct (K,H)]
Direct setting value.
Direct
numeral The [directly specified numerical value] +
setting With index modifier [direct (K,H) + index
setting [index register’s current value] becomes
register (V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7)]
the setting value.
Without index modifier The specified device’s current value
[data register D, extended register (R)] becomes the setting value.
Indirectly
Indirect With index modifier The [directly specified device No.] + [index
[data register (D) + index register (V0 to specified register’s current value] becomes the
setting
V7, Z0 to Z7)], device No. device No. specified by the setting value.
[Extended register (R) + index register (V0 That device’s current value becomes the
to V7, Z0 to Z7)] setting value.
*4. The C200 to C255 32-bit up/down counter and the high-speed counter have counting directions.
*5. Enabled only when a memory cassette is installed.
310
11
18.7.2 Monitor mode operation
Counters
High-Speed
This section explains the procedure for monitoring the input [X], output [Y], auxiliary relay [M], state [S], timer
[T], counter [C], data registers [D, DD], extended registers [R, DR], and the extended file registers [ER, DER].
The file register [D] and the index registers [V,Z] cannot be monitored.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.3 for a monitor screen display example. 12
→ Refer to Section 18.8 for user-registered device operation procedures.
External Wiring
→ Refer to Section 18.21 for the procedure used to display the timer, counter, and data register
current values as hexadecimal values.
1) At the menu screen, use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor
to the "Monitor/Test" item, then press [OK] to display the "device D( 16b i t )
selection screen" shown at right.
To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time
DD ( 3 2 b i t ) 13
T
Various Uses
Wiring for
display)", press [ESC] at the menu screen
C
2) Use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor to the device which is
to be monitored. R( 16b i t )
To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press
DR ( 3 2 b i t )
[ESC].
ER ( 1 6 b i t ) 14
DER ( 3 2 b i t )
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
X
Y
M
S 15
Us e r
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
3) Press [OK] to display the monitor screen for the device which was
selected for monitoring. D 0 0
To cancel the operation and return to the "device selection screen",
D 1 0
press [ESC].
After the power is turned on, the number of the device to be D 2 0 16
displayed is shown as follows. D 3 0
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
a) The first time the power is turned on, the display begins with
device No.1.
b) At subsequent power ONs, the device which was being
monitored at the previous operation is displayed (they are saved D 34 0
in memory for each device type). D 35 0 17
4) Use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor or the screen to the
Options
Units and
Other Extension
D 36 0
until the device to be monitored is displayed.
D 37 0
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.3 for status display details.
Selected Device Type Button Operation Description

• All devices ESC Returns to the "device selection screen". 18
Display Module
• Data registers (D, DD) Scrolls upward. Press for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.
• Extended registers - If pressed again at the beginning of the device No. list, the display jumps
(R, DR) to the end of the device No. list.
• Extended file registers
(ER, DER) Scrolls downward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed scrolling.
+ If pressed again at the end of the device No. list, the display jumps to the
• Timer (T)
beginning of the device No. list.
19
• Counter (C)
Terminal Block
Scrolls the display screen upward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-
• Input (X) - speed scrolling. If pressed again at the beginning of the device No. list, the
• Output (Y) display jumps to the end of the device No. list.
• Auxiliary relay (M) Scrolls the display screen downward. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-
• State (S) + speed scrolling. If pressed again at the end of the device No. list, the 20
display jumps to the beginning of the device No. list.
Cassette
Memory
• All devices except (x) OK Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer.
311
18.7.3 Monitor screen & status display

→ Refer to Section 18.21 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values.
1. Data register [D (16-bit)] / extended register [R (16-bit)] / extended file register [ER (16-bit)]
Display Content D 0 0 [1]

[1] Device No. D 1 0 [2]
[2] Current value D 2 0
D 3 0
2. Data register [DD (32-bit)] / extended register [DR (32-bit)] / extended file register [DER (32-bit)]
Display Content
D 1 D 0 [1]
Device No.
[1] [Upper 16-bit device No. (odd number)] 0 [2]
[Lower 16-bit device No. (even number)] D 3 D 2
[2] Current value 0
File register (D):

The file register (D) current value cannot be directly monitored at the
display module.
3. Timer (T)
[2] [3]
Display Content
[1] Device No. T 0 P R
Contact image 0 [4]
[2] ON: [5]
1000
OFF: Blank
Reset image
[3] ON:
[1] [2] [3]
OFF: Blank
[4] Current value T 1 P R
Setting value or device specified by setting value (if an index 0 [4]
[5]
modifier is present, the index register’s device is also displayed).
D 0 [5]
[6] Current value of device specified by setting value.
1000 [6]
312
11
4. Counter [C]
Counters
High-Speed
[1] [2] [3]
Display Content C0 to C199
[1] Device No. C 0 P R
Contact image 0 [5]
[2] ON:
OFF: Blank
100 [6] 12
External Wiring
Reset image
[3] ON:
[1] [2] [3]
OFF: Blank C0 to C199
Count direction display
C 1 P R
UP count:
[4] 0 [5] 13
DOWN count: Blank
(32-bit up/down counter and high-speed counter only) D 0 [6]
Various Uses
Wiring for
[5] Current value 1000 [7]
Setting value or device specified by setting value (if an index
[6] [1] [2] [3] [4]
modifier is present, the index register’s device is also displayed). C200 to C255
[7] Current value of device specified by setting value.
C2 0 0 P R U 14
0 [5]
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
-1 [5]
[6]
[1] [2] [3] [4]

C200 to C255
15
C2 0 1 P R U
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
0 [5]
DD 0 [5]
[6]
1000 [7]
5. Input [X] / Output [Y] / Auxiliary Relay [M] / State [S] 16

X000 01234 [1]
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Display Content
Device No. at beginning of line. X010 34567 [2]
Input (X) and output (Y): 8 points per line. X020 012 67
[1]
Auxiliary relay (M), special auxiliary relay (M), and state (S): 10 X030 56
points per line.
ON/OFF status 17
[2] ON: Last digit of device No.. M 0 45 89
Options
Units and
Other Extension
[1]
OFF: " • ".
M 10 23 67 [2]
M 20 01 45 89
M 30 0123 67
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
313
18.7.4 Test mode operation

There are 3 types of test mode operations, depending on the device type. The 3 operations are explained
below.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.1 for details concerning test mode subject devices.
1. Data registers [D: D (16-bit), DD (32-bit)] / extended registers [R: R (16-bit), DR (32-bit) /
extended file registers [ER: ER (16-bit), DER (32-bit)] / user-registered devices
1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose

current value is to be changed. D6 2 0 0 0
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.2 for monitor function operation D6 2 0 1 0
details.
D6 2 0 2 0
D6 2 0 3 0
2) Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test
mode. The current value begins blinking (refer to fig. at right). D6 2 0 0 0
D6 2 0 1 0
D6 2 0 2 0
D6 2 0 3 0
3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired.

To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press D6 2 0 0
[ESC]. D6 2 0 1 5
Button Operation Description D6 2 0 2
Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor D6 2 0 3
ESC
screen".
Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for high-
-
speed reduction.
Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for
+
high-speed increase.
Registers the current value and returns to the "monitor
OK
screen".
4) Press [OK] to register the current value and return to the "monitor screen".
• File register (D)

The display module’s test function cannot be used to change the current value of the file register (D) which
is stored in the program memory.
314
11
2. Timer [T], counter [C]
Counters
High-Speed
1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device where the
[Monitor screen]
test function is to be used.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.2 for monitor function operation T 0 P R
details. 0
1000
12
External Wiring
2) Press the [OK] button to display the cursor, then select the "test
subject selection screen". [Test subject selection screen]
To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press T 0 P R
[ESC]. 0 13
1000
Various Uses
Wiring for
3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to select the test subject.
To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [1]
[ESC]. 14
T 0 P R
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Test Subject Test Description
0 [2]
[1] Contact forced ON/OFF
1000 [3]
[2] Current value change
[3] Setting value change
4) Hold the [OK] button for 1 second or longer to register the test 15
subject selection, and switch to the test mode.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
T 0 P R
To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection
screen", press [ESC]. 0
Test Subject Status when [OK] is hold for 1 second or longer 1000
[1] No change
16
[2]
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Numeric value begins blinking.
[3]
5) Operation varies as shown below, depending on the selected test subject.

a) For "contact forced ON/OFF"
The contact ON/OFF status is highlighted when [OK] is pressed.
17
Button Operation Description T 0 P R
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Cancels the operation and returns to the "test 0
ESC
subject selection screen". 1000
- Disabled
+ Disabled
OK
Highlights the contact ON/OFF status, meaning the 18
current value can not be changed.
Display Module
b) For "current value change"

Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired, then
press [OK] to register the changed value. T 0 P R
Button Operation Description 0 19
Cancels the operation and returns to the "test 100
Terminal Block
ESC
subject selection screen".
Reduces the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for
-
high-speed reduction.
Increases the value. Hold for 1 second or longer for
+
high-speed increase. 20
Registers the current value or the setting value and
Cassette
Memory
OK
returns to the "test subject selection screen".
c) For indirect setting format
315
1 Use the [+] / [-] buttons to select the desired setting method (refer to table below), then press [OK]
to register this selection.
Changeable
Selectable Setting Values Setting Description
Content
Direct setting (without index modifier) The directly specified value becomes the setting
[Direct (K,H)] Direct value.
Direct setting (with index modifier) numeral The [directly specified numeicral value] + [index
[direct (K,H) + index register (V0 to V7, Z0 setting register’s current value] becomes the setting
to Z7)] value.
Indirect setting (without index modifier) The specified device’s current value becomes the
[data register (D), extended register (R)] setting value.
Indirect setting (with index modifier) Indirectly
The [directly specified device No.] + [index
[data register (D) + index register (V0 to specified
device No. register’s current value] becomes the device No.
V7, Z0 to Z7)],
specified by the setting value. That device’s
[Extended register (R) + index register (V0
current value becomes the setting value.
to V7, Z0 to Z7)]
2 Use the [+] / [-] buttons to determine the setting value.

The content that is changed varies according to the selected setting method, as shown below.
- For "direct setting" or "direct setting + index register" method:
Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired, then press [OK] to register the changed
value.
- For "indirect setting" or "indirect setting + index register" method:
Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the device No. as desired, then press [OK] to register the
setting value.
6) After the setting operation is completed, return to the "test subject selection screen", where the [ESC]
button can then be pressed to return to the "monitor screen".
316
11
3. Output [Y] / auxiliary relay [M] / special auxiliary relay [M] / state [S]
Counters
High-Speed
Forced ON/OFF operations are possible for the output [Y] / auxiliary relay [M] / special auxiliary relay [M] /
state [S] contacts.
1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose ON/ 12

OFF status is to be changed. Y000
External Wiring
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.2 for monitor function operation Y010
details.
Y020
Y030
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
mode. The device then begins blinking (refer to figure at right). Y000
To cancel the operation and return to the "test subject selection
Y010
screen", press [ESC].
Y020
Y030
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the blinking position to the device
where a forced ON/OFF is desired. Y000
To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press
Y010
[ESC].
Y020
Y030 15
ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen".
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF
- subject selection).
Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF
+ subject selection).
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
OK Highlights the contact’s ON/OFF status.
4) Press the [OK] button to highlight the contact’s ON/OFF status.

To cancel the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press Y000
[ESC].
Y010 6
Button Operation Description Y020
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor screen". Y030
Moves in the lower device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF
- subject selection).
Moves in the higher device No. direction (for forced ON/OFF
+ subject selection). 18
Display Module
OK Highlights the contact ON/OFF status.
5) Press [ESC] to return to the monitor screen.
19
18.7.5 Test mode operation notes
Terminal Block
When using multiple same-number timers (T) and counters (C).

Operation occurs as follows if multiple timers [T] and counters [C] are used in programs which contain CJ
instructions and step ladders.
• When a setting change is performed after switching from the device monitor to the test function mode, the 20
setting change is applied to the timer [T] or counter [C] which is nearest to Step 0.
Cassette
Memory
• When changing the setting values for same-number timers [T] and counters [C], use the programming tool
to change the program.
317
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.8 Monitor/Test Mode [User-Registered Devices]
18.8 Monitor/Test Mode [User-Registered Devices]

Regarding user-registered devices at this "Monitor/Test" menu, monitor and test operations can be performed
for a maximum of 4 data registers (16-bit/32-bit) specified by the system information.
→ Refer to Section 18.19 for details concerning the user-registered device setting procedure.
18.8.1 Monitor mode operation
1) At the menu screen, use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor
to the "Monitor/Test" item, then press [OK] to display the "device D( 16b i t )
selection screen" shown to the right.
DD ( 3 2 b i t )
display)", press [ESC] at the menu screen T
2) "Use the [+] and [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "User" item. C
To cancel the operation and return to the "device selection screen", R( 16b i t )
press [ESC].
DR ( 3 2 b i t )
ER ( 1 6 b i t )
DER ( 3 2 b i t )
X
Y
M
S
Us e r
3) Press [OK] to display the data registers specified by the system

information. H a l t t i me r [1]
The first time the power is turned on, the display begins with device D 1 0 0 [2]
No.1 of the "user-registered devices". At subsequent power ONs,
10 [3]
the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is
displayed.
If a specified user-registered device has been changed, the newly
specified device is displayed.
To cancel the operation and return to the "device selection screen", press [ESC].
Display Content
Device comments (registered at the PLC) is displayed together with the devices.
[1]
If no device comment has been registered, the device comment area is left blank.
[2] Device included in the user-registered devices
[3] Current value
4) Use the [+] and [-] buttons to scroll the user-registered devices
screen.
To cancel the operation and return to the "device selection screen", D 103 D 104
press [ESC].
0

ESC Returns to the "device selection screen".
Scrolls the user-registered devices.
- (User-specified device 1 → user-specified device 4 → user-specified device 3 → user-specified
device 2 → user-specified device 1)
Scrolls the user-registered devices.
+ (User-specified device 1 → user-specified device 2 → user-specified device 3 → user-specified
device 4 → user-specified device 1)
OK Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer.
318
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.9 Error Check
11
18.8.2 Test mode operation
Counters
High-Speed
1) Perform a monitor mode operation to display the user-registered
device whose current value is to be changed. Ha l t t i me r
→ Refer to Subsection 18.7.2 for monitor function operation D 100
details.
10
12
External Wiring
mode. The current value then begins blinking (refer to fig. at right). Ha l t t i me r
3) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the value as desired. To cancel D 100
the operation and return to the "monitor screen", press [ESC]. 10
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Cancels the operation and returns to the "monitor
ESC
screen".
Ha l t t i me r
Reduces the value.
- D 100
Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed reduction.
Increases the value.
20 14
+
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Hold for 1 second or longer for high-speed increase.
Registers the current value and returns to the "monitor
OK
screen".
4) Press [OK] to register the current value and return to the "user registered devices screen".
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
18.9 Error Check
The main unit’s error status displays at the "ErrorCheck" menu.
1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to
the "ErrorCheck" item, then press [OK]. When no errors have occurred
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
The error check result then displays at the "error display screen" E r r o r C h e c k
(refer to fig. at right).
No e r r o r s
display)", press [ESC] at the menu screen
2) If multiple errors have occurred, the [+] / [-] keys can be used to
switch between the error display pages.
17
When 1 error has occurred
Options
Units and
Other Extension
E r r o r Ch e c k
ESC Returns to the "menu screen".
M8 0 6 6 [1]
1 error or less Disabled
- Ladde r er ror [2]
2 errors or more Displays the previous-page’s error screen.
1 error or less Disabled
Er r or code 6612 [3] 18
+
Display Module
2 errors or more Displays the next-page’s error screen. When multiple errors have occurred
OK Returns to the "menu screen".
E r r o r Ch e c k 1 / 2 [4]
Display Content M8 0 6 0 [1]
Display Content I /O er r [2]
[1] Active error flag Er r or code 1020 [3]
19
Terminal Block
[2] Error name

- +
[3] Error code
Number of concurrent errors E r r o r Ch e c k 2 / 2 [4]
[4]
(displays only when multiple errors have occurred)
M8 0 6 3 [1]
3) To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press L i nk er ror 1 [2]
20
Cassette
Memory
[ESC]. Er r or code 6301 [3]
319
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.10 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)
18.10 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)

The language used at the display module menus is specified at the "LANGUAGE" menu. The language
setting procedure is described below.
All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in Japanese. When the menu
display language is set to English, please convert the screen messages to their English translations.
→ Refer to Section 18.25 for the Japanese & English display character correspondence table.
18.10.1 Changing to japanese menus

The procedure for changing from English menus to Japanese menus is described below.
1) Turn the PLC power on.
Title screen
Following a brief title screen display (1.5 seconds), the "current time
screen" or a "user message" is displayed. ME L S E C - F
FX3U Se r i e s
Ve r . 2 . 00
Approx.
1.5 secs.
Top screen (Time display)
05 . 5 . 31
23 : 59 : 59 [ Tue ]
or
User creation screen (example)
<P r o d u c t i o n>
Ta r ge t 10000
Pr oduc t i on 100
R ema i n i n g 9900
2) Press the [OK] button to display the menu screen shown to the right
(4 lines of the menu display). Monitor/Test
ErrorCheck
LANGUAGE
Contrast
ClockMenu
EntryCode
ClearAllDev
PLC Status
ScanTime
Cassette
3) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the
"LANGUAGE" item, then press [OK] to display the "display language L A NGU A G E
selection screen".
To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)",
En g l i s h
press [ESC].
320
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.10 LANGUAGE (Menu Display Language Setting)
11
4) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to " ".
Counters
High-Speed
To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC].
ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen".
- Moves the cursor upward.
+ Moves the cursor downward.
12
External Wiring
OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the "menu screen".
5) Press [OK] to register the selected display language and return to the "menu screen".
18.10.2 Changing to english menus

13
Refer to Subsection 18.10.1 (Changing to japanese menus) for the access procedure from the title screen.
Various Uses
Wiring for
"LANGUAGE" item, then press [OK] to display the "display language L A NGU A G E
selection screen".
press [ESC].
En g l i s h 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to "English".
To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC].
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
- Moves the cursor upward.
+ Moves the cursor downward.
Registers the selected display language and returns to the
OK
"menu screen".
3) Press [OK] to register the selected display language and return to the "menu screen".
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
18.10.3 D8302 changes by program & related devices
Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302.
D8302 has a battery backup for latch. 17
D8302 changes by user program can also be specified.
Options
Units and
Other Extension
D8302 Current Display When the display language is set to "Japanese"
Value Language
M8002
K0 Japanese MOV K0 D8302
K1 English 18
Other English
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
321
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.11 Contrast
18.11 Contrast
The liquid crystal display contrast setting is specified at the "Contrast" menu. Selections made at this menu
are saved at D8302. A contrast setting of "0" is specified at factory default.
the "Contrast" item, then press [OK] to display the "contrast Co n t r a s t
adjustment screen".
0
display)", press [ESC]. ( - 5 ~ 10 )
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to adjust the contrast.

To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press Co n t r a s t
[ESC]. 3
( - 5 ~ 10 )

Lowers the contrast
-
(decreases the numeric value. The value can be decreased to -5.)
Increases the contrast
+
(increases the numeric value. The value can be increased to +10.)
OK Registers the selected setting and returns to the "menu screen".
3) Press the [OK] button to register the selected setting and return to the "menu screen".
322
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.12 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)
11
18.12 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)
Counters
High-Speed
The "ClockMenu" menu consists of "current time display" and the "time setting" items.
The current time should be set before operating the system.
18.12.1 Current time setting procedure 12
External Wiring
the "ClockMenu" item, then press [OK] to display the selection Cu r r e n t t i me
screen shown at right. Cl ock se t t i ng
display)", press [ESC]. 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Clock setting"
item. Cu r r e n t t i me
To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press Cl ock se t t i ng
[ESC].
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
3) Press the [OK] button to display the "Clock setting screen".
To cancel the operation and return to the "selection screen", press Cl ock se t t i ng
[ESC]. 19 . 8 . 1993 *
7 : 11 : 19 [ Thu ]
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
4) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to change the blinking data as desired, then
press [OK] to register the change. Cl ock se t t i ng
Settings are performed in the following sequence: Year → Month → 31 . 1 . 2004 *
Day → Hours → Minutes → Seconds.
23 : 59 : 59 [ Sa t ]
After pressing [OK] to register the final "seconds" setting, a "Current 16
time is set" message is displayed, completing the current time
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
setting procedure. The default "Year" display is a
Button Operation Description 2-digit value indicating the
Western calendar year.
Returns to the previous setting item.
ESC Returns to the "selection screen", when at the "Year"
item ("Year" is blinking) position.
17
Reduces the value.
-
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Increases the value.
+
Proceeds to the next setting item.
OK "Current time is set" message displays if pressed at the
"Seconds" item ("Seconds" is blinking).
18
Display Module
5) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "selection screen".

6) Press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". Cu r r e n t t i me
Cl ock se t t i ng
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
323
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.12 Clock Menu (Current Time Setting)
18.12.2 Displaying the current time
the "ClockMenu" item, then press [OK] to display the selection Cu r r e n t t i me
screen shown to the right. Cl ock se t t i ng
display)", press [ESC].
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Current time"
item. To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen",
press [ESC].
3) Press the [OK] button to display the current time.
To cancel the operation and return to the "selection screen", press 2-digit display
[ESC].
Button Operation Description 31 . 1 . 04
ESC Returns to the "selection screen". 23 : 59 : 59 [ Sa t ]
- Disabled
+ Disabled
4-digit display
OK Returns to the "selection screen".
4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "selection screen".

31 . 1 . 2004
5) Press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen".
23 : 59 : 59 [ Sa t ]
18.12.3 Changing the current time’s "Year" from 2-digit format to 4-digit format
The "Year" data displays as 2-digit value with a default. This can be changed to a 4-digit display by the
following programming.
M8002
MOV K2000 D8018
It is also possible to set the current time with a sequence program.

→ Refer to the "time setting" (special devices D8013 to D8019) section of the Programming Manual.
324
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.13 Entrycodes
11
18.13 Entrycodes
Counters
High-Speed
Entry codes registered at the PLC can be canceled from the "EntryCode" menu.
When canceled, all operations are enabled.
Registering or changing entry codes is not possible at the display module.
The programming tool must be used in advance to register new entry codes. 12
External Wiring
18.13.1 Entry code types & levels
Entry codes can be entered in 2 ways (8-digit or 16-digit), depending on the peripheral device in question.
• For a [entry code (8-digit)] + [2nd entry code (8-digit)] = 16-digit input:
Processing is possible only with a peripheral device version compatible with the FX3U PLC. 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
• For an entry code (8-digit) input only:
Processing is possible even with a peripheral device version that is not compatible with the FX3U PLC.
Peripheral Device
Number Registration Entry Code
FX3U Not FX3U Registration Level Entry Code Description
Of Digits Method
Compatible Compatible
Reading/writing
14
By selecting the 16-digit hexadecimal value
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
entry code prohibited (A to F, 0 to 9)
16-digit registration level at − Writing prohibited [Ex]
the GX Developer’s All online opera- FAB05C25DAECF293
setting screen. tions prohibited AABCDEFF34509345
A
8-digit hexadecimal value
beginning with "A" or "0 to 9".
15
(A, 0 to 9 first char.)
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
[Ex]0ABCDEF2, AABCD345
By entering the level
at the first character
8-digit B beginning with "B".
when entering the
[Ex]B1234567,BABCDEF7
entry code.
C beginning with "C". 16
[Ex]C8904567,CDEF567F
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
325
18.13.2 Level-specific restrictions screen list

: Function enabled
: Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed.
−: Function disabled
Entry Code: 8 digits
Entry Code: 16 digits
Label entered as the first
Selected at GX Developer setting screen
character at Entry Code input
Function name None
All online Reading/
Writing
A B C operations writing
prohibited
prohibited prohibited
Top screen (time display)
Device − −
Monitor/
Test User (User-registered
− −
device)
ScanTime (Scan time display) − −
PLC status − −
ErrorCheck − −
User message display
Display screen protect function − − − −
Menu display language setting − −
Contrast adjustment − −
Display
Time
Setting − −
Entry Code (cancel) −
Clear all device
− −
(Device all-clear)
Memory cassette transfer − − − −
326
11
18.13.3 Entry code storage
Counters
High-Speed
The system has no process for recovering registered entry codes which are forgotten.
Therefore, be sure to store the entry codes in a secure location.
18.13.4 Screens requiring entry codes for access 12
External Wiring
At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "EntryCode" item, then press [OK] to
display one of the 4 screens shown below (the screen that displays depends on the entry code status).
If no entry codes are registered, press [ESC] to return to the "menu screen".
To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time display)", press [ESC].
13
Menu screen Not registered
Various Uses
Wiring for
En t r yCo d e The En t r y Co d e
C l e a r A l l De v i s no t se t
PLC S t a t u s
S c a n T i me 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Registered
Entry code If entry code is correct
When switching to menu
prohibited by entry code occurs P l ease , Al l ope r a t i on
i npu t En t r y Co d e i s poss i b l e
15
Registered
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
0
En t r y Co d e er ror Registered
Entry code + 2nd entry code If entry code is incorrect
P l ease , I ncor r ec t
i npu t En t r y Co d e En t r y code !
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
0
Canceled
17
Ma k e En t r y Co d e
Options
Units and
Other Extension
va l i d?
OK Execu t e
ESC Ca n c e l
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
327
18.13.5 Canceling an entry code
1) At the menu screen, use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "EntryCode" item, then press [OK]
to display the "entry code input screen".
If an entry code has been registered, one of the following screens is displayed.
- If a 16-digit entry code is registered, an 8-digit × 2-line screen (shown at left below) is displayed.
- If an 8-digit entry code is registered, an 8-digit × 1-line screen (shown at right below) is displayed.
16-digit entry code 8-digit entry code

P l ease , Entry code P l ease ,
i npu t En t r y Co d e i npu t En t r y Co d e
0 0
2nd entry code
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to specify the first digit of the entry code, then press [OK] to proceed to the next
digit. To cancel the operation and return to the "menu screen", press [ESC].
16-digit entry code 8-digit entry code
P l ease , P l ease ,
i npu t En t r y Co d e i npu t En t r y Co d e
6 7 2 3B9 6 7 01234567
AF2C4 5B0
Lowest order digit Lowest order digit

(final digit) (final digit)

Cancels the operation and returns to the "menu screen" if pressed when the entry code’s
left-most digit (highest order digit) is blinking.
ESC
Cancels the input and moves leftward to the next digit (higher order digit) if pressed when
a digit other than the left-most digit is blinking.
Reduces the value (F→E...2→1→0).
-
Increases the value (0→1→2...E→F).
+
Registers the specified value and moves to the next digit input position.
Highest order
If [OK] is pressed at the lowest order digit, and if the entered entry code is correct, the
digit to 2nd digit
Entry Code is canceled.
OK
An "All operation is possible" message appears, and the Entry
Lowest order Correct Entry Code Code is canceled.
digit (final digit)
Incorrect Entry Code A "Incorrect Entry Code" message appears.
3) If the [OK] button is pressed at the lowest order position, the entered
Entry Code is registered and the message shown to the right If entry code is correct
appears. Al l ope r a t i on
If the "Incorrect Entry Code" message appears, press [ESC] and
i s poss i b l e
return to step 1).
4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen".
If entry code is incorrect

I ncor r ec t
En t r y code !
328
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.14 Device All-Clear
11
18.13.6 Enabling an entry code
Counters
High-Speed
the "EntryCode" item, then press [OK] to display the "enable entry Ma k e En t r y Co d e
code" screen. va l i d?
2) Press the [OK] button to enable the entry code. Or, to retain the OK Execu t e 12
entry code’s canceled status, press [ESC]. ESC Ca n c e l
External Wiring
- Disabled
+ Disabled 13
Enables the Entry Code and returns to the "menu
Various Uses
Wiring for
OK
screen".
18.14 Device All-Clear

The devices listed below can be initialized (contact OFF, or current value to "0") from the "Clear all devices"
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
menu when a PLC STOP status is in effect.
Output [X], auxiliary relay (special relay) [M], state [S], timer [T], counter [C], data register
Subject devices (special data register) [D], extended register [R].
File register [D] is not a subject device.
Non-subject devices Input [Y], file register [D], extended file register [ER].
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
18.14.1 Device all-clear operation
the "ClearAllDev" item, then press [OK] to display the "Clear all C l ea r
devices" screen.
a l l dev i ces 16
OK Execu t e
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
E SC Ca n c e l
2) Press the [OK] button to initialize the subject devices. Or, to cancel
the operation, press [ESC].
Al l dev i ce
If the PLC is running at this time, a "PLC is running" message is
we r e c l ea r d
17
displayed and the all-clear is not executed. In this case, press [OK]
Options
Units and
Other Extension
or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen".
When PLC is running
- Disabled
+ Disabled PLC i s r unn i ng 18
Display Module
Initializes the subject devices and returns to the "menu

OK
screen".
3) Press [OK] or [ESC] to display the "menu screen".
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
329
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.15 PLC Status
18.15 PLC Status

The PLC statuses shown below can be displayed from the "PLC Status" menu.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.15.2 for display details.
Page Title Display Item
• Version
PLC Status(1/3)
• Entry code status
• Program memory type
PLC Status(2/3) • Memory cassette’s write protect status
• Program memory capacity
• Battery voltage
PLC Status(3/3)
• Number of registered comments
18.15.1 Display operation
"PLC Status" item, then press [OK] to display the "PLC Status (1/3)" PLC S t a t u s ( 1 / 3 )
screen.
Ve r . 2 . 00
press [ESC]. Al l ope r a t i on
i s un r es t r i c t ed
PLC S t a t u s ( 1 / 3 )
Ve r . 2 . 00
PLC ope r a t i on
i s l imi t ed
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to switch between the PLC Status screen
pages. PLC S t a t u s ( 2 / 3 )
Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". I n t e r na l Memo r y
Button Operation Description Pr o t ec t i on - -
ESC Returns to the "menu screen". Ca p a c i t y 64K
Returns to the previous page.
-
PLC Status(3/3) PLC Status(2/3) PLC Status(1/3) PLC S t a t u s ( 3 / 3 )
Proceeds to the next page. Ba t t e r y 3 . 2V
+
PLC Status(1/3) PLC Status(2/3) PLC Status(3/3) C o mm e n t s
OK Returns to the "menu screen". 1000 / 2000
3) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen".
330
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.15 PLC Status
11
18.15.2 PLC status display items
Counters
High-Speed
1. PLC Status 1/3
PLC S t a t u s ( 1 / 3 )
Ve r . 2 . 00 [1]
12
External Wiring
Al l ope r a t i on
[2]
i s un r es t r i c t ed
Display Content
[1] Main unit’s version information. 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Indicates the PLC’s entry code registration status.
Messages vary according to the entry code status.
When a 16-bit entry code status is "all online operations prohibited", and when an 8-bit entry code status is
"level A", the entry code must be canceled in order to view the PLC information.
Displayed message PLC status
• For 16-bit entry code: 14
A "writing prohibit" or "reading/writing prohibit" entry code is
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
[2] PLC operation is limited registered.
• For 8-bit entry code:
A "Level B" or "Level C" entry code is registered.
The registered entry code has been canceled by an "entry code" menu
All operation is unrestricted
operation. 15
The Entry Code is not set No entry codes have been registered.
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Fatal error occurred → Refer to Subsection 18.24.1 for details.
2. PLC Status 2/3
PLC S t a t u s ( 2 / 3 )
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
I n t e r na l Memo r y [1]
Pr o t ec t i on - - [2]
Ca p a c i t y 64K [3]
Display Content 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Program memory type
Displayed message Program memory type
[1] Internal Memory PLC internal RAM memory
Memory Cassette Memory cassette flash memory
Memory cassette protect switch status

18
Display Module
Displayed message Switch Status
[2] Protection switch -- Internal RAM memory (without protect switch)

Protection switch ON Memory cassette protect switch is ON
Protection switch OFF Memory cassette protect switch is OFF
[3] Program memory’s max. setting capacity (in step units)

19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
331
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.16 Scan Time (Scan Time Display)
3. PLC Status 3/3
PLC S t a t u s ( 3 / 3 )
Ba t t e r y 3 . 2V [1]
C o mm e n t s
[2]
1000 / 2000
Display Content
[1] Battery voltage
Number of registered comments
[2]
([number of registered comments] / [number of parameter-specified comments])
18.16 Scan Time (Scan Time Display)

The scan time’s current value, minimum value, and maximum value can be displayed from the "ScanTime"
menu.
18.16.1 Scan time display operation
the "ScanTime" item, then press [OK] to display the "scan time
S c a n T i me
screen".
To cancel the operation and return to the "top screen (time Cu r r : 0 . 7ms
display)", press [ESC]. Ma x : 5 . 6ms
2) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "menu screen". Mi n : 0 . 6ms
18.17 Cassette (Memory Cassette Transfers)

Data transfers (and consistency checks) between the internal RAM memory and a connected memory
cassette can be performed from the "Cassette" menu when the PLC is in a STOP state.
This menu is disabled, however, if an entry code is registered in the internal RAM. In this case, remove the
memory cassette and use the programming tool to cancel the internal RAM’s entry code.
Item Operation Description
Cassette←RAM Copies internal program memory (RAM) data to a connected memory cassette.
Cassette→RAM Copies data from a connected memory cassette to the internal program memory (RAM).
Performs a consistency check of the connected memory cassette data and the internal
Cassette : RAM
program memory (RAM) data.
332
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.17 Cassette (Memory Cassette Transfers)
11
18.17.1 Transfer from internal RAM to memory cassette (Cassette ← RAM)
Counters
High-Speed
the "Cassette" item, then press [OK] to display the "memory Memo r y Ca s s e t t e
cassette transfer screen".
C a s s e t t e  R AM
Ca s s e t t e R AM
12
External Wiring
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette ← RAM"
item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right. C a s s e t t e  R AM
To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer
( Wr i t e )
screen", press [ESC]. 13
OK Execu t e
Various Uses
Wiring for
E SC Ca n c e l
3) Press [OK] to begin the transfer.

Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation. C a s s e t t e  R AM
Button Operation Description ( Wr i t e ) 14
Cancels the operation and returns to the "memory P l ease wa i t . . .
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
ESC
- Disabled
+ Disabled
OK Executes the transfer.
15
• Caution:
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being
transferred by a "memory cassette transfer" menu operation, as these actions could destroy the program,
causing incorrect operation of the PLC.
4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "memory cassette transfer screen". 16

• Result and measures to take:
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
- The transfer is not executed if a "PLC is running" message PLC i s r unn i ng
appears.
In this case, set the PLC to a STOP state, then perform step 3)
described above.
17
- The transfer is not executed if a "Transfer failed" message
Options
Units and
Other Extension
appears. C a s s e t t e  R AM
In this case, turn the power off, check the memory cassette ( Wr i t e )
connection, then attempt the operation again from the first step.
Tr ans f e r
f a i l ed
18
- The transfer is not executed if a "Memory Cassette is write-
Display Module
protected" message displays. Memo r y Ca s s e t t e s

In this case, turn the power OFF, set the memory cassette i s
PROTECT switch to OFF, then attempt the operation again from
wr i t e - p r o t ec t ed
the first step.
19
- A "Transfer completed" message appears when the transfer is
Terminal Block
completed. C a s s e t t e  R AM
When this message appears, press [OK] or [ESC] to display the ( Wr i t e )
"Cassette screen".
Tr ans f e r
c omp l e t e d
20
Cassette
Memory
5) Press [ESC] to display the "menu screen".
333
18.17.2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal RAM (Cassette → RAM)
cassette transfer screen". C a s s e t t e  R AM
Ca s s e t t e R AM
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette → RAM"
item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown to the right. Ca s s e t t e R AM
To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer ( Re a d )
OK Execu t e
E SC Ca n c e l
3) Press [OK] to begin the transfer.

Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation. Ca s s e t t e R AM
Button Operation Description ( Re a d )
ESC
- Disabled
+ Disabled
OK Executes the transfer.
• Caution:
Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being
transferred by a "memory cassette transfer" menu operation, doing so may destroy the program and
disorder the PLC.
4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "memory cassette transfer screen".

- The transfer is not executed if a "PLC is running" message
appears. PLC i s r unn i ng
In this case, set the PLC to a STOP state, then perform the step 3)
operation described above.
- The transfer is not executed if a "Transfer failed" message

appears. Ca s s e t t e R AM
In this case, turn the power off, check the memory cassette ( Re a d )
connection, then attempt the operation again from the first step.
Tr ans f e r
f a i l ed
- A "Transfer completed" message appears when the transfer is

completed. Ca s s e t t e R AM
When this message appears, press [OK] or [ESC] to display the ( Re a d )
"memory cassette transfer screen".
Tr ans f e r
c omp l e t e d
334
11
18.17.3 Memory cassette & internal RAM consistency check (Cassette : RAM)
Counters
High-Speed
cassette transfer screen". C a s s e t t e  R AM
Ca s s e t t e R AM
12
External Wiring
2) Use the [+] / [-] buttons to move the cursor to the "Cassette : RAM"
item, then press [OK] to display the screen shown at right. C a s s e t t e : R AM
To cancel the operation and return to the "memory cassette transfer ( Ve r i f y )
OK Execu t e
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
E SC Ca n c e l
3) Press [OK] to begin the consistency check.

Or, press [ESC] to cancel the operation. C a s s e t t e : R AM
Button Operation Description ( Ve r i f y )
14
ESC
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
- Disabled
+ Disabled
OK Executes the consistency check.
4) Press [OK] or [ESC] to return to the "memory cassette transfer 15

screen". PLC i s r unn i ng
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
- The consistency check is not executed if a "PLC is running"
message appears.
In this case, stop the PLC, then perform step 3) described above.
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
( Ve r i f y )
P r o g r ams ma t c h
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
( Ve r i f y )
P r o g r ams
don ' t ma t c h
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
335
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.18 System Information (Restrictions From PLC)
18.18 System Information (Restrictions From PLC)

Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control
of these functions. Functions which require the use of system information are listed below.
• Monitor/test function • Display screen protect function
- For hexadecimal display of current value: → Refer to Section 18.22 for details.
→ Refer to Section 18.21 for the setting • Operation button ON/OFF information
procedure. → Refer to Section 18.20 for details.
- To use user-registered devices: • User message display function
→ Refer to Section 18.19 for the setting → Refer to Section 18.23 for details.
procedure.
18.18.1 System information list

Special data register D8300 and D8301 devices with first numbers specified are assigned as system
information devices (data register, auxiliary relay). The data register (excluding special data register) should
be specified at the system information’s "system signal 1", and the auxiliary relay (excluding special auxiliary
relay) should be specified at the system information’s "system signal 2". Both D8300 and D8301 have default
settings of "-1".
→ Refer to Sections 18.19 to 18.23 for explanations of each system signal.
1. System signal 1
Special data System
Description Remarks
register Information
D User-registered device 1 type
D +1 User-registered device 1 No.
D +2 Devices for user-registered device User-registered device 2 type
D +3 settings User-registered device 2 No. Refer to Section
Only data registers can be
D +4 User-registered device 3 type 18.19
specified for user-registered
D +5 devices. User-registered device 3 No.
D8300 = K
Occupies 41 D +6 User-registered device 4 type
points D +7 User-registered device 4 No.
Refer to Section
D +8 Device for display screen protect function
18.22
D +9 Device where user message display character strings are saved.
Use either character data or the data shown below. Refer to Section
∼
• Alphanumeric: 20H to 7DH, A1H to DFH ASCII code 18.23

D +40 • Japanese: Shift JIS code
2. System signal 2
Special data System
Description Remarks
register Information
M [OK] button ON/OFF
M +1 Operation button ON/ [ESC] button ON/OFF Refer to Section
M +2 OFF information [-] button ON/OFF 18.20
M +3 [+] button ON/OFF
D8301 = K Refer to Section
M +4 User message display command
Occupies 7 18.23
points Device for specifying the "Monitor/Test" menu’s current value and Refer to Section
M +5
setting the value display format (hexadecimal or decimal). 18.21
Refer to Section
ON during "user-registered device
Display screen 18.19
M +6 monitoring screen" or "user message"
information Refer to Section
display.
18.23
336
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.18 System Information (Restrictions From PLC)
11
18.18.2 System information setting programexample
Counters
High-Speed
The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D50 to D90 and
M50 to M56.
M8002
MOV K50 D8300 System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D90. 12
Initial pulse
External Wiring
MOV K50 D8301 System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to M56.
END
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
337
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.19 User (User-Registered Device Setting)
18.19 User (User-Registered Device Setting)

The procedure for specifying the devices which display as "User" at the "Monitor/Test" menu is explained
below. The user-registered devices are specified by writing the "device type" and "device No." at "D to
D +7" in the system information (system signal 1).
→ Refer to Section 18.8 for operation details.
→ Refer to Section 18.18 for system information setting details.
→ Refer to Subsections 18.19.3 to 18.19.5 for program examples.
18.19.1 System information - user-registered device setting
1. System signal 1
User-Registered System
Description Setting Value
Device No. Information
D = K7: Data register [D] (16-bit)
D Device type
D = K8: Data register [D] (32-bit)
1
When D = K7, D + 1 = K0 to K8511
D +1 Device No.
When D = K8, D + 1 = K0 to K7998, K8000 to K8510
D +2= K7: Data register [D] (16-bit)
D +2 Device type
2
When D = K7, D + 3 = K0 to K8511
D +3 Device No.
D +4 Device type
3
When D = K7, D + 5 = K0 to K8511
D +5 Device No.
D +6 Device type
4
When D = K7, D + 7 = K0 to K8511
D +7 Device No.
2. System signal 2
System Setting
Display Screen Status
Information Content
ON "User-registered device" screen, or "user message" screen is displayed.
M +6
OFF Other screen is displayed.
18.19.2 Precaution when setting 3 or fewer devices

When 3 or fewer devices are set as user-registered devices, the "type" setting for unused devices should be
set to a value other than 7 and 8.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.19.4 for a program example.
338
11
18.19.3 Program example 1 (when 4 devices are displayed as user-registered devices)
Counters
High-Speed
Use this program example as a reference when setting 4 devices as user-registered devices.
1. Operation
In this program example, the 4 devices shown in the table below are set as user-registered devices, with a
hexadecimal format specified for the current value display.
12
External Wiring
1) The hexadecimal display format applies only to current values which display at the "user-registered
device" menu. Other current values display in a decimal format.
2) In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56.
User-Registered Device Devices Set As User-

Data Length
Display 13
No. Registered Devices Format
Various Uses
Wiring for
1 D100 (D101) 32Bit
2 D102 16Bit
Hexadecimal
3 D103 16Bit
4 D104 16Bit
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
2. Program
M8002
MOV K50 D8300 System information (system No.1) is set at D50 to D90.
Initial pulse
M8002 15
MOV K8 D50
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Initial pulse User-registered device 1 is set as 32-bit data at "D101, D100".
MOV K100 D51
MOV K7 D52
User-registered device 2 is set as 16-bit data at "D102".
MOV K102 D53
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
MOV K7 D54
MOV K103 D55
MOV K7 D56 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
User- MOV K104 D57
registered
device
monitoring User message
in progress display command
M56 M54
SET M55
18
User- Hexadecimal current value appears while user-registered device
Display Module
registered
device monitoring screen is displayed.
monitoring in User message At other Monitor/Test screens, the current values and setting values
progress display command are displayed in a decimal format.
M56 M54
RST M55
19
END
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
339
18.19.4 Program example 2 (when 3 or fewer devices are displayed as user-registered devices)
Use this program example as a reference when setting 3 or fewer devices as user-registered devices.
1. Precaution When Setting 3 Or Fewer Devices

When 3 or fewer devices are set as user-registered devices, the "type" setting for unused devices should be
set to a value other than 7 and 8.
2. Operation
In this program example, the 3 devices shown in the table below are set as user-registered devices, with a
hexadecimal format specified for the current value display.
1) The hexadecimal display format applies only to current values which are displayed at the "user-registered
device" menu. Other current values are displayed in a decimal format.
User-Registered Device Devices Set As User- Display

Data Length
1 D100 (D101) 32-Bit
2 D102 16-Bit Hexadecimal
3 D103 16-Bit
3. Program
M8002
Initial pulse
M8002
MOV K8 D50
Initial pulse User-registered device 1 is set as 32-bit data at "D101, D100".
MOV K100 D51
MOV K7 D52
MOV K102 D53
MOV K7 D54
MOV K103 D55
MOV K-1 D56

User-registered device 4 is not.
User- MOV K-1 D57
registered
device
monitoring User message
in progress display command
M56 M54
SET M55
User- Hexadecimal current value appears while user-registered device
registered
device monitoring screen is displayed.
monitoring in User message At other Monitor/Test screens, the current values and setting values
progress display command
are displayed in a decimal format.
M56 M54
RST M55
340
11
18.19.5 Program example 3 (when 5 or more devices are displayed as user-registered devices)
Counters
High-Speed
Use this program example as a reference when setting 5 or more devices as user-registered devices.
1. Operation
In this program example, the 7 devices shown in the table below are set as user-registered devices, with the
current value display format set individually for each device. 12
External Wiring
1) The display formats specified here apply only to current values which appear at the "user-registered
device" menu. Other current values appear in a decimal format.
User-Registered Device Devices Set As User- Display
Data Length
13
1 D100 (D101) 32-Bit Hexadecimal
Various Uses
Wiring for
2 D102 16-Bit Decimal
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
2. Program
M8002
System information (system No.1) is
MOV K50 D8300
Initial pulse
set at D50 to D90. 15
System information (system No.2) is
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
MOV K50 D8301
set at M50 to M56.
Sets "K-1" at D52 to D57 because user-
FMOV K-1 D52 K6
registered devices 2 to 4 are unused.
At Monitor/Test screens other than
M8002 the "user-registered device" screen,
RST M55 the current values and setting values 16
Initial pulse are displayed in a decimal format.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
ZRSTP M58 M67 Initialization of the user-registered
User- screen's scroll flag.
registered User
device message Setting of flag that specifies the
monitoring display SET M60
in progress command [+] button ON default user-registered devices.
M56 M54 M53
SFTLP M60 M61 K7 K1 17
M61
Options
Units and
Other Extension
RST M60
M67
User- SET M60
registered User
device message
monitoring display User-registered device screen scroll
RST M67
in progress
M56
command
M54
[-] button ON
M52
program (by [+] and [-] buttons). 18
Display Module
SFTRP M58 M59 K8 K1

M59
RST M59
SET M66
M60 19
MOV K8 D50 Sets the first device which appears at
Terminal Block
the user-registered device screen as

MOV K100 D51 a "D101, D100" 32-bit device, with a
hexadecimal current value display
SET M55 format.
Continued on next page 20

Cassette
Memory
341
Continued from previous page
M61
MOV K7 D50 At user-registered device screen
scrolling (by [+] and [-] buttons), sets
MOV K102 D51 the 2nd displayed device as a "D102"
16-bit device, with a decimal current
RST M55 value display format.
M62
MOV K103 D51 the 3rd displayed device as a "D103"
M63
MOV K104 D51 the 4th displayed device as a "D104"
M64
16-bit device, with a hexadecimal
SET M55 current value display format.
M65
M66
16-bit device, with a hexadecimal
SET M55 current value display format.
END
342
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.20 Operation Button ON/OFF Information
11
18.20 Operation Button ON/OFF Information
Counters
High-Speed
Operation button ON/OFF information can be monitored at the system information (system signal 2) "M
to M +3" while the PLC is running. Various applications of this function are described below.
12
18.20.1 Various applications
External Wiring
1. Operation button function checks
The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information’s (system signal 2) "operation button
ON/OFF information", to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly.
13
2. User-registered device changes
Various Uses
Wiring for
The system information’s (system signal 2) "display screen information" and "operation button ON/OFF
information" can be used together to change and display 4 or more user-registered devices.
→ Refer to Section 18.19 for the user-registered device setting procedure.
3. User message changes

14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
The system information’s (system signal 2) "display screen information" and "user message display
command", and "operation button ON/OFF information" can be used together while a user message is
displayed in order to change (by [+] / [-] button operation) the user message that the program displays.
→ Refer to Section 18.23 for user message display function details.
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
18.20.2 System information - operation button ON/OFF information
1. System signal 1
System signal 1 has no system information related to this function.
2. System signal 2
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
System
Status Description
Information
ON [OK] button is pressed.
M
OFF [OK] button is not pressed.
M +1
ON [ESC] button is pressed. 17
OFF [ESC] button is not pressed.
Options
Units and
Other Extension
ON [-] button is pressed.
M +2
OFF [-] button is not pressed.
ON [+] button is pressed.
M +3
OFF [+] button is not pressed. 18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
343
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format
18.21 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format

The procedure for specifying a hexadecimal display format for current values which display at the "Monitor/
Test" menu explained below. The display format is specified by the system information’s (system signal 2)
"M +5" ON/OFF status.
The display formats which correspond to the ON and OFF statuses are shown in Subsection 18.21.1 below.
The display format should either be fixed as decimal or hexadecimal. Switching between the two should be
possible by an external operation.
18.21.1 System information - specifying a hexadecimal current value display format
1. System signal 1
System signal 1 is unrelated to this function.
2. System signal 2
System Setting Display
Display Subjects
Information Content Format
ON Hexadecimal Timer (T) [current value], counter (C) [current value], data register (D) [16-
M +5 bit/32-bit], extended register (R) [16-bit/32-bit], and extended file register
OFF Decimal (ER) [16-bit/32-bit]
18.21.2 Program example 1 (specifying a hexadecimal data display format)

The following program example specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values and setting values
which display at the "Monitor/Test" screen. In this program example, system information is assigned from D50
to D90 and from M50 to M56.
M8002
Initial pulse
M8000
Specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values which appear
M55
at the Monitor/Test screen.
RUN monitor
END
18.21.3 Program example 2 (specifying a decadal data display format)

The following program example specifies a decimal display format for current values and setting values which
appear at the "Monitor/Test" screen. In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to
D90 and from M50 to M56.
M8002
Initial pulse
M8000
Specifies a decimal display format for current values which appear at
M55
the Monitor/Test screen.
RUN monitor
344
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.22 Display Screen Protect Function
11
18.22 Display Screen Protect Function
Counters
High-Speed
The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions.
The display screen protect function is enabled when no entry code is registered.
The display screen protect function’s protection level is specified in the system information (system signal 1)
"D +8". 12
→ Refer to Section 18.4 for display module function details.
External Wiring
→ Refer to Subsection 18.13.5 for the "entry code cancel" procedure.
18.22.1 Entry code & display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions
If an entry code has been registered, that entry code related restriction takes priority over the "display screen
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
protect function"
:Usable
: Timer and counter settings cannot be changed
: Only monitor function is usable (test function is not available)
: Unusable
14
Function Name Entry code Display Screen Protect
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
All online Reading/
Writing
16-digit entry code setting--> operations writing
None prohibited None 1 2
prohibited prohibited
8-digit entry code setting (level) --> A B C
Top screen (time display) 15
Device
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Monitor/Test User (User-
registered device)
ScanTime (Scan time display)
PLC status
ErrorCheck
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
User message display
Display screen protect function
Menu display language setting
Contrast adjustment
Display
17
Time
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Setting
Entry code (cancel) −
Clear all device (Device all-clear)
Memory cassette transfer
18
Display Module
18.22.2 Relationship between entry code & display screen protect function
If the PLC’s entry code registration function is used, that entry code related restriction takes priority over the
display module’s "display screen protect function". The relationship between entry codes and the display
screen protect function is shown below.
Entry code Entry code Display Screen Protect
19
Function Restrictions
Terminal Block
registration Status Status

Entry code is Entry code is being used Restriction of functions is according to the entry code
Entry code is not canceled Entry code is not being used level.
registered Entry code is Entry code is being used
All functions are enabled (no restrictions).
canceled Entry code is not being used 20
Restriction of functions is according to the display
Cassette
Memory
Entry code is being used

Entry code is not registered screen protect function.
Entry code is not being used All functions are enabled (no restrictions).
345
18.22.3 Entry code levels
1. For versions prior to Ver.2.20

8-Digit Entry code Level Entry code Content Entry code Input Example
8-digit hexadecimal value beginning 0ABCDEF2
A
with "A" or "0 to 9" numeral. AABCD345
8-digit hexadecimal value beginning B1234567
B
with "B". BABCDEF7
8-digit hexadecimal value beginning C8904567
C
with "C". CDEF567F
2. For Ver.2.20 and later

16-digit entry codes are used.
If an 8-digit entry code is specified, processing occurs in the same manner as in versions prior to Ver.2.00.
16-Digit Entry code Setting
Entry code Content Entry code Input Example
Content
0ABCDEF262297529
All online operations prohibited "A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.
AABCDEBF34523724
B123456789012345
Writing prohibited "A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.
7ABCDEF73DAEB93A
Z890445234817567
Reading/writing prohibited "A to F", "0 to 9" 16-digit value.
CDEF567FABDFEA46
18.22.4 System information - display screen protect function
1. System signal 1
Setting
System
Content Function Restriction Summary
Information
(Level)
All functions except the "user message display"
1
and "top screen (time display)" functions are disabled.
The following functions are disabled: "monitor/test’s ’test’ function", "device all-clear",
D +8 2 "time change", "contrast setting", "memory cassette transfer",
and "menu display language setting".
Other
All functions are enabled.
values
2. System signal 2
System signal 2 is unrelated to this function.
18.22.5 Program example (screen protect function setting)

In this program example, the display screen protect function is set to "level 2". Use this program as a
reference when other level settings are specified.
In this program example, system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56.
M8002
Initial pulse
System information (system No.2) is set at M50 to
MOV K50 D8301
M56.
MOV K2 D58 Sets the display screen protect function to "level 2".
END
346
11
18.22.6 Pointers for using the display screen protect function
Counters
High-Speed
The display screen protect function settings should be specified in a sequence program.
• The protect function is enabled by using the display module’s "monitor/test function" to change the system
information’s (system signal 1) "D +8" current value to "1" or "2". 12
• Once the setting is made, it cannot be canceled from the display module.
External Wiring
• To cancel the setting, use the programming tool to change the system information’s (system signal 1)
"D +8" current value to a value other than "1" and "2".
If the system information’s (system signal 1) "D +8" is set in a general purpose data register, however,
the display screen protect function can be canceled by turning the power off, then on again.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
347
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.23 User Message Display Function
18.23 User Message Display Function

The user message display function allows a user-prepared message to appear in place of the "top screen
(time display)".
The [OK] button is then pressed to switch from the "user message screen" to the "menu screen".
If using fixed user messages, the messages (created in GX Developer’s "device memory" window) should be
saved individually at D +9 to D +40 of the file register (D), extended register (R), and extended file
register (ER).
→ Refer to Subsection 18.23.7 for character data input details.
18.23.1 System information - user message display function
1. System signal 1
System Information Description
D +9
Device where the user message character string is saved.
~
D +40
1) Displayable Characters & Codes

Character Type Code
Alphanumeric 20H to 7DH, A1H to DFH ASCII code
Japanese Shift JIS Level 1-, 2
2) System information’s (system signal 1) D +9 to D +40 and display position

Row (horizontal character position)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
D +9 D +10 D +11 D +12 D +13 D +14 D +15 D +16
Line (vertical character position)
1 Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher Lower Higher
order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order order
D +17 D +18 D +19 D +20 D +21 D +22 D +23 D +24
D +25 D +26 D +27 D +28 D +29 D +30 D +31 D +32
D +33 D +34 D +35 D +36 D +37 D +38 D +39 D +40
2. System signal 2
System Setting
Screen Display
Information Content
User message display command.
ON
M +4 This command is enabled only when the "top screen (time display)" is displayed.
OFF Cancels the user message display, and displays the "top screen (time display)".
ON when the "user-registered device monitor screen"
ON
M +6 or the "user message screen" is displayed.
OFF OFF when other screens are displayed.
18.23.2 Shift JIS code arrangement precautions

To prevent garbled characters when a 2-byte character (shift JIS code) arrangement extends into the next
line, the system replaces those characters with 2 spaces.
[Ex] If a full-size character arrangement exists at D +16 (higher order) + D +17 (lower order), spaces
will display at those positions. Therefore, the use of full-size characters (shift JIS code) should be avoided at
the shaded areas shown in the above table.
348
11
18.23.3 Displaying a word device current value as a message
Counters
High-Speed
A numeric value can be displayed at the user message by combining BCD (FNC18), ASCI (FNC82), and
BMOV (FNC15) instructions.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.23.6 for a program example.
12
18.23.4 Program example 1 (user messages display switching)
External Wiring
The following program example is for user messages that appear in accordance with the auxiliary relay M100
to M102 ON/OFF statuses.
Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the "top screen (time display)" is
displayed.
13
1. Operation
Various Uses
Wiring for
The 3 messages shown below appear in accordance with the auxiliary relay M100 to M102 ON/OFF
statuses.
When auxiliary relays are ON simultaneously, the messages appear in the No.1 --> No.2 --> No.3 order.
The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned from D50 to D90 and
from M50 to M56. 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
No.1 M100 is ON No.2 M101 is ON No.3 M102 is ON
P L CS <Se t t i n g up> <Op e r a t i n g >
Pr ocess i ng un i t Now wa rm i n g up Pr ocess 05
Ve r . 2 . 0 Dr i l l i ng ho l es
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2. Character data
User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer, and is assigned to the file registers shown
below.
→ Refer to Subsection 18.23.7 for character data input details. 16
File Register Where
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Message No.
Saved
1 D1000 to D1031
2 D1032 to D1063
3 D1064 to D1095
17
3. Program
Options
Units and
Other Extension
M8002
Sets system information (system
MOV K50 D8300
signal 1) at D50 to D90.
Initial puls
MOV K50 D8301
signal 2) at M50 to M56.
Message No.1 display
M100
18
Display Module
BMOV D1000 D59 K32

M100 M101 Sets character data at D59 to D90,
BMOV D1032 D59 K32 depending on conditions.
M100 M101 M102
BMOV D1064 D59 K32
19
M100
Terminal Block
Displays character data saved at D59

M54
to D90.
M101
M102
20
END
Cassette
Memory
349
18.23.5 Program example 2 ([+] / [-] buttons of user messages switching)

The following is a program example in which the [+] / [-] buttons are used to switch the displayed user message.
Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the "top screen (time display)" is displayed.
1. Operation
The No.1 message shown below appears when auxiliary relay M100 switches on, and the [+] / [-] buttons can
be used at that time to switch to the other messages as shown below.
The system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56.
No.1 No.2 No.3
P L CS <Se t t i ng up> <Op e r a t i n g >
Pr ocess i ng un i t + Now wa rm i n g up + Pr ocess 05
Ve r . 2 . 0 - - Dr i l l i ng ho l es
2. Character data
User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer, and is assigned to the file registers shown below.
Message No. File Register Where Saved
1 D1000 to D1031
2 D1032 to D1063
3 D1064 to D1095
3. Program
M8002
MOV K50 D8300
Initial pulse
MOV K50 D8301
M100
M54 User message display command.
M100
Initializes the user message selection
ZRST M58 M63
flag.
"User SET M60 Sets the user message initial screen.
message
displayed" flag [+] button ON
M100 M56 M53
SFTL M60 M61 K3 K1
M61
RST M60
M63
SET M60
"User
message User message selection flag control in
displayed" flag [-] button ON RST M63 accordance with [+] / [-] button
M100 M56 M52 operation.
SFTR M58 M59 K4 K1
M59
SET M62
RST M59
M60
BMOV D1000 D59 K32
M61
BMOV D1032 D59 K32
Sets user message data at D59 to
M62 D90.
BMOV D1064 D59 K32
END
350
11
18.23.6 Program example 3 (user messages plus data display)
Counters
High-Speed
The following is a program example in which the counter’s current value appears at the user message.
Note that user messages do not appear when a screen other than the "top screen (time display)" is displayed.
1. Operation
The message shown below appears when auxiliary relay M100 switches on.
12
External Wiring
In this program example, the system information is assigned from D50 to D90 and from M50 to M56.
<P r o d u c t i o n >
Ta r ge t *1
Pr oduc t i on *1
R ema i n i n g *1
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
*1. The current values of the devices shown below appear as the target quantity, the production quantity,
and the remaining quantity.
Item Device Remarks
Target D200 Specifies the C0 setting.
14
Production C0 Counts the number of M101 ON operations.
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Remaining D201 Remaining (D201) = target (D200) - production (C0).
2. Displaying a word device current value as a message

A numeric value can be displayed at the user message by combining BCD (FNC18), ASCI (FNC82), and
BMOV (FNC15) instructions, etc. 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
3. Character data
User message data to be displayed is created in GX Developer, and is assigned to file registers D1000 to D1031.
4. Program
M8002
16
MOV K50 D8300
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Initial pulse
MOV K50 D8301
Specifies "10000" as the target
MOV K10000 D200
quantity
M101
D200 17
Production quantity count setting is
Options
Units and
Other Extension
C0 specified indirectly by D200.
M8000
SUB D200 C0 D201 Remaining quantity
RUN monitor
M100
M54 User message display command. 18
Display Module
Sets character data other than "Target",

BMOV D1000 D59 K32
"Production", and "Remaining".
MOV D200 D100 Starts a sub-routine program that

adds a space (20H) to the target
quantity (D200) current value (5
CALL P0 digits) to generate 6-character data.
19
Saves the generated character data
Terminal Block
BMOV D140 D71 K3 at the user message display position.
MOV C0 D102 Starts a sub-routine program that

adds a space (20H) to the production
quantity (C0) current value (max. 5
CALL P0 digits) to generate 6-character data.
Saves the generated character data
20
BMOV D150 D79 K3
Cassette
Memory
at the user message display position.
Continued on next page
351
Starts a sub-routine program that

MOV D201 D104 adds a space (20H) to the
remaining quantity (D201) current
value (max. 5 digits) to generate 6-
CALL P0 character data.
Saves the generated character
BMOV D160 D87 K3 data at the user message display
position.
FEND
P0 M8000
INC D106
RUN
monitor
= K1 D106 MOV K0 Z0
MOV K0 Z1
= K2 D106 MOV K2 Z0
MOV K10 Z1
= K3 D106 MOV K4 Z0
Processing preparation program
MOV K20 Z1 for data generating program.
RST D106
M8000
RST D101
RUN
monitor
RST D103
RST D105
RST V0
DBCD D100Z0 D108

Program that converts the 5-digit
M8161 numeric value to ASCII code.
(Converts the BCD code saved at
"D109, D108" to ASCII code which
ASCI D108 D111 K5 is saved at the D111 to D115
M8000 lower order bytes.
M8161
MOV H20 D110 Adds space data.
= H30 D111 MOV H20 D111
= H30 D112 MOV H20 D112

Zero-suppress program.
= H30 D113 M60 (Replaces "0 (H30) " with a space
M60 (20H).)
MOV H20 D113
= H30 D114 MOV H20 D114
Continued on next page
352
11
Counters
High-Speed
MUL D111 H100 D120
ADD D120 D110 D130 12
External Wiring
MUL D113 H100 D121 Program comprising 6 characters
(with space added).
ADD D121 D112 D131 • Target → D140 to D142
• Production → D150 to D152
• Remaining → D160 to D162
MUL D115 H100 D122
13
ADD D122 D114 D132
Various Uses
Wiring for
M8000
BMOV D130 D140Z1 K3
RUN monitor
SRET
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
END
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
353
18.23.7 Character data input procedure

User messages are entered and assigned to file registers in advance, using GX Developer.
Messages are displayed by a file register → data register transfer, with the message being created in place of
the numeric values, etc.
32 data register points are assigned to each message.
1 Starting GX Developer
To start up GX Developer, click the Windows [Start] button, then click [Programs] - [MELSOFT
Application] - [GX Developer].
2 Setting The PLC Model Name

Set the "PLC series" and the "PLC Type" settings as
shown below.
Required Setting Items Setting Content
PLC series FXCPU
PLC Type FX3U(C)
3 Parameter Settings
To specify the parameter settings, select "PLC parameter" from the project
data list.
If the project data list does not display, click the toolbar’s [Display] - [Project
data list] items.
Click the "Memory capacity" tab to perform file register assignments.
354
11
4
Counters
High-Speed
Selecting The File Register
1. From the project data list, select "Device memory", then right-click and select [New] at the
submenu.
2. The "New" dialog box then appears. 12
External Wiring
Click [OK]
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
A confirmation dialog box then appears.
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Click [Yes].
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
3. Enter "D1000" at the device, then click [Display].

(The first No. of the file register is selected.)
20
4. At the 2 selection boxes next to the input area, select "16-bit integer" and "HEX".
Cassette
Memory
355
5 Entering User Messages

As shown in the illustration below, the dialog box for character string inputs is opened by double-
clicking on GX Developer’s character string display area or the data register display area.
When entering Japanese scripts (Chinese characters, etc.), data input automatically occurs in the
lower order → higher order sequence, and the input can therefore be used as it is at the display
module’s user message display.
The GX Developer screen’s character string shown below is for "program example 1".
→ Refer to Subsection 18.23.4 for "program example 1" details.
GX Developer character arrangement precautions:

A single line is comprised of 8 data registers.
To prevent garbled characters when a 2-byte character (shift JIS code) arrangement extends into the next
line, the system replaces those characters with 2 spaces.
([Ex] spaces display at the end of the 1st line and at the beginning of the 2nd line.)
The condition of the display module line must therefore be considered when entering the characters.
Moreover, the 1st character device should be specified for displaying a 1-line character input.
356
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.24 Operation Error Messages & Corrective Actions
11
18.24 Operation Error Messages & Corrective Actions
Counters
High-Speed
The following is a list of error messages which the system displays after an operation is performed.
Relevant Menu Screen Japanese English Corrective Action
Entry Code error
Cancel the entry code, then attempt the operation
12
• All menus
External Wiring
again.
The Entry Code No entry code has been registered.

is not set Entry codes cannot be registered from the
display module. A programming tool such as GX
• Entry code
Developer, etc., is required to register entry 13
codes.
Various Uses
Wiring for
Incorrect The entered entry code does not match the
Entry Code! registered entry code. Verify the registered entry
code, then enter the correct entry code.
The wrong device A device has been specified that does not exist
• Monitor/test
(user-registered
is registered among the system information (system signal 1) 14
"user-registered device" monitor devices. Check
devices)
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
the program.
PLC is running Stop the PLC, then attempt the operation again.
Memory Cassette
Turn the memory cassette’s write-protected
• Monitor/test is
status to OFF, then attempt the operation again.
(setting change) write-protected 15
• Memory cassette Write error Writing failed. Verify that the memory cassette is
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
transfer properly installed.
Read error Reading failed. Verify that the memory cassette
is properly installed.
• PLC Status Fatal error
• Monitor/test occurred 16
(setting change)
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
• Memory cassette → Refer to Subsection 18.24.1
transfer for details.
Memory Cassette Turn the PLC power OFF, install the memory
is misconnected cassette, then attempt the operation again.
• Memory cassette
transfer The Entry Code Remove the memory cassette, restart the unit 17
is set in the (power OFF→ON), then use the programming
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Internal Memory tool to cancel the entry code in the internal RAM.
Programs match The memory cassette program matches the RAM
• Memory cassette program.
transfer
(consistency check) Programs The memory cassette program does not match
don't match the RAM program. 18
Display Module
Transfer
• Memory cassette Transfer successful.
completed
transfer
(reading/writing) Transfer Check if the memory cassette is properly
failed installed.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
357
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.24 Operation Error Messages & Corrective Actions
18.24.1 When a "Fatal error occurred" message appears

Operation is possible with the "Level C" or "Level B" entry code function restrictions.
However, the system is probably in one of the statuses described below. Check these statuses in the order
shown below, and take the appropriate corrective action.
1. Perform an error check at the display module, and if an error is active, take the appropriate
corrective action.
→ Refer to Section 18.9 for the error check procedure.
If a program error is active:

The fatal error was probably activated due to a program error.
Use the programming tool to correct the program.
→ Refer to Section 14.6 for error codes and corrective actions.
→ Refer to Subsection 12.5.3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions.
If no program error is active:

There may be a problem with the PLC’s memory content. Perform the following procedure.
1) Use the programming tool to perform a program memory all-clear.
2) Rewrite the program.
3) Stop the PLC, turn the power ON, display the "PLC Status (1/3)" screen and check to refer to if the "Fatal
error occurred" message appears.
- If the "Fatal error occurred" message appears, perform the corrective action described at item "2" below.
- If the "Fatal error occurred" message does not appear, set the PLC to a RUN state, then check again if
the message appears.
If the message appears, a watchdog timer error has probably occurred. In this case, the program should
be re-examined.
→ Refer to Subsection 14.5.3 for the watchdog timer error corrective action.
2. If the "Fatal error occurred" message still appears after performing the corrective actions
described in item 1 above, perform the following procedure to check for symptom changes.
Turn the power OFF and disconnect all extension devices.
(extension connectors, extension cables, expansion board connectors, and CC-Link/LT dedicated flat
cable)
Turn the power ON again at the main unit, display the "PLC Status(1/3)" screen again, and check if the
"Fatal error occurred" message appears.
1) If the "Fatal error occurred" message appears:
The main unit hardware may have failed. Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
2) If the "Fatal error occurred" message does not appear:
Turn the power OFF, connect the extension devices, then operate the system again to check for errors.
If the problem persists, there may be main unit or extension device hardware failure. Contact your local
Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
358
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 18.25 Menu Display Characters - Japanese & English Display Character Correspondence Table.
11
18.25 Menu Display Characters - Japanese & English Display Character
Counters
High-Speed
Correspondence Table.
Menu Screen Japanese English Menu Screen Japanese English

12
Monitor/Test PLC Status(1/3)
External Wiring
ErrorCheck Ver.-.--
LANGUAGE Fatal error
Contrast occurred
ClockMenu
Menu The Entry Code
EntryCode
ClearAllDev PLC status(1)
is not set 13
PLC Status PLC operation
Various Uses
Wiring for
ScanTime is limited
Cassette All operation
ErrorCheck
PLC Status
is unrestricted
No errors PLC operation
ErrorCheck ErrorCheck is unavailable 14
PLC Status(2/3)
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Error code
Internal Memory
LANGUAGE PLC status(2) Memory Cassette
(Menu display Protection --
language setting)
Contrast Contrast
Capacity --K 15
PLC Status(3/3)
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Current time
Clock setting PLC status(3) Battery -.-V
ClockMenu
(Current time Clock setting Comments
setting) Current time ScanTime
is set ScanTime Curr: -.-ms
(Scan time display) Max : -.-ms 16
Please,
Min : -.-ms
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
input Entry Code
Memory Cassette
Cassette
******** Cassette←RAM
(Memory cassette
Cassette→RAM
Make Entry Code transfer)
Cassette:RAM
valid?
EntryCode OK→Execute Cassette←RAM 17
Cassette
ESC→Cancel (Write)
Options
Units and
Other Extension
←RAM
All operation Please wait...
is possible Cassette→RAM
Cassette
Incorrect (Read)
→RAM
Entry Code Please wait...
Clear Cassette Transfer 18

→RAM completed
Display Module
all devices
OK→Execute Cassette Transfer
ClearAllDev
ESC→Cancel ←RAM failed
(Device all-clear)
All device Cassette:RAM
were cleard (Verify)
Please wait... 19
Cassette:RAM
Terminal Block
Programs match
Programs
don't match
20
Cassette
Memory
359
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 19 FX-16/32E*-*-TB (Terminal Block)
19. FX-16/32E*-*-TB (Terminal Block)
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
connections.
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before starting the installation or wiring work.
360
11
Counters
High-Speed
• Use the product in the environment within the generic specifications described in section 4.1 of this manual.
Never use the product in areas with dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or
NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature, condensation, or wind and rain.
If the product is used in such a place described, electrical shock, fire, malfunctions, damage, or deterioration may
12
External Wiring
be caused.
• Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly, thus avoiding failure or malfunctions.
• Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM, and terminal block DIN rail only
Main unit, FX2N Series I/O extension unit/block, and FX0N/FX2N
Series special extension block/special adapter
DIN rail or direct mounting 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
• Install the product on a flat surface.
If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
• Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC's ventilation port when the installation work is completed.
Failure to do so could cause fires, equipment failures, and malfunctions.
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
• Fit the extension cables, peripheral device connecting cables, input/output cables and battery connecting cable
securely to the designated connectors.
Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, display module , expansion boards and special adapters
- Extension units/blocks and FX Series terminal block
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Connect the AC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
burnt out.
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will be 18
burnt out.
Display Module

19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
361
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.1 Overview
19.1 Overview
A terminal block is used to convert connector type input/output terminals into a terminal block.
Moreover, dedicated input and output terminal blocks (built-in element types) can be used to receive AC input
signals for conversion to relay / transistor / triac output types.
Optional cable or
user-fabricated cable
Terminal block Terminal block
362
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.1 Overview
11
19.1.1 Product configuration
Counters
High-Speed
The connection destinations shown below are products which can be connected by "connector ⇔ connector"
cables. An individual-wire type can also be used for wiring to the terminal blocks of PLC-side input/output
products.
Model Name
Number of Number of
Function Connection Destination
Drive Power 12
Input Points Output Points Supply
External Wiring
16 input points or
FX-16E-TB
16 output points Connects directly to
FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)
32 input points, PLC input/output *1
FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)
FX-32E-TB 32 output points, terminals.
or 16 input & 16 output points 13
FX-16EX-A1-TB*2 16 − 100V AC input type FX2N-16EX-C (sink input) *4
Various Uses
Wiring for
24V DC
FX-16EYR-TB*3 16 Relay output type FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)
80 mA
24V DC
FX-16EYS-TB*3 − 16 Triac output type FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)
112 mA
Transistor output 24V DC 14
FX-16EYT-TB*3 − 16
(sink) type
112 mA
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Transistor output 24V DC
FX-16EYT-H-TB*3 − 16
(sink) type
112 mA
*1. A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C.
The current consumption is shown in the table below.
Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
FX2N-16EX-C 24V DC 112 mA
*2. The applications shown below are not supported.

Unsupported Applications
High-speed
processing
High-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, pulse density (SPD) instruction 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Time division Matrix input (MTR) instruction, 16-key input (HKY) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction,
input arrow switch (ARWS) instruction
Input refresh (REFF) instruction, ten-key input (TKY) instruction, ABS current value readout
Other
(ABS) instruction
*3. The applications shown below are not supported. 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Pulse output (PLSY) instruction, pulse output with acceleration/deceleration (PLSR)
instruction, pulse width modulation (PWM) instruction, zero return with DOC search function
(DSZR) instruction, interruption positioning (DVIT) instruction, positioning by batch setting
Pulse output
format (TBL) instruction, ABS current value readout (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN)
instruction, variable speed pulse output (PLSV) instruction, relative positioning (DRVI) 18
instruction, absolute positioning (DRVA) instruction
Display Module
Time division Matrix input (MTR) instruction, 16-key input (HKY) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction,
input arrow switch (ARWS) instruction
Time division
7-segment display (SEGL) instruction, ASCII code print (PR) instruction
output
*4. A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C. 19
The current consumption is shown in the table below.
Terminal Block
Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption

FX2N-16EX-C 24V DC 160 mA
20
Cassette
Memory
363
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.2 External Dimensions & Component Names
19.2 External Dimensions & Component Names

FX-16E-TB FX-32E-TB
150(5.91") 150(5.91") 45(1.78")
55(2.17")
55(2.17")
FX-16EYR-TB
FX-16EX-A1-TB FX-16EYS-TB
FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
150(5.91") 150(5.91")
55(2.17")
55(2.17")
Units: mm (inches)
Accessories: Input/output No. labels, terminal block arrangement
cards
No. Name Remarks

[1] CN1 connector −
[2] CN2 connector Present at FX-32E-TB.
Present at FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-TB, FX-
[3] Operation indicator LED
16EYT-H-TB.
[4] POWER LED Present at FX-16EX-A1-TB.
[5] CN2 terminal block (M3.5 screws) Present at FX-32E-TB.
[6] CN1 terminal block (M3.5 screws) −
[7] Nameplate −
DIN rail mounting groove
[8] −
(DIN rail width: 35mm(1.38"))
[9] DIN rail mounting hook −
364
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.3 Terminal Arrangement
11
19.3 Terminal Arrangement
Counters
High-Speed
1. FX-16E-TB
When connected to the FX2N-16EYT-C
FX-16E-TB
12
External Wiring
Lower numbers Higher numbers
1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 13

0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM
Various Uses
Wiring for
When connected to the FX2N-16EX-C
FX-16E-TB
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
24- 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
15
2. FX-32E-TB
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
When connected to the FX2N-16EYT-C
CN2 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM

0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM 16
CN1 CN2
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Lower numbers Higher numbers 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
CN1 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM
0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM
When connected to the FX2N-16EX-C

18
CN2
Display Module
24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
24- 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
CN1 CN2
19
Terminal Block
CN1 24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
24- 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
20
Cassette
Memory
365
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.3 Terminal Arrangement
3. FX-16E-A1-TB
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
4. FX-16EYR-TB, FX-16EYS-TB, FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
366
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.4 Installation Work
11
19.4 Installation Work
Counters
High-Speed
→ Refer to Section 8.2 for installation location.
19.4.1 Mounting
12
External Wiring
1 Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC,
input/output devices, and terminal blocks.
2 Align the top side of the "DIN rail mounting groove" 13

(refer to Fig.1 at right) with the DIN rail.
Various Uses
Wiring for
3 Press the product onto the DIN rail (refer to Fig.2 at
right).
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
19.4.2 Removal
1 Turn the power supply OFF.

15
2
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Disconnect the wiring and input/output cables.
3 Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail

mounting hook in the posture shown (refer to Fig.1 at
right) 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
4 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at
right (refer to Fig.2) to detach the DIN rail mounting
hook from the DIN rail.
17
5 Remove the product from the DIN rail.
Options
Units and
19.4.3 Input/output cable connection Other Extension
The terminal block’s CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL-83503 standard.
18
Display Module
→ Refer to Subsection 9.2.2 for input/output cable information.
19
Terminal Block
Input/output cable
20
Cassette
Memory
Terminal block
367
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.4 Installation Work
19.4.4 Connection to terminal block
1. The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below.

Model Name Terminal Screw Size
• FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB
• FX-16EX-A1-TB
• FX-16EYR-TB M3.5
• FX-16EYS-TB
• FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
2. Crimp terminal sizes vary according to the wiring method.

Use the sizes shown below.
• When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal:
Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below, and install it as shown in the lower right figure.
Terminal Crimp
6.8mm(0.27")
or less
φ 3.7(0.15")
or less
• When 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal:

Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below, and install it as shown in the lower right figure.
φ 3.7(0.15")
6.0mm(0.24")
or more
φ 3.7(0.15")
or more
368
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB
11
19.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB
Counters
High-Speed
The FX-16E-TB and FX-32E-TB items must be connected using an FX2N series input/output connector type
expansion block.
Input Connector Output Connector
Connectable models FX2N-16EX-C (sink input) FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)
12
External Wiring
19.5.1 Internal circuit
0 to 7 (Lower Nos.) 0 to 7 (Higher Nos.)

*2 *3 *3 *3 *3 13
CN2 *1 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM
Various Uses
Wiring for
0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM
*3 *3 *3 *3
*2 *1
(20) (10)
COM (19) (9) COM
*3
7 (18) (8) 7
*3 14
6 (17) (7) 6
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
5 (16) (6) 5
4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
2 (13) (3) 2
1
0
(12)
(11)
(2)
(1)
1
0
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
0 2 4 6
FX-32E-TB
1 3 5 7
CN1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
*2
(20) (10) *1
*3
COM (19) (9) COM *3
FX-16E-TB
7 (18) (8) 7
6 (17) (7) 6 17
5 (16) (6) 5
Options
Units and
Other Extension
4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
2 (13) (3) 2
1 (12) (2) 1
*2 *3 *3 *3 *3
0 (11) (1) 0
1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM 18
0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM
Display Module
*1 *3 *3 *3 *3

*1 "24-" when connected to FX2N-16EX-C.
*2 "24+" when connected to FX2N-16EX-C.
*3 "•" when connected to FX2N-16EX-C.
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
369
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.5 FX-16E-TB, FX-32E-TB
19.5.2 Example of input external wiring
WIRING PRECAUTIONS

1. When connected to an FX2N-16EX-C (sink input) input expansion block:
PLC's
input No.
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
24- 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
24+
24+ 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
24- 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
24V
DC
19.5.3 Output external wiring
WIRING PRECAUTIONS

1. When connected to an FX2N-16EX-C (sink output) output expansion block:
PLC's COM
output No.
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
Vacant 0 2 4 6 0 2 4 6
terminal COM
1 3 COM 5 7 COM 1 3 COM 5 7 COM

0 2 COM 4 6 COM 0 2 COM 4 6 COM
MC1 MC2
24V
DC
370
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB
11
19.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB
Counters
High-Speed
The FX-16EX-A1-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series input expansion block (24V DC).
Input Connector
Connectable models FX2N-16EX-C (sink input)
12
The applications shown below are not supported.
External Wiring
High-speed
High-speed counter, input interruption, pulse catch, pulse density (SPD) instruction
processing
Matrix input (MTR) instruction, 16-key input (HKY) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction,
Time division input
arrow switch (ARWS) instruction
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
Input refresh (REFF) instruction, ten-key input (TKY) instruction, ABS current value readout
Other
(ABS) instruction
19.6.1 Specifications
14
Item AC Input Type
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
0 to 7
Photocoupler
CN1 100V
Input/output circuitry Connector AC
side
Fuse
15
COMn
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Terminal block
External wiring
Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC+10%-15% 50 / 60 Hz

4.7 mA / 100V AC 50 Hz
Input signal current
6.2 mA / 110V AC 60 Hz 16
Approx. 21 kΩ / 50 Hz
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Input impedance
Approx. 18 kΩ / 60 Hz
ON 3.8 mA / 80V AC or more
Input sensitivity
OFF 1.7 mA / 30V AC or more
Response time *1 25 to 30 ms
Input signal format Voltage contact
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation
Input operation display No input LEDs (equipped with 24V power supply LED indicator)
Power consumption 1.2 W (48 mA 24V DC)*2
*1. This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC.
*2. 3.9W (160mA, 24V DC) is required when connected to the FX2N-16EX-C.
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
371
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.6 FX-16EX-A1-TB
CN1
(20) (10)
COM (19) (9) COM
7 (18) (8) 7
Photo- 6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-
coupler 5 (16) (6) 5 coupler
4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
2 (13) (3) 2
1 (12) (2) 1
0 (11) (1) 0
Photo- Photo-
coupler coupler
0 to 3 4 to 7 0 to 3 4 to 7
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
0 to 7 Lower numbers 0 to 7 Higher numbers
19.6.3 Example of input external wiring
PLC input
No. 0 to 3 4 to 7 0 to 3 4 to 7
Photo-coupler
power supply
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
100 to
+10%
120V AC
24V DC -15% 3A
372
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.7 FX-16EYR-TB
11
19.7 FX-16EYR-TB
Counters
High-Speed
The FX-16EYR-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output expansion block (transistor).
Output Connector
Connectable models FX2N-16EYT-C (sink output)
12
External Wiring
Pulse output (PLSY) instruction, pulse output with acceleration/deceleration (PLSR) instruction, pulse
width modulation (PWM) instruction, zero return with DOC search function (DSZR) instruction,
Pulse
interruption positioning (DVIT) instruction, positioning by batch setting format (TBL) instruction, ABS
outputs
current value readout (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output 13
(PLSV) instruction, relative positioning (DRVI) instruction, absolute positioning (DRVA) instruction
Various Uses
Wiring for
Time division Matrix input (MTR) instruction, 16-key input (HKY) instruction, digital switch (DSW) instruction, arrow
input switch (ARWS) instruction
Time division
output
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Item Relay output
24V DC
5mA 0 to 7 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Input/output CN1
circuitry Connector side
LED
Fuse
COMn
External wiring
16
Load voltage 250V AC or less, 30V DC or less
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Resistance 2 A / point
Max. load The total load current per common (4 points) should not exceed 8A.
load Inductive
80 VA
load
Min. load 5V DC, 2mA Reference value 17
Open-circuit
Options
Units and
Other Extension
−
leakage current
Response time *1 Approx. 10 ms

Circuit isolation Mechanical isolation
Operation
indicators
LED lights when relay coil power is supplied 18
Display Module
Power
1.92 W (80 mA 24V DC)
consumption
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
373
(20) (10)
COM (19) (9) COM
7 (18) (8) 7
6 (17) (7) 6
5 (16) (6) 5
4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
2 (13) (3) 2
1 (12) (2) 1
0 (11) (1) 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
19.7.3 Example of output external wiring

PLC output
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.
Relay
power
supply
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
Fuse Fuse
24V
DC
374
11
Counters
High-Speed
A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal Load
could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To 0 to 7
prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the Fuse 12
output.
External Wiring
COMn
Terminal block

The relay output circuit in the terminal block is not equipped with a protection circuit. 13
Therefore, when an inductive load is connected. For the expected product life and noise reduction, it is
Various Uses
Wiring for
recommended to insert a contact protection circuit.
1) DC circuit
Connect a diode (for commutation) parallel to the
load. inductive load
The diode (for commutation) must comply with the 14
PLC output
following specifications. contact Diode
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Item Guide (for commutation)
Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage
2) AC circuit 15
Connect the surge absorber shown below (combined
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
CR components such as a surge killer and spark inductive load
killer, etc.), parallel to the load.
PLC output
Item Guide contact
Surge
Rated voltage 250V AC absorber
Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1µF 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Reference
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. CR-10201 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
3. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where Interlock Forward limit
a hazardous condition could result if switched ON PLC output
simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided contact
for interlocking the PLC’s internal programs as shown to
PLC output Reverse limit 18
the right. contact
Display Module
4. In-phase
manner.
Bad * 19
Terminal Block
*
Good *
20
Cassette
Memory
375
19.7.5 Operation life of relay output contact

500,000 times at 35 VA.
Test conditions: 1 sec. ON / 1 sec. OFF

Load Capacity Contact Life
0.35 A / 100V AC S-K10 to S-K150
35VA 3,000,000 times
0.17 A / 200V AC S-N10 to S-K35
0.8 A / 100V AC
80VA 1,000,000 times S-K180 to S-K400
0.4 A / 200V AC
1.2 A / 100V AC
120VA 200,000 times S-K600, S-K800
0.6 A / 200V AC
Even under the above conditions, the life of a relay contact could be shortened dramatically by shutting off a
rush current (over-current).
376
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
11
19.8 FX-16EYT-TB, FX-16EYT-H-TB
Counters
High-Speed
The FX-16EYT(-H)-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output expansion block (transistor).
Output Connector
12
External Wiring
Pulse
outputs
current value readout (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output 13
Various Uses
Wiring for
input switch (ARWS) instruction
Time division
output
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
Transistor output
Item
FX-16EYT-TB FX-16EYT-H-TB
3.3kΩ
Photo-
Fuse
Photo-
Fuse 15
coupler 0 to 7 3.3kΩ coupler 0 to 7
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
CN1 CN1
Connector Connector
Input/output circuitry side LED 5 to 30V LED 5 to 30V
side
24V DC DC 24V DC DC
7mA COMn 7mA COMn
External
wiring
External
wiring
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Load voltage 5 to 30V DC 5 to 30V DC
0.5 A / point 1 A / point
Resistance
The total load current per common (4 points) The total load current per common (4 points)
load
Max. load should not exceed 0.8 A. should not exceed 3 A.
Inductive
12 W (24V DC) 24 W (24V DC)
17
load
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Open-circuit leakage
0.1 mA / 30V DC 0.1 mA / 30V DC
current
Response OFF→ON
*1 0.2 ms or less / 24V DC 0.3 ms or less / 24V DC
time *1
ON→OFF*1 1.5 ms or less / 24V DC 4 ms or less / 24V DC 18
Output element’s ON
Display Module
1.5 V 1.5 V
voltage
Circuit isolation Photo-coupler isolation Photo-coupler isolation
Operation indicators LED lights when photo-coupler power is supplied LED lights when photo-coupler power is supplied
Power consumption 2.7 W (112 mA 24V DC) 2.7 W (112 mA 24V DC)
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
377
Photo- (20) (10)

3.3kΩ coupler COM (19) (9) COM 3.3kΩ
7 (18) (8) 7
6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-
5 (16) (6) 5 coupler
4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
Photo- 2 (13) (3) 2
3.3kΩ coupler 1 (12) (2) 1 3.3kΩ
0 (11) (1) 0
Photo-
coupler

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
* * * *
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
* For the FX-16EYT-H-TB, the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below.
PLC output
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No.
* * * *
Photo-coupler
power supply
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4
Fuse Fuse
24V
DC
* For the FX-16EYT-H-TB, the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below.
378
11
Counters
High-Speed
A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal Load
could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB. To 0 to 7
prevent this, a protection fuse should be inserted at the Fuse 12
output. Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2
External Wiring
times larger than the total rated fuse capacity. COMn
Terminal block
2. Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads

13
inductive
Various Uses
Wiring for
The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is load
equipped with a Zener diode (50V) for protection. When 0 to 7
an inductive load is connected, however, a diode should Fuse
be connected parallel to the load when required. The
diode must comply with the specifications shown below. COMn
Counter voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Terminal block
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
3. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where Forward
limit Interlock
a hazardous condition could result if switched ON
simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
for interlocking the PLC’s internal programs as shown to
the right. Reverse PLC output
limit element
16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
379
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 19.9 FX-16EYS-TB
19.9 FX-16EYS-TB
The FX-16EYS-TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output expansion block (transistor).
Output Connector

Pulse
outputs
current value readout (ABS) instruction, zero return (ZRN) instruction, variable speed pulse output
inputs switch (ARWS) instruction
Time division
outputs
Item TRIAC output
3.3kΩ 7mA Fuse

0 to 7
2.2Ω
CN1
Input/output connector
circuitry side U
LED 0.015
µF
Photo- COMn
thyristor
External wiring
Load voltage 85 to 242V AC

Resistance
0.3 A / point*1 The total load current per common (4 points) should not exceed 0.8 A.
Max. load
load Inductive 15 VA / 100V AC
load 36 VA / 200V AC
0.4 VA / 100V AC
Min. load
1.6 VA / 200V AC
Open-circuit 1 mA / 100V AC
leakage current 2 mA / 200V AC
Response time*2 2 ms or less

Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation
Operation indicator LED lights when photo-thyristor power is supplied
Power
2.7 W (112 mA 24V DC)
consumption
*1. In systems where frequent large-load ON/OFF switching occurs due to rush currents, the root mean square
current should be 0.2 A or less.
<Example>
0.4A
4A
42 0.02 + 0.42 0.7
= 0.2A
0.02 + 0.7 + 10
0.02 0.7 10
sec sec sec
380
11
Counters
High-Speed
(20) (10)
3.3kΩ COM
7
(19) (9) COM
(18) (8) 7
3.3kΩ 12
6 (17) (7) 6 Photo-
External Wiring
Photo- 5 (16) (6) 5 thyristor
thyristor 4 (15) (5) 4
3 (14) (4) 3
2 (13) (3) 2
3.3kΩ 1 (12) (2) 1 3.3kΩ
0 (11) (1) 0
Photo-
Photo-
thyristor
13
thyristor
Various Uses
Wiring for
Surge absorbers are connected to each output

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
U U U U
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Surge absorbers are connected to each output

PLC output
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16
No.
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Photo-coupler U U U U
power supply
24+ 1 3 COM1 5 7 COM2 1 3 COM3 5 7 COM4

24- 0 2 COM1 4 6 COM2 0 2 COM3 4 6 COM4 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
24V Load
DC
Fuse Fuse Fuse 18

Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
381

A short-circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause Load
burnout at the output element or the PCB. To prevent this, a 0 to 7
protection fuse should be inserted at the output. Fuse
COMn
Terminal block
2. Micro current load

The PLC’s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn-off C- Micro current load
R absorber. When a micro current load is connected, be sure to
connect a surge absorber parallel to the load.
In this manual, the term "micro current load" refers to a load of U Surge
absorber
0.4VA/100V AC or less, and 1.6VA/200V AC or less.
Item Guide
Rated voltage 250V AC
Static electricity capacity Approx. 0.1µF
Reference
3. Interlock
For loads such as forward/reverse contactors, etc., where Interlock Forward limit
Forward
a hazardous condition could result if switched ON
simultaneously, an external interlock should be provided U
for interlocking the PLC’s internal programs as shown to Reverse
the right. Reverse limit
U
PLC output
element
4. In-phase
manner.
Bad U
*
Good
U
382
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 20 FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L (Memory Cassette)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.1 Specifications
11
Counters
High-Speed
20. FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L (Memory Cassette)
This chapter explains the memory cassette specifications and functions. 12
The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit, and when installed, the memory cassette’s internal
External Wiring
program is used in place of the internal RAM memory.
20.1 Specifications
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
20.1.1 Electrical specifications
Max.
Memory PROTECT Loader Compatible
Model Name Max. Memory Capacity Allowable
Type
Write
Switch Function Versions 14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
64000 steps Flash 10,000
FX3U-FLROM-64L Provided Provided
(2k/4k/8k/16k/32k selectable) memory times
64000 steps Flash 10,000 1st article
FX3U-FLROM-64 Provided NA
(2k/4k/8k/16k/32k selectable) memory times (Ver.2.20)
16000 steps Flash 10,000
FX3U-FLROM-16
(2k/4k/8k selectable) memory times
Provided NA 15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
20.1.2 Component names & external dimensions
1. FX3U-FLROM-64L 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
[1] RD LED
[2] RD key
(Reading: PLC ⇒ memory cassette)
20(0.79")
[3] WR LED
[4] WR key
(writing: memory cassette ⇒ PLC) 17
[5] Prevent reverse installation slot
Options
Units and
Other Extension
37(1.46") 6.1(0.25") [6] PROTECT switch
Units: mm (inches) [7] Main unit connector
[8] Detachment lever
2. FX3U-FLROM-64, FX3U-FLROM-16
[1] Prevent reverse installation slot 18
[2] PROTECT switch
Display Module
[3] Main unit connector

20(0.79")
[4] Detachment lever
37(1.46") 6.1(0.25")
19
Terminal Block
Units: mm (inches)
20
Cassette
Memory
383
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.2 Installation & Removal
20.2 Installation & Removal

If a display module (FX3U-7DM) and a display module holder (FX3U-7DM-HLD) are installed, remove these
items before installing or removing the memory cassette. Be sure that the power is OFF when installing/
removing the memory cassette.
20.2.1 Memory cassette installation
1 Remove the top cover.

While pressing the top cover hook ("A"), remove the top
cover ("B") as shown in the figure to the right.
2 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever.

Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("C").
C 2
3 Install the memory cassette.

Align the cassette with the "prevent reverse installation slot"
("D"), then press it all the way in (when pressed all the way
in, the cassette is approx. 0.4mm (0.02") lower than the
surrounding surface.)
Installation
precaution
• Connect the memory cassette securely to the prescribed
connector. A poor connection can cause malfunctions.
Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause
malfunctions.
Cross-section drawing (memory cassette installation condition)

Press the 4 corners in approx.
0.4mm(0.02")
Memory
Good cassette
PLC body
Memory Raised cassette
Bad cassette
posture
Memory
Bad cassette Tilted cassette posture
384
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.2 Installation & Removal
11
4
Counters
High-Speed
Attach the top cover ("B").
12
External Wiring
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
20.2.2 Memory cassette removal
1 Remove the top cover.

14
While pressing the top cover hook ("A"), remove the top
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
cover ("B") as shown in the figure to the right.
15
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2 Raise the memory cassette detachment lever. 16
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
Raise the memory cassette detachment lever ("C").
17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
18
3 Grasp the detachment lever and pull it.
Display Module
Grasp the detachment lever ("C") and pull it vertically to

remove the memory cassette.
Caution:
19
Terminal Block
Take care to avoid twisting the detachment lever when removing

the memory cassette.
20
Cassette
Memory
385
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.3 Saved Data Content
20.3 Saved Data Content

The following data is saved on the memory cassette.
Item Description Saving Method
• Memory capacity setting
- Memory capacity (default setting: 16k steps)
2k/4k/8k/16k steps (FX3U-FLROM-16)
2k/4k/8k/16k/32k/64k steps (FX3U-FLROM-64/64L)
- Comment capacity
- File register capacity
Parameters - Buffer memory initial setting capacity
• Device latch range settings (keep device)
• Modem initializing settings, battery-free operation, RUN terminal
settings
Program • RS/RS2 instructions / computer link function communication settings Programming
Memory • Positioning settings tool *2
• BFM default settings
Sequence
User-created sequence programs
programs
Max. 6350 points Comments and file registers can
Comments (0 to 127 blocks, be created in the memory by
1 block = 50 points / 500 steps) setting them in the parameter
Max. 7000 points memory capacity.*1
File registers (0 to 14 blocks,
1 block = 500 points / 500 steps)
• Sequence
program
Extended file registers ER0 to ER32767 (32768 points)
• GX
Developer
*1. The total size of the programs + comments + file registers must not exceed the maximum capacity of
the memory cassette.
*2. The maximum number of points for the memory capacity, comments, and file registers, can be
specified when the FX3U(C) programming tool is selected. The maximum number of points cannot be
specified when a programming tool other than the FX3U(C) is selected.
386
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.4 PROTECT Switch
11
20.4 PROTECT Switch
Counters
High-Speed
20.4.1 PROTECT switch setting
Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by 12
using the programming tool.
External Wiring
PROTECT
Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format, a special
switch
ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required.
The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing.
13
Various Uses
Wiring for
20.4.2 PROTECT switch operation
14
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
1. Preparing the operation tools
Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers, a
precision screwdriver, or a tool with a tip width of approx. 0.8mm (0.04"). Shape of tool tip
Do not use objects with round tips, as the round tip can easily slip off the Good
switch knob, possibly resulting in an incorrect setting.
Tool tip
15
Bad
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
2. Switch operation procedure
As shown in the figure below, the switch knob can be "pushed" or "pulled". When setting the switch, do not
set it in an intermediate position.
Switch setting
16
Push tool
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
direction Switch Switch case Pull
knob direction
OFF ON OFF ON 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
20.4.3 Precautions when setting and using the switch
• Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment
failure.
18
• Also use care to avoid scratching the PCB when setting the switch.
Display Module
19
Terminal Block
20
Cassette
Memory
387
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.5 Memory Cassette <-> PLC (RAM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function
20.5 Memory Cassette <−> PLC (RAM Memory) Transfers by Loader Function
The FX3U-FLROM-64L loader function ([WR] and [RD] key operation) is explained in this chapter.
• Program transfers (reading/writing) are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC’s internal
RAM memory.
• The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped.
20.5.1 Tool for pressing the [WR] and [RD] keys

Use an insulator tool (plastic, ceramic, etc.) to press the [WR] and [RD] keys. The area around the keys is not
insulated. Using a metal screwdriver, etc can cause equipment damage.
20.5.2 Writing (WR: 64L → PLC)

A memory cassette program is written to the PLC’s internal RAM memory.
Required condition: The PLC must be stopped.
1 Install the memory cassette on the main unit.

(Setting the PROTECT switch to ON (on memory cassette’s rear face) prevents accidental overwriting of
memory cassette program.)
→ Refer to Subsection 20.2.1 for the installation procedure.
• Verify that the PLC power is OFF, then install the memory cassette on the PLC.
• Turn the PLC power ON.
[WR] LED [WR] key
• Raise the memory cassette’s eject lever.
2 Press the [WR] key 1 time. WR(64LJPLC)
RD(64LIPLC)
The [WR] LED lights, and a preparation status is established.
• To cancel, press the [RD] key.
3 Press the [WR] key again.

Writing is executed, and the [WR] LED goes off.
27
26
25
24
23
R
E
22
• Writing to the built-in RAM is completed instantaneously, and the

O
N
21
U
R
20
27
TT
A
7
26
B
24 R
6
17
23 RO
25
5
R
16
22 E
4
15
3
14
2
13
21
1
12
17 20
0
11
16 7
LED goes out soon.

10
15 6
IN
14 5
13 4
12 3
11 2
10 1
T 0
U
O
4 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit. FX

-48
MR
/ES
3U
Writing is completed when the [WR] LED goes off. RU

N
ST
OP
After turning the PLC power OFF, remove the memory cas-
sette from the PLC.
→ Refer to Subsection 20.2.2 for the removal procedure.
388
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 20.6 Transfers By Display Module Operation
11
20.5.3 Reading (RD: 64L ← PLC)
Counters
High-Speed
Programs are read from the PLC’s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette.
Required condition: The PLC must be stopped, and the PROTECT switch must be OFF.
1 Turn the PROTECT switch OFF at the rear face of the memory cassette. 12
External Wiring
The memory cassette must be removed from the PLC in order to turn the PROTECT switch OFF.
2 Install the memory cassette on the main unit.

→ Refer to Subsection 20.2.1 for the installation procedure. 13
• Verify that the PLC power is OFF, then install the memory
Various Uses
Wiring for
cassette on the PLC.
• Turn the PLC power ON. WR(64LJPLC)
• Raise the memory cassette’s eject lever. RD(64LIPLC)
14
3 Press the [RD] key 1 time. [RD] LED [RD] key
Troubleshooting
Maintenance,
Test Run,
The [RD] LED lights, and a preparation status is established.
• To cancel, press the [WR] key.
27
26
25
24
23
R
E
22
W
O
N
21
U
R
20
27
TT
4
A
7
26
B
24 R
6
17
25
23 RO
5
R
16
22 E
15
15
3
14
2
13
21
1
Press the [RD] key again.
12
17 20
0
11
16 7
10
15 6
IN
14 5
13 4
12 3
11 2
10 1
T 0
U
O
Extension Units
Powered
Input/Output
Reading is executed, and the [RD] LED blinks. FX
-48
MR
/ES
3U
5 Remove the memory cassette from the main unit. RU
N
ST
OP
Reading is completed when the [RD] LED goes off. 16

After turning the PLC power OFF, remove the memory cas-
Blocks
Extension
Input/Output
sette from the PLC, then turn the PROTECT switch ON.
20.6 Transfers By Display Module Operation 17
Options
Units and
Other Extension
Programs can be transferred (reading/writing) between the memory cassette and the PLC’s internal RAM
memory by a display module operation.
→ Refer to Section 18.17 for details concerning the memory cassette transfer function.
20.7 Operation Precautions 18

Display Module
Observe the following precautions when writing to file registers (D) and extended file registers (ER) by
program.
1. Flash memory writing count
10,000 writing operations are permitted at the flash memory. 19
Terminal Block
2. Precaution for file register usage

Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used in a
continuous execution format with regard to a file register.
To prevent this, be sure to use "pulse execution format" (BMOVP) instructions.
3. Precaution for extended file register (ER) usage
Do not use continuous constant-execution SAVER and LOGR instructions with regard to extended file
20
Cassette
Memory
registers. Use the individual instructions only when required.
389
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers 21 FX3U-32BL (Battery)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 21.1 Battery Purpose
21. FX3U-32BL (Battery)

PRECAUTIONS
TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS
• Before transporting the PLC, turn on power to the PLC to check that the BATT LED is off and check the battery
life.
If the PLC is transported with the BATT LED on or the battery exhausted, the backed up data may be unstable
during transportation.
The main unit of the PLC has a built-in battery.

When the battery voltage drops, the BATT LED lights, and the special auxiliary relay (M8005 or M8006) turns
on. In this case, replace the battery FX3U-32BL.
21.1 Battery Purpose

The battery is required to retain (backup) program memory and "keep device" data and maintain clock
operation in the event of a power outage.
Data Retained By Backup Battery
Program memory Internal RAM parameters, programs, device comments, file registers
• Auxiliary relay, state (for annunciator included), timer (cumulative type), counter, data
register keep device
Device memory
• Extended register
• Sampling trace result
Current time Current time clock
21.2 Specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Nominal voltage 3V Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005.
21.2.1 Differences between main unit’s internal battery and the optional battery
Although the optional battery (FX3U-32BL) serves as the same as the main unit’s internal battery, they differ in
the ways described below.
They may also have different external colors due to dates of manufacture.
Main Unit Internal Battery Optional Battery (Spare)
A nameplate label indicating the product model
and lot No. is affixed.
Connector Connector
External 410 0 1
FX3U-32BL
0
appearance
LOT.44
............
0
41 0 01
Nameplate
1 year from delivery or 18 months from date of

Warranty 1 year from delivery or 18 months from the date
manufacture, with reference to the main unit’s
period of manufacture, with reference to the lot No.
manufacture No.
390
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 21.3 Battery Handling
21
21.3 Battery Handling
Battery
When the battery voltage is low, a "BATT" LED lights (red) while the power is ON, and M8005 and M8006 are
switches ON.
Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the "BATT" LED switches ON, a
replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible. A
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
21.3.1 Battery life & replacement guidelines
FX3U-32BL battery life : Approx. 5 years (ambient temperature : 25°C(77°F))

[Guarantee period: 1 year after delivery or 18 months after production]
B
FX3U-32BL battery replacement period : Within 4 to 5 years
Instruction List
Although the battery has a 5-year life (approx.), this can vary according to ambient temperature conditions,
etc., and the battery should therefore be replaced after 4 to 5 years. Furthermore, because batteries are
subject to a natural discharge, a replacement battery should be ordered in advance, with reference to the
above replacement schedule.
C
21.3.2 Reading the date of manufacture
Character-code
1. Reading the optional battery’s lot No. (reference)
Batteries with affixed nameplate labels are optional batteries.
Nameplate
Model name Connector
L OT.4 4
FX3U-32BL
Year (Example: 2004) Month (Example: Apr) LOT.44
Last digit of calendar 1 to 9 : Jan to Sept. ............
year X : Oct, Y : Nov, Z : Dec
2. Reading the battery’s year/month of manufacture [main unit’s internal battery] (reference)
Batteries without affixed nameplate labels (refer to item 1. above) are main unit internal batteries.
001 Connector
41
0
0 4 1 0 0 1
0
41
001
Ref. No.
Month (Example: Apr)
1 to 9 : Jan to Sept.
X : Oct, Y : Nov, Z : Dec
Year (Example: 2004) Last 2 digits of Western-calendar year
21.3.3 Special "battery low-voltage" device & notification program example

Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status, using an indicator lamp,
etc.
• M8005
M8005
Y001 Y001 is output when a battery low-voltage condition occurs.
Battery low-voltage
• M8006
Battery low-voltage is latched.
• D8005
Battery voltage can be monitored.
391
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 21.4 Battery-Free Operation
21.4 Battery-Free Operation

FX3U series operation is possible without a battery (PLC’s internal battery removed) when the following
conditions are satisfied.
→ Refer to the FX3U / FX3UC Programming Manuals for details concerning battery-free operation.
1. A memory cassette must be installed.
2. The following devices must not be used as "keep" devices.

Auxiliary relay, state (for annunciator included), timer (cumulative type), counter, data register "keep" device,
extended register.
3. The sampling trace function must be disabled.
4. The clock function must be disabled.
392
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition 21.5 Battery Replacement
21
21.5 Battery Replacement
Battery
Before replacing the battery
Step 4 of the replacement procedure (below), must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3, or
the memory content could be lost.
A
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
1 Turn the power OFF.
A
2 Remove the battery cover.
B
Slightly lift the "B" side of the battery cover ("A").
Instruction List
Grasp the cover ("A") between your fingers and remove it.
B
C
Character-code
3 Remove the old battery.
Extract the old battery from the battery holder ("C"), and
disconnect the battery connector ("D"). Battery
4 Install the new battery.

Connect the battery connector ("D") to the new battery, and
insert the battery into the battery holder ("C").
5 Attach the battery cover ("A").
21.6 Battery Related Precautions
1. The FX3U series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2N (F2-40BL) and
FX2NC (FX2NC-32BL) series.
• Not for use with the FX3U series.
2. When performing battery-free operation, the clock stops when the main unit power is turned
OFF.
393
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers A Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -)
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)
Appendix A: Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -)

The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays (indicated as "special M" in tables) and
special data registers (indicated as "special D" in tables) are shown below.
Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC.
Do not use the undefined / blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program
since they are occupied by the CPU.
In addition, do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as [M]8000 or [D]8001
in the program.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Programming Manual.
Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)
Correspond- Correspond-
Number and Number and
Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special
name name
device device
PLC Status Clock
[M]8010 Not used –
[M]8000
RUN [M]8011 ON and OFF in 10 ms cycle
RUN monitor input – –
10 ms clock pulse (ON: 5 ms, OFF: 5 ms)
NO contact
M8061 [M]8012
Error occurrence ON and OFF in 100 ms cycle
[M]8001 100 ms clock –
(ON: 50 ms, OFF: 50 ms)
RUN monitor – pulse
NC contact M8000 [M]8013 ON and OFF in 1 sec cycle
–
1 sec clock pulse (ON: 500 ms, OFF: 500 ms)
[M]8002 M8001 [M]8014 ON and OFF in 1 min cycle
Initial pulse – –
1 min clock pulse (ON: 30 sec, OFF: 30 sec)
NO contact M8002 Clock stop and preset
M 8015 –
[M]8003 For real time clock
M8003
Initial pulse – Time read display is stopped
1 scan time M 8016 –
NC contact For real time clock
±30 seconds correction
ON when either M8060, M8061, M 8017 –
[M]8004 For real time clock
M8064, M8065, M8066, or M8067 D8004
Error occurrence Installation detection (Always ON)
is ON. [M]8018 –
For real time clock
[M]8005 Real time clock (RTC) error
ON when battery voltage is below M 8019 –
Battery voltage D8005 For real time clock
the value set in D8006.
low
Flag
[M]8006 It is set when battery voltage low is
D8006 [M]8020 ON when the result of addition/
detected.
Battery error latch –
Zero subtraction is 0.
ON for 1 scan, when detecting [M]8021 ON when the result of subtraction is
momentary power failure –
[M]8007 Borrow less than the min. negative number.
Even if M8007 turns ON, PLC D8007
Momentary power ON when 'carry' occurs as a result
continues to RUN mode in case D8008 M 8022
failure of addition or when an overflow –
duration of power loss is within Carry
occurs as a result of shift operation.
period of time specified in D8008.
It is set when momentary power
BMOV direction specification
failure is detected. M 8024*1 (FNC 15)
–
[M]8008
If power loss time is longer than
Power failure D8008 HSC mode
period of time specified in D8008, M 8025*1 (FNC 53 to 55)
–
detected
M8008 is reset and PLC is turned
RAMP mode
in STOP mode.(M8000=OFF). M 8026*1 (FNC 67)
–
[M]8009 ON when 24V DC power fails in
D8009 PR mode
24V DC down either powered extension unit M 8027*1 (FNC 77)
–
Interrupt permission during FROM/

M 8028 TO (FNC 78 and 79) instruction –
execution
[M]8029
ON when operation such as DSW
Instruction –
(FNC 72) is completed.
execution complete
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
394
21
Battery
name name
device device
PLC Mode Interrupt Disable
*1 When M8030 set to ON, LED on M8050
M 8030 PLC is not lit even if low battery – (input interrupt) –
Battery LED OFF voltage is detected.
I00 disable*4 A
• If an input interrupt or timer
M 8031*1 If this special auxiliary relay is
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
M8051 interrupt occurs while a special
Non-latch activated, the ON/OFF image – (input interrupt) –
auxiliary relay for that interrupt
memory all clear memory of Y, M, S, T, and C, and I10 disable*4 (M8050 - M8058) is ON, the
present values of T, C, D, special
M8052 interrupt will not operate.
data registers and R are cleared to
(input interrupt) For example, turning M8050 ON –
M 8032*1 zero.
disables the I00 interrupt;
However, file registers (D) in I20 disable*4
Latch memory
all clear program memory, and extension
–
M8053
hence, the interrupt routine is not
processed even in an allowable
B
file registers (ER) in the memory
Instruction List
(input interrupt) program area. –
cassette are not cleared.
I30 disable*4
M 8033 When PLC is switched from RUN • If an input interrupt or timer
M8054
Memory hold to STOP, image memory and data – interrupt occurs while a special
(input interrupt) –
STOP memory are retained. auxiliary relay for that interrupt
I40 disable*4 (M8050 - M8058) is OFF,
M 8034*1 All external output contacts of PLC
All outputs disable are turned OFF.
– M8055
(input interrupt)
a) The interrupt will be
accepted. –
C
M 8035
Character-code
– I50 disable*4 b) The interrupt routine will be
Forced RUN mode processed promptly if it is
M8056
M 8036 →Refer to Programming Manual permitted by the EI (FNC
– (Timer interrupt) –
Forced RUN signal for details. 04) instruction. However, if
I6 disable*4 the DI (FNC 05) instruction
M 8037
– M8057 disables interrupts, the
Forced STOP signal
(Timer interrupt) interrupt program will not –
[M]8038 Communication parameter setting D8176 to be processed until EI (FNC
Parameter setting flag (for N:N network setting) D8180 I7 disable*4
04) permits the interrupts.
M 8039 When M8039 is ON, PLC waits until M8058
Constant scan scan time specified in D8039 and D8039 (Timer interrupt) –
mode then executes cyclic operation. I8 disable*4
M8059
*1. Executed at END instruction
Counter interrupt Interrupt of I010 to I060 disabled –
disable*4
Step Ladder and Annunciator
M 8040 While M8040 is turned ON, transfer *4. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
–
Transfer disable between states is disabled.
Error Detection
[M]8041*2 Transfer from initial state is enabled
–
Transfer start in automatic operation mode. [M]8060 I/O configuration error D8060
[M]8042 Pulse output is given in response [M]8061 PLC hardware error D8061
–
Start pulse to a start input. [M]8062 Not used –
M 8043*2 Set this in the last state of zero [M]8063*5*6 Serial communication error 1 [ch1] D8063
Zero return –
return mode. [M]8064 Parameter error D8064
complete
D8065
M 8044*2 Set this when machine zero return
– D8069
Zero point condition is detected. [M]8065 Syntax error
D8314
M 8045 Disables the ’all output reset’ D8315
All output reset function when the operation mode – D8066
disable is changed. D8069
[M]8066 Ladder error
ON when M8047 is ON and either D8314
[M]8046*3 of S0 to S899 or S1000 to S4095 is M8047 D8315
STL state ON active. D8067
M 8047*3 D8069
D8040 to D8047 are enabled when D8040 to [M]8067*7 Operation error
D8314
STL monitoring M8047 is ON. D8047
enable D8315
D8068
[M]8048*3 ON when M8049 is ON and either M 8068 Operation error latch D8312
Annunciator –
of S900 to S999 is ON. D8313
operate
M 8069*8 I/O bus check –
M 8049*2 D8049 is enabled when M8049 is D8049
Annunciator ON. M8048 *5. Not cleared PLC.
enable
*6. Serial communication error 2 [ch2] PLC is detected by
*2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. M8438.
*3. Executed at END instruction. *7. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
*8. When M8069 is ON, I/O bus check is executed.
395
name name
device device
Parallel Link Memory Information
*1 Parallel link Set M8070 when [M]8101 –
M 8070 –
using master station. [M]8102 –
Not used
Parallel link Set M8071 when [M]8103 –
M 8071*1 using slave station.
–
[M]8104 –
[M]8072 Parallel link ON when operating – [M]8105 ON when writing to flash memory –
Parallel link [M]8106 Not used –
[M]8073 ON when M8070 or M8071 setting –
[M]8107 Device comment registration check D8107
is incorrect
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. Output Refresh Error
Sampling Trace [M]8109 Output refresh error –
[M]8074 Not used – [M]8110 –
[M]8075 Ready request for sampling trace [M]8111 –
[M]8076 Start request for sampling trace M 8112 –
[M]8077 ON during sampling trace D8075 to M 8113 –
ON when sampling trace is D8098 M 8114 –
[M]8078 Not used
completed M 8115 –
[M]8079 Sampling trace system area M 8116 –
[M]8080 – M 8117 –
[M]8081 – [M]8118 –
[M]8082 – [M]8119 –
[M]8083 – RS (FNC 80) and Computer Link [ch1]
[M]8084 – [M]8120 Not used –
Not used
[M]8085 – RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[M]8121*3 Send wait flag
–
[M]8086 –
[M]8087 – *3 RS (FNC 80) instruction:
M 8122 D8122
[M]8088 – Send request
[M]8089 – RS (FNC 80) instruction:
M 8123*3 Receive complete flag
D8123
Flag
BKCMP (FNC194 to FNC199) RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[M]8124 –
[M]8090 instructions - Block comparison – Carrier detection flag
signal [M]8125 Not used –
COMRD (FNC182) and BINDA [M]8126 Computer link [ch1]: Global ON
M 8091 (FNC261) instructions - Output – Computer link [ch1]:
[M]8127
character quantity selector signal On-demand send processing
[M]8092 – Computer link [ch1]: D8127
M 8128
[M]8093 – On-demand error flag D8128
Computer link [ch1]: D8129
[M]8094 –
[M]8095 Not used – On-demand Word/Byte changeover
M 8129
RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[M]8096 –
Time-out check flag
[M]8097 –
[M]8098 – *3. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS
instruction is OFF.
High Speed Ring Counter
High speed ring counter operation
M 8099*2 (in units of 0.1ms, 16 bits)
D8099

*2. 0.1ms high speed ring counter D8099 will operate after
M8099 turns ON.
396
21
Battery
name name
device device
High Speed Counter Comparison, High Speed Table, and Positioning Advanced Function
HSZ (FNC 55) instruction: M 8160*2 SWAP function of XCH (FNC 17) –
M 8130
Table comparison mode
HSZ (FNC 55) instruction: D8130 M 8161 *2*3 8-bit process mode – A
[M]8131 Table comparison mode M 8162 High speed parallel link mode –
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
completion flag [M]8163 –
Not used
HSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY (FNC 57) M 8164 –
M 8132
instructions: Speed pattern mode SORT2 (FNC149) instruction:
HSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY (FNC 57) D8131 to M 8165*2 Sorting in descending order
–
instructions: D8134
[M]8133 [M]8166 Not used –
Speed pattern mode completion
HKY (FNC 71) instruction:
B
flag M 8167*2 –
Instruction List
[M]8134 – HEX data handling function
[M]8135 – SMOV (FNC 13) instruction:
Not used M 8168* HEX data handling function
–
[M]8136 –
[M]8137 –
HSCT (FNC280) instruction: *2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
[M]8138
Instruction execution complete flag
D8138
*3. Applicable to ASC (FNC 76), RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC
C
Character-code
HSCS(FNC 53), HSCR(FNC 54), 82), HEX (FNC 83), CCD (FNC 84), and CRC (FNC188)
HS2(FNC 55), HSCT(FNC280) instructions.
[M]8139 instructions: D8139
High speed counter comparison
instruction executing Pulse Catch
ZRN (FNC156) instruction: M 8170*4 Input X000 pulse catch –
M 8140 –
CLR signal output function enable M 8171 *4 Input X001 pulse catch –
[M]8141 –
M 8172*4 Input X002 pulse catch –
[M]8142 –
Not used *4 Input X003 pulse catch –
M 8173
[M]8143 –
*4 Input X004 pulse catch –
[M]8144 – M 8174
M 8145 [Y000] Pulse output stop command – M 8175*4 Input X005 pulse catch –
M 8146 [Y001] Pulse output stop command – M 8176*4 Input X006 pulse catch –
[Y000] Pulse output monitor
[M]8147 – M 8177*4 Input X007 pulse catch –
(BUSY/READY)
[Y001] Pulse output monitor *4. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
[M]8148 – EI (FNC 04) instruction is necessary.
(BUSY/READY)
Inverter Communication Function Communication Port Channel Setting
[M]8150 Not used – Parallel link channel switch (OFF:
M 8178 –
Inverter communication in ch1/ON: ch2)
[M]8151 *1 D8151
execution [ch1] M 8179 N:N network channel switch*5 –
*1 Inverter communication error [ch1] D8152
[M]8152 *5. The channel is specified by either creating or not creating
*1 Inverter communication error latch M8179 in setting program.
[M]8153 D8153
[ch1] •ch1: not creating M8179 in setting program
IVBWR (FNC274) instruction error •ch2: creating M8179 in setting program
[M]8154*1 [ch1]
D8154

Inverter communication in
[M]8156*1 execution [ch2]
D8156
[M]8157*1 Inverter communication error [ch2] D8157

Inverter communication error latch
[M]8158*1 [ch2]
D8158
IVBWR (FNC274) instruction error

[M]8159*1 [ch2]
D8159
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
397
name name
device device
N:N Network Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction
[M]8180 – M 8200 C200 –
[M]8181 Not used – M 8201 C201 –
[M]8182 – M 8202 C202 –
Data communication error M 8203 C203 –
[M]8183
(Master station) M 8204 C204 –
[M]8184
(Slave station No.1) M 8206 C206 –
[M]8185
(Slave station No.2)
M 8208 C208 –
Data communication error
[M]8186 M 8209 C209 –
D8201 to M 8210 C210 –
Data communication error
[M]8187 D8218 M 8211 C211 –
[M]8188 M 8213 C213 –
[M]8189 (Slave station No.6) M 8215 C215 When M8 is ON, the –
Data communication error M 8216 C216 corresponding C is –
[M]8190
(Slave station No.7) M 8217 C217 changed to down mode. –
[M]8191 Data communication in execution M 8218 C218 • ON: Down count operation –
[M]8192 – M 8219 C219 • OFF: Up count operation –
[M]8193 – M 8220 C220 –
[M]8194 – M 8221 C221 –
Not used
[M]8195 – M 8222 C222 –
[M]8196 – M 8223 C223 –
[M]8197 – M 8224 C224 –
High Speed Counter Edge Count Specification M 8225 C225 –
C251, C252, C254: 1/4 edge count M 8226 C226 –
M 8198*1*2 selector
–
M 8227 C227 –
C253, C255, or C253 (OP): 1/4 M 8228 C228 –
M 8199*1*2 edge count selector
–
M 8229 C229 –
*1. OFF: 1 edge count M 8230 C230 –
ON: 4 edge count M 8231 C231 –
*2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. M 8232 C232 –
M 8233 C233 –
M 8234 C234 –
High Speed Counter Up/down Counter Counting Direction
M 8235 C235 –
M 8236 C236 –
M 8237 C237 –
M 8238 C238 When M8 is ON, the –
M 8239 C239 corresponding C is –
M 8240 C240 changed to down mode. –
M 8241 C241 • ON: Down count operation –
M 8242 C242 • OFF: Up count operation –
M 8243 C243 –
M 8244 C244 –
M 8245 C245 –
398
21
Battery
name name
device device
High Speed Counter Up/down Counter Monitoring Timing Clock and Positioning
[M]8246 C246 – DUTY (FNC186) instruction:
[M]8330 D8330
[M]8247 C247 – Timing clock output 1
[M]8248 C248
When C of 1-phase
– DUTY (FNC186) instruction:
A
2-input or 2-phase [M]8331 D8331
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
[M]8249 C249 2-input counter is in down – Timing clock output 2
[M]8250 C250 mode, the – DUTY (FNC186) instruction:
[M]8332 D8332
Timing clock output 3
[M]8251 C251 corresponding M8 –
DUTY (FNC186) instruction:
[M]8252 C252 turns ON. – [M]8333 D8333
• ON: Down count operation Timing clock output 4
[M]8253 C253 –
[M]8254 C254
• OFF: Up count operation
– [M]8334
DUTY (FNC186)
Timing clock output 5
instruction:
D8334 B
Instruction List
[M]8255 C255 – [M]8335 Not used –
[M]8256 to [M]8259 Not used – DVIT (FNC151) instruction:
Analog Special Adapter M 8336*3 Interrupt input specification D8336
M 8260 to M 8269*1 1st special adapter – function enabled
M 8270 to M 8279*1 2nd special adapter –
PLSV (FNC157) instruction: C
M 8280 to M 8289*1 3rd special adapter –
M 8338 Acceleration/deceleration –
Character-code
M 8290 to M 8299*1 4th special adapter – operation
[M]8300 to [M]8315 Not used – [M]8339 Not used –
[Y000] Pulse output monitor (ON:
*1. The unit number of the analog special adapter is counted [M]8340 –
BUSY/ OFF: READY)
from the main units side.
*3 [Y000] Clear signal output function
M 8341 –
enable
Unconnected I/O Designation Error and flag
[Y000] Zero return direction
D8316 M 8342*3 specification
–
[M]8316*2 Unconnected I/O designation error
D8317
M 8343 [Y000] Forward limit –
M 8344 [Y000] Reverse limit –
BFM initialization failure
ON when a FROM/TO error has M 8345*3 [Y000] DOG signal logic reverse –
occurred in a special function [Y000] Zero point signal logic
M 8346*3 reverse
–
block/unit as specified in the BFM
initialization function at changing [Y000] Interrupt signal logic
D8318 M 8347*3 –
[M]8318 PLC from STOP to RUN. reverse
D8319
When M8318 turns ON, the unit [Y000] Positioning instruction
number in which the error has [M]8348 –
activation
occurred is stored in D8318, and
the BFM number is stored in M 8349*3 [Y000] Pulse output stop command –
D8319. *3. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
[M]8319 to [M]8327 Not used –
[M]8328 Instruction non-execution –
[M]8329 Instruction execution abnormal end –
*2. If the I/O device numbers are unavailable, M8316 turns
ON when its directly designated to device numbers
including LD, AND, OR, and OUT instructions or indirectly
designated by index.
399
name name
device device
Positioning High Speed Counter Function
[Y001] Pulse output monitor Operation status of C235, C241,
[M]8350 –
(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY) [M]8380*3 C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, –
[Y001] Clear signal output function C252, and C254
M 8351*1 enable
–
[M]8381*3 Operation status of C236 –
[Y001] Zero return direction Operation status of C237, C242,
M 8352*1 specification
– [M]8382*3 –
and C245
M 8353 [Y001] Forward limit – Operation status of C238, C248,
M 8354 [Y001] Reverse limit – [M]8383*3 C248 (OP), C250, C253, and C255
–
M 8355*1 [Y001] DOG signal logic reverse – [M]8384*3 Operation status of C239 and C243 –
[Y001] Zero point signal logic [M]8385*3 Operation status of C240 –
M 8356*1 reverse
–
[M]8386*3 Operation status of C244 (OP) –
[Y001] Interrupt signal logic
M 8357*1 reverse
– [M]8387 *3 Operation status of C245 (OP) –
[Y001] Positioning instruction Contact for high speed counter
[M]8358 – [M]8388 –
activation function change
M 8359*1 [Y001] Pulse output stop command – M 8389 External reset input logic reverse –
[Y002] Pulse output monitor Function changeover device for
[M]8360 – M 8390 –
(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY) C244
[Y002] Clear signal output function Function changeover device for
M 8391 –
M 8361*1 enable
– C245
[Y002] Zero return direction Function changeover device for
M 8392 –
M 8362*1 specification
– C248 and C253
M 8363 [Y002] Forward limit – *3. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
M 8364 [Y002] Reverse limit –
Interrupt Program
M 8365*1 [Y002] DOG signal logic reverse –
[M]8393 Contact for delay time setting D8393
[Y002] Zero point signal logic
M 8366*1 reverse
– HCMOV (FNC189):
[M]8394 –
Drive contact for interrupt program
[Y002] Interrupt signal logic
M 8367*1 – [M]8395 –
reverse
[Y002] Positioning instruction [M]8396 Not used –
[M]8368 –
activation [M]8397 –
M 8369*1 [Y002] Pulse output stop command – Ring Counter
[Y003] Pulse output monitor Ring counter operation D8398,
[M]8370*2 – M 8398
(ON: BUSY/ OFF: READY) (in units of 1ms, 32 bits)*4 D8399
[Y003] Clear signal output function [M]8399 Not used –
M 8371*1*2 –
enable
*4. 1ms ring counter (D8399, D8398) will operate after M8398
[Y003] Zero return direction turns ON.
M 8372*1*2 –
specification
M 8373*2 [Y003] Forward limit – RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
M 8374*2 [Y003] Reverse limit – [M]8400 Not used –
M 8375*1*2 [Y003] DOG signal logic reverse – [M]8401*5 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send wait flag –
[Y003] Zero point signal logic *5 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send request D8402
M 8376*1*2 – M 8402
reverse
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
[Y003] Interrupt signal logic M 8403*5 D8403
M 8377*1*2 – Receive complete flag
reverse
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
[Y003] Positioning instruction [M]8404 –
[M]8378*2 – Carrier detection flag
activation
[M]8405 –
M 8379*1*2 [Y003] Pulse output stop command –
[M]8406 –
Not used
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. [M]8407 –
*2. Available only when two FX3U-2HSY-ADP units are [M]8408 –
connected to an FX3U PLC. RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
M 8409 –
Time-out check flag
*5. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when
RS2 instruction [ch1] is OFF.
400
21
Correspond-
Battery
Number and
Operation and function ing special
name
device
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2]
[M]8410 to [M]8420 Not used –
[M]8421*1 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send wait flag – A
M 8422*1 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send request D8422
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
M 8423*1 Receive complete flag
D8423
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]

[M]8424 –
Carrier detection flag
[M]8426 Computer link [ch2] Global ON
B
Instruction List
Computer link [ch2]
[M]8427
On-demand send processing
Computer link [ch2] D8427
M 8428
On-demand error flag D8428
Computer link [ch2] D8429
M 8429
On-demand Word/Byte changeover
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
C
Character-code
Time-out check flag
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when
RS2 instruction [ch2] is OFF.
Error Detection
[M]8430 to [M]8437 Not used –
M 8438 Serial communication error 2 [ch2] D8438
[M]8439 to [M]8448 Not used –
[M]8449 Special block error flag D8449
[M]8450 to [M]8459 Not used –
Positioning
DVIT (FNC151) instruction [Y000]
M 8460 D8336
User interrupt input command
M 8461 D8336
M 8462 D8336
M 8463*2 User interrupt input command
D8336
DSZR (FNC150), ZRN (FNC156)

instructions [Y000]
M 8464 D8464
Clear signal device specification
function enabled
instructions [Y001]
M 8465 D8465
function enabled
instructions [Y002]
M 8466 D8466
function enabled
*2 instructions [Y003]
M 8467 D8467
function enabled
[M]8468 to [M]8511 Not used –
*2. Available only when two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
connected to a PLC.
401
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)
Appendix A-2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511)
Content of register ing special Content of register ing special
name name
device device
PLC Status Clock
Default value is shown on the right [D]8010 Accumulated instruction-execution
(in 1ms steps) Present scan time time from 0 step –
(Writes from system ROM at power *2 (in units of 0.1 ms)
D 8000
ON) – [D]8011
Watchdog timer Minimum value of scan time
Value overwritten by program is Minimum scan –
valid after END or WDT instruction (in units of 0.1 ms)
time*2
execution.
[D]8012
Maximum value of scan time
BCD converted Maximum scan –
2 4 2 2 0 value (in units of 0.1 ms)
[D]8001 time*2
PLC type and Version 2.20 D8101 D 8013 0 to 59 seconds
system version –
FX3U, FX3UC, FX2N, FX2NC Second data (for real time clock)
Series
D 8014 0 to 59 minutes
–
• 2...2K steps Minute data (for real time clock)
• 4...4K steps D 8015 0 to 23 hours
[D]8002 • 8...8K steps –
D8102 Hour data (for real time clock)
Memory capacity • If 16K steps or more
"K8" is written to D8002 and "16" D 8016 1 to 31 days
–
or "64" is written to D8102. Day data (for real time clock)
Type of cassette or ON/OFF status D 8017 1 to 12 months

–
[D]8003 Month data (for real time clock)
of memory protect switch is –
Memory type D 8018 2 digits of year data (0 to 99)
stored.*1 –
Year data (for real time clock)
BCD converted D 8019
8 0 6 0 value 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday)
[D]8004 Day-of-the-week –
M8004 (for real time clock)
Error number M data
8060 to 8068
(when M8004 is ON) *2. Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan
operation (when M8039 is activated).
BCD converted
[D]8005 3 0 value
(in units of 0.1V) M8005 Input Filter
Battery voltage
Battery voltage present value
(Example: 3.0V) D 8020
Input filter value of X000 to X017*3
Input filter –
[D]8006 (Default: 10 ms)
Default: adjustment
Low battery
(Writes from system ROM at power M8006 [D]8021 –
voltage detection
ON) [D]8022 –
level
[D]8007 Operation frequency of M8007 is [D]8023 –
Momentary power stored. M8007 [D]8024 Not used –
failure count Cleared at power-off.
[D]8025 –
D 8008
Default: [D]8026 –
Power failure M8008
10 ms (AC power supply type) [D]8027 –
detection
Minimum input device number of Index Register Z0 and V0
[D]8009
extension units and extension [D]8028 Value of Z0 (Z) register*4 –
24V DC failed M8009
power units in which 24V DC has
device [D]8029 Value of V0 (V) register*4 –
failed.
*1. D8003 becomes the undermentioned content. *3. X000 to X007 in FX3U-16M .
Present value Type of memory Protect switch *4. The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182
to D8195.
02H Flash memory cassette OFF
0AH Flash memory cassette ON
10H Built-in memory in PLC –
402
21
Battery
name name
device device
Constant Scan Error Detection
[D]8030 – If the unit or block corresponding to
[D]8031 – a programmed
I/O number is not actually loaded,
A
[D]8032 –
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
M8060 is set to ON and the first
[D]8033 – device number of the erroneous
[D]8034 Not used – block is written to D8060.
[D]8035 – [D]8060 Example:If X020 is unconnected. M8060
[D]8036 – BCD converted
1 0 2 0 value
[D]8037 –
B
Device number
Instruction List
[D]8038 – 10 to 337
Default: 0 ms (in 1 ms steps) 1: Input X
D 8039 0: Output Y
(Writes from system ROM at power
Constant scan M8039
ON) [D]8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061
duration
Can be overwritten by program
Error code for PLC/PP
Stepladder and Annunciator [D]8062
communication error
M8062 C
Character-code
[D]8040*1 Error code for serial
[D]8063 M8063
ON state number communication error 1 [ch1]
1 [D]8064 Error code for parameter error M8064
[D]8041*1 [D]8065 Error code for syntax error M8065
ON state number
[D]8066 Error code for ladder error M8066
2
[D]8067*2 Error code for operation error M8067
[D]8042*1
ON state number Operation error step number
D 8068*2 M8068
3 latched*3
The smallest number out of active
[D]8043*1 Error step number of M8065 to M8065 to
state ranging from S0 to S899 and [D]8069*2
ON state number S1000 to S4095 is stored in D8040 M8067*4 M8067
4 and the second-smallest state
M8047 *2. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
[D]8044 *1 number is stored in D8041.
*3. In case of 32K steps or more, step number is stored in
ON state number Active state numbers are then [D8313, D8312].
5 sequentially stored in registers up
to D8047 (Max. 8 points). *4. In case of 32K steps or more, step number is stored in
[D]8045*1 [D8315, D8314].
ON state number
6
Parallel Link (Refer to Data Communication Edition for details.)
[D]8046*1 Parallel link error time-out check
ON state number [D]8070 –
time: 500 ms
7
[D]8071 –
[D]8047*1 [D]8072 Not used –
ON state number
8 [D]8073 –
[D]8048 Not used –

When M8049 is ON, the smallest
[D]8049*1 number out of active annunciator
On state minimum relay ranging from S900 to S999 is M8049
number stored in D8049.
[D]8050 to [D]8059 Not used –
*1. Executed at END instruction.
403
name name
device device
Sampling Trace*1 Output Refresh Error
[D]8074 Y number where output refresh
[D]8109 M8109
error occurs
[D]8075
[D]8110 to [D]8119 Not used –
[D]8076
RS (FNC 80) and Computer Link [ch1]
[D]8077
RS (FNC 80) instruction and
[D]8078
D 8120*3 computer link [ch1] –
[D]8079 Communication format setting
[D]8080 Computer link [ch1]
D 8121*3 Station number setting
–
[D]8081
[D]8082 RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[D]8122*4 Remaining points of transmit data
M8122
[D]8083
RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[D]8084 [D]8123*4 Monitoring receive data points
M8123
These devices are occupied by the
[D]8085 PLC system when the sampling
M8075 to RS (FNC 80) instruction:
[D]8086 trace function is used in the D 8124 –
M8079 Header <Default: STX>
A6GPP, A6PHP, A7PHP, or
[D]8087 *1 RS (FNC 80) instruction:
personal computer . D 8125 –
[D]8088 Terminator <Default: ETX>
[D]8089 [D]8126 Not used –
[D]8090 Computer link [ch1]
D 8127 Specification of on-demand head
[D]8091
device register
[D]8092
Computer link [ch1]
[D]8093 M8126 to
D 8128 Specification of on-demand data
M8129
[D]8094 length register
[D]8095 RS (FNC 80) instruction, computer
[D]8096 D 8129*3 link [ch1]
Time-out time setting
[D]8097
[D]8098 *3. Latch (battery backed) device
*1. The sampling trace devices are used by peripheral
equipment.
High Speed Ring Counter

Up-operation high speed ring
D 8099 counter of 0 to 32,767 (in units of M8099
0.1ms, 16-bit)*2
*2. 0.1ms high speed ring counter D8099 will operate after
M8099 turns ON.
Memory Information
[D]8101 BCD converted

1 6 2 2 0 value
PLC type and –
system version FX3U/ Version 2.20
FX3UC
2 ...... 2K steps
4 ...... 4K steps
[D]8102 8 ...... 8K steps –
16 .... 16K steps
64 .... 64K steps
[D]8103 –
[D]8104 –
Not used
[D]8105 –
[D]8106 –
[D]8107 Number of registered device comments M8107
Number of special function units/
[D]8108 –
blocks connected
404
21
Battery
name name
device device
High Speed Counter Comparison, High Speed Table, and Positioning Error code for inverter
[D]8157*1 communication [ch2]
M8157
HSZ (FNC 55) instruction:
[D]8130 High speed comparison
counter
table M8130
[D]8158
Inverter communication error step
number latched [ch2] M8158
A
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
HSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY (FNC 57) Default: -1
[D]8131 instructions: M8132 Parameter number when error
Speed pattern table counter occurs during IVBWR (FNC274)
[D]8159 M8159
[D]8132 Lower HSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY instruction [ch2]
(FNC 57) instructions: M8132 Default: -1
[D]8133 Upper Speed pattern frequency
*1. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. B
[D]8134 Lower HSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY
Instruction List
(FNC 57) instructions: Advanced Function
M8132
[D]8135 Upper Number of target pulses for
speed pattern [D]8160 –
D 8136 Lower PLSY (FNC 57), PLSR [D]8161 –

(FNC 59) instructions: [D]8162 –
Accumulated total number – [D]8163 –
C
D 8137 Upper of pulses output to Y000
Character-code
D 8164 Not used –
and Y001
[D]8165 –
HSCT (FNC280) instruction:
[D]8138 D8138
Table count [D]8166 –
HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), [D]8167 –
HSZ (FNC 55), and HSCT [D]8168 –
[D]8139 (FNC280) instructions: D8139
Access restriction status by 2nd
Number of instructions being [D]8169 –
executed keyword*2
D 8140 Lower Accumulated number of *2. Access restriction status by 2nd keyword
pulses output to Y000 for Program Present
PLSY (FNC 57) and PLSR Present Access restriction Monitor-
– value
value status Read Write ing
D 8141 Upper (FNC 59) instructions, or change
current address of Y000 for H0000 2nd keyword is not set. *3 *3 *3 *3
positioning instruction
H0010 Write protection –
D 8142 Lower Accumulated number of
H0011 Read / write protection – –
pulses output to Y001 for
PLSY (FNC 57) and PLSR All online operation
– H0012 – – – –
protection
D 8143 Upper (FNC 59) instructions, or
current address of Y001 for H0020 Keyword cancel
positioning instruction
*3. The accessibility is restricted depending on the keyword
[D]8144 to [D]8149 Not used –
setting status.
Inverter Communication Function
Response wait time of inverter
D 8150 –
communication [ch1]
Step number of instruction during
[D]8151 inverter communication [ch1] M8151
Default: -1
Error code for inverter
[D]8152*1 communication [ch1]
M8152
Inverter communication error step

[D]8153 number latched [ch1] M8153
Default: -1
Parameter number when error
occurs during IVBWR (FNC274)
[D]8154 M8154
instruction [ch1]
Default: -1
Response wait time of inverter
D 8155 –
communication [ch2]
Step number of instruction during
[D]8156 inverter communication [ch2] M8156
Default: -1
405
name name
device device
N:N Network (setting) N:N Network (monitoring)
[D]8170 – [D]8200 Not used –
[D]8171 Not used – [D]8201 Current link scan time –
[D]8172 – [D]8202 Maximum link scan time –
[D]8173 Station number – Number of communication error at
[D]8203
[D]8174 Total number of slave stations – master station
[D]8175 Refresh range – Number of communication error at

[D]8204
slave station No.1
D 8176 Station number setting
Number of communication error at
D 8177 Total slave station number setting [D]8205
slave station No.2
D 8178 Refresh range setting M8038 Number of communication error at
[D]8206
D 8179 Retry count setting slave station No.3
D 8180 Comms time-out setting Number of communication error at
[D]8207
[D]8181 Not used – slave station No.4
Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 Number of communication error at
[D]8208
slave station No.5
[D]8182 Value of Z1 register –
[D]8183 Value of V1 register – [D]8209
slave station No.6
[D]8184 Value of Z2 register –
[D]8185 Value of V2 register – [D]8210
slave station No.7 M8183 to
[D]8186 Value of Z3 register – Code of communication error at M8191
[D]8211
[D]8187 Value of V3 register – master station
[D]8188 Value of Z4 register – Code of communication error at
[D]8212
slave station No.1
[D]8189 Value of V4 register –
Code of communication error at
[D]8190 Value of Z5 register – [D]8213
slave station No.2
[D]8191 Value of V5 register –
[D]8192 Value of Z6 register – [D]8214
slave station No.3
[D]8193 Value of V6 register – Code of communication error at
[D]8215
[D]8194 Value of Z7 register – slave station No.4
[D]8195 Value of V7 register – Code of communication error at
[D]8216
slave station No.5
[D]8196 –
[D]8197 – [D]8217
Not used slave station No.6
[D]8198 –
[D]8199 – [D]8218
slave station No.7
[D]8219 to [D]8259 Not used –
Analog Special Adapter
D 8260 to D 8269 1st special adapter*1
D 8270 to D 8279 2nd special adapter*1
D 8280 to D 8289 3rd special adapter*1
D 8290 to D 8299 4th special adapter*1
*1. The unit number of the analog special adapter is counted

from the main units side.
406
21
Battery
name name
device device
Display Module Function FX3U-7DM D 8342 [Y000] Bias speed Default: 0 –
Control device (D) for display module D 8343 Lower [Y000] Maximum speed
D 8300 – –
• Default: K-1
D 8344 Upper • Default: 100000 A
Control device (M) for display module
D 8301 – [Y000] Creep speed
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
• Default: K-1 D 8345 –
• Default: 1000
Language display setting
D 8346 Lower [Y000] Zero return speed
[D]8302*1 • Japanese: K0 – –
• English: Other than K0 D 8347 Upper Default: 50000
LCD contrast setting value [Y000] Acceleration time
[D]8303 – D 8348 –
• Default: K0 • Default: 100 B
[D]8304 to [D]8309 – [Y000] Deceleration time
Instruction List
D 8349 –
• Default: 100
[D]8305 –
D 8350 Lower [Y001] Current value register
[D]8306 – –
Not used D 8351 Upper • Default: 0
[D]8307 –
D 8352 [Y001] Bias speed Default: 0 –
[D]8308 –
[D]8309 –
D 8353 Lower [Y001] Maximum speed
–
C
D 8354 Upper • Default: 100000
Character-code
*1. Latch (battery backed) device
[Y001] Creep speed
D 8355 –
RND (FNC184) • Default: 1000
[D]8310 Lower RND (FNC184) instruction: D 8356 Lower [Y001] Zero return speed
–
Data for generating random D 8357 Upper • Default: 50000
–
[D]8311 Upper number
• Default: K1 [Y001] Acceleration time
D 8358 –
• Default: 100
Syntax, Circuit, Operation, or Unconnected I/O Designation Error
Step Number [Y001] Deceleration time
D 8359 –
• Default: 100
D 8312 Lower Operation error step
M8068 D 8360 Lower [Y002] Current value register
D 8313 Upper number latched (32-bit) –
*2 Lower Error step number of
[D]8314 M8065 to D 8362 [Y002] Bias speed Default: 0 –
[D]8315 *2 Upper M8065 to M8067 (32-bit) M8067
D 8363 Lower [Y002] Maximum speed
–
[D]8316 Lower Step number of instruction D 8364 Upper • Default: 100000
specifying an unconnected
M8316 [Y002] Creep speed
[D]8317 Upper I/O number (directly or D 8365 –
indirectly using index register) • Default: 1000
BFM initialization function: D 8366 Lower [Y002] Zero return speed
[D]8318 M8318 –
Error unit number D 8367 Upper • Default: 50000
BFM initialization function: [Y002] Acceleration time
[D]8319 M8318 D 8368 –
Error BFM number • Default: 100
[D]8320 to [D]8328 Not used – [Y002] Deceleration time
D 8369 –
• Default: 100
*2. Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN.
D 8370*3 Lower [Y003] Current value register –
Timing Clock and Positioning
D 8371*3 Upper • Default: 0 –
D 8372*3 [Y003] Bias speed Default: 0 –
[D]8330 M8330
Scan counting for timing clock output 1 D 8373*3 Lower [Y003] Maximum speed –
[D]8331
M8331 D 8374*3 Upper • Default: 100000 –
Scan counting for timing clock output 2
D 8375*3 [Y003] Creep speed Default: 1000 –
[D]8332 M8332 D 8376*3 Lower [Y003] Zero return speed –
DUTY (FNC186) instruction: D 8377*3 Upper • Default: 50000 –
[D]8333 M8333
[Y003] Acceleration time
DUTY (FNC186) instruction: D 8378*3 • Default: 100
–
[D]8334 M8334
[Y003] Deceleration time
DVIT (FNC151) instruction: D 8379*3 • Default: 100
–
D 8336 M8336
Specification of interrupt input
[D]8380 to [D]8392 Not used –
[D]8337 to [D]8339 Not used –
*3. Available only when two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
D 8340 Lower [Y000] Current value register connected to an PLC.
–
407
name name
device device
Interrupt Program [D]8424 Not used –
D 8393 Delay time M8393 Communication parameter display
[D]8425 –
[ch2]
[D]8394 –
[D]8395 –
Not used Computer link [ch2]
[D]8396 –
D 8427 Specification of on-demand head
[D]8397 – device register
Ring Counter Computer link [ch2]
M8426 to
D 8428 Specification of on-demand data
D 8398 Lower Up-operation ring counter M8429
length register
of 0 to 2,147,483,647 M8398
D 8399 Upper (in units of 1ms, 32-bit)*1 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2], computer link
D 8429 [ch2]
*1. 1ms ring counter (D8399, D8398) will operate after M8398 Time-out time setting
turns ON. RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
D 8430 –
Header 1 and 2 <Default: STX>
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] D 8431 –
D 8400 – Header 3 and 4
Communication format setting
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
[D]8401 Not used – D 8432 –
Terminator 1 and 2 <Default: ETX>
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
[D]8402*2 Remaining points of transmit data
M8402 D 8433 –
Terminator 3 and 4
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
[D]8403*2 Monitoring receive data points
M8403 [D]8434 –
Receive sum (received data)
[D]8404 Not used – RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2]
[D]8435 –
Communication parameter display Receive sum (calculated result)
[D]8405 –
[ch1] [D]8436 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Send sum –
[D]8406 – [D]8437 Not used –
[D]8408 –
Error Detection
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
D 8409 –
Time-out time setting Error code for serial
[D]8438 M8438
communication error 2 [ch2]
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
D 8410 – RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2]
Header 1 and 2 <Default: STX>
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] [D]8439 Operation mode display [ch2] –
D 8411 –
Header 3 and 4 Error Detection
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] [D]8440 to [D]8448 Not used –
D 8412 –
Terminator 1 and 2 <Default: ETX>
[D]8449 Special block error code M8449
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1]
D 8413 – [D]8450 to [D]8459 Not used –
Terminator 3 and 4
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Positioning [FX3U and FX3UC PLCs]
[D]8414 –
Receive sum (received data) [D]8460 to [D]8463 Not used –
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN
[D]8415 –
Receive sum (calculated result) (FNC156) instructions:
D 8464 M8464
[D]8416 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch1] Send sum – [Y000] Clear signal device
specification
[D]8417 –
Not used DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN
[D]8418 – (FNC156) instructions:
D 8465 M8465
[D]8419 Operation mode display [ch1] – [Y001] Clear signal device
specification
*2. Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP. DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] and Computer Link [ch2] (FNC156) instructions:
D 8466 M8466
[Y002] Clear signal device
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] specification
D 8420 –
Communication format setting
DSZR (FNC150) and ZRN
Computer link [ch2] Station *4 (FNC156) instructions:
D 8421 – D 8467 M8467
number setting [Y003] Clear signal device
specification
RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Remaining
[D]8422*3 points of transmit data
M8422
[D]8468 to [D]8511 Not used –
*3 RS2 (FNC 87) [ch2] Monitoring *4. Available only when two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are
[D]8423 M8423
receive data points connected to an PLC.
408
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition A-3 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299]
21
Appendix A-3 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299]
Battery
When analog special adapters are connected, operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in
the tables below in accordance with the number of connected analog special adapters.
Devices which cannot be written are shaded in "Operation and function" column.
→ For the details, refer to the manual of each product. A
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
Appendix A-3-1 Special auxiliary relays (M8260 to M8299)
Operation and function

Number
1st analog special adapter B
M 8260 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching Ch1 Temperature unit selection Temperature unit selection
Instruction List
M 8261 Input mode switching Ch2 Output mode switching Ch2 Not used Type-K/-J switching
M 8262 Input mode switching Ch3 Output mode switching Ch3 Not used Not used
M 8264 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch1 Not used Not used
M 8265 Not used Output hold mode cancel Ch2 Not used Not used C
Character-code
M 8268 Not used Not used Not used Not used
2nd analog special adapter
3rd analog special adapter
4th analog special adapter
409
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition A-3 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299]
Appendix A-3-2 Special data registers (D8260 to D8299)
Operation and function

Number
1st analog special adapter
D 8260 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1 Measured temperature Ch1
Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for Number of averaging times for
D 8264 Ch1 (1 to 4095)
Not used Ch1 (1 to 4095) Ch1 (1 to 4095)
D 8265 Ch2 (1 to 4095)
D 8266 Ch3 (1 to 4095)
D 8267 Ch4 (1 to 4095)
D 8268 Error status Error status Error status Error status
D 8269 Model code: K1 Model code: K2 Model code: K20 Model code: K10
2nd analog special adapter
D 8274 Ch1 (1 to 4095)
D 8275 Ch2 (1 to 4095)
D 8276 Ch3 (1 to 4095)
D 8277 Ch4 (1 to 4095)
3rd analog special adapter
D 8284 Ch1 (1 to 4095)
D 8285 Ch2 (1 to 4095)
D 8286 Ch3 (1 to 4095)
D 8287 Ch4 (1 to 4095)
4th analog special adapter
D 8294 Ch1 (1 to 4095)
D 8295 Ch2 (1 to 4095)
D 8296 Ch3 (1 to 4095)
D 8297 Ch4 (1 to 4095)
410
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers B-1 Basic Instructions
21
Battery
Appendix B: Instruction List
A
Appendix B-1 Basic Instructions
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
Mnemonic Function Mnemonic Function
Contact Instruction Out Instruction
LD
Initial logical operation contact type NO (normally OUT Final logical operation type coil drive B
open) SET SET Bit device latch ON
Instruction List
Initial logical operation contact type NC (normally RST RESET Bit device OFF
LDI
closed)
PLS Rising edge pulse
LDP Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse
PLF Falling/trailing edge pulse
LDF Initial logical operation of Falling/trailing edge pulse
Master Control Instruction
AND Serial connection of NO (normally open) contacts
MC Denotes the start of a master control block C
ANI Serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts
Character-code
MCR Denotes the end of a master control block
ANDP Serial connection of Rising edge pulse
Other Instruction
ANDF Serial connection of Falling/trailing edge pulse
NOP No operation or null step
OR Parallel connection of NO (normally open) contacts
End Instruction
ORI Parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts
END Program END, I/O refresh and Return to Step 0
ORP Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse
ORF Parallel connection of Falling/trailing edge pulse
Connection Instruction
ANB Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits
ORB Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits
Stores the current result of the internal PLC
MPS
operations
Reads the current result of the internal PLC
MRD
operations
Pops (recalls and removes) the currently stored
MPP
result
Invert the current result of the internal PLC
INV
operations
Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instructions
Mnemonic Function
STL Starts step ladder

RET Completes step ladder
411
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number
Appendix B-3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number
FNC No. Mnemonic Function FNC No. Mnemonic Function

Program Flow Data Operation
00 CJ Conditional Jump 40 ZRST Zone Reset
01 CALL Call Subroutine 41 DECO Decode
02 SRET Subroutine Return 42 ENCO Encode
03 IRET Interrupt Return 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits
04 EI Enable Interrupt 44 BON Check Specified Bit Status
05 DI Disable Interrupt 45 MEAN Mean
06 FEND Main Routine Program End 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set
07 WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 47 ANR Annunciator Reset
08 FOR Start a FOR/NEXT Loop 48 SQR Square Root
09 NEXT End a FOR/NEXT Loop 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point
Move and Compare High Speed Processing
10 CMP Compare 50 REF Refresh
11 ZCP Zone Compare 51 REFF Refresh and Filter Adjust
12 MOV Move 52 MTR Input Matrix
13 SMOV Shift Move 53 HSCS High Speed Counter Set
14 CML Complement 54 HSCR High Speed Counter Reset
15 BMOV Block Move 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare
Move and Compare 56 SPD Speed Detection
16 FMOV Fill Move 57 PLSY Pulse Y Output
17 XCH Exchange 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation
18 BCD Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 59 PLSR Acceleration/Deceleration Setup
19 BIN Conversion to Binary Handy Instruction
Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, –, ×, ÷) 60 IST Initial State
20 ADD Addition 61 SER Search a Data Stack
21 SUB Subtraction 62 ABSD Absolute Drum Sequencer
22 MUL Multiplication 63 INCD Incremental Drum Sequencer
23 DIV Division 64 TTMR Teaching Timer
24 INC Increment 65 STMR Special Timer
25 DEC Decrement 66 ALT Alternate State
26 WAND Logical Word AND 67 RAMP Ramp Variable Value
27 WOR Logical Word OR 68 ROTC Rotary Table Control
28 WXOR Logical Exclusive OR 69 SORT SORT Tabulated Data
29 NEG Negation External FX I/O Device
Rotation and Shift Operation 70 TKY Ten Key Input
30 ROR Rotation Right 71 HKY Hexadecimal Input
31 ROL Rotation Left 72 DSW Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)
32 RCR Rotation Right with Carry External FX I/O Device
33 RCL Rotation Left with Carry 73 SEGD Seven Segment Decoder
34 SFTR Bit Shift Right 74 SEGL Seven Segment With Latch
Rotation and Shift Operation 75 ARWS Arrow Switch
35 SFTL Bit Shift Left 76 ASC ASCII Code Data Input
36 WSFR Word Shift Right 77 PR Print (ASCII Code)
37 WSFL Word Shift Left 78 FROM Read From A Special Function Block
38 SFWR Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control] 79 TO Write To A Special Function Block
39 SFRD Shift Read [FIFO Control]
412
21
Battery
External FX Device Floating Point Degree to Radian
136 RAD
80 RS Serial Communication Conversion
81 PRUN Parallel Run (Octal Mode) Floating Point Radian to Degree

137 DEG
Conversion
82 ASCI Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion
138, 139 – A
83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
Data Operation 2
84 CCD Check Code
140 WSUM Sum of Word Data
85 VRRD Volume Read
141 WTOB WORD to BYTE
86 VRSC Volume Scale
142 BTOW BYTE to WORD
87 RS2 Serial Communication 2
88 PID PID Control Loop
143 UNI 4-bit Linking of Word Data B
144 DIS 4-bit Grouping of Word Data
Instruction List
89 to 99 –
145, 146 –
Data Transfer 2
147 SWAP Byte Swap
100, 101 –
148 –
102 ZPUSH Batch Store of Index Register
Data Transfer 2
149 SORT2 Sort Tabulated Data 2 C
Positioning Control
Character-code
103 ZPOP Batch POP of Index Register
150 DSZR DOG Search Zero Return
104 to
– 151 DVIT Interrupt Positioning
109
Floating Point 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode
110 ECMP Floating Point Compare 153,

–
154
111 EZCP Floating Point Zone Compare
155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read
112 EMOV Floating Point Move
156 ZRN Zero Return
113 to
– 157 PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output
115
Floating Point to Character String 158 DRVI Drive to Increment
116 ESTR
Conversion 159 DRVA Drive to Absolute
Character String to Floating Point Real Time Clock Control
117 EVAL
Conversion 160 TCMP RTC Data Compare
Floating Point to Scientific Notation 161 TZCP RTC Data Zone Compare
118 EBCD
Conversion
162 TADD RTC Data Addition
Scientific Notation to Floating Point
119 EBIN 163 TSUB RTC Data Subtraction
Conversion
120 EADD Floating Point Addition 164 HTOS Hour to Second Conversion
121 ESUB Floating Point Subtraction 165 STOH Second to Hour Conversion
122 EMUL Floating Point Multiplication 166 TRD Read RTC data
123 EDIV Floating Point Division 167 TWR Set RTC data
124 EXP Floating Point Exponent 168 –

125 LOGE Floating Point Natural Logarithm 169 HOUR Hour Meter
126 LOG10 Floating Point Common Logarithm External Device
127 ESQR Floating Point Square Root 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion
128 ENEG Floating Point Negation 171 GBIN Gray Code to Decimal Conversion
129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion 172 to

–
175
Floating Point
176 RD3A Read form Dedicated Analog Block
130 SIN Floating Point Sine
177 WR3A Write to Dedicated Analog Block
131 COS Floating Point Cosine
178, 179 –
132 TAN Floating Point Tangent
Extension Function
133 ASIN Floating Point Arc Sine
180 EXTR External ROM Function (FX2N/FX2NC)
134 ACOS Floating Point Arc Cosine
135 ATAN Floating Point Arc Tangent
413

Others Data Comparison
181 – 220 to
–
182 COMRD Read Device Comment Data 223
183 – 224 LD= Load Compare S1 = S2
184 RND Random Number Generation 225 LD> Load Compare S1 > S2
185 – 226 LD< Load Compare S1 < S2
186 DUTY Timing Pulse Generation
227 –
187 –
228 LD<> Load Compare S1 ≠ S2
188 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
229 LD<= Load Compare S1 ≤ S2
189 HCMOV High Speed Counter Move
Block Data Operation 230 LD>= Load Compare S1 ≥ S2
190, 191 – 231 –

192 BK+ Block Data Addition 232 AND= AND Compare S1 = S2
193 BK- Block Data Subtraction 233 AND> AND Compare S1 > S2
Block Data Subtraction
234 AND< AND Compare S1 < S2
194 BKCMP= Block Data Compare S1 = S2
235 –
195 BKCMP> Block Data Compare S1 > S2 236 AND<> AND Compare S1 ≠ S2
196 BKCMP< Block Data Compare S1 < S2 237 AND<= AND Compare S1 ≤ S2
197 BKCMP<> Block Data Compare S1 ≠ S2 238 AND>= AND Compare S1 ≥ S2
198 BKCMP<= Block Data Compare S1 ≤ S2 239 –
199 BKCMP>= Block Data Compare S1 ≥ S2 Data Comparison
Character String Control 240 OR= OR Compare S1 = S2
200 STR BIN to Character String Conversion 241 OR> OR Compare S1 > S2
201 VAL Character String to BIN Conversion
242 OR< OR Compare S1 < S2
202 $+ Link Character Strings
243 –
203 LEN Character String Length Detection
244 OR<> OR Compare S1 ≠ S2
Extracting Character String Data from the
204 RIGHT
Right 245 OR<= OR Compare S1 ≤ S2
Extracting Character String Data from the
205 LEFT 246 OR>= OR Compare S1 ≥ S2
Left
247 to
206 MIDR Random Selection of Character Strings –
249
Random Replacement of Character
207 MIDW Data Table Operation
Strings
250 to
208 INSTR Character string search –
255
209 $MOV Character String Transfer
256 LIMIT Limit Control
Data Operation 3
257 BAND Dead Band Control
210 FDEL Deleting Data from Tables
258 ZONE Zone Control
211 FINS Inserting Data to Tables
259 SCL Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)
212 POP Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]
260 DABIN Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion
Data Operation 3
261 BINDA BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion
213 SFR Bit Shift Right with Carry
262 to
214 SFL Bit Shift Left with Carry –
268
215 to 269 SCL2 Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)
–
219
414
21
Battery
FNC No. Mnemonic Function
External Device Communication (Inverter Communication)
270 IVCK Inverter Status Check
271 IVDR Inverter Drive
272 IVRD Inverter Parameter Read A
273 IVWR Inverter Parameter Write
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
274 IVBWR Inverter Parameter Block Write
275 to
–
277
Data Transfer 3
278 RBFM Divided BFM Read B
Instruction List
279 WBFM Divided BFM Write
High Speed Processing 2
High Speed Counter Compare With Data
280 HSCT
Table
281 to
289
– C
Character-code
Extension File Register Control
290 LOADR Load From ER
291 SAVER Save to ER
292 INITR Initialize R and ER
293 LOGR Logging R and ER
294 RWER Rewrite to ER
295 INITER Initialize ER
296 to
–
299
415
FX3U Series Programmable Controllers C-1 ASCII Code Table
Appendix C: Character-code
Appendix C-1 ASCII Code Table
• (ASCII Code: 5C) symbol is displayed as " " even if the language display setting at FX3U-7DM is set to
English (LANGUAGE: ENGLISH).
• The Character at ASCII Code: 7E "~" is not displayed.
1. ASCII code table (7-bit code expressed in hexadecimal)

Example . "A " becomes 41H(hexadecimal number) by ASCII code.
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 SP 0 @ P p
´
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w As for this range, the
Japanese syllabary is
8 ( 8 H X h x displayed.
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L l
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ˆ n
F / ? O _ o
2. Examples of ASCII codes

ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
Decimal Alphabet Alphabet Symbol
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) (hexadecimal)
0 30 A 41 N 4E # 24
1 31 B 42 O 4F & 26
2 32 C 43 P 50 = 3D
3 33 D 44 Q 51 5C
4 34 E 45 R 52
5 35 F 46 S 53
6 36 G 47 T 54
7 37 H 48 U 55
8 38 I 49 V 56
9 39 J 4A W 57
K 4B K 58
L 4C Y 59
M 4D Z 5A
416
21
MEMO
Battery
A
(M8000-,D8000-)
Special Devices
B
Instruction List
C
Character-code
417
MEMO
418
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition Warranty
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be production
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the 1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be seven (7) years after production of the product is
repaired at no cost via the sales representative or discontinued.
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's
discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any 2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that after production is discontinued.
involves replacement of the failed module. 3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
[Gratis Warranty Term]
overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
each FA Center may differ.
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from 4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary
Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) loss from warranty liability
months, and the longest gratis warranty term after Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not
manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss
warranty term before repairs. in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user or third
person by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
[Gratis Warranty Range]
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or
1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for
usage state, usage methods and usage environment, damages to products other than Mitsubishi products,
etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
given in the instruction manual, user's manual and equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
caution labels on the product.
5. Changes in product specifications
2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or
charged for in the following cases.
technical documents are subject to change without prior
a) Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or
notice.
handling, carelessness or negligence by the user.
Failure caused by the user's hardware or software 6. Product application
design. 1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic
b) Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
to the product by the user. application will not lead to a major accident even if any
c) When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a problem or fault should occur in the programmable
user's device, Failure that could have been logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe
avoided if functions or structures, judged as functions are systematically provided outside of the
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device for any problem or fault.
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has
standards, had been provided.
been designed and manufactured for applications in
d) Failure that could have been avoided if
general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.)
public could be affected such as in nuclear power
designated in the instruction manual had been
plants and other power plants operated by respective
correctly serviced or replaced.
power companies, and applications in which a special
e) Relay failure or output contact failure caused by
quality assurance system is required, such as for
usage beyond the specified Life of contact
Railway companies or Public service purposes shall
(cycles).
be excluded from the programmable logic controller
f) Failure caused by external irresistible forces such
applications.
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused
In addition, applications in which human life or
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning,
property that could be greatly affected, such as in
wind and water damage.
aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel
g) Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by
devices, manned transportation, equipment for
sc ientific tec hnol ogy s tanda rds a t tim e of
recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall
shipment from Mitsubishi.
also be excluded from the programmable logic
h) Any other failure found not to be the responsibility
controller range of applications.
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
However, in certain cases, some applications may be
user.
possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
requirements of the project, and providing that all
parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at the users discretion.
419
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition Revised History
Revised History
Date Revision Discription
7/2005 A First Edition
420
USER'S MANUAL - Hardware Edition
FX3U SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
HEAD OFFICE: MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310

HIMEJI WORKS: 840, CHIYODA CHO, HIMEJI, JAPAN
MODEL FX3U-HW-E
MODEL CODE 09R516
JY997D16501A Effective July 2005

(MEE) Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FX3U HW Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FX3U HW Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FX3U HW Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Санкт-Петербург, ул. Седова, д.

USER'S MANUAL - Hardware Edition

FX3U SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)

Certification of UL, cUL standards ..................................................................................................... 15

1.1 Introduction of Manuals................................................................................................................ 19

2. Features and Part Names 29

2.1 Major Features .............................................................................................................................. 29

3. Introduction of Products (Compliant with Overseas Standards) 34

4. Specifications, External Dimensions and Terminal Layout (Main Units) 46

4.1 Generic Specifications .................................................................................................................. 46

5. Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History 62

5.1 Version Upgrade History ............................................................................................................... 62

6. Examination of System Configuration 68

6.1 Configuration of Whole System..................................................................................................... 68

6.7 Number of Input/Output (Occupied) Points and Current Consumption......................................... 87

7. Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y) and Unit Numbers 101

7.1 Assignment of Input/Output Numbers (X/Y)................................................................................ 101

8. Installation In Enclosure 107

8.1 Generic Specifications ................................................................................................................ 110

9. Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 131

9.1 Preparation for Wiring ................................................................................................................. 133

10.1 Before Starting Input Wiring ...................................................................................................... 145

11. Use of High-speed Counters (C235 to C255) 159

11.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 159

12. External Wiring Procedures 181

12.1 Sink and Source Output (Transistor)......................................................................................... 183

13. Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 196

13.1 Notes about Examples of Wiring............................................................................................... 197

14. Test Operation, Adjustment, Maintenance and Troubleshooting 208

14.1 Preparation for Test Operation.................................................................................................. 209

15. FX2N-32/48E*-* (Input/Output Powered Extension Units) 230

15.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 232

15.7 FX2N-32ES................................................................................................................................ 252

16. FX2N-16E*-*(Input/Output Extension Blocks) 258

16.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 259

17. Other Extension Devices and Optional Units

17.1 Special Function Units/Blocks................................................................................................... 282

18. FX3U-7DM (Display Module) 302

18.1 Description of Products (Introduction of Related Products) ...................................................... 303

18.20 Operation Button ON/OFF Information ................................................................................... 343

19. FX-16/32E*-*-TB (Terminal Block) 360

19.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 362

20. FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L (Memory Cassette) 383

20.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 383

21. FX3U-32BL (Battery) 390

21.1 Battery Purpose ........................................................................................................................ 390

Appendix A: Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 394

Appendix A-1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511) ........................................................ 394

Appendix B: Instruction List 411

Appendix B-1 Basic Instructions ............................................................................................... 411

Appendix C: Character-code 416

Appendix C-1 ASCII Code Table .............................................................................................. 416

Revised History ..................................................................................................................... 420

FX3U Series Programmable Controllers

Manual number JY997D16501

© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Certification of UL, cUL standards

UL, cUL registration number : E95239

Models : MELSEC FX2N series manufactured

15. FX2N-32/48E- (Input/Output Powered Extension Units) 230

16. FX2N-16E-(Input/Output Extension Blocks) 258

19. FX-16/32E--TB (Terminal Block) 360